No.

201L0E/1-1

OPERATION MANUAL
SB-12R type G
SB-16R type G
SB-20R type G
CNC Swiss-Type Automatic Lathe
FANUC 0i-TD
(Applicable from machine serial No. 0322 onwards)

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING
Read and understand the contents of this operation manual thoroughly before
operating this machine.

Carefully read the safety precautions and obey the instructions.

Keep this manual in a safe place for easy access at all times.
 NOTICE
STAR MICRONICS CO., LTD.

THIS MACHINE IS CONTROLLED UNDER FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND

FOREIGN TRADE CONTROL LAW.

YOU ARE REQUESTED TO OBTAIN PERMISSION FROM THE JAPANESE GOVERNMENT

BEFORE SHIPPING THE MACHINE, IN ANY FORM, TO ANOTHER COUNTRY OUTSIDE JAPAN.

YOU MUST NOTIFY YOUR DEALER OR STAR MICRONICS WHEN CARRYING OUT SALE,
RELOCATION, EXPORTATION AND/OR SCRAPPING OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY COUNTRY
OUTSIDE JAPAN.
Revision History

Edition No. Date Summary of changes

1-0 May. 2014 First edition issued
1-1 Jan. 2015 Add SB-12R typeG
Change air purge amounts
Add cartridge type tool units (option)
Add Coolant Unit 6.9MPa (option)
MEMO
Introduction

Introduction

This is the Operation Manual for the SB-12R type G, SB-16R type G and the
SB-20R type G CNC Swiss-type Automatic Lathe.
This machine comprises of hazardous voltage area, rotating and driving parts.
Therefore, failure to observe the safety precautions or improper handling and
operation of this machine could cause injuries and damage the machine or the
other properties.

To avoid accidents and problems, carefully read this manual and the other
instructions attached to this manual and fully understand the contents.

This manual describes many “Don’ts” in operating the machine.

However, it is impossible to cover all the potential hazards for various
applications.
Therefore, it should be basically considered a “Don’t” if not stated in this manual.
This machine belongs to “Small turning machine” in Group 3 of ISO 23125.

Point of contact

If any question or doubt arises concerning the contents of this manual,

contact STAR MICRONICS first.
Also contact STAR MICRONICS in the case of loss or damage of this manual.
A new one will be sent at an extra cost.

Star Micronics Co., Ltd. Machine tools division

TEL: 0537-36-5561 FAX: 0537-36-5873
Change or modification of machine

After delivery and installation of the machine, do not ever modify or change any
part of the machine without prior consent of Star. Star is not in position in any
event to bear any responsibility of what-so-ever potential troubles of any kind to
be incurred through any modification made in the field with no prior consent with
us.

Details of contents

Details of all illustrations and specifications in this manual are subject to change
without prior notice for improvement and development.

Resale or leasing

At the time of resale, leasing out or lending out the machine to the third party,
make sure to include with the machine all the manuals and any other documents
found supplied at the time of initial installation.

Exportation

This product is an export control item subject to the foreign exchange and foreign
trade laws.
You must notify your dealer or STAR MICRONICS when carrying out sale,
relocation, exportation and/or scrapping of this product in any country outside
Japan.
Safety Alert Symbols

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS

These symbols are used to call your attention to items or operation
that could be dangerous to you or other personnel using this machine.
Please read these messages and follow these instructions carefully.
It is essential that you read the instructions and safety regulations
before you attempt to use this machine.

Definitions of cautionary signal words

Symbol Definitions
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
DANGER ignored, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
WARNING ignored, could result in serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
CAUTION ignored, may result in minor or moderate injury or other
property damage.

In addition to this Safety Alert Symbols, the marks below will also appear in
this manual.

Please read the following explanation in order to handle the machine correctly.

Symbol Definitions

NOTICE: Indicates referential information or points to

which special attention should be paid during
service.

NOTE: Indicates referential information or points which

are helpful during service.

REFER: Indicated a reference section or clause.

 Table of Contents

1. Using This Manual

2. Safety Precautions
2-1 General Precautions ········································································· 2-1
2-2 Cautions about Inspection and Maintenance ········································· 2-3
2-3 Cautions before Operation ································································· 2-6
2-4 Cautions during Operation ································································· 2-7
2-5 Cautions after Completing Operation ··················································· 2-8
2-6 Other Cautions ················································································ 2-9
2-7 Labels ···························································································· 2-12
2-7-1 Warning Labels ··················································································· 2-12
2-7-2 Locations of Labels ·············································································· 2-16
2-7-3 Ordering Warning Labels ······································································ 2-17
2-8 Safety Devices ················································································ 2-18
2-8-1 Door Interlock ····················································································· 2-18
2-8-2 Safety Devices for Coolant ···································································· 2-19
2-8-3 Safety Device for Lubricant···································································· 2-21
2-8-4 Broken Cut-Off Tool Detector ································································· 2-22
2-8-5 Parts Ejection Detector ········································································· 2-23
2-8-6 Parts Stopper Unit ··············································································· 2-24
2-8-7 Safety Functions of the CNC Device ······················································· 2-25

3. Outline
3-1 Features ························································································· 3-1
3-2 Configuration of the Main Units and the Names of Units ·························· 3-1
3-3 Functions of the Main Units ································································ 3-5

4. Specifications
4-1 Standard Machine Specifications ························································ 4-1
4-2 Accessories ···················································································· 4-10
4-2-1 Standard Accessories··········································································· 4-10
4-2-2 Optional Accessories············································································ 4-11

C- 1
 4-3 CNC Device Specifications ································································ 4-14
4-3-1 Standard CNC Specifications ································································· 4-14
4-3-2 Optional CNC Functions ······································································· 4-17
4-3-3 Optional Software ················································································ 4-17

5 Turning the Power ON/OFF

5-1 Turning the Power ON ····································································· 5-1
5-1-1 Preparation and Inspection before Turning the Power ON ··························· 5-1
5-1-2 Procedure for Turning the Power ON······················································· 5-2
5-1-3 Preparation and Inspection before Starting Operation································· 5-4
5-2 Turning the Power OFF ··································································· 5-5
5-2-1 Procedure for Turning the Power OFF ····················································· 5-5

6. Functions of the Operation Panels

6-1 Functions of the Machine Operation Panel ············································ 6-1
6-2 Functions of the CNC Operation Panel ················································· 6-17

7. Functions and Operation of the CNC

7-1 Setting Screen ················································································· 7-1
7-1-1 Setting Screen ···················································································· 7-1
7-1-2 Setting of Chamfering Corner R/Direct Drawing Dimension Programming ······ 7-3
7-1-3 Language Select Screen ······································································· 7-4
7-1-4 Operation Confirmation Screen ······························································ 7-6
7-1-5 Macro Variable Screen ········································································· 7-7
7-2 Program Input/Output ······································································· 7-9
7-2-1 Registering a Program in the Memory with the Address/Numerical Keys ········ 7-9
7-2-2 Program Input/Output ··········································································· 7-10
7-3 Registered Program Number Display ··················································· 7-20
7-4 Search ··························································································· 7-21
7-4-1 Program Number Search ······································································ 7-21
7-4-2 Sequence Number Search ···································································· 7-23
7-4-3 Word Search ······················································································ 7-24
7-5 Program Editing ··············································································· 7-25
7-6 Program Deletion ············································································· 7-28
7-6-1 Deletion of One Program ······································································ 7-28

C- 2
 7-6-2 Deletion of All Programs ······································································· 7-29
7-6-3 Command Help ··················································································· 7-30
7-7 Background Editing ·········································································· 7-39
7-7-1 Program Editing in Background Mode······················································ 7-40
7-7-2 Program Registration in Background Mode ··············································· 7-42
7-7-3 Program Output in Background Mode ······················································ 7-47
7-8 Position Display Screen····································································· 7-51
7-9 Offset Screen ·················································································· 7-55
7-9-1 Tool Wear Offset (Wear Offset) Screen ··················································· 7-55
7-9-2 Tool Geometry Offset (Geometry Offset) Screen ······································· 7-63
7-10 Custom Screen ················································································ 7-71
7-10-1 Counter Screen ··················································································· 7-72
7-10-2 Run Hour Display Screen ······································································ 7-76
7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen ·············································· 7-78
7-10-4 Maintenance Timer Screen ···································································· 7-86
7-10-5 Machining Data Screen········································································· 7-89
7-10-6 Servo Monitor Screen ··········································································· 7-91
7-10-7 Tool Life Management Screen by Tool No, Counter ··································· 7-93
7-11 Macro Screen ·················································································· 7-100
7-11-1 Tool Select Screen ·············································································· 7-100
7-11-2 Auto Cut-off Screen ············································································· 7-104
7-11-3 Guide Bush Version Change Screen ······················································· 7-106

8. Programming
8-1 Programming ·················································································· 8-1
8-2 Program Structure ············································································ 8-2
8-3 Dimension Word ·············································································· 8-4
8-4 Coordinate System ··········································································· 8-5
8-5 Soft OT Function by Tool ··································································· 8-13
8-5-1 Effective Stroke and the First Soft OT ······················································ 8-13
8-5-2 The Second Soft OT ············································································ 8-15
8-5-3 The Third Soft OT ················································································ 8-24
8-6 Feed Function ················································································· 8-25
8-7 Spindle Function (S Function)····························································· 8-26
8-8 Tool Function (T Function) ································································· 8-28
8-9 Broken Cut-off Tool Detector ······························································ 8-35
8-10 Preparatory Functions (G Functions) ··················································· 8-38

C- 3
 8-10-1 Positioning (G0) ················································································· 8-41
8-10-2 Linear Interpolation (G1)······································································ 8-42
8-10-3 Circular Interpolation (G2, G3) ······························································ 8-43
8-10-4 Helical Interpolation (G2, G3) ······························································· 8-46
8-10-5 Dwell (G4) ························································································ 8-48
8-10-6 Programmable Data Input (G10) ··························································· 8-49
8-10-7 Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19) ·························································· 8-50
8-10-8 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection ON/OFF (G26, G25) ························· 8-51
8-10-9 Reference Point Return (G28) ······························································ 8-52
8-10-10 The Second Reference Point Return (G30) ············································· 8-53
8-10-11 Threading (G32) ················································································ 8-54
8-10-12 Variable Lead Threading (G34) ····························································· 8-58
8-10-13 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40, G41, G42) ·································· 8-59
8-10-14 Coordinate System Setting, Maximum Spindle Speed Clamp (G50)············· 8-68
8-10-15 Macro Program Call (G65 G67) ·························································· 8-69
8-10-16 Multiple Canned Cycles (G70 G76) ····················································· 8-70
8-10-17 Canned Cycle for Drilling (G80, G83~G85, G87, G89) ······························ 8-75
8-10-18 Single Canned Cycle (G90, G92, G94) ··················································· 8-79
8-10-19 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97) ··········································· 8-83
8-10-20 Feed Function Specification (G98, G99) ················································· 8-84
8-10-21 Cylindrical Interpolation (G107) ····························································· 8-85
8-10-22 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G112, G113) ··········································· 8-86
8-10-23 Coordinate System Setting (G125, G130, G131, G132, G133) ··················· 8-87
8-10-24 Tool Selection Path Commands (G170, G171, G172) ······························· 8-89
8-10-25 Polygon Machining (G250, G251) ························································· 8-91
8-10-26 Geometry Offset Input (G265) ······························································ 8-92
8-10-27 Machining Data Setting (G266) ····························································· 8-93
8-10-28 Tool Life Management Data Setting (G267) ············································ 8-94
8-10-29 Auto Cut-off (G300) ············································································ 8-95
8-10-30 X Cross Rigid Tapping Cycle (G784) ····················································· 8-96
8-10-31 Y Cross Rigid Tapping Cycle (G884) ····················································· 8-97
8-10-32 Block Skip on PATH2 Single Operation (G900 J**) ··································· 8-98
8-10-33 Front/Back Off-Center Rigid Tapping Cycle (G984) ·································· 8-99
8-11 Auxiliary Functions (M Functions)························································ 8-100
8-12 Sub Program Function ······································································ 8-121
8-13 Macro Program (G65 G67) ································································ 8-122
8-14 Program Pattern ·············································································· 8-132
8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System Setting ··················· 8-134

C- 4
 8-14-2 Program Beginning············································································· 8-136
8-14-3 Parts Pick-up Process ········································································· 8-138
8-14-4 Bar Replacement Program··································································· 8-140
8-14-5 Parts Ejection Process ········································································ 8-143
8-14-6 Program Pattern when Using Stopper ···················································· 8-144
8-14-7 Spindle Indexing ················································································ 8-150
8-14-8 Turning ···························································································· 8-152
8-14-9 Circular Interpolation ·········································································· 8-153
8-14-10 Front Drilling / Front Rigid Tapping ························································ 8-154
8-14-11 Cross Drilling / Cross Rigid Tapping ······················································ 8-156
8-14-12 Front Off-center Drilling / Front Off-center Rigid Tapping ·························· 8-160
8-14-13 Milling ······························································································ 8-162
8-14-14 Slotting ···························································································· 8-163
8-14-15 Thread Whirling ················································································· 8-164
8-14-16 Polygon Machining ············································································· 8-166
8-14-17 Cylindrical Interpolation ······································································· 8-168
8-14-18 Helical Interpolation ············································································ 8-170
8-14-19 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ······························································ 8-172
8-14-20 Back Drilling / Back Rigid Tapping ························································· 8-174
8-14-21 Back Boring ······················································································ 8-175
8-14-22 Back Off-center Drilling / Back Off-center Rigid Tapping ···························· 8-176
8-14-23 Back Polar Coordinate Interpolation······················································· 8-180
8-14-24 Simultaneous Machining for PATH1 and 2 ·············································· 8-184
8-14-25 Z1-Z2 axis Synchronous Control ··························································· 8-186
8-14-26 X and Y axes Changeover Control ························································ 8-188
8-14-27 Re-clamp Machining ··········································································· 8-190
8-14-28 Chamfering and Corner R ···································································· 8-196
8-14-29 Direct Drawing Dimension Programming ················································ 8-198
8-15 Program Example for the Test Piece ··················································· 8-202
8-16 Program Reference Data ··································································· 8-207

9. Automatic and Manual Operations

9-1 MDI Operation ················································································· 9-2
9-2 Memory Operation ··········································································· 9-4
9-3 Manual Handle Retrace Operation ······················································ 9-7

C- 5
10. Setting and Adjustment
10-1 Installing and Adjusting the Main Collet ················································ 10-2
10-2 Installing and Adjusting the Guide Bush
<Exclusive for Guide Bush Version> ···················································· 10-6
10-2-1 Installing and Adjusting the Stationary Guide Bush ··································· 10-7
10-2-2 Installing and Adjusting the Revolving Guide Bush ··································· 10-8
10-2-3 Replacing the Revolving Guide Bush with the Stationary Guide Bush ·········· 10-12
10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet ················································· 10-15
10-4 Installing and Adjusting the Tool Units ·················································· 10-20
10-4-1 Installing and Adjusting the Tools ·························································· 10-20
10-4-2 Installing and Adjusting the Power-Driven Tool Unit ·································· 10-36
10-4-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sleeve on the 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder ············· 10-71
10-4-4 Installing and Adjusting the Tool Unit on the Back 4-Spindle Unit ················ 10-77
10-4-5 Precautions of Tooling ········································································ 10-88
10-5 Installing and Adjusting Other Devices ················································· 10-103
10-5-1 Parts Ejection Detector ······································································· 10-103
10-5-2 Changing from Guide Bush Version to Non-Guide Bush Version ················· 10-106
10-5-3 Changing from Non-Guide Bush Version to Guide Bush Version ················· 10-119
10-5-4 Adjustment When Using the Profile Bar Stock Version ······························ 10-132

11. Troubleshooting
11-1 Notification of Trouble ······································································· 11-1
11-2 Contents of Alarms and Troubleshooting ·············································· 11-2
11-2-1 How to Check Alarms ········································································· 11-2
11-2-2 List of CNC Alarms ············································································· 11-7
11-2-3 Causes and Measures of CNC Alarms ··················································· 11-19
11-3 How to Check the PMC DGN ····························································· 11-43
11-4 How to Check the Parameters ···························································· 11-44
11-4-1 PARAMETER (SETTINGS) Screen ······················································· 11-44
11-4-2 PMC PARAM (TIMER) Screen ····························································· 11-47
11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen ···················································· 11-50
11-4-4 PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) Screen ···················································· 11-58

C- 6
12. Inspection and Maintenance
12-1 Daily Inspection ··············································································· 12-1
12-1-1 Removing the Cutting Chips ································································· 12-2
12-1-2 Cleaning and Inspection of the Coolant Unit ············································ 12-4
12-1-3 Inspection of the Lubricant ··································································· 12-10
12-1-4 Checking Alarm Messages ·································································· 12-13
12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure ······························ 12-14
12-2 Periodical Inspection········································································· 12-19
12-2-1 Monthly Inspection ············································································· 12-20
12-2-2 6-Month Inspection ············································································· 12-34
12-2-3 How to Replace the Battery·································································· 12-55

13. Specifications and Handling of Optional Accessories

13-1 Barstock Gripping Unit [57418] ··························································· 13-2
13-2 Main Spindle Inner Tube [1L445] <Exclusive for SB-12R>
[0M446] <Exclusive for SB-16R/20R> ················ 13-4
13-3 Parts Receptacle [68424] ·································································· 13-6
13-4 Transformer [0G492] ········································································ 13-7
13-5 Beacon [0T427] ··············································································· 13-8
13-6 Cable for Transformer CE Marking Version [0T488] ································ 13-10
13-7 Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497] ············································· 13-11
13-8 Parts Separator Type A [0H414] ························································· 13-12
13-9 Parts Conveyor [0M412] ···································································· 13-18
13-10 Parts Receptacle in Machine [0M425] ················································ 13-21
13-11 Steady Rest Unit Cover [0M447] ······················································· 13-22
13-12 Drive Unit for Power-driven Tool Type B [0M457]·································· 13-23
13-13 Coolant Flow Detector [0M459] ························································· 13-24
13-14 Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431], Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa [0M462]
Coolant Valve 2.5MPa [0M493], Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488]
Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489] ···················································· 13-29
13-15 Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa [0M494]
Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488], Coolant Valve 6.9MPa [0M492] ········ 13-35
13-16 Reducing Valve [68493] ··································································· 13-50
13-17 Check Valve [0M496] ······································································ 13-51
13-18 Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461] ·············································· 13-52
13-19 Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube [0M463]····································· 13-53
13-20 Low Pr. Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M464] ································ 13-55

C- 7
13-21 Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466] ··········································· 13-56
13-22 Coolant Piping for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467] ··································· 13-58
13-23 Coolant Piping for Guide Bush [0M468] ·············································· 13-59
13-24 Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] ··········································· 13-61
13-25 Coolant Piping for Thread Whirling [0M495] ········································· 13-65
13-26 Automatic Bar Feeder Interface [0M416] ············································· 13-66
13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 10mm [0M471], 13mm [0M472],
16mm [0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475], Accessory for Parts Ejector
(Guide Tube) [0M476], Warning Plate (Japanese/English) [0M476A]
Parts Stopper Unit [0G478] ······························································ 13-68
13-28 Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479, 0M479A 0M479E] ··················· 13-75
13-29 Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478, 0M478A 0M478F] ························· 13-83
13-30 Water Separator [0M482] ································································· 13-89
13-31 Stopper [0M497] <Exclusive for Non-Guide Bush Version> ···················· 13-90
13-32 Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171]·················································· 13-96
13-33 Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] ······················································· 13-97
13-34 Main Collet SR23 [66351] <Exclusive for 20R Guide Bush Version>,
[0M359] <Exclusive for 20R Non-Guide Bush Version> · 13-98
13-35 Sub Collet SR23 [0M379] ································································· 13-99
13-36 Oil Hole Drill Version for Sleeve Holder [67126] ·································· 13-100
13-37 Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit [67127, 0R123] ····························· 13-101
13-38 Jig for G.B. VNC 20 [1L421], R20 [1L422], R16, P16 [1L423],
S13 [1L427], S12 [1H429], S10, P10 [1H431], T7 [1H432],
Jig for G.B. Body [1L426, 1L431] ····················································· 13-103
13-39 CE Marking Version (Accessories in Compliance with CE Machinery
Directive or Korean Regulation: Self-Regulatory Safety Confirmation)
[0M902] ······················································································ 13-104
13-40 Safety Relay Module Version [0M932] ·············································· 13-106
13-41 Expanded I/O Module Unit [0R449] ·················································· 13-108
13-42 Program Utility Jr. (PU-Jr.) [72592]··················································· 13-109
13-43 PU-Jr. USB Protection Key [72593] ················································ 13-110
13-44 RS232C Interface Version [72801]
RS232C Interface Version (with Cover) [72803] ································· 13-111

C- 8
Appendix
Appendix 1 Major Dimensional Drawings ··············································· A-1
Appendix 2 Control Axis Configuration Diagram ······································ A-3
Appendix 3 Tool Numbers ··································································· A-5
Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders ···························································· A-13
Appendix 5 Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders ······················ A-19
Appendix 6 Consumable Tool List ························································· A-39
Appendix 7 Work Tools “Unique Shape ” ················································ A-49
Appendix 8 Precausions on Use, Inspection and Maintenance ··················· A-51
Appendix 9 Trouble Notes ··································································· A-55

C- 9
MEMO

C- 10
1. Using This Manual

This operation manual is for the SB-12R type G, SB-16R type G and the SB-20R
type G CNC Swiss-type automatic lathe. This manual should not only be read by
inexperienced users but also by experienced users who have knowledge and
experience from previous use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

The highest priority should be given to the safety when handling this machine.
Work in strict conformity to all cautionary points mentioned in this manual.

This operation manual contains the following information:

1) Using This Manual

2) Safety Precautions
3) Outline
4) Specifications
5) Turning the Power ON/OFF
6) Functions of the Operation Panels
7) Functions and Operation of the CNC
8) Programming
9) Automatic and Manual Operations
10) Setting and Adjustment
11) Troubleshooting
12) Inspection and Maintenance
13) Specifications and Handling of Optional Accessories
Appendix

Please contact STAR MICRONICS if the manual has been lost or damaged.
A new one will be provided at an extra cost.

CE marking specification
In order to comply with the CE Machinery Directive or Korean regulation
(Self-regulatory safety confirmation), CE Marking Version (Accessories in
compliance with the CE Machinery Directive or Korean regulation:
Self-regulatory safety confirmation) [0M902] includes additional guards, the
interlock system, covering etc.
They are to be installed when this machine is due to be used in EU member
countries or Korea.

1-1
MEMO

1-2
2. Safety Precautions
Thoroughly understand the following safety precautions and other cautions, and follow these
instructions before starting operation.

2-1 General Precautions

WARNING
Always wear work uniform, safety shoes and other required gear when operating
the machine.
Never wear clothes with loose sleeves, or any accessories that can be easily
entangled into the machine. Tie long hair back into a bun. Also, never wear any
magnetic health appliances that could affect the control unit of the machine.
Never modify the machine.
Modifying the machine will lead to obstructions and put the operator at risk.
If you wish to add modifications to the machine, always follow the instructions
given by STAR MICRONICS.
Covers that are mounted on the machine are important to secure safety.
Always turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ) before dismounting a
machine cover or CNC cabinet cover.
In addition, always mount the covers onto their original positions before turning
the main power (main breaker) ON ( ) again.
In order to maintain safety, do not operate the machine while a part is
dismounted.

CAUTION
Always pay attention to the maintenance of each part of the machine in order to
prevent damage and malfunction, especially to loosened parts, screws etc.
Replace damaged parts immediately to prevent further damage and/or
malfunction.

2-1
Always read this operation manual thoroughly and learn the contents beforehand
when operating the machine.
Always keep the machine clean and tidy. It is particularly important that the
operation panel is kept free from oil and cutting chips in order to prevent
operational mistakes and injuries.
In order to avoid injury from cutting chips, or by slipping and falling, keep the area
around the machine neat and clean, and work in a clean environment.
In order to avoid electrical leakages and machine errors, be careful not to spill
liquids on electrical parts when cleaning etc.
The machine supervisor must always store the following keys:

The CONTROL MODE key and the MEMORY INPUT key .

In order to prevent rust from developing, do not use the sand cloth (paper) inside
the machine.

2-2
2-2 Cautions about Inspection and Maintenance

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting, adjusting the machine and removing
the cutting chips.
Check that the gripping force of the main/sub collets and the collets of tool units
are sufficient. If the gripping force is not sufficient, the material or the tool could
be ejected from the spindle, which is very dangerous.
Check that the clearance between the guide bush and the material is adequate.
If the guide bush is too tight, the material can become burnt or cause a fire.
If cutting chips accumulate or become entangled in the material or tools, the
coolant will lose its effectiveness considerably and a fire may occur.
Consider the effectiveness of cooling, and carry out proper tooling.
If coolant is not supplied to the machining point, a fire may occur.
Always set the coolant nozzles toward the machining point correctly in order to
supply a sufficient amount of coolant.
The cutting chips can scatter and cause injury. Never blow air directly towards
the cutting chips.
Breakage of a cut-off tool could damage the machine or cause a fire.
Always use the broken cut-off tool detector after the cut-off process. In addition,
if the cut-off tool becomes broken, replace it immediately.
High-voltage currents flow inside the terminal block covers of the automatic
centralized lubrication pump motor, the coolant pump motor and the parts
conveyor motor. Receiving an electric shock will cause serious injury or death.
Only qualified servicing personnel are required to remove the covers after the
main power (main breaker) is turned OFF ( ).

2-3
 CAUTION
Do not touch cutting chips with bare hands as this can cause injuries.
When removing the cutting chips, work with protective gear such as leather
gloves.
Do not touch the edges of tools when replacing them as this can cause injuries.
Do not use coolant that contains a chlorine element, as it will considerably
shorten the life of rubber parts such as the belt and seals.
Mount the tool units and attachments correctly in order to prevent damage to the
machine and accidents.
Never machine beyond the machine specifications as doing so can cause
damage to the machine and accidents.
The operator is at risk of being hit by the bar during bar feeding. Never put any
body part into the machine when feeding a bar.
Touching the spindles can cause burn injuries. Do not touch the spindle units or
the power-driven tool units immediately after machining.
The temperature of the surface of the coolant pump will become very high during
machine operation. Touching it for a long period of time can cause burn injuries.
Do not touch the coolant pump during machine operation or immediately after
the machine stops.
Supply clean compressed air to the machine.
If the carbide, oil mist etc. generated in the compressor are continuously
supplied to the machine together with the compressed air, it will cause the
malfunction of pneumatic equipment (solenoid valves, pneumatic cylinder etc.)
used by the machine.
Follow the instructions of compressor manufacturer and carry out the
maintenance and inspection of the compressor periodically.
If oil mist and moisture are contained in the compressed air, take necessary
measures for removing them, such as installing a removal device.

2-4
Designate a person who is familiar with the machine as a machine supervisor, and
always carry out inspections and adjustments of the machine under his/her
supervision.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.
Always use the lubricant oil designated by STAR MICRONICS.
Never mix the lubricant oil with other brands, as doing so will reduce its
effectiveness.
Always decide tooling with consideration to machine collision, and be sure to run
air-cut operation and confirm that no problems exist before starting operation.
Never leave any tools, tool holders, etc. on the machine after use, in order to avoid
the occurrence of accidents and work inefficiency. Always keep them organized.
Using an undesignated tool unit will cause machining defects or machine collision.
Be sure to use the tool units listed in “Appendix 4. List of Tool Holders” in this
manual.

2-5
2-3 Cautions before Operation

DANGER
Always keep the cabinet covers closed.
Ignoring this can cause serious injury or death due to high-voltage electric
shocks.

CAUTION
Check that the amount of lubricant oil and coolant are sufficient in order to
prevent machine damage and malfunctions.
Check that the tooling matches the program in order to prevent machine
damage and malfunctions.

In order to prevent the mixing of defectives and the tool damages, use better bar
than MAS class B as allowance of bar curvature.
*Bar better than MAS class B: 0.5mm or less per 1.0m (curvature)
Please consult the manufacturer of automatic bar feeder if anything is unclear.

Be sure to check the location of the EMERGENCY STOP button in

preparation for any accidents and hazards.
Check that the tool compensation details are adequate.
Before starting operation, run idle for the main spindle and the sub spindle for 15
minutes at 3000min-1.
Check that the tools, machine parts etc. are correctly mounted on the machine to
prevent machine damage and malfunctions.
Check that there is a sufficient amount of coolant before starting operation.

2-6
2-4 Cautions during Operation

WARNING
In order to prevent hazards, always close all the doors and turn the CONTROL
MODE key switch to MACHINING .
In order to prevent injuries, do not put your hand(s) into the machine.
Check the discharge amount and direction of the coolant.
If cutting chips accumulate or become entangled in the material or tool, the
effectiveness of the coolant significantly declines and a fire can occur.
Clear away the chips appropriately.
Be sure to stop the machine before removing the cutting chips.
During automatic operation, check the status of operation at suitable intervals to
see the status of the cutting chips, the coolant amount and discharge status,
tool damage and wear, and guide bush seizure. Major accidents can occur if
any trouble is neglected.
To avoid injury, keep away from the cover mounted on the guide tube of the
parts ejector with guide tube. This cover is exposed at the bottom therefore
parts of your body can easily be caught by the guide tube which moves inside
the cover.

CAUTION
The temperature of the work piece just after machining will become very high.
Touching it can cause burn injuries.
Never touch the work piece just after machining.

Always carry out the machining program in air cut mode and confirm that no
problems exist before starting automatic operation. During this time, check the
operation by lowering the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE to minimize the
damage caused by machine collision.
Check that the pneumatic pressure gauge reads 0.5MPa.
The mesh plate or filter can easily get clogged up by cutting chips. Remove the
cutting chips so that the coolant flows smoothly, and always stop the machine
before doing so.
Observe the automatic operation until it runs correctly.
Before starting automatic operation, be sure to check the disposal of cutting chips,
the coolant amount and coolant discharge status. After checking all these
conditions carefully, set the automatic operation time.

2-7
2-5 Cautions after Completing Operation

Confirm that the main power (main breaker) is turned OFF ( ).

Clean the machine, remove any chips and apply the rust prevention oil.
It is important to be especially careful when using a water-soluble coolant in order
to prevent rusting. After wiping off the coolant as much as possible, supply the
lubricant manually. Refer to the section “12-1-3 Inspection of the Lubricant” and
reciprocate all axes in full stroke a couple of times to spread the lubricant to the
slideways.

2-8
2-6 Other Cautions

Cautions about the control unit

DANGER
High voltage currents flow inside the cabinet and operation panel.
Receiving an electric shock will result in serious injury or death.
Only qualified servicing personnel are permitted to remove the cabinet covers
and the operation panel cover.

WARNING
Always contact STAR MICRONICS beforehand when modifying a control unit or
circuit. Unauthorized modifications can cause serious problems to the control
system.

CAUTION
When replacing a fuse, make sure a specified fuse is used.
Keep the control unit away from any shocks or vibrations.
Do not apply a strong force to the connecting parts.

Cautions about the vision panel of the cutting room

CAUTION
The vision panel is made from polyvinyl chloride. Replace the vision panel when
it becomes dirty, discolored and/or deteriorated from long-term coolant use to a
degree that the operator cannot see inside. Replace it immediately when
damage such as cracks or dents has been inflicted.
The service life of the vision panel is approximately 5 years. Replace it after 5
years even if there are no problems with visibility.

When cleaning the vision panel, use a neutral detergent and soft material such as a
sponge.
Contact STAR MICRONICS when the vision panel needs to be replaced.

2-9
Cautions about Fire Prevention

Water-insoluble coolant has the potential to catch fire if it vaporizes or forms a mist inside
the machine. Pay close attention to the following points to prevent fire occurrence.

(1) Conditions when the coolant easily catches fire

When cutting chips accumulate or become entangled in the material or tools, and the
effectiveness of the coolant declines remarkably.
When coolant supplied to the machining point is insufficient due to the nozzle
directions being incorrect. Pay attention to the direction of the nozzles as they may
become altered by moving parts or cutting chips.
When the coolant discharge is insufficient because of a shortage of the coolant,
clogging of the cutting chip filter or a breakage of the coolant pump.
When a coolant with low cooling effectiveness or an inflammable coolant is used.
When the temperature is high and the coolant evaporates, forming high
concentration.
When frictional heat between the material and tool is abnormally high due to damage
or deterioration of the tool.
When there is an abnormality of the electrical system inside or around the machine
which easily leads to sparks.

(2) Cautionary points about fire prevention

WARNING
Never use anything flammable near the machine.
If an automatic fire extinguisher is installed, connect the power supply to the
primary side of the machine main breaker (QF001).
If an automatic fire extinguisher is not installed, place a fire extinguisher near the
machine.
When the automatic fire extinguisher and mist collector are used together, install
a shutter between the machine and the mist collector. Interlock the shutter with
the mist collector so that the mist suction is stopped for safety in the event of a
fire.
Never carry out machining that exceeds the machine specifications.
Check that the discharge amount and direction of coolant discharge are
appropriate.
Confirm that the moving parts or cutting chips do not alter the direction of the
coolant nozzles.
Routinely check that the safety devices (coolant level detector, broken cut-off
tool detector, etc.) function normally.
Make sure that all the doors are closed during operation.

2-10
 In order to circulate the coolant smoothly in the machine, check the cutting chips in
the coolant tank and chip tank. Also check and amend where necessary the
clogging of the cutting chip filter and the twisting and clogging of the coolant hoses.
When machining combustible materials (magnesium, titanium, zirconium, sodium
alloy, etc.), make sure that a fire extinguisher for metal fires is placed near the
machine and always watch over the machining conditions during machining.

Other Cautions about Fire

In case of fire, be sure to contact STAR-MICRONICS even when there is no damage.

After the extinguishing agent is sprayed, thoroughly ventilate inside and around the machine,
then carry out the restoration work.

Cautions about coolant use

For both water-soluble and water-insoluble coolant, follow the directions of the
coolant manufacturer about quality, deterioration, inspection intervals, replacement
intervals and safe disposal of the coolant.
On occasions when a large amount of coolant mist is generated due to the material
or machining conditions, install a mist collector to exhaust the mist out of the
machine. In addition, for details concerning the installation of mist collector, refer to
section “4-3 Reference Dimensional Drawings Reference dimensional drawing for
mist collector” of the Installation Manual.
Sealing has been applied to rotating parts in order to make water-soluble coolant use
possible and prevent seeping of the coolant. However, the service life of the bearings
used for power-driven tools, the revolving guide bush etc. will become shorter
compared to water-insoluble coolant use. In addition, when stopping the machine for
long periods, please remove the coolant from the main parts of the machine, all units,
especially the rotating parts and guideways, and prevent those areas from rusting.

Cautions about lubricant oil use

Follow the directions of the lubricant oil manufacturer about quality, deterioration,
inspection intervals, replacement intervals and safe disposal of the lubricant oil.

2-11
2-7 Labels

2-7-1 Warning Labels

WARNING
Never remove nor stain any labels on the machine.

Refer to “2-7-2 Locations of Labels” for details on label locations.

Refer to “2-7-3 Ordering Warning Labels” for details on ordering labels.

2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-7-2 Locations of Labels

The figure below shows the locations of the labels.

2-16
2-7-3 Ordering Warning labels

If any warning label becomes lost or illegible, inform STAR MICRONICS.

Replacement label will be sent at an extra cost, so stick it on the designated place.

When ordering the warning labels, inform STAR MICRONICS of the related order number and
EDP code listed below. If an order number is blank, mention the EDP code.
If any warning label is required in language other than those listed below, inform STAR
MICRONICS of the related order number and required language.

Warning label Language Order No. EDP code

Japanese/English #36340 87505908
Japanese/English #36360 87505910
Japanese/English #36370 87505911
Japanese/English #17482 87505794
–––––––––– –––––––––– 87505373
Japanese/English #36330 87505907
Japanese/English #17471 87505793
–––––––––– –––––––––– 87505372
–––––––––– –––––––––– 87505745

2-17
2-8 Safety Devices

2-8-1 Door Interlock

WARNING
Be sure to keep the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING during
operation of the machine.

The machine supervisor should keep the key of the CONTROL MODE key switch.

If the CONTROL MODE key switch is turned to MACHINING while the doors of the

headstock room and the cutting room are closed, the doors will be locked and will not be able
to be opened.
If the CONTROL MODE key switch is turned to MACHINING while one of the doors is
open, the machine will display operator message 2062 and a buzzer will sound.

If closing the door or turning the key switch to SETTING is not carried out within 30
seconds, the machine will enter the emergency stop state. Closing the door during emergency
stop will lock the door.

If either the door is closed or the key switch is turned to SETTING within 30 seconds,
operator message 2062 will disappear and the buzzer sound will stop.

For details on the CONTROL MODE function, please refer to section “6-1 Functions
of the Machine Operation Panel”.

2-18
2-8-2 Safety Devices for Coolant

Coolant Level Detector

The coolant level detector is a device for detecting shortages of coolant in the tank.

WARNING
If Coolant Flow Detector [0M459] is not mounted, it is necessary to put the
machine into the feed hold state when the coolant level detector functions. Set
both of the keep relays: K00-bit1 and K01-bit4 to “0” before starting operation.

Keep relay
Operation when shortage of coolant is detected
K00-bit1 K01-bit4
The machine enters the feed hold state and the
1. 0 0 main/sub-spindle motors, the power-driven tool motor and the
coolant motor will stop.
The machine stops by single block and the main/sub-spindle
2. 1 0 motors, the power-driven tool motor and the coolant motor
will stop.
The machine stops by one cycle and the main/sub-spindle
3. 0 1 motors, the power-driven tool motor and the coolant motor
will stop.

2-19
Coolant Flow Detector

The coolant flow detector is a device for detecting shortages of coolant discharge.
If a shortage of coolant discharge is detected, the main/sub spindle motors, the power-driven
tool motor and coolant motor will stop.

For details on the coolant flow detector, please refer to section “13-13 Coolant Flow
Detector [0M459]”.

2-20
2-8-3 Safety Device for Lubricant

The lubrication system is equipped with a lubricant level detector for detecting shortages of
lubricant in the tank. If the lubricant level becomes lower than line EMPTY, the lubricant
level detector stops the machine by one cycle.

2-21
2-8-4 Broken Cut-Off Tool Detector

This unit detects breakages of the cut-off tool by mechanically detecting the presence of the
machined part remaining at the guide bush after the cut-off process. If damage of the cut-off
tool is detected, an alarm will be displayed on the screen. The machine will then enter the feed
hold state, and the main/sub-spindle motors, the power-driven tool motor and the coolant
motor will stop.

WARNING
Breakage of the cut-off tool could damage the machine or cause a fire.
Replace it immediately when broken. In addition, make sure that this unit is
used after the cut-off process.
Check the operation of this unit before initiating any machining work of new
parts.

Make sure the operation of the broken cut-off tool detector is checked every six
months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS if any problems arise with the safety devices.

Refer to section “8-9 Broken Cut-off Tool Detector” for details.

2-22
2-8-5 Parts Ejection Detector

This device checks the position of the push rod with the switch , and detects a failure of
the sub spindle parts pick-up and parts ejection.
When this device detects a failure of parts pick-up or ejection, an alarm is triggered and a
message is displayed on the screen.
When a failure of parts pick-up is detected, the machine enters the feed hold state, and the
main/sub-spindle motors, the power-driven tool motor and the coolant pump motor will stop.
When a failure of parts ejection is detected, the machine stops by single block stop.

Refer to section “10-5-1 Parts Ejection Detector” for details.

2-23
2-8-6 Parts Stopper Unit

When Parts Ejector with Guide Tube [0M471~ 0M475] is installed and sub spindle air blow is
performed, machined parts may fly out of the machine because of the compressed air blowing
into the guide tube. This unit is to be installed at the end of guide tube to prevent the parts
from flying out of the machine.

Refer to section “13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 10mm [0M471],
13mm [0M472], 16mm [0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475], Accessory for
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476], Warning Plate (Japanese/English) [0M476A]
Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]” for details.

2-24
2-8-7 Safety Functions of the CNC Device

Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detecting Function

When the speed difference between the specified speed of the main spindle and the actual
spindle speed exceeds the set value, this function brings the machine into the feed hold state
and stops the main/sub spindle motors, the power-driven tool motor and the coolant motor.
The function is used to prevent seizure of the guide bush, and to detect spindle overload.
Spindle speed fluctuation detection ON : G26
Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF : G25

Servo Torque Limit Function and Servo Monitor Function

Damage caused by tool collision during air cut operation (dry run) or parts pick up by the sub
spindle can be reduced by applying a torque limit (current limit) to the servomotor.
The servomotor load status (current value) can be checked on the LCD screen.

Auto power-off function

This function automatically shuts off the main power (main breaker) when an alarm is
triggered due to a malfunction of the machine or no barstock etc., while the lamp on the

AUTO POWER OFF key is lit.

2-25
MEMO

2-26
3. Outline
This chapter describes the outline of this machine.

3-1 Features

This machine is a CNC sliding headstock automatic lathe which allows front machining with
the main spindle and the tool post as well as back machining with the sub spindle and the
back 4-spindle unit, or the sub spindle and the back machining tool of the sleeve holder.

3-2 Configuration of the Main Units and the Names of Units

The main units of this machine are shown below:

3-1
3-2
3-3
A fire extinguisher is option.

3-4
3-3 Functions of the Main Units

This machine is a CNC sliding headstock automatic lathe and is composed of the following
main attachments.
<Guide Bush Version>

<Non-Guide Bush Version>

3-5
Headstock

The headstock comprises of the main spindle and a sliding unit. The main spindle chucks a
bar material with the collet and gives it a rotary motion, and the sliding unit gives it a
reciprocating motion in the Z1-axis direction (longitudinal) with the CNC control. The feeding
of bar material in the Z1-axis direction is performed by the headstock during front
machining.

Front machining ········ Machining with the main spindle and the tool post.
Back machining ········ Machining with the sub spindle and the sleeve holder
installed on the tool post or counter face drilling unit on the
tool post.
Machining with the sub spindle and the back 4-spindle unit.

3-6
Tool post

The tool post provides a reciprocating motion in the X1 and Y1-axis directions with the CNC
control and feeding of the bar in the diametrical direction during front machining.
This unit makes the cutting tool come into contact with the bar for machining and cooperates
with the headstock or the back attachment.
The tool holder, sleeve holder and the cross drilling unit are installed onto the tool post.
The cutting tool is attached to the tool holder to execute turning.
Various sleeves are attached to the sleeve holder to execute front or back drilling, tapping
and boring.
The cross drilling unit gives the drill, tap and end mill a rotary motion to perform cross
drilling, tapping and milling.
In addition, by attaching the cartridge type power-driven tool unit on the cross drilling unit,
front, back or cross drilling, tapping, milling, off-center drilling, thread whirling, polygon
machining and slotting can be performed.
The X1-axis feeds the tool holder and the cross drilling unit in the diametrical direction. The
Y1-axis selects tools.

3-7
Guide bush <Guide Bush Version >

The guide bush supports the bar near the machining point to prevent it from being bent by
the cutting load, and enables highly accurate machining.
In the machine of Guide bush version, the guide bush supports most of the cutting load in the
diametrical direction. Machining accuracy largely depends on the clearance between the
guide bush and the bar.
For highly accurate machining, choose a bar with an accurate outer diameter.
It is possible to choose either the stationary guide bush (not revolving) or revolving guide
bush that synchronizes with the main spindle.

3-8
Back attachment

+Z2

+X2

The back attachment comprises of the sub spindle which chucks a bar with a collet and gives
it a rotary motion and the sliding unit which gives it a reciprocating motion in the X2 and
Z2-axes (longitudinal) direction with the CNC control.
The back attachment provides the bar feed in the Z2-axis direction at the time of back
machining and the bar feed in the X2-axis direction at the time of the tool selection of back
4-spindle unit.

The roles of the back attachment are roughly classified as follows.

Non-pip machining
The back attachment chucks a bar with the sub collet and synchronous rotation
control is commanded with the main spindle to execute cutting-off so that the cut-off
surface is finished without dowel.
Z1-Z2 synchronous control
The back attachment chucks a bar simultaneously with the main spindle during
front machining, performs synchronous movement in the Z1/Z2-axis direction, or
performs synchronous rotation with the main spindle in order to prevent the bar
from bending or swinging, and ensures heavy duty cutting or accurate machining.
Back machining
The back attachment performs back drilling at the cutting-end surface or around it
together with the sleeve holder, the counter-face drill on the tool post or the back
4-spindle unit.

3-9
Back 4-spindle unit

This unit has four tool attachable positions, and performs back drilling, tapping and boring
on the cutting-off surface with the back attachment. In addition, by attaching the
power-driven tool unit to this unit, back off-center drilling, tapping and milling can be
performed.
The sub spindle gives a rotary motion of the bar, and the X2-axis selects tools.

3-10
4. Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications of the machine.

4-1 Standard Machine Specifications

Control axis specifications

Item Specifications
X1, Z1, Y1, X2, Z2 35000mm/min
Rapid feed rate
C1, C2 198000 /min (550min-1)
Maximum X1, Z1, Y1, X2, Z2 10000mm/min
turning feed rate C1 ,C2 10000 /min (27.8min-1)
X1, Y1, X2 0.001mm/0.0001inch (diametrical)
Minimum input
Z1, Z2 0.001mm/0.0001inch
increment
C1, C2 0.001

When “Increment system 1/10” is selected, one digit will be added to the number of
digits after the decimal point.

4-1
Machining capabilities

Item Specifications Remarks

SB-12R 13 mm (1/2 inch)
Maximum SB-16R 16 mm (5/8 inch)
machining 23mm
diameter SB-20R 20 mm (25/32 inch) (29/32inch)
option
Maximum Guide bush version 205 mm (8 1/16 inch)
headstock
Non-guide bush version 50 mm (2 inch)
stroke
SB-12R 10 mm (25/32 inch)
Stationary tool
SB-16R/20R 12 mm (15/32 inch)
T31,T32 6 mm (15/64 inch)
Maximum 0M151
T33,T34,T35 7 mm (9/32 inch) Note 1
drilling
capability Power- 0M152 T31 T34 7 mm (9/32 inch)
driven tool 0M156 T31 T35 5 mm (3/16 inch)
T31,T32 5 mm (3/16 inch)
0M157
T33,T34,T35 7 mm (9/32 inch) Note 1
Stationary tool M10 P1.5
T31, T32 M5×P0.8
0M151
Maximum T33,T34,T35 M6×P1.0 Note 2
tapping Power- 0M152 T31 T34 M6×P1.0
capability driven tool 0M156 T31 T35 M5×P0.8
T31,T32 M5×P0.8
0M157
T33,T34,T35 M6×P1.0 Note 2
T31,T32 7 mm (9/32 inch)
0M151
T33,T34,T35 10 mm (25/64 inch) Note 3
Maximum milling 0M152 T31 T34 10 mm (25/64 inch)
capability 0M156 T31 T35 7 mm (9/32 inch)
T31,T32 7 mm (9/32 inch)
0M157
T33,T34,T35 10 mm (25/64 inch) Note 3

(Note 1) Maximum drilling capability of High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit
[0M158] that is to be attached to T34 or T35 is 5mm (3/16 inch).
(Note 2) Maximum tapping capability of High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit
[0M158] that is to be attached to T34 or T35 is M5×P0.8.
(Note 3) Maximum milling capability of High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit
[0M158] that is to be attached to T34 or T35 is 7mm (9/32 inch).

The stated machining capabilities apply to SUS303 (AISI 303, DIN X10CrNis189).
Machining capabilities may differ from the listed data depending on the machining
conditions e.g. the bar material and/or tools used.
Stationary tool units and power-driven tool units are options.

4-2
Machine configuration

Item Specifications Remarks

Operation mode Right-handed
Integrated mechanical/
Configuration
electrical/ structure
L W H 2070 1177 1760mm Including the leveling
Center height 1060mm pads
Dimensions
Not including the
Weight 1750 kg approx.
coolant tank

Main spindle specifications

Item Specifications Remarks

SB-12R Max.15000min-1
Spindle speed
SB-16R/20R Max.10000min-1
Rotation control AC Spindle drive
Drive motor 2.2kW (CONT.)/3.7kW (10min/25%ED)
Indexing C-axis control

Tool post specifications

When selecting 5-spindle cross drilling unit ER11/16 [0M151]

Item Specifications Remarks

Type Gang tool post
12 mm×95 130 mm
6 tools
1/2 inch×4 5 inch Select either one of
Tool
10 mm×95 130 mm the combinations
7 tools
3/8 inch×4 5 inch
When installing
Number Sleeve 4 tools
[0M111] at T35
of tools
2 tools ER11 Integrated [0M151]
Cartridge type Option
Power-driven
(2 tools are attachable when
tool 3 tools
sleeve holder is installed at
T35.)
T31, T32 Max. 8000 min-1
Spindle speed
Power- T33, T34, T35 Max. 6000 min-1
driven Rotation
AC servo drive
tool control
Drive motor 1.0kW (CONT.)/1.2kW (5min/30%ED)
Tool selection Servo motor

Sleeves and Cartridge-type tools are options.

Refer to “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

4-3
When selecting 4-spindle cross drilling unit ER16 [0M152]
Item Specifications Remarks
Type Gang tool post
12 mm×95 130 mm
6 tools
1/2 inch×4 5 inch Select either one of
Tool
10 mm×95 130 mm the combinations
Number of 7 tools
3/8 inch×4 5 inch
tools
Sleeve 4 tools [0M112]
Power-driven
4 tools ER16
tool
Power- Spindle speed Max. 6000 min-1
driven Rotation control AC servo drive
tool Drive motor 1.0kW (CONT.)/ 1.2kW (5min/30%ED)
Tool selection Servo motor

Sleeves are optional.

Refer to “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

When selecting High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11 [0M156]

Item Specifications Remarks

Type Gang tool post
12 mm×95 130 mm
6 tools
1/2 inch×4 5 inch Select either one of
Tool
10 mm×95 130 mm the combinations
Number of 7 tools
3/8 inch×4 5 inch
tools
Sleeve 4 tools [0M112]
Power-driven Integrated
5 tools ER11
tool
Spindle speed Max. 10000 min-1
Power-
Rotation control AC servo drive
driven
1.0kW (CONT.)/ 1.2kW
tool Drive motor
(5min/30%ED)
Tool selection Servo motor

When using 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M156], always use with Cover for SB
type E/N/G [0M156A].

Sleeves are optional.

4-4
 Refer to “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

When selecting High Speed 5sp Cross Drill Unit ER11/16 [0M157]
Item Specifications Remarks
Type Gang tool post
12 mm×95 130 mm
6 tools
1/2 inch×4 5 inch Select either one of
Tool
10 mm×95 130 mm the combinations
7 tools
3/8 inch×4 5 inch
When installing
Number of Sleeve 4 tools
[0M111] at T35
tools
2 tools ER11 Integrated
Cartridge type Option
Power-driven
(2 tools are attachable when
tool 3 tools
sleeve holder is installed at
T35.)
T31, T32 Max. 10000 min-1
Spindle speed
Power- T33, T34, T35 Max. 6000 min-1
driven Rotation
AC servo drive
tool control
Drive motor 1.0kW (CONT.)/ 1.2kW (5min/30%ED)
Tool selection Servo motor

Sleeves and Cartridge-type tools are options.

Refer to “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

4-5
Back attachment specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
SB-12R 13 mm (1/2 inch)
Maximum
SB-16R 16 mm (5/8 inch)
chucking
diameter 23mm(29/32inch)
SB-20R 20 mm (25/32 inch)
option
Pick-up Maximum pick-up part length 80mm (3-5/32inch)
capability Maximum part projection length 30mm (1-3/16inch)
When using
50mm (1-31/32inch)
[0M478]
Maximum part insertion length
When using
75mm (2-61/64inch)
[0M479]
SB-12R Max. 12000min-1
Spindle speed
SB-16R/20R Max. 9000min-1
SB-12R 5-digit direct S command
Speed control
Spindle SB-16R/20R 4-digit direct S command
specifications Rotation control AC spindle drive
0.55kW(CONT.)/
Drive motor
1.1kW(15min/40%ED)
Indexing C-axis control
4 tools
Stationary tool
(counter face sleeve)
Main tool
post 3 tools
Number of Power-driven tool (3-spindle counter face Option
tools drilling unit)
Back tool Stationary tool 4 tools
post Power-driven tool (Back 4-spindle unit) Option
Rotation speed Max. 8000min-1
Power-driven Speed control 4-digit direct S command
Option
tool Rotation control AC spindle drive
Drive motor 0.75kW
Stationary tools 8mm(5/16inch)

When using
Maximum 7mm(9/32inch) [0M155]
drilling (3-spindle counter Note: 5mm
Power-
capability face drilling unit) (3/16inch) when
driven tools
using [0M158]
Machining
6mm(15/64inch)
capability Option
(Back 4-spindle unit)
Stationary tools M6×P1.0
M6×P1.0
Maximum
(3-spindle counter Option
tapping Power-
face drilling unit
capability driven tools
M5×P0.8
Option
(Back 4-spindle unit)

4-6
 The stated machining capabilities apply to SUS303 (AISI 303, DIN X10CrNis189).
Machining capabilities may differ from the listed data depending on the machining
conditions e.g. the bar material and/or tools used.
Stationary tool units and power-driven tool units are optional.

Refer to “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

Broken cut-off tool detector

Item Specifications Remarks

Minimum detectable
5mm
length
Minimum detectable
2mm
diameter
3.7N
Detection load
(parts outer diameter: 2mm)

Coolant unit specifications

Item Specifications Remarks

Installation method Stand-alone type
Tank capacity 180L Effective capacity : 133L
Coolant motor 0.4kW
Detects shortages of coolant in
Coolant level detector
the tank
Safety devices
Detects shortages of the coolant
Coolant flow detector
flow [0M459]
Coolant Water-soluble/water-insoluble

Please consult STAR MICRONICS when water-soluble coolant is used.

4-7
Lubrication system specifications

Item Specifications Remarks

Rectilinear guide bearings,
sliding guideways,
Lubrication points
ball screws,
Main/sub spindle shifters
Discharge interval: 30min/50Hz,
Oil discharge amount 3.0cm3 per time
25min/60Hz
Tank capacity 2.0L Effective capacity: 1.3L
Pump motor 4W or less
Detects shortages of lubricant in the
Safety device Lubricant level detector
tank
For sliding surface: Recommended oil:
Lubricant
Viscosity grade ISO VG68 Mobil Vactra oil No. 2SLC

Pneumatic unit specifications

Item Specifications Remarks

Normal Compressed air source to be
0.5MPa
pressure supplied by the user
Piping bore Rc1/4
Water-insoluble 4.2m3/h
G.B. coolant (ANR)
version Water-soluble 7.5m3/h
coolant (ANR)
SB-12R
Water-insoluble 11.4m3/h
N.G.B coolant (ANR) The values in the left-hand
version Water-soluble 16.5m3/h column are when air is
Air coolant (ANR) blown for 10 sec/min and air
consumption Water-insoluble 6.9m3/h purge is used.
G.B. coolant (ANR) Air consumption of the bar
version Water-soluble 9.8m3/h feeder is not included.
SB-16R coolant (ANR)
/20R Water-insoluble 14.3m3/h
N.G.B coolant (ANR)
version Water-soluble 19.6m3/h
coolant (ANR)

4-8
Power supply

Item Specifications Remarks

Voltage 3 phase, 200Vac±10％
Frequency 50/60Hz ±1Hz
Power Load run average power:
SB-12R
supply 4.5KVA Power supply capacity of the
Capacity
SB-16R/ Load run average power: machine body only
20R 3.7KVA
Rated current: 30A
Machine Rated shutdown capacity: QF001
Icu/Ics: 2.5/1kA
Main Rated current: 20A
circuit Rated shutdown capacity: Transformer [0G492]
breaker External Icu/Ics: 2.5/1kA
transformer Rated current: 20A
Transformer CE Marking
Rated shutdown capacity:
Version [0T497]
Icu/Ics: 7.5/4kA
Leakage current 5mA
Included with the machine
Electric circuit diagram No. 10171/** ***
** *** is an edition number

4-9
4-2 Accessories

4-2-1 Standard Accessories

Name SB-12R SB-16R/20R

CNC unit : (FANUC Series 0i-TD)
Control box & operation panel with 8.4 inch color LCD display
Pneumatic unit
Stand-alone type coolant tank
Coolant level detector (Lower limit)
Automatic centralized lubrication unit (with level detector)
Door interlock system
Spindle clamp unit (for main spindle)
Sub spindle clamp unit [1L484]
Drive unit for revolving guide bush [1L452, 1L452B]
Drive unit for revolving guide bush [0M454, 0M454B]
C-axis contouring control version (for main/sub spindle)
Main spindle air purge
Air purge for revolving guide bush
Sub spindle air purge
Parts ejection detector
Broken cut-off tool detector
Back attachment
4-spindle unit for back working
Sub spindle air blow unit
Leveling bolts & leveling pads
Work light
Earth leakage breaker (Rated sensitivity current: 30mA)
Tool kit (1 set)

4-10
4-2-2 Optional Accessories

Type No. Name Remarks

57418 Bar Stock Gripping Unit
0M446 Main Spindle Inner Tube For SB-16R/20R
1L445 Main Spindle Inner Tube For SB-12R
68424 Parts Receptacle
For overseas machines, 12KVA (not in
0G492 Transformer compliance with CE Machinery
Directive)
Always use Coolant Flow Detector
Cable for Transformer CE Marking [0M459], Transformer CE Marking
0T488
Version Version [0T497] and CE Marking
Version [0M902].
For overseas machines, 12KVA (in
compliance with CE Machinery
Directive)
0T497 Transformer CE Marking Version Use with Coolant Flow Detector
[0M459], CE Marking Version
[0M902] and Cable for Transformer
CE Marking Version [0T488].
0H414 Parts Separator Type A
Cannot be used with Parts Receptacle
0M412 Parts Conveyor
in machine [0M425].
0M416 Automatic Bar Feeder Interface
Cannot be used with Parts Conveyor
0M425 Parts Receptacle in Machine
[0M412].
Required when installing steady rest
0M447 Steady Rest Unit Cover
unit of the bar feeder manufacturer
Drive Unit for Power Driven Tool Type Drive unit for power driven tool of
0M457
B back 4-spindle unit
0M459 Coolant Flow Detector
0T431 Coolant Unit 2.5MPa Use with [0M462, 0M488, 0M489].
1A457 Coolant Unit 6.9MPa Use with [0M488, 0M494].
0M461 Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle Use with [0T431] or [1A457].
0M462 Coolant Piping Unit 2.5MPa Use with [0T431, 0M488, 0M489].
0M494 Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa Use with [1A457, 0M488].
0M466 Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder Use with [0T431] or [1A457].
Coolant Piping for Back 4 Spindle
0M467 Use with [0T431] or [1A457].
Unit
0M468 Coolant Piping for Guide Bush Use with [0T431] or [1A457].
Use with [0T431] or [1A457, 68493,
0M469 Coolant Discharge for Back ATT.
0M496].
0M488 Coolant Unit Signal Cable Use with [0T431] or [1A457]
0M489 Coolant Unit Power Cable Use with [0T431, 0M462, 0M488]
0M493 Coolant Valve 2.5MPa Use with [0T431].( Additional valve)
0M492 Coolant Valve 6.9MPa Use with [1A457].( Additional valve)
0M495 Coolant Piping for Thread Whirling Use with [0T431] or [1A457].

4-11
Type No. Name Remarks
For standard coolant
0M463 Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube
Use with [0M446] or [1L445].
Low Pr. Coolant Piping for Sleeve
0M464 For standard coolant
Holder
68493 Reducing Valve Use with [1A457].
0M496 Check Valve Use with [1A457].
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for
0M471
S Collet 10
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for
0M472
S Collet 13 Use with Parts Stopper Unit [0G478],
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide
0M473
S Collet 16 Tube) [0M476] and Warning Plate
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for (Japanese/English) [0M476A].
0M474
S Collet 18
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for
0M475
S Collet 20
Accessory for Parts Ejector Use with any one of [0M471 0M475],
0M476
(Guide Tube) [0G478] and [0M476A].
Accessory for Parts Ejector (guide tube) Use with any one of [0M471 0M475],
0M476A
Warning Plate (Japanese/English) [0G478] and [0M476].
Use with any one of [0M471 0M475],
0G478 Parts Stopper
[0M476] and [0M476A].
Use with any one of
0M478 Parts Ejector with Spring
[0M478A 0M478F].
Parts Ejector with Spring
0M478A
(for sub collet VNC20)
Parts Ejector with Spring
0M478B
(for sub collet SNC18)
Parts Ejector with Spring
0M478C
(for sub collet R16)
Use with [0M478].
Parts Ejector with Spring
0M478D
(for sub collet P10)
Parts Ejector with Spring
0M478E
(for sub collet S13)
Parts Ejector with Spring
0M478F
(for sub collet T7)
Use with any one of
0M479 Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
[0M479A 0M479E].
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
0M479A
(for sub collet VNC20)
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
0M479B
(for sub collet SNC18)
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
0M479C Use with [0M479].
(for sub collet R16)
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
0M479D
(for sub collet P10)
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
0M479E
(for sub collet S13)
0M482 Water Separator

4-12
Type No. Name Remarks
0M497 Stopper
When using the machine in any of
the EU member countries:
Always use with Coolant Flow
Detector [0M459], Transformer CE
CE Marking Version (Accessories in
Marking Version [0T497], Cable for
compliance with CE Machinery
0M902 Transformer CE Marking Version
Directive or Korean regulation:
[0T488].
Self-regulatory safety confirmation)
When using the machine in Korea:
Always use with Coolant Flow
Detector [0M459], Warning Plate
[28814].
0M932 Safety Relay Module Version Use with [0M459].
0R449 Expanded I/O Module Unit
1H429 Jig for G.B. S12 For SB-12R
1H431 Jig for G.B. S10 P10 For SB-12R
1H432 Jig for G.B. T7 For SB-12R
1H427 Jig for G.B. S13 For SB-12R
1L431 Jig for G.B. Body For SB-12R
1L421 Jig for G.B. VNC20 For SB-20R
1L422 Jig for G.B. R20 For SB-20R
1L423 Jig for G.B. R16,P16 For SB-16R/20R
1L426 Jig for G.B. Body For SB-16R/20R
0T427 Beacon Red, Yellow, Green
Program-editing software for the
72592 Program Utility Jr. (PU-Jr.) user’s personal computer. One set is
required per PC.
Please purchase together with
72593 PU-Jr. USB Protection Key
[72592]. One set is required per PC.
72801 RS232C Interface Version Without cover
72803 RS232C Interface Version (with cover)
Refer to“Appendix 4 List of Tool
Guide bush, collet, tool holder
Holders”.

Optional accessories needed to CE Marking are as follows.

- Cable for Transformer CE Marking Version [0T488]
- Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497]
- Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]
- CE Marking Version [0M902]

Optional accessories needed to Korean regulation (Self-regulatory safety

confirmation) are as follows.
- Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]
- CE Marking Version [0M902]

Optional accessories needed to GB regulation are as follows.

- Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]
- Safety Relay Module Version [0M932]

4-13
4-3 CNC Device Specifications

4-3-1 Standard CNC Specifications

Item Specifications
Control unit FANUC Series 0i- TD
7axes in total:
Number of control axes
4 axes (for PATH1) and 3 axes(for PATH2)
Simultaneously controlled
Z1 and Z2 axes, C1 and C2 axes
axes
Linear interpolation: G1
Interpolation function
Circular interpolation: G2 (CW), G3 (CCW)
Simultaneous control of the Synchronous control of the rotation for the main and sub
rotation for Main/Sub spindle spindles is possible.
Operation panel 8.4 inch color LCD display
Input/output interface Memory card, USB, RS232C(option)
Coordinate command system Absolute/incremental commands can be used together
Decimal point input Available
Diametric direction command Diametric value command (X, Y-axes)
Feed per minute (mm/min): G98
Feed command method
Feed per revolution (mm/rev): G99
Electronic handwheel 1, 10 or 100 one scale
Feed rate override 0 – 150% (rotary switch)
Cutting feed override 100%: ON: M88
Override cancel
Cutting feed override 100%: OFF: M89
Rapid traverse override 0 100% (rotary switch)
Selection by T-code command
PATH1
T 00 (T3-digit) ········( is 1 7, 9)
Tool selection and
T 00 (T4-digit) ( is 11 14, 31~ 35)
plane selection
PATH2
T 00 (T4-digit) ( is 11 14, 20 24, 29,
33 35)
128 pairs in total for PATH1/2
Tool wear offset
Absolute/incremantal input is available
Program storage 1MB in total for PATH1/2
Number of registerable 800 programs in total for PATH1/2
programs (Number of registerable programs expansion 1 included)
During the operation of a program, editing of another
program is possible in background mode. The following
operations are possible in background mode:
Background editing
Program editing
Program input from an external device
Program output to an external device
Threading ····················G32
Threading function Threading cycle ············G92
Cs contour control Main spindle, Sub spindle
Cut-off and end face cutting during preparation can be
Cut-off process function
performed easily.

4-14
 Item Specifications
This function stores the geometry offset amounts for each
tool, positions the tool where the offset amount has been
Tool geometry offset function
calculated at the time of tool selection, then executes
coordinate setting. Offsets of X, Y and Z-axes.
This function is for applying a torque limit (current limit)
to the servo motor and reducing the degree of damage
caused by collision during air-cut or parts pick-up by the
Servo torque limit and sub spindle by setting parameters of rapid traverse,
servo monitor function cutting feed rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant
etc.,
Also, the servo motor load (current load) can be checked on
the LCD screen.
Memory protect function This function prohibits program editing.
M21, M22. Function to make the geometry of the corner
Error detect ON/OFF
sharp/not sharp.
M23, M24. Function that allows chamfering to be switched
Chamfering ON/OFF
between valid/invalid.
The current position of each axis (X, Y, Z, C) and the
Position display function
selected tool numbers are displayed on the LCD screen.
When a key has not been pressed after a certain length of
Automatic erase display
time, (initial setting is 15 minutes) the back light of the LCD
function
screen automatically turns off.
Displays Hour/Minute/Second on the LCD screen.
Clock display
(Y/M/D: is displayed on some screens).
The wear offset amount of each axis is displayed on the
Offset display function
LCD screen.
Machining information (bar diameter, part length, cut-off
Machining data display
tool width, main spindle speed during cut-off, the number of
function
machining by one chuck) is displayed on the LCD screen.
Displays the program number, remarks, capacity, remaining
Program list display function number of program registrations, memory capacity and
remaining available memory on the LCD screen.
By setting the pre-set time for each of the 5 timers on the
LCD screen, total machining time is calculated and an
Timer function
alarm is displayed on the screen when it reaches the preset
time. This is useful when carrying out maintenance.
Keep relay Keep relays can be changed by following the given dialogues
conversational function on the LCD screen.
LCD screen display
Multi-language display English, Japanese, Chinese (simplified characters),
German
Constant surface speed
G96,G97,G50 (Available for main/sub spindle)
control
Spindle speed fluctuation
G25,G26 (Available for main/sub spindle)
detection
Multiple repetitive canned G70 G76
cycle (Available on the Z X plane)
Addresses I, K and R can be commanded on the Z X plane.
Automatic chamfering corner
This cannot be used with the direct drawing dimension
R
programming.

4-15
 Item Specifications
Tool nose R compensation G40 G42
G80 G87, G89
Canned cycle for drilling
(G87,G89 available on PATH1 only)
Variable lead threading G34

Threading retract

Continuous threading
Programmable data input G10: Tool wear offset can be changed in a program.
Available on the Z X plane
Direct drawing dimension
This cannot be used with Chamfering corner R.
programming
(Chamfering corner R function is valid as initial setting.)
Cylindrical interpolation G107
Polar coordinate interpolation G112, G113
For the main/sub spindles ······M29
Rigid tapping For front/back off-center tapping············ G984
For cross drilling power-driven tools ········ G784, G884
Increment system 1/10 Minimum setting unit: 0.0001mm/0.00001inch
Inch/ metric conversion G20, G21
Custom macro common
#100~#199, #500~#999
variables addition
Extended part program
Program copy, movement and insertion are possible.
editing
Program operation can be performed by rotating the
Manual handle retrace
electronic handwheel.
This will count the machined parts with M20 in a program
Parts counter function operation, and display the number on the LCD screen. The
(Star unique specification) machine will stop by a one cycle stop when counted up
Counting‥‥‥0 999999
Run hour display function
Measures the machine running time and cycle time.
(Star unique specification)

When the AUTO POWER OFF key on the operation

Auto-power shut off function panel is lit, this function automatically shuts off the main
power (main breaker) when the machine stops due to a
machine error or no barstock etc.

When setting the increment system 1/10, please select [932 86 128].

4-16
4-3-2 Optional CNC Functions

Type No. Item Specifications

Commanding M156 M159 from either
PATH1 or 2 are possible.
932 86 005 Spare M code 2 pairs
Note) 2 pairs (M152 M155) are prepared
as the standard.
By commanding axis movement (excluding
the axes of the selected plane) at the same
932 86 134 Helical interpolation
time as circular interpolation, it will be
possible to move the tool onto the spiral.
Tool wear offset number
932 86 233 200 pairs in total for PATH1/2
addition C
Tool life management by tool No. Allocated to each tool (Star unique
932 86 314
counter specification)

4-3-3 Optional Software

Type No. Item Specifications

Please purchase this when a PU-Jr.
password is required from the fourth time
932 ZZ ZZZ PU-Jr. additional license
onwards. One password is issued per
license.

4-17
MEMO

4-18
5. Turning the Power ON/OFF
This chapter explains the procedure for turning the power ON/OFF.

5-1 Turning the Power ON

5-1-1 Preparation and Inspection before Turning the Power ON

Before turning the power ON, prepare and inspect the following points in the table below.

No. Section Contents Remarks

Refer to section
Remove the cutting “12-1-1 Removing the
Chip tank
chips. Cutting Chips” for
details.
Check the amount of Refer to section
coolant. “12-1-2 Cleaning and
Coolant tank Inspection of the
Inspect the coolant Coolant Unit” for
tank. details.
Refer to section
Check the opening of
“12-1-2 Cleaning and
Coolant handles the coolant handles
Inspection of the
and coolant nozzles and direction of the
Coolant Unit” for
coolant nozzles. details.
Refer to section
Check the amount of “12-1-3 Inspection of
Lubrication unit
lubricant. the Lubricant” for
details.

5-1
5-1-2 Procedure for Turning the Power ON

5-2
Follow the procedure below to turn the power ON.

CAUTION
When the LCD display appears at the time of turning the main power on, while
the sub collet is open, the sub collet will close automatically. In addition, if the
main collet is closed and the machine enters the MACHINE READY state, the
main collet will open automatically.

(1) Turn the factory power supply ON.

When Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497] is used, turn ON ( ) the power

switch of the transformer CE marking version.

(2) Turn the main power (main breaker) ON ( ).

The LCD display will appear.
Alarm Nos. 1000 and 1022 will be displayed on the screen.

If the LCD display does not appear even if the main breaker is turned ON ( ), the
following reasons can be considered.
- The factory power supply is OFF.
- Breaker QF010 has tripped.
- Circuit protector FU702 has tripped
Contact the qualified servicing
- The regulator A061 is faulty. personnel or STAR MICRONICS.
- The LCD display is faulty.
- The cable of LCD display is
disconnected.
- The power switch of Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497] (when used)
is not turned ON ( ).

(3) Reset the EMERGENCY STOP button .

Alarm No. 1000 will disappear.

Turn the button to the right until it pops up to the reset position.

(4) Press the MACHINE READY button .

Alarm No. 1022 will disappear and the machine will enter the machine ready
state.

5-3
5-1-3 Preparation and Inspection before Starting Operation

After turning the power ON to prepare the machine for operation, please prepare and inspect
the following points in the table below before starting operation.

No. Section Contents Remarks

Refer to section
Check if any alarm is
LCD display screen “11-2-1 How to Check
not displayed. Alarms” for details.
Refer to section
“12-1-5 Inspection
Check that the air
Pneumatic unit and Adjustment of the
pressure is 0.5MPa. Pneumatic Pressure”
for details.

5-4
5-2 Turning the Power OFF

5-2-1 Procedure for Turning the Power OFF

WARNING
If a machine fault occurs, or emergency situation in which the power must be

turned off, press the EMERGENCY STOP button immediately without

waiting for the machine to stop.
If the main breaker is turned off while the main/sub spindles are rotating, the
main/sub spindles will run by inertia force.
Do not open the headstock room and cutting room doors until 2 minutes or more
have passed since the time of turning the main breaker off (while the main/sub
spindles were rotating).

5-5
Turn OFF the power by following the procedure below:
(1) Stop operating the machine.

(2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button .

(3) Turn the power supply (the main breaker) OFF ( ).
(4) Turn the factory switchboard OFF ( ).

5-6
6. Functions of Operation Panels

6-1 Functions of the Machine Operation Panel

This chapter describes functions of the machine operation panel and CNC operation panel
installed on the machine.

CAUTION
Handle the CNC operation panel carefully.
Jolting the panel will cause a failure.

Diagram of the operation panel

6-1
Operation panel A

6-2
DOOR OPEN button

This button is used to open the doors while in SETTING

mode.

When the doors can be opened, the DOOR OPEN button

flashes.
When one of the doors is opened, the DOOR OPEN button

lights up.

When the DOOR OPEN button is pressed for 30

seconds or more (ON state), alarm No. 1710 will be
displayed.

How to use the DOOR OPEN button

(1) Select SETTING mode.

When SETTING mode is selected, the machine will enter one cycle stop.
Stop the machine by either one cycle stop or single block stop.

(2) Confirm that the START button goes out.

(3) Press the DOOR OPEN button.

All rotating spindles, the standard and 2.5MPa coolant motor will stop.

(4) Confirm that the DOOR OPEN button is flashing.

When the DOOR OPEN button is flashing, the doors of the machine body can
be opened.

(5) Open the doors of the machine body.

The DOOR OPEN button lights up when the doors of the machine body is
open.

6-3
(6) After the adjustment work etc. is finished, close the doors of the machine body.

(7) Select MACHINING mode.

(8) After confirming the machining program, press the START button.

The spindles and the standard, 2.5MPa and 6.9MPa coolant motors that have

stopped in step (3) will start up. The DOOR OPEN button light will go out.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is pressed before pressing the START

button , all the spindles, the s standard, 2.5MPa and 6.9MPa coolant motors
that have stopped in step (3) will start up.

START button

Press this button for starting automatic operation of the

machine in MEMORY mode or MDI mode. When the

START button is released, the operation will start.

Be sure to close the doors to operate in MDI, MEMORY
or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is
open.

When the START button is pressed for 10 seconds

or more (ON state), alarm No. 1710 will be displayed.

FEED HOLD button

Press this button during automatic operation to select the feed

hold state.

6-4
OVERRIDE TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch

This switch is used for changing the rapid traverse speed

(0%, 1%, 5%, 25% and 100%).

When the program operation is performed in

MACHINING mode while the RAPID TRAVERSE
OVERRIDE switch is not100%, alarm No.2061 is
displayed.

To restart the program, press the START button.

OVERRIDE switch

This switch is used for changing the cutting feed rate

(0 150%).

When the program operation is performed in

MACHINING mode while the OVERRIDE switch is
not100%, alarm No.2061 is displayed.

To restart the program, press the START button.

MACHINE READY button

This button cancels alarm No. 1022 and the machine enters the
machine ready state for operation.

The machine ready state means that alarm No. 1022 is

not displayed and the lamp on this button is lit.

MEMORY INPUT key switch

The following operations cannot be carried out with the CNC

operation panel when the MEMORY INPUT key switch is
OFF ( ).
Program registration, editing and parameter rewriting

Appoint a machine supervisor who is in charge of the

key.
Set the key switch to OFF ( ) to remove the key.

6-5
CONTROL MODE key switch

When the CONTROL MODE key switch is turned to

MACHINING , the closed headstock and/or cutting room
door will be locked and cannot be opened.
If the CONTROL MODE key switch is turned to
MACHINING while one of the doors is open, the machine
will display alarm No. 2062 and a buzzer will sound.

If closing the opened door or turning the key switch to

SETTING is not carried out within 30 seconds, the machine

will enter the emergency stop state. Closing the door during
emergency stop will lock the door.
If either the opened door is closed or turning the key switch to

SETTING is carried out within 30 seconds, alarm No. 2062

will disappear and the buzzer sound will stop.

Continuous machining can only be operated in MACHINING

mode.
When the CONTROL MODE key switch is turned to

SETTING , both headstock and cutting room doors can be

opened. Also, the lamp of the ONE CYCLE key will flash.

The machine will enter the following conditions depending on the selected mode and
whether or not a door is open.

SETTING MODE MACHINING MODE

FUNCTION DOOR DOOR DOOR
DOOR OPENED
CLOSED OPENED CLOSED
EDIT POSSIBLE POSSIBLE
POSSIBLE
STARTING
MEMORY (ONE CYCLE
IMPOSSIBLE
STOP)
POSSIBLE
STARTING
MDI (ONE CYCLE
IMPOSSIBLE
STOP) EMERGENCY STOP
STARTING (When changing to
MACRO POSSIBLE
IMPOSSIBLE POSSIBLE
MACHINING while
HANDLE POSSIBLE POSSIBLE a door is open)
STARTING
ZERO RETURN POSSIBLE
IMPOSSIBLE
MAIN/SUB SPINDLE STARTING
POSSIBLE
ROTATION IMPOSSIBLE
POWER DRIVEN STARTING
POSSIBLE
TOOL ROTATION IMPOSSIBLE

6-6
 Continuous machining is only available when both COOLANT 1 and COOLANT 2
keys are turned ON ( ) in MACHINING mode.
Appoint a machine supervisor who is in charge of the key of this switch.
Set the key switch to MACHINING to remove the key.

When the DOOR OPEN button is flashing while in SETTING mode, the doors can
be opened. In addition, the DOOR OPEN button will light up when one of the doors
is opened.

ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL

In HANDLE mode, the axes can be moved minutely with

the electronic handwheel.
This is used in the manual handle retrace operation.

Choose the axes to be moved and the feed with the

AXIS DIRECTION keys and the handle feed
magnification keys.

For details on manual handle retrace, please refer to

section “9-3 Manual Handle Retrace Operation” for
details.

EMERGENCY STOP button

Press this button to stop the machine immediately in case of

emergency. This is a lock-type button. To unlock the button,
turn the knob clockwise. Once this button is pressed, the
following operations must be carried out to restart the machine.
1) Check that the emergency status is evaded.
2) Turn the main breaker OFF.
3) Unlock the button by turning the knob clockwise.
4) Turn the main breaker ON.

5) Press the MACHINE READY button .

6-7
Operation Panel B

When the sheet key is pressed for more than 10 seconds, alarm No.1710 will be
displayed.
The sheet keys can be set so that they do not function when touched accidently.
A timer can be set for each key, and the keys do not function until they are pressed
for longer than the set time of the timer.
The initial time setting of each key is 0msec, 200msec (MAIN/SUB COLLET), or
1000msec (COOLANT1,2).
Even if the POWER TOOLS key, MAIN SPINDLE key or SUB SPINDLE key is set
to more than 1 second, the key(s) will be forced to function in 1 second.

For details on each timer and the timer setting method, please refer to section
“11-4-2 PMC PARAM (TIMER) Screen” for details.

6-8
 Operation mode selector keys
The following keys are used to select the operation mode for program running, MDI operation
or program editing.
Press the necessary key to light up the lamp.

PATH1 key
Press this key to light up the lamp for PATH1 operation.

When the lamp of PATH1 key is lit, MEMORY operation on

PATH1 is possible.
To perform the simultaneous operation of PATH1 and PATH2,
press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up the lamps.

PATH2 key
Press this key to light up the lamp for PATH2 operation.

When the lamp of PATH1 key is turned off and the lamp of PATH2
key is lit, MEMORY operation on PATH2 is possible.
To perform the simultaneous operation of PATH1 and PATH2,
press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

The following key is used to switch between systems (PATH1 or PATH2).

Every push of the CHANGE key switches between PATH1 and PATH2.

CHANGE key
Press this key to switch to/from PATH1 and PATH2 in EDIT or MDI
mode.
For example, it is possible to change the PATH on the displayed
OFFSET screen during MEMORY operation.

The PATH that is currently valid is displayed on the bottom-right

of the LCD screen.
When “PATH1” is displayed, operations of offset, DGN and
parameter are possible on the PATH1 side.
When “PATH2” is displayed, operations of offset, DGN and
parameter are possible on the PATH2 side.

6-9
 Mode selector keys
These keys are used for selecting a method of operating the machine.
Press the necessary key to light up the lamp.

EDIT key
Select this key to edit the program.

MEMORY key
Select this key to operate the machine according to the program
in the memory.

MDI key
Select this key to input and execute a CNC command with the
data input keys on the CNC operation panel.

MACRO key
Select this key to operate the STAR original functions.

HANDLE key
Select this key to move the X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Z2-axes in manual
handle feed mode with the electronic handwheel.

ZERO RETURN key

Select this key to manually return each axis to the reference
point.

All servo motors of this machine use an absolute pulse

coder. Therefore, the program can be started even when
reference point return is not completed.
Reference point return cannot be executed if there is an
alarm displayed on the screen.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point
return, operations in MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode.
The operation will not start if a door is open.

6-10
 Operation keys
Press the necessary key to light up the lamp.

HANDLE RETRACE key

By pressing this key in MEMORY mode to light up the lamp, the
machine enters the handle retrace mode.

AUTO POWER OFF key

By pressing this key to light up the lamp, the main power (main
breaker) will turn off automatically when the machine stops due
to an error or no barstock.

OPTIONAL STOP key

Press this key to light up the lamp and stop the machine
temporarily at the block where the M1 code is executed in the
program.

Press the START button to resume the program.

This function applies to both the PATH1 and PATH2 programs.

ONE CYCLE key

Press this key to light up the lamp and stop the machine
temporarily at the block with the M20 code in the program.

Press the START button to resume the program.

This function applies to both the PATH1 and PATH2 programs.

SINGLE BLOCK key

Press this key to light up the lamp and press the START

button to execute the program one block at a time.

When this key is pressed in continuous operation, the currently
executed block will be completed, but the next block will not be
executed.
This function applies to both the PATH1 and PATH2 programs.
To return to continuous operation, press the SINGLE BLOCK key

again to turn off the lamp and press the START button .

6-11
AIR CUT key
Press this key to make the lamp flash and select air cut
operation.
Under this condition, the machine operates as follows:

Press the START button to display alarm No. 2095 once.

If there is no problem, press the START button once

again to cancel the alarm and execute air cut operation.
The alarm will not be displayed when the lamp on the

SINGLE BLOCK key is lit.

Blocks containing a slash code “/” between M75 and M76 will
be skipped.
M27 (parts pickup/ejection detection) on PATH2 will be
ignored.
When the COOLANT1 key is turned OFF ( ) in SETTING

mode , alarm No. 2083 will be ignored.

The NO BAR STOCK signal will be ignored.
The preparation ready (Preparation completed) signal and
error signal of the automatic bar feeder will be ignored.
The coolant ON command will be ignored.
Alarm Nos.1011 and 1012 that occur during adjustment of the
main collet will be ignored.

Before carrying out machining, check that the machining

program functions correctly by following the steps below.

- Turn the AIR CUT key on to make the lamp

flash.

- Turn the SINGLE BLOCK key on to light up the

lamp.
- Lower the rapid traverse speed by changing the
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch.
When necessary, turn on the torque limiter, make the servo
monitor function effective and take measures so that
damage will be reduced if machine collision occurs.
Turn off the torque limiter when starting normal machining.
AIR CUT cannot be turned ON and OFF during automatic
operation.

When the AIR CUT key is flashing, the coolant flow

will not be monitored even while coolant is being
discharged.
Refer to section “7-10-6 Servo Monitor Screen” for details.

6-12
SPINDLE ON/OFF keys

MAIN SPINDLE key

Press this key to rotate/stop main spindle.
The lamp of this key lights up while main spindle rotates.

The rotation speed and direction must be commanded in

advance.
The operation will not start if a door is open.

SUB SPINDLE key

Press this key to rotate/stop sub spindle.
The lamp of this key lights up while sub spindle rotates.

The rotation speed and direction must be commanded in

advance.
The operation will not start if a door is open.

POWER DRIVEN TOOLS AUTO/OFF keys

POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key

Press this key to switch POWER DRIVEN TOOLS AUTO/OFF.
While the power-driven tools are rotating, press this key to turn
off the lamp and stop the power-driven tools.
After that, press this key to light up the lamp and rotate the
power-driven tools.

The operation will not start if a door is open.

While the lamp of this key goes out, pressing the START

button will display alarm No.2080.

6-13
AXIS DIRECTION keys

These keys are used for selecting an axis when carrying out manual
handle feed (with the electronic handwheel) and manual reference point
return.
The axes selected by the AXIS DIRECTION keys move in HANDLE

mode.

The axis moves each time the AXIS DIRECTION key is pressed in

ZERO RETURN mode.

Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point

return. The operation will not start if a door is open.

COOLANT ON/OFF keys

COOLANT1 key
Press this key to switch COOLANT1 ON/OFF.
When turning the lamp OFF during coolant discharge, it will
stop.
To switch the key ON/OFF in MACHINING mode , it is
necessary to hold down the key for 1 second (initial setting) or
more.

COOLANT2 key
Press this key to switch COOLANT2 ON/OFF.
When turning the lamp OFF during coolant discharge, it will
stop.
To switch the key ON/OFF in MACHINING mode , it is
necessary to hold down the key for 1 second (initial setting) or
more.

6-14
HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION keys

Press one of these keys to select the magnification ( 1, 10, 100) for
the feed rate in manual handle feed mode.
The minimum input increment (one division of the electronic
handwheel) will be multiplied by the selected magnification.

The magnification will be ( 1, 10, 1000) when “Increment

system 1/10 [932 86 128]” is selected.

COLLET UNCLAMP/CLAMP keys

MAIN COLLET UNCLAMP/CLAMP key

Press this key to unclamp/clamp the main collet in

HANDLE mode.
The lamp lights up while the main collet is being clamped.

To switch the key ON/OFF, it is necessary to press the key

for 0.2 seconds (initial setting) or more.
The collet cannot be clamped or unclamped in manual
mode during main spindle rotation.
If an attempt is made to execute unclamp/clamp, spindle
rotation stops and alarm No. 1711 will be displayed.

SUB COLLET UNCLAMP/CLAMP key

Press this key to unclamp/clamp the sub collet in HANDLE

mode.
The lamp lights up while the sub collet is being clamped.

To switch the key ON/OFF, it is necessary to press the key

for 0.2 seconds (initial setting) or more.
The collet cannot be clamped or unclamped in manual
mode during the sub spindle rotation.
If an attempt is made to execute unclamp/clamp, spindle
rotation stops and alarm No. 1711 will be displayed.

6-15
BLOCK SKIP ON/OFF keys

BLOCK SKIP keys

When the BLOCK SKIP key of each PATH is pressed and the
lamp is lit, the blocks that contain a slash code “/” at the front of
the block in the program of each PATH will not be executed.
However, this function will not skip the blocks that contain a
slash code “/” between M80 and M81.

AUX key

AUX key
This is a spare key used for user specifications as necessary.

6-16
6-2 Functions of the CNC Operation Panel

Operation Panel C

6-17
 Address/data keys
These keys are used for entering the tool offset amounts, setting data and parameters using
alphabetical and numerical characters.

Function keys
These keys are selector keys related to the display and writing.

POSITION key
This key displays the current position of each axis.

PROGRAM key
This key edits and displays programs in the memory in

EDIT mode.

This inputs and displays MDI data in MDI mode.

This key also displays the program being executed and

commanded values in MEMORY mode.

OFFSET key
This key sets and displays offset amounts, macro variables and
setting parameters.

CUSTOM/GRAPH key
This key displays the STAR original screen.

SYSTEM key
This key displays the status of input/output signals and
displays/enters parameters.

MESSAGE key
This key displays alarm messages.

SHIFT key

To input letters on the top-left corner of address/data keys, press

this key before entering the desired address/data key.

6-18
○
4 CANCEL key

This key deletes the characters or numerical values inputted in

the key input buffer (at the bottom-left of each mode screen).

INPUT key

This key inputs parameters and offset data.

Edit keys
These keys edit programs in the memory.

ALTER key
This key alters data in the memory.

INSERT key
This key inserts data into the memory.

DELETE key
This key deletes data in the memory.

HELP key

This key is used to confirm alarm information, operation methods

and parameter number contents.

6-19
 RESET key

This key resets the contents of the CNC unit.

The following operations are executed by pressing this key.
Movement command cancel
Buffer clear (valid in EDIT mode)
Alarm resetting after their causes are removed
Auxiliary function (M function) cancellation
G code resetting

Cursor keys
These keys move the cursor on the screen to the left, to the right, up and down.

This key moves the cursor to the left.

This key moves the cursor to the right.

This key moves the cursor up.

This key moves the cursor down.

Page keys
These keys display the previous or next page on the screen.

This key displays the previous page.

This key displays the next page.

6-20
 Soft keys
These keys execute various functions depending on the application. Available functions are
displayed on the lowest section of the screen.

Leftmost soft key

This key returns to the initial conditions (when the function key was
pressed) when each function is acquired with the soft key.

Rightmost key
This key displays other functions, if any, not yet displayed on the
screen.

Memory card interface

CNC data input/output and remote diagnoses with the MODEM card through the memory
card interface are possible.

Please contact the CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

USB port
Data inside the CNC can be inputted and outputted with the USB memory stick.

The input/output interface setting is required when using the USB memory stick.

Please refer to section “7-1-1 Setting Screen” for details on the input/output
interface setting.

6-21
MEMO

6-22
7. Functions and Operation of the CNC

This chapter explains the functions and operation of the CNC.

7-1 Setting Screen

7-1-1 Setting Screen

On the SETTING (HANDY) screen, parameter writing valid/invalid, [TV check], [Punch code],
[I/O Channel] setting, Auto insert ON/OFF of sequence numbers etc. can be set.

Refer to OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center

System) published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

The parameter setting for input/output interface can be changed on the SETTING (HANDY)
screen.

SETTING (HANDY) screen

Follow the procedure below to display the SETTING (HANDY) screen.

(1) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(2) Press the [SETING] soft key.

(3) Press the PAGE key several times to display the SETTING (HANDY) screen.

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which to display the screen.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.

7-1
Input/output interface setting change
Setting parameters for input/output interface are as listed below.

Setting Parameter Setting Value Contents

0 EIA code
PUNCH CODE
1 ISO code
0 Baudrate: 4800 Stop Bit: 2
1 Baudrate: 19200 Stop Bit: 2
I/O CHANNEL
4 Memory card interface valid
17 USB port valid

Since the operation of memory cards/USB memory sticks available in the market
are not ensured, please carry out a thorough operation check before usage.

RS232C Interface Version [72801] or RS232C Interface Version (with cover)

[72803] is required for using RS232C.

To change the setting parameters, follow the procedure below on the SETTING (HANDY)
screen.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Move the cursor to a setting parameter to change with the cursor keys , .
(4) Input a setting value with the numerical keys.

(5) Press the INPUT key .

Using a memory card

On the SETTING (HANDY) screen, move the cursor to “I/O CHANNEL”.
Set “I/O CHANNEL” to “4” to make the memory card effective.

Using USB memory stick

On the SETTING (HANDY) screen, move the cursor to “I/O CHANNEL”.
Set “I/O CHANNEL” to “17” to make the USB memory stick effective.

7-2
7-1-2 Setting of Chamfering Corner R/Direct Drawing Dimension Programming

Setting Change
Setting parameters of Chamfering corner R and Direct drawing dimension programming are
shown in the following table.
Setting Parameter Setting Value Contents
0 When using Chamfering corner R
CCR / DDDP When using Direct drawing dimension
1
programming

Follow the procedure below to change the setting parameters.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to a setting parameter to change.
(4) Input a setting value with the numerical keys.

(5) Press the INPUT key .

7-3
7-1-3 Language Select Screen

English, Japanese, Chinese (simplified characters) and German are the main languages
which can be displayed on the screen.
On the LANGUAGE screen, it is possible to switch the display language to a preferred
language.

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center

System) published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

Displaying another language

Follow the procedure below to change the display language to another language (this
procedure is an example of selecting German).

(1) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(2) Press the [SETTING] soft key.

(3) Press the soft key several times to display the [LANG.] soft key.
(4) Press the [LANG.] soft key to display the following screen.

(5) Press the cursor keys to select “GERMAN DEUTSCH”.

(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
(7) Press the [APPLY] soft key.

7-4
Displaying other languages
Some screens may be displayed in English instead of the selected language.
The alarm help may not function with some languages.

Selected language Certain screens Remarks

English
Japanese All screens are displayed in the
German selected language.
Chinese (Simplified characters)
Chinese (Traditional Chinese) English
French English
Italian English
Spanish English
Dutch English
Danish English
Portuguese English
Polish English
Hungarian English
Swedish English
Czech English
Russian English
Turkish English
The standard screen of FANUC
displays when an alarm or operator
Korean English
message appears (the alarm help
screen cannot be displayed).

7-5
7-1-4 Operation Confirmation Screen

Change the operation confirmation function by following the procedure below.

(1) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(3) Press the soft key several times to display the [GUARD] soft key.
(4) Press the [GUARD] soft key to display the following screen.

(5) Move the cursor to a tick box to change with the cursor keys , .
(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
(7) Press either the [ON: 1] or [OFF: 0] soft key.
If a tick ( ) is displayed in the tick box, the function will be effective.
If a tick ( ) is not displayed in the tick box, the function will be ineffective.

Setting items
Confirmation of incremental input Confirmation of setting
Confirmation of program deletion Highlight display of renewed modal data
Confirmation of all-data deletion Display of axis conditions
Tool offset workpiece shift Confirmation of midway program start
Workpiece zero point offset

Refer to OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center

System) published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

7-6
7-1-5 Macro Variable Screen

The macro variables (#100 #199, #500 #999) can be displayed on the screen and set when
necessary.

MACRO screen

Follow the procedure below to display the macro screen.

(1) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(2) Press the soft key until the [MACRO] soft key appears.
(3) Press the [MACRO] soft key.

7-7
Setting
Set common variables by following the procedure below.

The following common variables are used as standard, so they must not be used by
the user when creating a macro program.
PATH1: #144 #150, #521, #522, #524, #527~#531
PATH2: #143 ~ #150

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to a variable

number to set.
(4) Press the numerical keys to input a setting value.

(5) Press the INPUT key .

The [INPUT] soft key is also available.

There are two methods of setting. One is by moving the cursor with the PAGE keys
and cursor keys, and the other is by inputting a variable number to search.
Searching by inputting a variable number is shown below.
(1) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
(2) Press the numerical keys to input a variable number.
(3) Press the [NO.SRH] soft key.

7-8
7-2 Program Input/Output

When an attempt is made to register a program number that is already registered,

an alarm will be triggered.
When the number of registered programs in both PATH1 and 2 exceeds 800, an
alarm will be triggered.

7-2-1 Registering a Program in the Memory with the Address/Numerical Keys

Follow the procedure below to create a program with the address/numerical keys, and
register it in the CNC memory.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch ON ( ).

(2) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to register a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Press the [0] address key.

(7) Press the data keys to input a program number then press the INSERT key .

(8) Press the EOB key and then the INSERT key .
The program number is registered.
(9) Press the address keys and data keys to input a program for one block.

(10) Press the EOB key and then the INSERT key .
A program for one block is registered.
(11) Repeat steps (8) and (9) shown above to input the entire program.

(12) After inputting the program, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-9
7-2-2 Program Input/Output

Set the following I/O interface.

RS232C: I/O Channel=0 or 1
Memory card: I/O Channel=4
USB Memory stick: I/O Channel=17
Do not use characters other than those shown below when inputting a file name:
Alphabetical (upper/lower case), numerical, +, , _, . (full stop)
Full stop alone cannot be used as a file name.
Do not remove the USB memory stick when the STATUS display is “ACCESSING”
or “FORMATTING”. Data stored in the memory may be lost.
STAR MICRONICS has no warranty for any corrupted data or loss of data,
therefore regularly back up the important data stored in the memory to a separate
storage location in case data corruption or loss should happen.

RS232C interface version [72801] or RS232C interface version (with cover) [72803]
is required for using RS232C.

For details on setting the input/output interface, please refer to section “7-1-1
Setting Screen”.

Inputting one program into the CNC

Memory card
(1) Insert the memory card into the memory card interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to input a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [M-CARD] soft key.

7-10
 After pressing the [M-CARD] soft key, it may take some time to recognize the
media.
Please carry out the following procedure after the media has been recognized.

(12) The file folder in the memory card is displayed.

(13) Press the PAGE keys , to check the program to input.

(14) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.
(15)Input the file number.
(16)Press the [F SET] soft key.
(17) Input the program number.
(18) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(19)Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When inputting is finished, “(INPUT)” disappears.
(20) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(21) Press the soft key until [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(22) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(23) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.
Confirm that the program is inputted.

(24) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-11
USB memory stick
(1) Insert the USB memory stick into the USB interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to input a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until [DEVICE] appears.

(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [USB MEM] soft key.

After pressing the [USB MEM] soft key, it may take some time to recognize the
media.
Please carry out the following procedure after the media has been recognized.

(12) The program list in the USB memory stick is displayed.

(13) Press the PAGE keys , or the cursor keys , to position the
cursor to the program to input.
(14) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.

(15) Press the soft key until [F GET] appears.

(16) Press the [F GET] soft key.

(17) Press the soft key until [F NAME] appears.

(18) Press the [F NAME] soft key.
(19) Input the program number.
(20) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(21) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When inputting is completed, “(INPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of the
screen disappears.
(22) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(23) Press the soft key until [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(24) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(25) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.
Confirm that the program is inputted.

(26) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-12
External I/O device
(1) Insert the RS232C cable of the external I/O device into RS232C interface.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to input a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(8) Press the soft key until [DEVICE] appears.

(9) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(10) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

(11) Press the soft key until [F INPUT] soft key appears.
(12) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.
(13) Input the program number to be registered.
(14) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(15) Execute program transfer from the external I/O device.
(16) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When inputting is completed, “(INPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of the
screen disappears.

(17) Press the PROGRAM key .

(18) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
Confirm that the program is inputted.

(19) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-13
Outputting one program from the CNC
Memory card

(1) Insert the memory card into the memory card interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

Confirm that “DEVICE: CNC_MEM” is displayed around the center of the screen.

(12) The program folder in the CNC memory is displayed.

(13) Press the PAGE keys , to check the program to be outputted.

(14) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(15)Input the program number to be outputted.
(16) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(17) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom right part of
the screen disappears.

(18) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch OFF ( ).

7-14
USB memory stick
(1) Insert the USB memory stick into the USB interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key several times until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

Confirm that “DEVICE: CNC_MEM” is displayed around the center of the screen.

(12) The program folder in the USB memory stick is displayed.

(13) Press the PAGE keys , to check the program to be outputted.

(14) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(15) Input the program number to be outputted.
(16) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(17) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of
the screen disappears.

(18) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-15
External I/O device

(1) Insert the RS232C cable of the external I/O device into RS232C interface.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [(DIR)] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until [FOUTPUT] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(11) Input the program number to be outputted.
(12) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(13) Put the external I/O device into the receiving state
(14) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of
the screen disappears.

(15) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-16
Outputting all programs from the CNC

Follow the steps below to output all programs registered in the CNC memory at each PATH.

For each PATH, all the programs stored in the memory will be outputted as one
program with the following file name:
PATH1: ALL PROG.TXT PATH2: ALL PROG.P 2

Memory card

(1) Insert the memory card into the memory card interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

Confirm that “DEVICE: CNC_ MEM” is displayed around the center of the screen.

(12) The program folder in the CNC memory is displayed.

(13) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(14) Input “[ ][9][9][9][9]” and press the [O SET] soft key.
(15) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When data output is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of
the screen disappears.

(16) After finishing program output, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF
( ).

7-17
USB memory stick

(1) Insert the USB memory stick into the USB interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

Confirm that “DEVICE: CNC_MEM” is displayed near the center of the screen.

(12) The program folder in the CNC memory is displayed.

(13) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(14) Input “[ ][9][9][9][9]” and press the [O SET] soft key.
(15) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of
the screen disappears.

(16) After the program output is completed, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to
OFF ( ).

7-18
External I/O device

(1) Insert the RS232C cable of the external I/O device into RS232C interface.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [DIR] soft key.
(8) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(9) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(10) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(11) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.
(12) The program folder of the CNC is displayed
(13) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(14) Put the external I/O device into the receiving state.
(15) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom right part of
the screen disappears.

(16) After finishing the program output, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to
OFF ( ).

7-19
7-3 Registered Program Number Display

This function displays all program numbers registered and remaining characters in the
memory. Follow the procedure below to display the registered program number.

Refer to OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center

System) published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

(1) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH of which to display a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [DIR] soft key to display the following screen.

7-20
7-4 Search

This section explains the procedure for searching a program number, sequence number and
“word”.

7-4-1 Program Number Search

Search a program number by one of the following three methods.

After searching is finished, the searched program number will be displayed on the top-right
part of the screen.

Method A

(1) Press EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to search a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(5) Press the [O] address key.
(6) Press the data keys to input a program number to search.

(7) Press the [SRH ] soft key, [SRH ] soft key or the cursor keys , .

Method B

(1) Press the MEMORY key or EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which to search a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(5) Press the [O] address key.

(6) Press the cursor key .

(7) Repeat steps (3) and (6) until the required program number is displayed.

7-21
Method C

(1) Press the MEMORY key or EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which to search a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(5) Press the data keys to input a program number to search.
(6) Press the [O SRH] soft key.

7-22
7-4-2 Sequence Number Search

Carry out the procedure below to search a sequence number.

In EDIT mode

(1) Press the PROGRAM key .

(2) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which in which searches a sequence
number.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(3) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(4) Press the [N] address key.
(5) Press the data keys to input a sequence number to search.

(6) Press the [SRH ], [SRH ] soft keys or the cursor keys , .

In MEMORY mode

(1) Press the PROGRAM key .

(2) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which searches a sequence number.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(3) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(4) Press the data keys to input a sequence number to search.
(5) Press the [N SRH] soft key.

7-23
7-4-3 Word Search

Search a “word” by following one of the two methods shown below.

By Scanning

(1) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which to search a word.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.

(5) Press the cursor key , , , or PAGE key , to move the

cursor.

Keep the page keys , pressed to move the page continuously.

Keep the cursor keys , , , pressed to move the page

continuously.

By “Word” Search

(1) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which to search a word.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(5) Press an address key and data key to input a “word” to search.
<Example>
Input [U], [0], [.] and [1].

(6) Press the CURSOR key .

The cursor moves to the word “U0.1”.

N26 G1 X7.6 W0.4 F0.01 ;

N27 X6.0 ;
N28 G4 U0.1 ;

7-24
7-5 Program Editing

The contents of a program registered in the memory can be changed.

Follow the procedure below to edit the program.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which edits a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Search a word to be changed.

Refer to section “7-4-3 Word Search” for details.

(7) Edit the program by altering, inserting, deleting, copying, or cutting/pasting “words”.
Word insertion
1. Search for or scan the “word” immediately before the position to insert.
2. Press the address keys and data keys to input the word.

3. Press the INSERT key .

Word alteration

1. Search or scan a word to be altered.

2. Press the address keys and data keys to input the word.

3. Press the ALTER key .

7-25
Deletion

a) Word deletion

1. Search for or scan a word to delete.

2. Press the DELETE key .

b) Deletion up to EOB

N01 M3 S1000 ;
With the currently searched word “N01”:

1. Press EOB key .

2. Press the DELETE key .

After deletion up to EOB, the cursor moves below N01 of the next block.

c) Deletion of several blocks

N01 M3 S1000 ;
N02 M11 ;
N03 G0 Z0 ;
N04 M20 ;
N05 G0 Z 0.2 ;

1. Search the word of the first block of the section to delete.

2. Press the EOB key the same number of times as the number of blocks to
delete.

3. Press the DELETE key .

E.g.) Search N02, press the EOB key twice and press the DELETE key .
Two blocks are deleted and the cursor moves to N04.

Copy

1. Search or scan the first word of the section to be copied.

2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

3. Press the soft key until the [SELECT] soft key appears.
4. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
5. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the end of the target range to be
copied.
6. Press the [COPY] soft key.
7. Move the cursor to the copy destination.
8. Press the [PASTE] soft key.
9. Press the [BUF-EX] soft key.

7-26
 Cut and paste

1. Search or scan the first word of the section to be cut.

2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

3. Press the soft key until the [SELECT] soft key appears.
4. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the target range to be cut with the cursor key.
6. Press the [CUT] soft key.
7. Move the cursor to the position to paste the character string.
8. Press the [PASTE] soft key.
9. Press the [BUF-EX] soft key.

(8) After finishing the program editing, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF
( ).

7-27
7-6 Program Deletion

Programs registered in the memory can be deleted by following the procedure below.

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center

System) published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

7-6-1 Deletion of One Program

Follow the procedure below to delete a program registered into the memory.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH in which to delete a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [O] address key.
(6) Press the data keys to input a program number.

(7) Press the DELETE key .

”DELETE PROGRAM (O****)?” will be displayed on the bottom-right part of the
screen.
(8) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

(9) After finishing the program deletion, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to
OFF ( ).

7-28
7-6-2 Deletion of All Programs

Follow the procedure below to delete all programs registered in the memory.

All the programs registered in the memory of the selected PATH will be deleted.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to delete a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [O] address key.
(6) Press the data keys to input [ ], [9], [9], [9] and [9].

(7) Press the DELETE key .

(8) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
All registered programs will be deleted.

(9) After finishing the program deletion, turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to
OFF ( ).

7-29
7-6-3 Command Help

On the PROGRAM screen, G code and M code lists, as well as a help screen for checking
details of each code can be displayed.

COMMAND LIST screen

On the COMMAND LIST screen, lists of G codes and M codes which can be commanded in a
program are displayed.

(1) Press the PROGRAM key to display the PROGRAM screen.

(2) Press the soft key several times until the [COMM.] soft key appears.

Codes which are inputted on the COMMAND LIST screen or the COMMAND HELP
screen can be inserted into the PROGRAM screen. During word editing, the code
is inserted into the key input line. During character editing, the code is inserted into
the cursor position.
When inserting a code, move the cursor to the desired insertion position before
displaying the COMMAND LIST screen.
Code insertion is only possible in EDIT mode, MDI mode and background mode.

For details on background editing, refer to section “7-7 Background Editing”.

7-30
(3) Press the [COMM.] soft key to display the COMMAND LIST screen.

(4) To display the G code list screen, press the [G CODE] soft key.
(5) To display the M code list screen, press the [M CODE] soft key.

(6) If the command list extends to multiple numbers of pages, press the PAGE keys ,

to switch between the pages.

7-31
(7) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor.

(8) Press the data keys to enter a code and press the [NO.SRH] soft key to move the cursor
to the code entered.

7-32
 If the [NO.SRH] soft key is not displayed, press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
If the inputted code does not exist, the message “SPECIFIED CODE NOT FOUND”
will be displayed, and the cursor moves to the nearest code number that exceeds
the inputted code number.
The cursor moves even when a numerical value is inputted without G or M.

(9) Enter the code and press the [INSERT] soft key to return to the PROGRAM screen and
insert the inputted code on the screen.

7-33
 During word editing, the code is inserted into the key input line.
During character editing, the code is inserted into the cursor position.
The [INSERT] soft key will be displayed only when the COMMAND LIST screen is
displayed from the PROGRAM screen in edit mode, MDI mode, or background
mode.

(10) On the COMMAND LIST screen, press the [PROGRAM] soft key to return to the
PROGRAM screen.

7-34
If the [PROGRAM] soft key is not displayed, press the [<] soft key.

When returning to the PROGRAM screen without pressing the [INSERT] soft key,
the code inputted into the input line will not be inserted.

7-35
COMMAND HELP screen

On the COMMAND HELP screen, details of the command selected on the COMMAND LIST
screen are displayed.

(1) On the COMMAND LIST screen, press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to
a command of which to refer to the COMMAND HELP screen.

(2) Press the HELP key to display the COMMAND HELP screen.

7-36
 When the COMMAND HELP screen is displayed, cursor on the COMMAND LIST

screen will become ineffective (in gray) and the cursor keys , and

PAGE keys , will be effective on the COMMAND HELP screen.

(3) When contents of the help extend to several pages, press the PAGE keys , to
switch the pages.

(4) If the contents of the help cannot be displayed at a time, press the cursor keys ,

to scroll the screen.

(5) Enter the code and press the [INSERT] soft key to return to the PROGRAM screen and
insert the inputted code.

7-37
 Codes will be inserted into the input line during word editing, and into the cursor
position during character editing.
The [INSERT] soft key will be displayed only when the COMMAND LIST screen is
displayed from the PROGRAM screen in edit mode, MDI mode, or background
mode.

(6) Press the help key while the COMMAND HELP screen is displayed to close the
COMMAND HELP screen and display the COMMAND LIST screen.

7-38
7-7 Background Editing

With the exception of the program selected in the foreground, editing of a program is possible
in background mode during automatic operation, regardless of the selected mode.

Never press the RESET key in background mode.

Alarms can be reset by pressing any key excluding the RESET key .

An alarm that is triggered during background editing does not affect foreground
operation at a. Conversely, an alarm that is triggered on the foreground does not
affect background editing.
All programs cannot be deleted during background editing.

7-39
7-7-1 Program Editing in Background Mode

Follow the procedure below to edit the program in background mode.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the PROGRAM key .

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to edit the program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(5) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(6) Press the soft key several times until the [BG-EDIT] soft key is displayed.
(7) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key.
(8) Press the [EDT EXE] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(9) Specify the program to be edited.

To create a new program

1) Press the [O] address key.

2) Press the data keys to input a program number.

3) Press the INSERT key .

4) Press the EOB key .

5) Press the INSERT key .

To edit an existing (registered) program

Registered program can be checked by pressing the [FOLDER] soft key.

When editing the registered program after pressing the [FOLDER] soft key,
press the [PROGRAM] soft key.

1) Press the [O] address key.

2) Press the data keys to input a program number.

3) Press the CURSOR keys , .

7-40
(10) Edit the program.
Background editing is carried out in the same way as foreground program editing.

(11) When program editing is completed, press the soft key until the [BG-END] soft
key appears.
(12) Press the [BG-END] soft key to finish background editing.

(13) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-41
7-7-2 Program Registration in Background Mode

Set the following I/O interface.

RS232C: I/O Channel=0 or 1
Memory card: I/O Channel=4
USB memory stick: I/O Channel=17
Only characters shown below can be used when inputting a file name.
Alphabetical (upper/lower case), numerical, +, , _, . (full stop)
Full stop alone cannot be used as a file name.
Do not remove the USB memory when the STATUS display is “ACCESSING” or
“FORMATTING”. Data stored in the memory may be lost.

RS232C interface version [72801] or RS232C interface version (with cover) [72803]
is required for using RS232C.

For details on setting the input/output interface, please refer to section “7-1-1
Setting Screen”.

Follow the procedure below to register the program into the CNC memory in the background
mode.

Memory card

(1) Insert the memory card into the machine.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to register a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until the [BG-EDIT] soft key appears.
(8) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key.
(9) Press the [EDT EXE] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(10) Press the [DIR] soft key.

(11) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

7-42
(12) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(13) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.

(14) Press the [M-CARD] soft key.

After pressing the [M-CARD] soft key, it may take some time to recognize the
media.
Please carry out the following procedure after the media has been recognized.

(15) The file folder in the memory card is displayed.

(16) Press the PAGE keys , to check the program to be inputted.

(17) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.
(18)Input the file number, and then press [F SET] soft key.
(19) Input the program number, and then press the [O SET] soft key.
(20) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When inputting is finished, “(INPUT)” will disappear.

(21) Press the soft key until [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(22) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.
(23) Press the [BG-END] soft key.

(24) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-43
USB memory stick
(1) Insert the USB memory stick into the USB interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to register a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until [BG-EDIT] soft key appears.
(8) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key, then [EDT EXE] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(9) Press the [DIR] soft key.

(10) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(11) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(12) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(13) Press the [USB MEM] soft key.

After pressing the [USB MEM] soft key, it may take some time to recognize the
media.
Please carry out the following procedure after the media has been recognized.

(14) The program list in the USB memory is displayed.

(15) Press the PAGE keys , or the cursor keys , to position the
cursor to the program to be inputted.
(16) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.

(17) Press the soft key until [F GET] appears.

(18) Press the [F GET] soft key.

(19) Press the soft key until [F NAME] appears.

(20) Press the [F NAME] soft key.
(21) Input the file number, and then press [O SET] soft key.
(22) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When inputting is completed, “(INPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of the
screen will disappear.

7-44
(23) After the program registration is completed, press the PROGRAM key .
(24) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(25) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(26) Press the soft key until the [BG-END] soft key appears.
(27) Press the [BG-END] soft key.

(28) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-45
External I/O device

(1) Insert the RS232C cable of the external I/O device into RS232C interface.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which to register a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until the [BG-EDIT] soft key appears.
(8) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key, and then press the [EDT EXE] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(9) Press the [DIR] soft key.

(10) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(11) Press the soft key until the [F INPUT] soft key is displayed.
(12) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.
(13) Press the data keys to input the program number.
(14)Press the [O SET] soft key.
(15)Execute program transfer from the external I/O device.
(16) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When data input is completed, (INPUT) displayed on the screen disappears.

(17) After the program registration is completed, press the PROGRAM key .
(18) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(19) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(20) Press the soft key until the [BG-END] soft key appears.
(21) Press the [BG-END] soft key.

(22) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-46
7-7-3 Program Output in Background Mode

Set the following I/O interface.

RS232C: I/O Channel=0/1
Memory card: I/O Channel=4
USB Memory stick: I/O Channel=17
Only characters shown below can be used when inputting a file name.
Alphabetical (upper/lower case), numerical, +, , _, . (full stop)
Full stop alone cannot be used as a file name.
Do not remove the USB memory when the STATUS display is “ACCESSING” or
“FORMATTING”. Data stored in the memory may be lost.

RS232C interface version [72801] or RS232C interface version (with cover) [72803]
is required for using RS232C.

For details on setting the input/output interface, please refer to section “7-1-1
Setting Screen”.

Follow the procedure below to output the program of the CNC memory to the memory drive in
the background mode.

Memory card

(1) Insert the memory card into the memory card interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which to output a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until the [BG-EDIT] soft key appears.
(8) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key.
(9) Press the [EDIT] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(10) Press the [DIR] soft key.

(11) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

7-47
(12)Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(13)Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(14)Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

Confirm that “DEVICE: CNC_ MEM” is displayed near the center of the screen.

(15)The program folder in the CNC will be displayed.

(16)Press the soft key until [F OUTPUT] soft key appears.

(17)Press the [F OUTPUT] soft key.
(18)Input the program number, and then press [O SET] soft key.
(19)Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of the
screen will disappear.

(20)After the program registration is completed, press the PROGRAM key .

(21)Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(22)Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(23)Press the soft key until the [BG-END] soft key appears.
(24)Press the [BG-END] soft key.

(25)Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-48
USB memory stick
(1) Insert the USB memory stick into the USB interface of the operation panel.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which edits a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(5) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until [BG-EDIT] soft key appears.
(8) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key, then [EDIT EXE] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(9) Press the [DIR] soft key.

(10) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(11) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(12) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(13) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.

Confirm that “DEVICE: CNC_MEM” is displayed near the center of the screen.

(14) Press the PAGE keys , to check the program to be outputted.

(15) Press the soft key until [F OUTPUT] soft key appears.
(16) Press the [F OUTPUT] soft key.
(17) Input the program number, and then press [O SET] soft key.
(18) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting is completed, “(OUTPUT)” displayed at the bottom-right part of
the screen disappears.

(19) After the program registration is completed, press the PROGRAM key .
(20) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(21) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(22) Press the soft key until the [BG-END] soft key appears.
(23) Press the [BG-END] soft key.

(24) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-49
External I/O device

(1) Insert the RS232C cable of the external I/O device into RS232C interface.

(2) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH from which outputs a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(6) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(7) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(8) Press the soft key until the [BG-EDIT] soft key appears.
(9) Press the [BG-EDIT] soft key.
(10) Press the [EDT EXE] soft key.

“BG-EDIT” will appear on the screen.

(11) Press the [DIR] soft key.

(12) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(13) Press the soft key until the [DEVICE] soft key appears.
(14) Press the [DEVICE] soft key.
(15) Press the [CNCMEM] soft key.
(16) The program folder in the CNC will be displayed.

(17) Press the soft key until the [FOUTPUT] soft key is displayed.
(18) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
(19) Input the program number to be outputted.
(20) Press the [O SET] soft key.
(21) Put the external I/O device into the receiving state.
(22) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When data output is complete, (OUTPUT) displayed on the screen disappears.

(23) After the program registration is completed, press the PROGRAM key .
(24) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
(25) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(26) Press the soft key until the [BG-END] soft key appears.
(27) Press the [BG END] soft key.

(28) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-50
7-8 Position Display Screen

There are three kinds of screens that display the position of a currently selected tool.
These screens can be selected with the soft keys.

(1) Press the POSITION key .

One of the position display screens is displayed.
(2) Press the [ABS], [REL] or [ALL] soft key.

The data display for the inch version will be . .

Press the [ABS] soft key to display the absolute coordinate system position display
screen.
Press the [REL] soft key to display the relative coordinate system position display
screen.
Press the [ALL] soft key to display the overall position display screen.
Jog feed rate is displayed at the bottom-right part of the position display screen
during HANDLE mode.

Absolute coordinate system position display screen

Press the [ABS] soft key to display the current position of each axis in the absolute
coordinate sytem (ABSOLUTE).

7-51
Relative coordinate system position display screen

Press the [REL] key to display the current position of each axis in the relative coordinate
system (RELATIVE).

The relative coordinate system can be set for each tool.

The relative coordinate system is set as follows.
(1) Press the [REL] soft key.
(2) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
(3) To set each axis to “0”, input the axis name (U1, V1, W1, U2, W2, H1, H2) with the
address/numerical key. Then press the [ORIGIN] soft key.
(4) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
(5) To set all axes to “0”, press the [ORIGIN] soft key and the [ALL AX] soft key
respectively.

7-52
Overall position display screen

Press the [ALL] soft key to simultaneously display the current positions in the workpiece
coordinate system, in the machine coordinate system, and the remaining movement amount
of each axis.
Workpiece coordinate system : (ABSOLUTE)
Machine coordinate system : (MACHINE)
Remaining movement amount : (DIST TO GO)

The position data for the inch version will also be displayed in mm for the machine
coordinate system (MACHINE).

7-53
Overall position display screen

Press the [ALL] soft key twice to simultaneously display the current positions in the relative
coordinate system, in the machine coordinate system, and the remaining movement amount
of each axis.
Relative coordinate system : (RELATIVE)
Machine coordinate system : (MACHINE)
Remaining movement amount : (DIST TO GO)

The position data for the inch version will also be displayed in mm for the machine
coordinate system (MACHINE).

7-54
7-9 Offset Screen

The data display (X, Y, Z and R) for the inch version will be . .

7-9-1 Tool Wear Offset (Wear Offset) screen

Follow the procedure below to input the tool wear offset amount.

Inputting with the numerical keys

(1) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(2) Press the [OFFSET] soft key to display the screen below.

When a program is executed by one cycle, the tool number corresponding to the
tool wear offset number at the cursor position will be displayed at the top right side
of the screen.

(3) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH in which edits a program.
The active PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.
(4) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

7-55
(5) Press the PAGE keys , and cursor keys , , , to move
the cursor to an offset number to set.
(6) Press the numerical keys to input a wear offset amount.
(7) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the [+INPUT] soft key.
(8) Repeat the above steps (3) to (7) until all wear offset amounts of the required tools are
entered.

Input diametrical values for the X and Y-axes.

Press the [INPUT] soft key to enter an absolute value.
Press the [+INPUT] soft key to enter an incremental value.
There is an input restriction set to the wear offset amounts.
By changing the value of parameter No. 5013, the restriction of the maximum
amount (absolute value) will be altered.
By changing the value of parameter No. 5014, the restriction of the maximum
amount of incremental inputting will be altered.
The initial parameter values are set to No.5013=2.0 and No.5014=0.5.
When the [UNDO] soft key is pressed, the value altered just before changes back
to the previous value.
The [UNDO] soft key displays after inputting data.

7-56
Inputting with the [MEASUR] soft key

Carry out the procedure below to input the tool wear offset amounts with the [MEASUR] soft
key.

(1) Select a tool for inputting tool wear offset.

(2) Position the X-axis to . :
(3) Execute turning of . :
(4) Retract the tool from the bar diameter by cutting feed. :
(5) Command M5 to stop the spindle rotation.
(6) Measure dimension which has been turned.
(7) Move the Z-axis in the negative direction to retract the tool tip from the workpiece. :
(8) Position the X-axis to the turned dimension .:

(9) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(10) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(11) Press the [OFFSET] soft key to display the following screen.

7-57
(12) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(13) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , , , to

move the cursor to an offset number to set.
(14) Press the address/numerical keys to input the measurement value of the turned
dimension after X.
E.g. X10.123
(15) Press the [MEASUR] soft key.
(16) The wear offset amount will be inputted into the X data position of the set offset
number.
(17) Repeat steps (1) ~ (16) shown above to write the wear offset values for all the required
tools.

Input diametrical values for the X and Y-axes.

There is an input restriction set to the wear offset amounts.
By changing the value of parameter No. 5013, the restriction of the maximum
amount (absolute value) will be altered.
By changing the value of parameter No. 5014, the restriction of the maximum
amount of incremental inputting will be altered.
The initial parameter values are set to No. 5013=2.0 and No. 5014=0.5.

(18) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

7-58
Inputting/outputting wear offset data

Carry out the procedure below to output the tool wear offset amounts.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Insert the memory card/USB memory stick into the machine.

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(5) Press the [OFFSET] soft key to display the WEAR OFFSET screen.

(6) Select a PATH for outputting tool offset amounts by pressing the CHANGE key .
(7) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(8) Press the soft key until the [FOUTPUT] soft key appears.

(9) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.

The [CAN] and [EXEC] soft keys will be displayed.

7-59
 “TOOLOFS .TXT” will be displayed at the default file name.
is the currently selected PATH number (1 or 2).
The default file name can be changed.
A maximum of 8 characters can be inputted.

Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to the default file name.
Then press the address/numerical keys to input a file name.

To delete the characters, press the cancel key .

At this time, do not change the full stop (.) or the “TXT” extension.

(10) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

When the output is complete, the message “OUTPUT COMPLETE” is displayed at the
bottom-left part of the screen.

(11) Press the RESET key to cancel the message.

7-60
Carry out the procedure below to input the tool wear offset amounts.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Insert the memory card/USB memory stick into the machine.

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(5) Press the [OFFSET] soft key to display the WEAR OFFSET screen.

(6) Select a PATH for inputting wear offset amounts by pressing the CHANGE key .
(7) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(8) Press the soft key until the [F INPUT] soft key appears.

(9) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.

The memory card / USB memory stick list will be displayed on the screen.

Files with “TXT” extensions in the memory card / USB memory stick will be
displayed. Only files with “TXT” extensions will be displayed.
The file display differs according to the contents stored in the memory card/ USB
memory stick.

7-61
(10) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , , , to
select a file to input.
(11) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When the input is completed, the message “INPUT COMPLETE” displays at the
bottom-left part of the screen.

If data other than wear offset is selected and executed on the WEAR OFFSET
screen, the data file will not be loaded even when the input is completed.

(12) Press the RESET key to cancel the message.

7-62
7-9-2 Tool Geometry Offset (Geometry Offset) Screen

Make a note of the setting data (X, Y, Z) of the geometry offset amounts.

The data display for the inch version will be . .

Input with the address/numerical keys

Input the tool geometry offset amounts for each tool by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch ON ( ).

(2) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(3) Press the [GEOM.] soft key to display the following screen.

Tool geometry offset data can also be set by the G265 command.

For details on setting with the G265 command, please refer to section “8-10-26
Geometry Offset Input (G265)”.

7-63
(4) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(5) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , , , to

move the cursor to the axis data of a tool number to set.
(6) Press the numerical keys to input a setting value.
(7) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the [+INPUT] soft key.
(8) Repeat the above steps (5) ~ (7) to input all necessary geometry offset data.

Input diametrical values for the X and Y-axes.

Pressing the [INPUT] soft key will write an absolute value.
Pressing the [+INPUT] soft key will write an incremental value.
When the [UNDO] soft key is pressed, the value altered just before changes back
to the previous value.
The [UNDO] soft key will be displayed after inputting a data.

For details on the tool geometry offset, please refer to section “Appendix 5
Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders”.

7-64
Inputting with the [MEASUR] soft key

Refer to “10-4-1 Installing and Adjusting the Tools, Center height offset by turning
(Geometry Offset)” and OPERATOR’S MANUAL published by CNC manufacturer
(FANUC) for details.

Carry out the procedure below to display the soft key [MEASUR] on the GEOMETRY
OFFSET screen.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch ON ( ).

(2) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(3) Press the [GEOM.] soft key to display the screen below.

(4) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(5) Press the [MEASUR] soft key.

7-65
The example below is when inputting the X-axis geometry offset of the cross drill (T3200)
with the soft key [MEASUR].
(1) Select T3200.
(2) Project the bar from the end face of the guide bush.
(3) After positioning the X-axis, fix the tool lightly on T3200 while making the tool tip
lightly touch the outer diameter of the bar.

(4) On the GEOMETRY OFFSET screen, press the PAGE keys , or the cursor

keys , , , to move the cursor to the X data position.

(5) Input the outer diameter of the bar with the numerical keys.
(6) Press the soft key [MEASUR].
(7) The geometry offset amount will be input into the X data position of T3200.
(8) After the tool selection of other than T3200 is commanded, fix the tool on T3200.

7-66
Inputting/outputting tool geometry offset data

Set the following I/O interface.

Memory card: I/O Channel=4
USB memory stick : I/O Channel=17

For details on setting the input/output interface, please refer to section “7-1-1
Setting Screen Input/output interface setting change”.

Carry out the procedure below to output the tool geometry offset data.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch ON ( ).

(2) Insert the memory card / USB memory stick into the interface of the operational panel.

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(5) Press the [GEOM.] soft key to display the GEOMETRY OFFSET screen.

(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until the [F OUTPUT] soft key appears.

7-67
 (8) Press the [FOUTPUT] soft key.
The [CAN] and [EXEC] soft keys will be displayed.

“TOOLGEOM.TXT” will be displayed at the default file name.

The default file name can be changed.
Maximum of 8 characters can be inputted.

Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to the default file name.
Then press the address/numerical keys to input a file name.

To delete the characters, press the CANCEL key .

At this time, do not change the “.TXT” extension.

(9) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

When the output is completed, the message “OUTPUT COMPLETE” displays at the
bottom-left part of the screen.

(10) Press the RESET key to cancel the message.

7-68
Carry out the procedure below to input the tool geometry offset data.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch ON ( ).

(2) Insert the memory card / USB memory stick into the interface of the operational panel.

(3) Press the EDIT key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(5) Press the [GEOM.] soft key to display the GEOMETRY OFFSET screen.

(6) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(7) Press the soft key until the [F INPUT] soft key appears.

(8) Press the [F INPUT] soft key.

The memory card / USB memory stick list will be displayed on the screen.

Files with “TXT” extensions in the memory card / USB memory stick will be
displayed.
Only files with “TXT” extensions will be displayed.
The file display differs according to the contents stored in the memory card/ USB
memory stick.

7-69
(9) Press the PAGE keys , or the cursor keys , , , to select
a file to input.
(10) Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When the input is completed, the message “INPUT COMPLETE” displays at the
bottom-left part of the screen.

If data file other than geometry offset is selected and executed on the GEOMETRY
OFFSET screen, the data will not be loaded even when the input is completed.

(11) Press the RESET key to cancel the message.

7-70
7-10 Custom Screen

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key to display the following CUSTOM screen.

When the soft key is pressed, the soft keys in the following screen will be
displayed.

7-71
7-10-1 Counter Screen

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key and the [COUNTER] soft key respectively to display
the following screen.

During program operation in MACHINING mode, the number of machined parts is

counted and displayed with the M20 command on PATH1. If the required quantity of parts is
set into PRESET in advance, the machine will stop at the M20 command where the COUNT
value reaches the PRESET value.

Press the [ON/OFF] soft key to change the display between COUNTER ON and
COUNTER OFF.
- Counting will be executed by the one cycle stop command (M20) when
COUNTER ON is displayed.
- Counting will not be executed by the one cycle stop command (M20) when
COUNTER OFF is displayed.

Counting will not be executed when SETTING mode is selected.

However, counting will be executed when the keep relay K26-bit7=1.
When the COUNT value becomes equal to the PRESET value during program
operation, the program stops by one cycle stop (M20) and the counter reaches the
count up state.

When the lamp on the AIR CUT key is flashing, *AIR CUT/DRY RUN* will be
displayed.

7-72
Altering the PRESET and COUNT values

(1) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(2) Press the [CHANGE] soft key.
*ALTER* is displayed, and altering each value becomes possible.

(3) To alter the PRESET value, press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to
PRESET.

To alter the COUNT value, press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to
COUNT.

To alter the TOTAL value, press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to
TOTAL.
(4) Press the numerical keys to input a setting value.

(5) Press the INPUT key .

These values will change to the inputted values.

Input a value into PRESET that is at least 2 more than the COUNT value.
In the following cases, the input will be regarded as an error and “DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE” will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
- When the PRESET value is not between 2 999999.
- When the COUNT value is not between 0 999997.
- When the TOTAL value is not between 0 999999.
If the values become “PRESET value [COUNT value + 1]” during alteration, the
data will be regarded as an error and *DATA IS OUT OF RANGE* will be displayed
at the bottom part of the screen.

7-73
(6) Press the [CHANGE] soft key.
“*ALTER*” disappears.

Alteration can be carried out as many times as required while *ALTER* is

displayed.

7-74
Resetting the count-up state

In the count-up state, the program stops by one cycle stop (M20), and the machine enters the
feed hold state. Also, the main and sub spindle motors, power-driven tool motor, and coolant
motor stop. At this time, the beacon lights up, alarm No. 2070 will be displayed and
“COUNTER” flashes on the screen.

Follow the procedure below to reset the count-up state.

(1) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(2) Press the [CHANGE] soft key.

(3) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to the PRESET value or COUNT
value.
(4) Alter the PRESET value or the COUNT value.

(5) Press the RESET key .

7-75
7-10-2 Run Hour Display Screen

The running time, cycle time and remaining time are displayed on the COUNTER screen.

Running time display

The cumulative running time during automatic operation is displayed.

Follow the procedure below to reset the running time display.

(1) Stop the automatic operation.

Stop the operation by single block or one cycle stop.

(2) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.

(3) Press the [CHANGE] soft key.
“*ALTER*” is displayed on the screen and alteration becomes possible.

(4) Press the CURSOR keys , to move the cursor to: **** H ** M of “RUNNING
TIME”.

(5) Press the [0] with the numerical key, then press the INPUT key .
(6) Press the [CHANGE] soft key.
“*ALTER*” disappears.

7-76
Display of cycle time

The cycle time during automatic operation is displayed.

The cycle time is displayed by calculating the time from M20 to the next M20 in the program
on PATH1.

The calculation is suspended if the machine stops halfway through automatic

operation.
The cycle time data is updated at each one cycle. Therefore unlike running time, it
is not necessary to reset the cycle time.

When the lamp on the AIR CUT key is flashing, “*AIR CUT/DRY RUN*” will
be displayed.

Display of remaining cycle time

The remaining predicted cycle time until count up is displayed.

The calculation is suspended if the machine stops halfway through automatic

operation.
Data of the remaining cycle time is updated at each one cycle.
Therefore unlike running time, it is not necessary to reset the cycle time.

When the lamp on the AIR CUT key is flashing, “*AIR CUT/DRY RUN*” will
be displayed.

7-77
7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key and the [K.RELA] soft key respectively to display the
following screen.

7-78
How to change the keep relay

(1) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to a keep relay to change.
(2) Press the [YES/NO] soft key.

7-79
Explanations of keep relay

<1/3 PAGE>

EMERGENCY STOP AT NO STOCK

[YES] : When all bars in the automatic bar feeder have finished, emergency stop is applied
with M0.
[NO] : When all bars in the automatic bar feeder have finished, the program will wait for
bar supply when the machine stops with M0.

PROGRAM RE-START

[YES] : Alarm No. 1142 becomes ineffective.

The START button becomes effective regardless of the starting position

(cursor position) of the program on PATH1 and PATH2.
[NO] : Alarm No. 1142 becomes effective.

After canceling this alarm, the START button becomes effective regardless of
the starting position (cursor position) of the program on PATH1 and PATH2.

CANCEL MAINTENANCE TIME UP

[YES] : Do not display the maintenance timer time up (alarm No. 2084)
[NO] : Display the maintenance timer time up (alarm No. 2084)

ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0

[YES] : Rotation of the main/sub spindles does not stop with M0.
[NO] Rotation of the main/sub spindles stops with M0.

It is recommended to set this keep relay to [YES] when machining small diametric
bars because the main/sub spindles do not stop rotating for bar replacement.

USE M80 AS WAITING CODE

[YES] : Wait for the program on the other PATH at M80.

[NO] : Do not wait for the program on the other PATH at M80.

PHASES SYNCHRONIZATION AT M82

[YES] : Phase synchronization is performed with rotation synchronization.

[NO] : Phase synchronization is not performed with rotation synchronization.

7-80
 SPINDLE STOP AT M83

[YES] : Stop the rotation of main/sub spindles when spindle synchronous rotation control
is canceled.
[NO] : Do not stop the rotation of main/sub spindles when spindle synchronous rotation
control is canceled.

CHECK PARTS EJECT SIGNAL AT M75

[YES] : Apply parts ejection detection signal to the conditions for M75 activation.
[NO] : Do not apply parts ejection detection signal to the conditions for M75 activation.

USE PARTS EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER

[YES] : Use Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479].

[NO] : Do not use Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479].

USE PARTS SEPARATOR A

[YES] : Use Parts Separator A [0H414].

[NO] : Do not use Parts Separator A [0H414].

<2/3 PAGE>

USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T4

[YES] : Use the overhang tool holder on T400.

[NO] : Do not use the overhang tool holder on T400.

When “USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T4” is set to “YES”,

“USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T5” is set to “NO”.

USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T5

[YES] : Use the overhang tool holder on T500.

[NO] : Do not use the overhang tool holder on T500.

When “USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T5” is set to “YES”,

“USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T4” and “USE OVERHANG TOOL
HOLDER ON T6” are set to “NO”.

7-81
USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T6

[YES] : Use the overhang tool holder on T600.

[NO] : Do not use the overhang tool holder on T600.

When ”USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T6” is set to “YES”,

“USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T5” is set to “NO”.

USE [0M155] AT T35

[YES] : Use 3-Spindle Counter Drilling Unit [0M155] at T3500.

[NO] : Do not use 3-Spindle Counter Drilling Unit [0M155] at T3500.

When “USE [0M155] AT T35” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below are set
“NO”.
“USE [0M158] AT T35”
“USE MILLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35”
“USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35”

USE [0M158] AT T35

[YES] : Use High Speed 3-sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] at T3500.
[NO] : Do not use High Speed 3-sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] at T3500.

When “USE [0M158] AT T35” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below are set
“NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T35”
“USE MILLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35”
“USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35”

7-82
USE MILLING UNIT AT T35

[YES] : Use Milling Unit [33150, 57155, 57163] at T3500.

[NO] : Do not use Milling Unit [33150, 57155, 57163] at T3500.

When “USE MILLING UNIT AT T35” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below
are set “NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T35”
“USE [0M158] AT T35”
“USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35”
“USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35”

USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35

[YES] : Use Thread Whirling Unit [0M171] at T3500.

[NO] : Do not use Thread Whirling Unit [0M171] at T3500.

When “USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35 is set to “YES”, the keep relay
settings below are set “NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T35”
“USE [0M158] AT T35”
“USE MILLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35”
“USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35”

USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35

[YES] : Use 3-Spindle Counter Drilling Unit [0M155] for cross drilling at T3500.
[NO] : Do not use 3-Spindle Counter Drilling Unit [0M155] for cross drilling at T3500.

When “USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings
below are set “NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T35”
“USE [0M158] AT T35”
“USE MILLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35”

7-83
 USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35

[YES] : Use High Speed 3-sp Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] for cross drilling at T3500.
[NO] : Do not use High Speed 3-Sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] for cross drilling at
T3500.

When “USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings
below are set “NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T35”
“USE [0M158] AT T35”
“USE MILLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35”
“USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35”

<3/3 PAGE>

USE [0M155] AT T34

[YES] : Use 3-Spindle Counter Drilling Unit [0M155] at T3400.

[NO] : Do not use 3-Spindle Counter Drilling Unit [0M155] at T3400.

When “USE [0M155] AT T34” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below are set
“NO”.
“USE [0M158] AT T34”
“USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34”

USE [0M158] AT T34

[YES] : Use High Speed 3-sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] at T3400.
[NO] : Do not use High Speed 3-sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] at T3400.

When “USE [0M158] AT T34” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below are set
“NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T34”
“USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34”

USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34

[YES] : Use Polygon Unit [0M191] at T3400.

[NO] : Do not use Polygon Unit [0M191] at T3400.

When “USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below
are set “NO”.
“USE [0M155] AT T34”
“USE [0M158] AT T34

7-84
USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T33

[YES] : Use Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] at T3300.

[NO] : Do not use Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] at T3300.

When “USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T33” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings
below are set “NO”.
“USE POLYGON UNIT AT T33”

USE POLYGON UNIT AT T33

[YES] : Use Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] at T3300.

[NO] : Do not use Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] at T3300.

When “USE POLYGON UNIT AT T33” is set to “YES”, the keep relay settings below
are set “NO”.
“USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T33”

USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T23 (K23-bit3)

[YES] : Use Slotting Unit [69165, 69166] at T2300.

[NO] : Do not use Slotting Unit [69165, 69166] at T2300.

USE 3 SPINDLE BACK DRILL AT T21 (K23-bit6)

[YES] : Use 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] at T2100.

[NO] : Do not use 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] at T2100.

FOR [0M111], SET SCREWS FROM REAR

[YES] : When 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] is used, attach the screws from rear side.
[NO] : When 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] is used, attach the screws from front side.

7-85
7-10-4 Maintenance Timer Screen

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key and the [M.TIME] soft key respectively to display the
following screen.

This screen is used for maintenance.

Time up display

By setting the preset values beforehand, alarm No.2084 displays when the running time of
the machine reaches the preset time of one of the timers. In addition, the timer number
flashes.

If you do not want the alarm message (alarm No. 2084) to be displayed when a
timer enters the count up state, set the keep relay K02-bit2 to “1”.
When a timer enters the count up state, the count value of the timer automatically
resets to “0”.
The machine continues operation without stopping, and the counter starts to count
again from the time it is reset to “0”.

For details on setting the keep relay, please refer to “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP
RELAY) screen” for details.

7-86
 Resetting the time-up state

(1) Press the START button or the RESET key to reset the time-up state.
The timer No. that entered the count up state stops flashing.
Alarm No. 2084 disappears (if displayed).

As shown in the following table, inspection items are controlled by timers 1~3.
If time up is displayed, inspect the relevant item(s).

Timer setting data

Inspection item Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Timer4 Timer5
500H 1500H 3000H 0H 0H
Inspection of heat generation from bearing ○
Cleaning the guide bush ○
Cleaning the collets ○
Inspection of the pneumatic pressure gauge
○
operation
Cleaning the filter element ○
Inspection of cooling fans ○
Inspection of the tooth face of the
○
power-driven tool unit
Inspection of wear on the main/sub spindle
○
shifters
Inspection of belts ○
Inspection of wiring and piping ○
Inspection of safety devices ○
Inspection of the packing of the cable entry ○
Operation check of the earth leakage
○
breaker
Inspection of the emergency stop function ○

Timers 4 and 5 are not used, but they can be used by inputting preset values when
required.

Refer to chapter “12. Inspection and Maintenance” for details.

7-87
Setting the preset values

(1) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to a PRESET value of a timer
number to set.
(2) Press the numerical keys to input a value.

The maximum input value for each PRESET value is “9999”.

(3) Press the INPUT key .

Clearing the count values

(1) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to a PRESET value of a timer
number to clear.
(2) Press the [CLEAR] soft key.
The selected COUNT value is cleared to “0”.

Press the [AL.CLR] soft key to clear all COUNT values of timer Nos. 1 5 to “0”.

7-88
7-10-5 Machining Data Screen

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key and the [MCGSET] soft key respectively to display
the following screen.

The machining data is required for operating a machining program, using the auto cut-off
function and using the tool selection command etc.

Common
Contents
Variable
A BAR DIAMETER (mm) or (inch) #531
W PART LENGTH (mm) or (inch) #530
S SPINDLE SPEED (min-1) #529
B CUT OFF WIDTH (mm) or (inch) #528
Z Z START POSITION (mm) or (inch) #525
X CUT OFF END POS. (mm) or (inch) #524
F CUT OFF FEED RATE (mm/rev) or (inch/rev) #522

The setting values can be inputted by either pressing the numerical keys or by
inputting with the program (G266).
Common variables (#522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530, #531) set on the
machining data screen can be used for cut-off process etc. on PATH1.

For details on “Auto cut-off”, please refer to section “7-11-2 Auto Cut-off Screen”.

7-89
 Spindle phase shift amount
Input the shift amount at the time of spindle phase synchronous control into parameter
No. 4034(S2) on PATH2.

“SPINDLE PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT” and “SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2” are
displayed only when the PARAMETER WRITING is ENABLE.

SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is for data reference and a value cannot be

inputted.
For details on SPINDLE PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT and SPINDLE SYNCHRO
ERROR S2, please refer to “10-5-4 Adjustment When Using the Profile Bar Stock
Version”.

Setting of machining data

There are two methods: inputting with the numerical keys, and inputting into the program.

Inputting with the numerical keys

(1) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to the data to alter.
(2) Press the numerical keys to input a setting value.

(3) Press the INPUT key .

Press the [INPUT] soft key or the [+INPUT] soft key.

Inputting into the program

(1) Command “Machining data setting” at the head of the program of the PATH which
has the cut-off process.

G266 A W S X Z F B ;

G266: Machining data setting

A: Bar diameter
W: Part length
S: Spindle speed (cut-off)
X: Cut-off end position
Z: Z1-axis machining start position
F: Cut-off feed rate
B: Cut-off tool width

7-90
7-10-6 Servo Monitor Screen

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key then press the soft key until the [S.MONI] soft
key is appears.
Press the [S.MONI] soft key to display the following screen.

This screen is used for checking the servo motor load (current value).
Also, this is used for applying a torque limit (current limit) to the servo motor.
This makes it possible to reduce the damage caused in the event of a collision while checking a
program with air cut.

Setting of torque limiter

The torque limiter becomes effective (ON) when the [ON/OFF] soft key is pressed.
When the torque limit is ON, the rapid override (rapid traverse) is automatically limited to
15% or less (0%, 1%, and 5% are available. 15% is set when 25% or 100% is selected).
If a current larger than the preset limit data on the SERVO MONITOR screen is applied for
a certain time due to a collision, alarms SV0411 and No.1143 will be displayed at the same
time.

When performing normal machining, set “TORQUE LIMITER:” to “OFF”.

The cutting feed override 100% ON command (M88) becomes invalid when the
torque limit is ON,

Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm and delete the message.

7-91
Display of load current value

The load current, the maximum load current and the percentage of each rating are displayed
simultaneously. This is convenient when the single block stop function is used to check each
block unit.
It may take some time to display the load current, therefore the current in short time
durations (such as during accelerataion/deceleration, etc.) cannot be checked.

Data on all axes can be cleared by pressing the [AL.CLR] soft key.

Standard setting values of limit data

The limit data is set in PMC PARAMETER (DATA TABLE). The standard setting values are
as listed below.

PMC PARAMETER (DATA TABLE)

PMC PRM No. Axis Setting value
D624 X1 84 (33%)
D626 Z1 89 (35%)
D628 Y1 69 (27%)
D630 X2 102 (40%)
D632 Z2 82 (32%)

When a value is set lower than the standard value of the limit data,
an alarm may be triggered at the time of acceleration/deceleration.

Refer to “11-4-4 PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) Screen” for details.

7-92
7-10-7 Tool Life Management Screen by Tool No. Counter

Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key then press the soft key a few times to display
the [T.LIFE] soft key.
Press the [T.LIFE] soft key to display the following screen.

Pressing the PAGE key will display the following screen (4th page).

7-93
During program operation in MACHINING mode , the M20 command on PATH1 counts
and displays the count value of the effective tool number counters which have been set.
When a number is set at PRESET of each counter, the machine stops at the M20 command
immediately after one of the COUNT values reaches its PRESET value.
The “NON-STOP TIME PERIOD” is the time zone in which the machine does not stop, even
when a COUNT value reaches its PRESET value. By setting the “SETTING OF NON-STOP
TIME PERIOD” to “ON” and inputting the “TIME PERIOD”, it is possible to stop the machine
at the M20 command just after the time period elapses.

Soft key functions

[ON/OFF] : Setting of COUNTER ON/OFF, NON-STOP TIME PERIOD SETTING

ON/OFF, COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE ON/OFF, and tool number
counter ON/OFF are possible.
[AUTO] : All counters with tool numbers displayed become effective.
[AL.SET] : All PRESET values are set to the same value.
[AL.CLR] : All counter values are set to “0”.
[INPUT] : Used for the setting value of TIME PERIOD, and inputting PRESET and
COUNT values.

Functions displayed on the screen

COUNTER ON
The M20 command in the program counts and displays the COUNT values of the
effective tool number counters which have been set.

The PRESET and COUNT values of effective tool number counters are displayed in
colors other than gray.
The PRESET and COUNT values of ineffective tool number counters are displayed
in grey.
All tool number counters do not count when COUNTER OFF is selected.

SETTING OF NON-STOP TIME PERIOD ON

Setting of TIME PERIOD and COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE ON/OFF becomes
effective.
TIME PERIOD and COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE display in black.

When the SETTING OF NON-STOP TIME PERIOD is set to OFF, TIME PERIOD
and COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE change to grey and setting of TIME PERIOD
and COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE becomes ineffective.

7-94
TIME PERIOD
Input the time period that the machine does not stop with M20 even when a COUNT
value reaches its PRESET value.

COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE ON

In the case when one of the COUNT values is expected to reach its PRESET value in the
non-stop time period, operator message No.2047 will be displayed.
This operator message displays at a time other than set time of time period.

COUNT PREDICTED TIME

The first time a COUNT value reaches its PRESET value is displayed as the predicted
time.
The predicted time is displayed when it is predicted to occur within 24 hours.

Display of tool number counters

When a counter is effective, the PRESET and COUNT values change to a color other
than gray. When ineffective, the PRESET and COUNT values become grey.
Counters with a COUNT value that is expected to reach its PRESET value within 24
hours, they will be displayed in red.
In the count up state, the tool number of the counter flashes.
In the case when PRESET COUNT, the * mark will be displayed on the left side of
the tool number.

Display of page number

The page number is displayed in the top-right part of the screen.

7-95
Setting of tool number counter effective/ineffective

Follow the procedure below to change the setting of tool number counter effective/ineffective.

Setting all counters with displayed tool numbers to effective

(1) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 4/4.

(2) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to OFF of

COUNTER.
(3) Press the [ON/OFF] soft key to display COUNTER ON.

(4) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 1, 2
or 3.
(5) Press the [AUTO] soft key.
All counters with tool numbers displayed will become effective.

Setting an individual tool number counter to effective/ineffective

(1) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 4/4.

(2) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to OFF of

COUNTER.
(3) Press the [ON/OFF] soft key to display COUNTER ON.

(4) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 1, 2
or 3.

(5) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to a PRESET value
or a COUNT value of an individual tool number counter to set.
(6) Press the [ON/OFF] soft key.
ON : The PRESET and COUNT values become effective and change to black.
OFF : The PRESET and COUNT values become ineffective and change to grey.

7-96
Altering the PRESET/COUNT values and canceling the count up state

Carry out the following procedure to alter the PRESET/COUNT values and cancel the count
up state.

(1) Press the CUSTOM/GRAPHIC key to display the TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
screen.

(2) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 1, 2
or 3.

(3) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to a PRESET value
or a COUNT value to alter.
(4) Input a setting value with the numerical keys.

(5) Press the INPUT key or the [INPUT] soft key.

The setting value will be inputted.

To set all PRESET values to a certain value, press the numerical keys and the
[AL.SET] soft key.
To set all COUNT values to “0”, press the [AL.CLR] soft key.
Always input a value into PRESET which is 2 or more than the COUNT value.
In the following cases, the input will be regarded as an error and “DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE” will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
- When the PRESET value is not between 2 ~ 999999.
- When the COUNT value is not between 0 ~ 999997.
If PRESET [COUNT+1] during alteration, it will be regarded as an input error
and *ERROR* will flash at the bottom of the screen.
The * mark will be displayed on the left side of tool numbers with an error.
In this case, input a correct value to reset the input error (PRESET > [COUNT+1]).
Count up state
The program stops by one cycle stop (M20), the main/sub spindle motors,
power-driven tool motor and coolant motor stop, the machine enters feed hold and
the beacon lights up.
At this time, alarm No. 2085 is displayed, the tool number flashes and the * mark is
displayed on the left side of the tool number simultaneously.

7-97
Setting of non-stop time period

(1) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 4/4.

(2) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to SETTING OF

NON-STOP TIME PERIOD.
(3) Press the [ON/OFF] soft key to set the SETTING OF NON-STOP TIME PERIOD to
ON.

(4) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to the left side of
“ ” at TIME PERIOD.
(5) Use the numerical keys to input the start time of the non-stop time period.
Input a whole number from 0 to 23 (from 0:00 to 23:00).

(6) Press the INPUT key or the [INPUT] soft key.

The setting value will be inputted.

(7) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to the right side of
“ ” at TIME PERIOD.
(8) Input the end time of the non-stop time period with the numerical keys.
Input a whole number from 0 to 23 (from 0:00 to 23:00).

(9) Press the INPUT key or the [INPUT] soft key.

The setting value is inputted.

Setting of count attainment notice

The count attainment notice is effective when SETTING OF NON-STOP TIME

PERIOD is ON.

(1) Press the PAGE keys , and the cursor keys , to display page 4/4.

(2) Press the cursor keys , , , to move the cursor to COUNT

ATTAINMENT NOTICE.
(3) Press the [ON/OFF] soft key to set COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE to ON.
In the case when one of the COUNT values is expected to reach its PRESET value in
the non-stop time period, operator message No.2047 will be displayed.

7-98
The following operations are performed according to the ON/OFF state of the SETTING OF
NON-STOP TIME PERIOD and COUNT ATTAINMENT NOTICE.

In the non-stop time Outside the non-stop

Mode
period time period
SETTING OF COUNT
Machine Attainment Machine Attainment
NON-STOP ATTAINMENT
operation message operation message
TIME PERIOD NOTICE
ON ON Operation 2) No display Stop Display 1)
ON OFF Operation 2) No display Stop No display
OFF ON Stop Display 1) Stop Display 1)
OFF OFF Stop No display Stop No display

Display 1) : In the case when a COUNT value is expected to reach its PRESET value
during the non-stop time period, operator message No.2047 will be displayed.
Operation 2) : As soon as the non-stop time period elapses, the machine stops at M20.

7-99
7-11 MACRO Screen

7-11-1 Tool Select Screen

At the time of preparation, tool selection and X-axis (Y-axis) positioning can be carried out
while a door is open.

Tool select screen display

Press the MACRO key , then press the [T-SLCT] soft key to display the following screen.

The cursor is located at “APPROACH POSITION” when the power is turned on.

7-100
Tool selection X direction

Follow the procedure below to carry out tool selection.

(1) Press the [X/Y] soft key to display X direction
(2) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to “APROACH POS”, and input the desired
position for tool positioning.
(3) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to “RELEASE POS”, and input the desired
retract position.
(4) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to the desired T number.

(5) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
(6) The tool (T number) specified in step (4) will be selected, and positioning to the approach
position (tool selection) will be performed. When positioning to the approach position (tool

selection) is complete, the START button will flash.

(7) When the positioning (tool selection) is complete, release the DOOR OPEN button .
If a tool of T100~T600 or a cross drill of T3100~T3400 is selected and the X-axis
position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool selection will be
performed. Then, the tool positions to the approach position and the START

button will flash.

When the START button is pressed again while holding down the DOOR OPEN

button , the X-axis will move to the retract position (release).

When the movement is complete, the START button will go out.

When a front tool of T1100~T1400 is selected, only tool selection will be executed.

Besides, the START button will go out.

7-101
Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If the DOOR OPEN button is released during tool selection, the movement

will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again while pressing

down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

If no program is registered on PATH1 and/or PATH2 of memory, the tool select
function cannot be executed. When using the tool select function, register at least 1
program on both PATH1 and PATH2 of memory beforehand.

The operation will start when the START button is released.

If the DOOR OPEN button is pressed after pressing the START button ,
tool selection will not be performed.
Negative values (minus) cannot be inputted into the approach position.
In the case of a pressing a function key to switch to a different screen, press the

CUSTOM key to select the TOOL SELECT screen again.

In the case of a pressing a mode key to switch to a different screen, press the

MACRO key to select the TOOL SELECT screen again.

If the keep relays corresponding to each tool have not been set, T11~T14 will not
be displayed.
To enable selection of (display) T11 tool K27 bit0=1
To enable selection of (display) T12 tool K27 bit1=1
To enable selection of (display) T13 tool K27 bit2=1
To enable selection of (display) T14 tool K27 bit3=1
Every push of the [CURSOR] key will move the cursor to the T number area and to
the GEOMETRY OFFSET area alternately.
To input geometry offset, first select a T number using the cursor keys, then press
the [CURSOR] soft key to move the cursor to the GEOMETRY OFFSET area.
Next, move the cursor to the desired axis and input a geometry offset value.
The electronic handwheel will be enabled by pressing the [HANDLE] soft key.
Pressing an AXIS DIRECTION key and turning the handwheel will move the
selected axis.

7-102
Tool selection Y direction

Follow the procedure below to adjust the tool position in the center height direction.
(1) Press the [X/Y] soft key to display Y direction
(2) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to “DIAMETER (ACT)”, and input the measured
bar diameter.
(3) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to “RELEASE POS”, and input the desired
retract position.
(4) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the desired T number for adjusting the center
height.

For details on the center height adjustment, please refer to “10-4 Installing and
Adjusting the Tool Units”.

7-103
7-11-2 Auto Cut-off Screen

Press the MACRO key and the [CUTOFF] soft key respectively to display the following
screen.

Cutting-off the end of the bar material can be executed.

Follow the procedure below to execute auto cut off.

(1) Input the setting values on the MACHINING DATA screen.

Setting values cannot be inputted on the AUTO CUT OFF screen.

The setting values of the MACHINING DATA screen will be displayed.
When executing the cut-off process with the AUTO CUT OFF screen, positioning of
the cut-off tool (tool tip) will be G0 X24.0.

For details on the MACHINING DATA screen, please refer to section “7-10-5
Machining Data Screen” for details.

(2) Position the length of material to be cut off to the right side of the cut-off tool blade.
(3) Set the OVERRIDE to 100.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the START button to execute the cut-off process.

(6) After the cut-off process has finished, alarm No. 3008 will be displayed.

7-104
(7) Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

If the PATH1 and PATH2 keys are not lit up, an alarm will be displayed

and the cut-off process will not start even when the START button is pressed.
After the cut-off process has finished, the machine enters G97 mode.

When the SINGLE BLOCK key is on, the START button turns off every
time operation of 1 block finishes.

7-105
7-11-3 Guide Bush Version Change Screen

Press the MACRO key and then press the soft key until the [GUIDE BUSH] soft
key appears.
This screen is used to change from Guide bush version to Non-guide bush version and vice
versa.

7-106
Setting

CAUTION

Always press the [FINISH] soft key and START button after checking the
contents on the cursor position.
Pressing them accidently may cause machine damage and/or accidents.

Guide bush version Non-guide bush version

By pressing the [GB/NGB] soft key, the following screen will be displayed depending on the
type of guide bush.
When the revolving guide bush is used

7-107
 When the stationary guide bush is used

The machine position of the Z1-axis is displayed on the screen.

Change to the non-guide bush version according to the procedures on the screen.
After completing the procedures, the next procedure will be displayed by pressing the
[FINISH] soft key.

When stopping the Z1-axis movement halfway after “PRESS CYCLE START
HEADSTOCK MOVE TO Z=0 OF NGB” is executed, OT500(+Z1) alarm will occur.
Press the [CAN] soft key and move the Z1-axis in the “-Z1” direction in HANDLE
mode to cancel the alarm.
By pressing the [CAN] soft key, the display position will return to “PRESS START,
MOVE TO CHANGE POS.”.

For details on how to change from Guide bush version to Non-guide bush version,
refer to section “10-5-2 Changing from Guide Bush Version to Non-Guide Bush
Version”.

7-108
Non-guide bush version Guide bush version
By pressing the [GB/NGB] soft key, the following screen will be displayed.

The machine position of the Z1-ais is displayed on the screen.

Change to the desired guide bush according to the procedures on the screen.
When “PRESS [RGB], CHANGING TO RGB” is displayed on the screen, press the [SGB] or
the [RGB] soft key according to the guide bush to be changed.

When stopping the Z1-axis movement halfway after “PRESS CYCLE START
HEADSTOCK MOVE TO Z=0 OF GB” is executed, OT500(-Z1) alarm will occur.
Press the [CAN] soft key and move the Z1-axis in the “+Z1” direction in HANDLE
mode to cancel the alarm.
By pressing the [CAN] soft key, the display position will return to “PRESS START,
MOVE TO CHANGE POS.”.

For details on how to change from Non-guide bush version to Guide bush version,
refer to section “10-5-3 Changing from Non-Guide Bush Version to Guide Bush
Version”.

7-109
MEMO

7-110
8. Programming

WARNING
Read chapter "9. Automatic and Manual Operations" thoroughly beforehand and

execute operation in MEMORY mode or MDI mode.

Refer to section "11-4 How to Check the Parameters" when changing the
parameter settings in the following explanations.

8-1 Programming

The CNC automatic lathe will work exactly as instructed by the program in the memory.
Programming is the act of writing down commands in accordance with specific rules to control
the tool number, tool path and other processing conditions when machining parts.
Discuss the tooling when the drawings of parts to be machined have been determined.

Drawing of parts to be machined

Check the material to be cut
Check the dimensional tolerance
Check the surface roughness

Tooling discussion
Deciding the machining range
Selection of machine and options
Deciding the machining process
Decision of cutting tools, tool holders
and installation positions
Setting of processing conditions

Programming

8-1
8-2 Program Structure

Meaning and Command Unit of Addresses

Address Meaning Command unit
O (Note1) Program number 4-digit (1 9999)
N Sequence number 5-digit (1 99999)
G Preparatory function 3-digit (0 999)
X1-axis movement command,
X･U 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit (diameter)
X2-axis movement command
Y･V Y1-axis movement command 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit (diameter)
Z1-axis movement command,
Z･W 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit
Z2-axis movement command
C･H Main spindle angle indexing command 0.001 unit
R Arc radius designation 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit
I･K･J Arc center element 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit
Angle of direct drawing dimension
,A 0.001 unit
programming
Chamfering of direct drawing dimension
,C 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit
programming
Corner rounding of direct drawing dimension
,R 0.001mm, 0.0001inch unit
programming
Feed per revolution:
0.0001mm/rev, 0.00001inch/rev
F Feed rate designation
Feed per minute:
0.001mm/min, 0.0001inch/min
S Spindle speed command 5-digit min-1 unit
T Tool selection number & Tool offset number 4-digit
M Auxiliary function 3-digit
U･P･X Dwell time command 0.001s 99999.999s (U X)
Subprogram number command Low-order 4-digit (1 9999)
P
Subprogram repetition command High-order 3-digit (1 999)
P･Q Sequence number command 5-digit (1 99999)

Block

A 1-line unit in the program is called a block.

A block is terminated by the end-of-block code, represented by a ";".

Word

Blocks are made up of “words”.

“Words” are made up of an address (alphabetical characters) followed by a numerical value.
(The plus sign (+) or minus sign ( ) may be prefixed to a number.)

8-2
Decimal Input

There are some restrictions depending on the address, but addresses with units such as
distance, speed or time can use decimal values.
The following table shows the decimal input unit and the addresses that can be used with
them.

Unit Addresses
Distance (mm/inch) X Y Z U V W I J K ,A ,C ,R
Speed (mm/rev, mm/min)
F
(inch/rev, inch/min)
Time (s) UX
Angle ( /degree) CH

Program number

A program has a 4-digit number (max.) attached to its head in order to distinguish
programs from each other.
A maximum of 800 programs can be registered into the memory of PATH1 and PATH2

Sequence number

The block during a program can have a 5-digit number (max.) attached to its head.

Block skip

Blocks with a slash code "/" at the front of the block will be ignored while the BLOCK SKIP

key is on.
If a slash code "/" is not at the head of the block, the contents from the slash code "/” to
immediately before the end of block “;” will be ignored.
When inputting or outputting the program, the "/" codes in the program will be inputted or

outputted regardless of the status of the BLOCK SKIP key .

There are two BLOCK SKIP keys . One is for PATH 1 use and the other is for
PATH 2 use.

Reading zero

When data (numerical values) other than "0" is specified, the preceding "0" before the
decimal point, and the following “0” after the decimal point can be omitted.
Example:
G01 G1
T0200 T200
F0.020 F0.02 (Do not omit “0” of the first digit.)
X10.05 X10.05 (“0” cannot be omitted.)

8-3
8-3 Dimension Word

The dimension word is a command that executes movement of each axis.

It consists of an address that specifies the axis and a numeral that commands the direction
and amount to move.
There are two commanding methods: absolute commands and incremental commands.

Diameter dimension Length dimension Angle dimension

X1, X2-axis Y1-axis Z1, Z2-axis C1, C2-axis
Absolute
X Y C
(Absolute value Z
(Diameter) (Diameter) (Angle)
command)
Incremental U V H
(Incremental (Diametrical (Diametrical W (Angular
value command) difference) difference) difference)

Point Absolute command Incremental command

1 X 6.0 ― Z0 ― ― ― ―
2 (X 6.0) ― Z12.0 ― (U 0 ) ― W12.0 ―
3 X10.0 ― (Z12.0) ― U 4.0 ― (W 0 ) ―
4 (X10.0) ― Z25.0 ― (U 0 ) ― W13.0 ―
Note) Note)
5 X 9.54 Y3.0 ― ― ― ―
Z26.0 W1.0
6 (X 9.54) Y 3.0 (Z26.0) ― (U 0 ) V 6.0 (W 0) H180.0
7 X 8.0 ― (Z25.0) C0 ― ― W 1.0 ―
8 (X 8.0) ― Z40.0 C180.0 (U 0 ) ― W15.0 ―

Note) This includes the tool shift amount (9mm).

If the amount of movement is 0, just as the commands in brackets in the table

shown above, the command can be omitted.

8-4
8-4 Coordinate System

The X1, X2 and Y1-axes take the center of the bar diameter as the zero point (X0, Y0), and the
Z1-axis takes the bar end face after completion of cut-off as the zero point (Z0). The X2 and
Z2-axes take the reference point as the zero point (X0, Z0).
The reference point is a mechanical fixed point to which the axes move with the reference
point return operation or by commanding.

The reference point is a mechanical fixed point to which the axes move with the
reference point return operation or by commanding.
Radius values are used in the dimensional drawings of this chapter.
The dimension unit “mm” is used in the drawings of this chapter.
The differences between Guide bush version and Non-guide bush version are only
the Z1-axis reference point and the stroke.
Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing: SB-12R: 1.0mm,
SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Z1-axis

8-5
X2, Z2-axis

8-6
X1, Y1-axis

Tool holder

Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm
[0M103] [0M104]

The dimension in brackets is when 1/2 The dimension in brackets is when 3/8
inch tool is used. inch tool is used.

8-7
4-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER16 [0M152] + 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M112]

Dimension A Dimension B
When Wedge Type 6 Station and 12 mm tools are used 297.5 36.5
Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is
used together and 1/2 inch tools are used 296.8 35.8

Dimension A Dimension B
When Wedge Type 7 Station and 10 mm tools are used 297.5 30.5
Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is
used together and 3/8 inch tools are used 298.0 31.0

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

8-8
High Speed 5-Sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11 [0M156] + 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M112]

Dimension A Dimension B
When Wedge Type 6 Station and 12 mm tools are used 297.5 34.0
Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is
used together and 1/2 inch tools are used 296.8 33.3

Dimension A Dimension B
When Wedge Type 7 Station and 10 mm tools are used 297.5 28.0
Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is
used together and 3/8 inch tools are used 298.0 28.5

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

8-9
5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] or High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill Unit
ER11/16 [0M157] + 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] + Cartridge type power-driven tool
unit (2 tools)

Dimension A Dimension B
When Wedge Type 6 Station and 12 mm tools are used 291.5 33.5
Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is
used together and 1/2 inch tools are used 290.8 32.8

Dimension A Dimension B
When Wedge Type 7 Station and 10 mm tools are used 291.5 32.5
Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is
used together and 3/8 inch tools are used 292.0 33.0

8-10
In the case of using a cartridge type power-driven tool unit on T3300 T3400, it is
required to set the keep relay on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen
depending on the tool unit to be used.
In the following cases, it is necessary to set the keep relay.
USE [0M155] AT T34
USE [0M158] AT T34
USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34
USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T33
USE POLYGON UNIT AT T33

Dimension J in the above relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm
Dimension K in the above relational dimension drawing:
[0M151] 7.0mm, [0M157] 5.5mm

Refer to section “Appendix 5 Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holder” for

details on the cartridge type power-driven tool unit.
Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

8-11
5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] or High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill Unit
ER11/16 [0M157] + Cartridge type power-driven tool unit (3 tools)

In the drawing below, only the dimensions different from the ones in the drawing of
“ 5-Spindle Cross Drilling unit ER11/16 [0M151] or High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill
Unit ER11/16 [0M157] + 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111]+ Cartridge type
power-driven tool unit (2 tools)” are indicated.

In the case of using a cartridge type power-driven tool unit on T3500, it is required
to set the keep relay on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen
depending on the tool unit to be used.
In the following cases, it is necessary to set the keep relay.
USE [0M155] AT T35
USE [0M158] AT T35
USE MILLING UNIT AT T35
USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35
USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35
USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35
The drawing below is the example when “USE MILLING UNIT AT T35” is set to
“YES”.

Dimension A
When Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder and 12 mm tools are used 290.5
12mm [0M103] is used together and 1/2 inch tools are used 289.8

Dimension A
When Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder and 10 mm tools are used 290.5
10mm [0M104] is used together and 3/8 inch tools are used 291.0

Refer to section “Appendix 5 Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holder” for

details on the cartridge type power-driven tool unit.
Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details on
the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.

8-12
8-5 Soft OT Function by Tool

The following table shows the stroke for each axis.

How to cancel the alarm

In HANDLE mode, move the alarm axis out from the prohibition area, and then

press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

8-5-1 Effective Stroke and the First Soft OT

Reference First soft OT

Effective stroke (mm)
point Machine position Absolute position
–151.0 +1.0
X1-axis 75.0 148.0 No.1321 No.1320 –3.0 149.0
(PATH1 X)
–597.0 +37.0
Y1-axis 315.0 0.0 No.1321 No.1320 –597.0 37.0
(PATH1 Y)
–1.0 +206.0
Guide bush version
0.0 No.1321 No.1320 –1.0 206.0
205.0
(PATH 1 Z)
Non-guide bush version 267.5 +298.5
Z1-axis (SB12R) 268.0 No.1321 No.1320 –0.5 30.5
30.0 (PATH 1 Z)
Non-guide bush version 273.0 +324.0
(SB16R/20R) 273.5 No.1321 No.1320 –0.5 50.5
50.0 (PATH 1 Z)
–1.0 +521.0
X2-axis 260.0 0.0 No.1321 No.1320 –1.0 521.0
(PATH 2 X2)
–0.5 +210.5
Z2-axis 210.0 0.0 No.1321 No.1320 –0.5 210.5
(PATH 2 Z2)

There are some restrictions for the X1-axis effective stroke of T1100 and T1400.
T1100 cannot be used when the X1-axis absolute position is in the minus direction
from 0.0.
T1400 cannot be used when the X1-axis absolute position is in the plus direction
from 0.0.

8-13
In practice, the absolute position for each axis will include its own data for each
machine. Therefore, they will slightly differ from the values in the table above.

8-14
8-5-2 The Second Soft OT

CAUTION
The second soft OT is invalid when power is turned on.
Tool selection with the MDI key or the MEMORY key will make the
second soft OT valid.

: In the case when Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is installed
in the machine
: In the case when Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is installed
in the machine

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
T100 +210500 D2000
T200
T300
T400
+195000 D2008
T500
+200000 D2004
T600
T700
T900
T1100
+32.0 #14708
T1200
+50000 D2048
T1300
16.0 #14709
T1400
T2100
T2200
+49000 D2052
T2300
T2400
T2900 +40000 D2056

8-15
When 5-spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] or High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill Unit
ER11/16 [0M157] is installed

: In the case when Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is installed
in the machine
: In the case when Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is installed
in the machine
T3500 is not available when using 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder (cartridge type) [0M111].

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
+195000 D2008 40.0 #14700
T3100
+200000 D2004 20.0 #14701
20.0 #14702
T3200 +195000 D2008
29.0 #14703
32.0 #14704
T3300 +152000 D2028
32.0 #14705
32.0 #14706
Data will vary
T3400 +50000 D2048
15.0 #14707 depending on the
tool unit of T3500.
T3500 Data will vary depending on the tool unit to be used.

When 4-spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER16 [0M152] is installed

: In the case when Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is installed
in the machine
: In the case when Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is installed
in the machine
T3500 is not available.

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
+195000 D2008 47.0 #14710
T3100
+200000 D2004 29.0 #14711
29.0 #14712
T3200 +195000 D2008
29.0 #14713
29.0 #14714
T3300 +152000 D2028
29.0 #14715
29.0 #14716
T3400 +50000 D2048
22.0 #14717

8-16
When High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11 [0M156] is installed

: In the case when Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103] is installed
in the machine
: In the case when Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is installed
in the machine

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
+195000 D2008 47.0 #14710
T3100
+200000 D2004 29.0 #14711
29.0 #14712
T3200 +206500 D2060
29.0 #14713
29.0 #14714
T3300 +206500 D2060
29.0 #14715
29.0 #14716
T3400 +50000 D2048
22.0 #14717
25.0 #14746
T3500 +50000 D2048
24.0 #14747

8-17
Changing the second soft OT by keep relay conversational setting

By setting the optional tool units to be used on the KEEP RELAY (conversational
setting) screen, OT data of the X1, Y1 and Z2-axes will change as shown in the
tables below.

For details on the setting, refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational
Setting Screen”.

When ”USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T4” is set to YES

Tool Z2-axis
number Data PMC data
T300 +176000 D2020
T400
+169500 D2024
T500

When ”USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T5” is set to YES

Tool Z2-axis
number Data PMC data
T400 +176000 D2020
T500
+169500 D2024
T600

When ”USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T6” is set to YES

This setting is for only when Wedge Type 7-station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104] is
installed.

Tool Z2-axis
number Data PMC data
T500 +176000 D2020
T600
+169500 D2024
T700

8-18
When “USE [0M155] AT T35” or “USE [0M158] AT T35” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 +120000 D2040
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +79000 D2044
No change #14705
No change #14706
T3400 +79000 D2044
No change #14707
No change #14708
T3500 +79000 D2044
No change #14709

When “USE MILLING UNIT AT T35” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 No change D2008
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +195000 D2008
No change #14705
No change #14706
T3400 +195000 D2008
No change #14707
No change #14708
T3500 +195000 D2008
No change #14709

When “USE THREAD WHIRLING UNIT AT T35” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 No change D2008
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +138000 D2036
No change #14705
T3400
No change #14708
T3500 +138000 D2036
No change #14709 –120.0 #14731

8-19
When “USE [0M155] FOR CROSS AT T35” or “USE [0M158] FOR CROSS AT T35” is set to
YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 No change D2008
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +195000 D2008
No change #14705
No change #14706
T3400 +195000 D2008
–32.0 #14722 –141.0 #14732
43.0 #14723
T3500 +195000 D2008
No change #14709 –141.0 #14733

When “USE 3 SPINDLE COUNTER DRILL AT T34” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 No change D2008
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +79000 D2044
–15.0 #14721
No change #14706
Data will vary
T3400 +79000 D2044
No change #14707 depending on the
tool unit of T3500.
T3500 Data will vary depending on the tool unit to be used.

When “USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 +138000 D2036
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +120000 D2040
–15.0 #14729
No change #14706
Data will vary
T3400 +79000 D2044
No change #14707 depending on the
tool unit of T3500.
T3500 Data will vary depending on the tool unit to be used.

8-20
When “USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T33” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
No change #14700
T3100 +169500 D2024
No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 +169500 D2024
–1.0 #14724
43.0 #14725
T3300 +169500 D2024
–80.0 #14726
T3400
T3500 Data will vary depending on the tool unit to be used.

When “USE POLYGON UNIT AT T33” is set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
No change #14700
T3100 +120000 D2040
No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 +120000 D2040
–1.0 #14727
No change #14704
T3300 +120000 D2040
No change #14705
15.0 #14728
Data will vary
T3400 +79000 D2044
No change #14707 depending on the
tool unit of T3500
T3500 Data will vary depending on the tool unit to be used.

When “USE POLYGON UNIT AT T34” and “USE 3 SPINDLE BACK DRILL AT T21” are
set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 +138000 D2036
–1.0 #14727
No change #14704
T3300 +120000 D2040
No change #14705
15.0 #14728
Data will vary
T3400 +79000 D2044
No change #14707 depending on the
tool unit of T3500.
Data will vary
Data will vary
Data will vary depending depending on the tool
T3500 depending on the
on the tool unit to be used. unit to be used.
tool unit to be used.
–3.0 #14735

8-21
When “USE POLYGON UNIT AT T33” and “USE 3 SPINDLE BACK DRILL AT T21” are
set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool P-CODE
P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable
variable
No change #14700
T3100 +120000 D2040
No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 +120000 D2040
–1.0 #14727
No change #14704
T3300 +120000 D2040
No change #14705
15.0 #14728
Data will vary
T3400 +79000 D2044
–1.0 #14734 depending on the
tool unit of T3500.
T3500 Data will vary depending on the tool unit to be used.

When either “USE [0M155] AT T34” or “USE [0M158] AT T34”, and “USE 3 SPINDLE
BACK DRILL AT T21” are set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool P-CODE
P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable
variable
D2008 No change #14700
T3100 No change
D2004 No change #14701
No change #14702
T3200 No change D2008
No change #14703
No change #14704
T3300 +79000 D2044
–15.0 #14721
No change #14706
Data will vary
T3400 +79000 D2044
No change #14707 depending on the
tool unit of T3500.
Data will vary
Data will vary
Data will vary depending depending on the tool
T3500 depending on the
on the tool unit to be used. unit to be used.
tool unit to be used.
–3.0 #14736

When either “USE [0M155] AT T34” or “USE [0M158] AT T34”, and “USE 3 SPINDLE
BACK DRILL AT T21” are set to YES

Z2-axis Y1-axis X1-axis

Tool
P-CODE P-CODE
number Data PMC data Data Data
variable variable
T1100
T1200
No change D2048 –1.0 #14737
T1300
T1400

8-22
Second soft OT by setting keep relay

When Stopper [0M497] is used on the non-guide bush version

Y1-axis
Tool number
Data P-CODE variable
1.0 #14730
T3100
No change #14701

For details on Stopper [0M497], refer to section “13-31 Stopper [0M497] <Exclusive
for Non-Guide Bush Version>”.

When Coolant Unit for Sub Spindle [0M461] is used:

With 5-spindle Cross drilling unit [0M151] or High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16
[0M157] installed
Z2-axis
Tool number
Data PMC data
T3100 190000 D2012
T3200
T3300
145000 D2032
T3400
T3500

With 4-spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER16 [0M152] installed

Z2-axis
Tool number
Data PMC data
T3100
T3200
180000 D2016
T3300
T3400

With High Speed 5-sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11 [0M156] installed
Z2-axis
Tool number
Data PMC data
T3100
T3200
T3300 195000 D2008
T3400
T3500

For details on Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461], refer to section
“13-18 Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461]”.

8-23
8-5-3 The Third Soft OT

Axis movement is not possible in the range of X2 > 1.0 (PRM No. 1325 (X2)), Z2 > 50.0 (PRM
No. 1325 (Z2)).

Alarm display
504 OVER TRAVEL + ( : Axis name)

8-24
8-6 Feed Function

Rapid feed speed

The respective axis moves at constant high speed with the G0 command in the program.

Axis Rapid traverse feed rate

X1-axis
Y1-axis
Z1-axis 35000mm/min
X2-axis
Z2-axis
C1-axis 198000ﾟ/min
C2-axis (550min-1)

Cutting feed rate

The "F" address commands the feed rate of each axis.

The feed rate consists of the feed per revolution and the feed per minute; both are specified
by the G code.

Type G code Unit Program Datum spindle

Feed per minute G98 mm/min PATH1 2 Main Sub

inch/min

Feed per revolution G99 mm/rev PATH1 2 Main Sub

inch/rev

When changing a G code, a new “F” command is required.

The feed command for the power-driven tool becomes effective by rotation
command after T code.
Do not input 0 or negative values.
The command values of the X1 and Y1-axes are speeds determined by radial
values.
When carrying out simultaneous interpolation with 2 or more axes, the speed is
tangential.

The feed rate for each axis is shown below.

Name Feed per revolution Feed per minute

X1-axis
Y1-axis
0.001 mm/rev 0.001 10000mm/min
Z1-axis
0.0001 inch/rev 0.0001 393.7inch/min
X2-axis
Z2-axis
C1-axis
10000 /min (27.8min-1)
C2-axis

8-25
8-7 Spindle Function (S Function)

The respective spindle speeds can be controlled directly with “S” addresses.

Spindle name Command range

SB-12R Max. 15000min-1
Main spindle
SB-16R/20R Max. 10000min-1
SB-12R Max. 12000min-1
Sub spindle
SB-16R/20R Max. 9000min-1
When selecting T3100, T3200 Max. 8000min-1
When selecting T3300, T3400 Max. 6000min-1
[0M151]
When selecting [0M155] Max. 6000min-1
T3521 T3523 [0M158] Max. 10000min-1
Power-driven [0M152] ― Max. 6000min-1
tool on PATH1 [0M156] ― Max. 10000min-1
When selecting T3100, T3200 Max. 10000min-1
When selecting T3300, T3400 Max. 6000min-1
[0M157]
When selecting [0M155] Max. 6000min-1
T3521 T3523 [0M158] Max. 10000min-1
Power-driven
― Max. 8000min-1
tool on PATH2

As for 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] and High Speed 5-sp. Cross
Drill Unit ER11 [0M156], the gear ratio of ER16 [T3100, T3200] is different from that
of ER11 [T3300, T3400, T3500]. When changing the tool from [T3100 or T3200] to
[T3300, T3400 or T3500], or changing the tool from [T3300, T3400 or T3500] to
[T3100 or T3200], command spindle speed with M36 or M37 again.
Stop the main spindle with M5 before commanding the rotation of the power-driven
tool motor, then command “S” in the same block with M36 or M37.
The “S” spindle speed command is required with the M36 or M37 command when
starting up the power-driven tool. This is also required for the speed change.
Only M36 or M37 is required when rotating the spindle in reverse after starting up.
The "S" command without M36 or M37 on PATH1 is considered as the rotation
speed command for main spindle.

Rotation command M code

Each spindle can rotate forwards, in reverse and stop with only the M codes.

PATH1 PATH2
Main spindle Power-driven tools Sub spindle Power-driven tools
Forward direction M3 M36 M3 M56
Reverse direction M4 M37 M4 M57
Stop M5 M38 M5 M58

8-26
 The main spindle forward rotation is the same direction as the sub spindle reverse
rotation.

Rotating direction

8-27
8-8 Tool Function (T Function)

CAUTION
Check beforehand which M codes can be used in blocks with T codes by
referring to section “8-11 Auxiliary Functions (M Functions)”.

Summary

Tool function is commanded with the "T" address, and contains the tool selection function and
the tool position offset function.

Tool selection function

When selecting a tool

Add "00" to the tool number to select, i.e. command T and 3-digit or T and 4-digit.

Example): T100; Select tool number T1.

T400; Select tool number T4.
T1100; Select tool number T11.
T3200; Select tool number T32.
However, when 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER16 [0M151] is installed, a unit to which
3 tools can be attached, can be attached to T34 or T35.
Add ID number “21, 22, 23” to the tool number to select, i.e. command T and 4-digit in
order to distinguish the tools.

Example): When 3-Spindle Front Drilling Unit ER16 [0M155] is attached to T34, by
commanding T3423, the tool of T3423 will be selected as shown in the drawing
below.

8-28
 Tool select position

The axis will not move when an identical tool is selected. (the command will end.)
Specify G0 or G1 in the process before the tool selection.
In order to function the geometry offset of the Z1-axis, be sure to command the
Z1-axis coordinate system (Absolute) in the positioning block after tool selection.

The selected positions of each tool by commanding tool selection are as shown below.

The selected positions below are in G170 mode (Tool selection path cancel).

Refer to section “8-10-24 Tool Selection Path Command” for details on the tool
selection path command cancel (G170), tool selection path command (direct)
(G171) and tool selection path command (indirect) (G172).

Tool selection Workpiece coordinate

Figure
command X Y

T100~ T700 40.0 0

Remarks:
When the current X position before this tool
Geometry offset 0 0
selection exceeds X40.0, the X-axis will not
move.

T900 40.0 0

Remarks:
When the current X position before this tool
Geometry offset 0 0
selection exceeds X40.0, the X-axis will not
move.

8-29
 Tool selection Workpiece coordinate
Figure
command X Y

T1100~ T1400 0 0

Geometry offset 0 0 ―

T3100~ T3500 40.0 0

Remarks:
Tool tip positions to X40.0 even when the
Max. geometry offset value is inputted into X.
Geometry offset 0
24.0 When the current X position before this tool
selection exceeds X40.0, the X-axis will not
move.

T3300 0 0

Geometry offset 0 0 ―

T3400 0 0

Geometry offset 0 0 ―

8-30
 Tool selection Workpiece coordinate
Figure
command X Y

T3500 30.0 0

Geometry offset 0 0 ―

T3421~ T3423 0 0

Geometry offset 0 0 ―

T3521~ T3523 0 0

Geometry offset 0 0 ―

8-31
 Tool selection Workpiece coordinate
Figure
command X Y

T3521~ T3523 0 41.0

Remarks:
The tool positions to regardless of the
Geometry offset 0 Max.17.0 Y-axis geometry offset value.
Input Y17.0 or less ( ) into the Y-axis
geometry offset.

T2000~ T2900 0 0

Remarks:
Geometry Offset 0 0
Z2-axis positions to Z0.

T2121~ T2123 0 0

Remarks:
Geometry offset 0 0
Z2-axis positions to Z0.

8-32
Tool position offset function

This function is called “offset” or “tool offset”.

In tool position offset, there is tool wear offset and tool geometry offset.

Tool wear offset

This is used for adjusting the size of machined parts.

When the size of machined parts is to be increased, input a positive offset value.
When it is to be decreased, input a negative offset value.
The offset value will be increased or decreased at each “end of program” block.

Refer to section “7-9-1 Tool Wear Offset (Wear Offset) Screen” for the input method
of offset values.

Commanding method for offset number

T□□□
Tool offset number 000 to 064
T000 is cancellation of tool wear offset

There are 64 pairs of offset numbers each in PATH1 and PATH2.

Refer to the examples below.

Offset numbers example:

[PATH1] [PATH2]
Tool select Tool wear Offset Tool select Tool wear Offset
command offset number address command offset number address
T100 T1 X, Y, Z T1100 T11 X, Z
T200 T2 X, Y, Z T1200 T12 X, Z
T300 T3 X, Y, Z T1300 T13 X, Z
T400 T4 X, Y, Z T1400 T14 X, Z
T500 T5 X, Y, Z T2000 －
T600 T6 X, Y, Z T2100 T21 X, Z
T700 T7 X, Y, Z T2200 T22 X, Z
T1100 T11 X, Y, Z T2300 T23 X, Z
T1200 T12 X, Y, Z T2400 T24 X, Z
T1300 T13 X, Y, Z T2900 － －
T1400 T14 X, Y, Z
T3100 T31 X, Y, Z
T3200 T32 X, Y, Z
T3300 T33 X, Y, Z
T3400 T34 X, Y, Z
T3500 T35 X, Y, Z

8-33
Tool geometry offset

Tool shape, mounting position and the center height of a tool (T100 T700) can be
compensated.
Input the offset values of the X1, X2, Y1, Z1 and Z2-axes for each tool on the GEOMETRY
OFFSET screen beforehand. The offset values of the X1, X2 and Y1-axes will become valid
at the tool selection command. The offset values of Z1 and Z2-axes will become valid at the
Z1 and Z2-axes positioning block after tool selection.
At this time, the coordinate system of each axis will shift in the plus direction by the offset
value with a + (plus) sign, and in the minus direction by the offset value with a (minus)
sign.

Command Z1-axis and Z2-axis coordinate value (Absolute) in the positioning block
after tool selection in order to make the Z1-axis and Z2-axis geometry offset valid.
Note down each setting data.

Refer to section “10-4-1 Installing and Adjusting the Tools” for details on how to
offset the tool center height (T100 ~T700).

When the tool installation length is longer than the standard tool length, input the length
difference into X1 or Y1 as a positive offset value. If the tool installation length is shorter
than the standard tool length, input the difference as a negative offset value.
Double the X1-axis and Y1-axis data because they are diametrical values.
Tool geometry offset value = (installed tool length standard tool length) 2
Standard tool length ········ Tool length to the center of the guide bush or the main spindle
at the time of zero point positioning

E.g.) T3100, T3200 on 5-Spindle Cross Drilling unit ER11/16 [0M151]

Standard tool length: ························ 20.5 mm
Tool installation length ······················· 32.5 mm
Geometry offset value ························· 24.0 mm
Geometry offset value = (Standard installed tool length ― Standard tool length)×2
= (32.5 ― 20.5)×2 = 24.0

8-34
8-9 Broken Cut-off Tool Detector

Summary

This unit detects damage of the cut-off tool by mechanically detecting if the machined part
remains after the cut-off process performed by tool T100.

WARNING
Always operate this unit after the cut-off process.
Breakage of the cut-off tool can damage the machine and/or cause a fire.
Always check the operation of this unit before starting any machining of new
parts.

Be sure to perform cutting off with tool T100. If cutting off is performed by a tool
other than T100, the machine will be stopped by an alarm.
This unit may sometimes not be effective for some products, depending on their
shape.
This is a safety device. Therefore be sure to check the operation of this unit once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS if a malfunction occurs with any of the safety devices.

Refer to section “12-2-2. 6-Month Inspection” for details on the operation check.

Specifications

Minimum parts detection length ······ 5mm

Minimum parts detection diameter ·· 2mm
Detection load ································ 3.7N

Command

PATH1: M27 Broken cut-off tool detection

8-35
Operation

(1) After completing the cutting off process, command G0

X[#531+1.0] Z 0.5 on PATH1.
Command M27 “Broken cut-off tool detection ON”.
The detection probe moves to the center of the
guide bush.
(2) When the cut-off tool is damaged, the product will not
be cut-off and will remain in the guide bush.
Therefore, the detection probe strikes the product
and the broken cutoff tool detection sensor turns off.
In this case, alarm No. 1006 is displayed and the
machine enters the feed-hold state.
When the cut-off tool is not damaged, the broken
cutoff tool detection sensor will not turn off. In this
case, the machine proceeds to the next process.

Operation check
(1) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ) and remove the tool from tool post T100.
(2) Set the coolant nozzles toward the guide bush to prevent collision between the coolant
nozzles and the broken cutoff tool detector.
(3) Turn the main power ON ( ).
(4) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(5) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(6) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the MAIN COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the collet.
Then, insert a bar into the guide bush and make it project 20mm out from the end face
of the guide bush.

(8) Press the MAIN COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the collet.

(9) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp, and press the PROGRAM

key to display the program (MDI) screen.

(10) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(11) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH1.

(13) Key in and execute the following program.
T100 ;
G0 X–2.0 ;
M27 ;
(14) Verify if the device detects an error of the cut-off process and puts the machine into the
feed-hold state.
If the machine does not enter the feed-hold state, contact STAR MICRONICS.

8-36
Program example

Enter the M27 command in the position of the program.

[PATH1]
O1234 ; ················································ Program number
G266 A W S B Z X F ;
G125 ;
G300 ;
G170 ;
G40 G97 M9 ;
G99 M3 S500 ;
M11 ;
G0 Z0 T0 ;
M200 ;
M20 ;
M10 ;
G171 ;
T100 ; ·················································· Cut-off tool selection
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z 0.5 M25 ; ··················· Cut-off tool retract
M27 ; ··················································· : Broken cut-off tool detection

With M27,
(1) X1-axis will move to –124.0 (machine position).
(2) Y1-axis will move to the detecting position of +35.0 (machine position).
If breakage of the cut-off tool is detected at the position, an alarm is displayed
after the Y1-axis moves to 0.0 (machine position).
If breakage of the cut-off tool is not detected, the block with M27 will be
completed and the next block will be executed.

8-37
8-10 Preparatory Functions (G Functions)

G code table

PATH
G code Div. Function Group Remarks
1 2
G0 B Positioning (rapid traverse)
G1 B Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
B Circular interpolation CW
G2 01
O Helical interpolation CW
B Circular interpolation CCW
G3
O Helical interpolation CCW
G4 B Dwell
00
G 10 B Programmable data input
G 17 B X-Y plane selection
G 18 B Z-X plane selection 16
G 19 B Y-Z plane selection
Spindle speed fluctuation
G 25 B
detection OFF Command independently
08
Spindle speed fluctuation in a single block.
G 26 B
detection ON
G 28 B Reference point return
00
G 30 B Second reference point return
G 32 B Threading/ continuous threading
01
G 34 B Variable lead threading
Tool nose radius compensation
G 40 B
cancel
G 41 B Tool nose radius compensation left 07 Y-Z plane: Right
Tool nose radius compensation
G 42 B Y-Z plane: Left
right
Coordinate system setting
Available when using
G 50 B 00
Maximum spindle speed clamp constant surface speed
control
G 65 B Macro program call 00
G 66 B Macro modal call
12
G 67 B Macro modal call cancel
G 70 B Finishing cycle
G 71 B Outer diameter rough cutting cycle
G 72 B End face rough cutting cycle
Available only on Z-X
G 73 B Closed loop cutting cycle 00
plane.
G 74 B End face cut-off cycle
G 75 B Outer diameter cut-off cycle
G 76 B Automatic threading cycle
G 80 B Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G 83 B Front drilling cycle
G 84 B Front tapping cycle
10
G 85 B Front boring cycle
G 87 B Side drilling cycle
G 89 B Side boring cycle

8-38
 PATH
G code Div. Function Group Remarks
1 2
Outer· internal diameter turning
G 90 B
cycle
01
G 92 B Threading cycle
G 94 B End face turning cycle
G 96 B Constant surface speed control ON
Constant surface speed control 02
G 97 B
OFF
G 98 B Feed per minute (mm/min)
05
G 99 B Feed per revolution (mm/rev)
Command independently
G107 B Cylindrical interpolation 00
in a single block.
G112 B Polar coordinate interpolation ON
Command independently
Polar coordinate interpolation 21
G113 B in a single block.
OFF
G125 B Z1-axis coordinate system setting
Z2-axis coordinate system setting
G130 B
cancel
Z2-axis coordinate system setting
G131 B
for parts pick-up Command independently
Z2-axis coordinate system setting in a single block.
G132 B Star
for back machining
unique
Storage of Z2-axis workpiece
G133 B specifi
projection length
cation
Tool selection path command
G170 B
cancel
Tool selection path command Command independently
G171 B
(direct) in a single block.
Tool selection path command Available in MEMORY
G172 B
(indirect) mode.
G250 B Polygon machining OFF
20
G251 B Polygon machining ON
Command independently
G265 B Geometry offset input
in a single block.
Command independently
G266 B Machining data setting
in a single block.
Command independently
G267 B Tool life management data setting
in a single block.
Star Command independently
G300 B Auto cut-off
unique in a single block.
Specifi Command independently
G784 B X cross rigid tapping cycle
cation in a single block.
Command independently
G884 B Y cross rigid tapping cycle
in a single block.
Block skip on PATH 2 single Command independently
G900 B
operation in a single block.
Front/back off-center rigid tapping Command independently
G984 B
cycle in a single block.

8-39
Multiple G codes can be commanded in the same block together if they belong to
different groups (01 09).
If G codes belonging to the same group are commanded in the same block, only
the last one will be valid.
G codes with the mark are selected automatically when the power is turned on.
Division B is the standard version and division O is the optional version.
00 group, G125, G130, G131, G132, G133, G265, G266, G267, G300, G784,
G884, G900 and G984 are non-modal. All other G codes are modal.
"Non-modal" codes are G codes that are valid only for the commanded block.
"Modal" codes are G codes that are valid until another G code of the same group is
commanded.
Alarm “PS010” is displayed on the screen if a G code that is not listed in the table is
commanded.
Optional G codes become valid when functions that correspond to them are added.
Therefore, when commanding these optional G codes without adding the
corresponding function, the alarm “PS010” will be displayed.

8-40
8-10-1 Positioning (G0)

This command is used to move each axis from the current position to the specified position at a
rapid traverse rate.

Format

G0 X (U) Y(V) Z(W) C (H) ;

X, Y, Z and C Coordinate of the position after movement (the end point

Absolute command coordinate)

U, V, W and H Direction and distance of the movement based on the

Incremental command current position

(Example):
G0 X10.0 ; X position moves to 10.0.
G0 U 5.0 Z20.0 ; X position moves to 5.0 and Z position moves to 20.0 at the
same time.
G0 X10.0 W30.0 ; X position moves to 10.0 and Z position moves to 50.0 at the
same time.

8-41
8-10-2 Linear Interpolation (G1)

This command is used to move the tool (turning) linearly from the current position to the
specified position at the feed rate specified with F.

Format

G1 X(U) Y(V) Z(W) F ;

X, Y and Z Coordinate of the position after movement (the end point

Absolute command coordinate)

U, V and W Direction and distance of the movement based on the

Incremental command current position

F Feed rate

Refer to section “8-14-8 Turning” for details.

8-42
8-10-3 Circular Interpolation (G2, G3)

This command is used to move (turn the material) the tool along the commanded radius arc
from the current position to the specified position at the feed rate specified with F.

Command plane selection (G17, G18 or G19) to determine the machining plane
before commanding circular interpolation.
G18 (Z-X plane) is automatically selected when the power is turned on.
It is not possible to command an angle of 180 or more with R (arc radius value).
To command 180 degrees or more, divide the value into two or more and command
them in two or more blocks respectively, or specify R (arc radius) with a negative
value.

Format

G2/ G3 X(U) Z(W) R F ;

G2/ G3 Y(V) Z(W) R F ;

G2/ G3 X(U) Y(V) R F ;

X, Z : End point coordinates

of arc
R: Arc radius value
F: Feed rate along the arc

8-43
 Tool T100 T700
T1100 T1400
Plane T3100 T3500
G17;
G2
X(U) Y(V) R F ;
G3
X-Y
plane
(G17)

G18; G18;
G2 G2
X(U) Z(W) R F ; X(U) Z(W) R F ;
Z-X G3 G3
plane
(G18)
*When
turning
the
power on

G19; G19;
G2 G2
Y(V) Z(W) R F ; Y(V) Z(W) R F ;
G3 G3

Y-Z plane
(G19)

The plus (+) and minus ( ) axis directions shown in the above figures are when the
workpiece is stationary and the tools are moving.

Refer to section “8-14-9 Circular Interpolation” for details.

8-44
 Tool T1100～T1400
M143 M142
(When “X and Y axes (When “X and Y axes T2100 T2400
Plane changeover control” is changeover control” is
OFF) ON)
G18; G18; G18;
G2 G2 G2
Z-X plane X(U) Z(W) R F ; X(U) Z(W) R F ; X(U) Z(W) R F ;
G3 G3 G3
(G18)
*Selected
when
power is
turned on

G19;
G2
X(U) Z(W) R F ;
G3
Y-Z plane
(G19)

The plus (+) and minus ( ) axis directions shown in the above figures are when the
workpiece is stationary and the tools are moving.

Refer to section “8-14-9 Circular Interpolation” for details.

8-45
8-10-4 Helical Interpolation (G2, G3)

By commanding axis movement (excluding the axis of the selected plane) at the same time as
circular interpolation, it will be possible to move the tool onto the spiral and perform helical
interpolation.
Format
X-Y plane X(U) Y(V) Z(W) I J F ;
G17 G2/ G3
X(U) Y(V) Z(W) R F ;
Z-X plane X(U) Z(W) Y(V) I K F ;
G18 G2/ G3
X(U) Z(W) Y(V) R F ;
Y-Z plane Y(V) Z(W) X(U) J K F ;
G2/ G3
G19 Y(V) Z(W) X(U) R F ;

G17 X-Y plane, Z cutting axis

G18 Z-X plane, Y cutting axis
G19 Y-Z plane, X cutting axis
I X-axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc (with sign, radius value)
J Y-axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc (with sign, radius value)
K Z-axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc (with sign, radius value)
R Arc radius (without sign)

IF I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by

address R takes precedence and the others (I, J, K) are ignored.

Refer to section “8-10-3 Circular Interpolation (G2,G3)” for details on the tool path
in G2,G3.
Refer to section “8-10-3 Circular Interpolation (G2,G3)” for details on I,J,K, and R
addresses.
Refer to section “8-14-18 Helical Interpolation” on the example of use.

Drawing-1
By setting parameter No.1403-bit5, a
tangential velocity of the arc in a specified
plane or a tangential velocity including the
linear axis can be specified as the feed rate.
When parameter No.1403-bit5 = 0, an F
command specifies a feed rate along a
circular arc. (Drawing-1)Therefore, the feed
rate of the linear axis is as follows:

Length of linear axis

F
Length of circular arc

Determine the feed rate so that the linear

The feed rate along the circumference of two
axis feed rate does not exceed any of the
various limit values. circular interpolated axes is the specified feed
rate.

8-46
If parameter No.1403-bit5 = 1, specify a feed Drawing-2
rate along the tool path which includes the
linear axis.
(Drawing-2)Therefore the tangential
velocity of the arc is expressed as follows:

Length of arc
F
(Length of arc)2 + (Length of
linear axis)2

The velocity along the linear axis is

expressed as follows:
Length of linear axis The feed rate along the tool path is specified.
F
(Length of arc)2 + (Length of
linear axis)2

8-47
8-10-5 Dwell (G4)

This is used to delay the next block execution for a specified period set by the timer.

Format

G4 U ; or G4 X ; or G4 P ;

Timer setting
After the time specified with U, X or P has elapsed, the program will
proceed to the next block.
U, X and P G4 is non-modal, so it is only valid in the commanded block.
The time that can be specified is 0.001 to 99999.999 second(s).
Addresses U and X use second units, and decimal point input can be used.
Decimal point input cannot be used for address P.

Example: To command a dwell of 0.5 seconds, command G4 U0.5; or G4 X0.5; or G4 P500;.

U, X and P can be used for the timer setting. However, U is used as an example in
this manual.

8-48
8-10-6 Programmable Data Input (G10)

This command is used to set and change the tool wear offset amount.
When G10 is commanded by absolute input, the commanded offset amount will be the new tool
wear offset amount. If commanded by incremental input, the current tool wear offset amount
will be the one with the commanded offset amount added.

Format

G10 P X(U) Y(V) Z(W) R(C) Q ;

P Tool wear offset number

Absolute input:
X, Y, Z
The tool wear offset amount will change to the new commanded value.
Incremental input:
U, V, W The tool wear offset amount will be added to/taken away from the previous
value.
R Tool nose R amount will change to the new commanded value. (Absolute input)
The commanded value will be added to/taken away from the previous tool nose
C
R amount. (Incremental input)
Q Changes the imaginary tool nose position during the tool nose R compensation.

Example: G10 P2 X0.1 W 0.035 ;

It subtracts 0.035mm from the Z offset.

It sets the X offset to 0.1mm.
It sets the tool wear offset number to "02".

8-49
8-10-7 Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)

The plane selection G17, G18, G19 is required for the commands of circular interpolation and
tool nose R compensation.

Format

Command Plane
G17 X-Y Plane
G18 Z-X Plane (Selected when turning the power on)
G19 Y-Z Plane

Commanding G18 in a single block independently will switch back to the basic Z-X
plane.
The plane will not change in a block with no plane selection command.
Be sure to command G18 in order to restore the circular interpolation plane to the
basic Z-X plane after completing G17 and G19 machining process.
When commanding plane selection, cancel tool nose radius compensation (G41,
G42) with G40 beforehand.

G18 (Z-X plane) is selected when the power is turned on.

Refer to section “8-10-3 Circular Interpolation” for details on format.

8-50
8-10-8 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection ON/OFF (G26, G25)

This is used to trigger an alarm if the main and/or sub spindle speed fluctuates more or less
than the commanded speed.

Format

G26 P Q R I ; Spindle speed fluctuation detection ON

G25 ; Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF

The time from the spindle speed change command to the start of the
P
check. (Unit: ms)
The permissible ratio for determining that the speed reaches the
Q commanded value when the speed is commanded or changed.
The check will start after this. (Unit: 0.1%)
The permissible fluctuation ratio for determining that the rotation
R speed is abnormal. If this value is exceeded, an alarm will be triggered.
(Unit: 0.1%)
The rotation fluctuation range for determining that the rotation speed
I is abnormal. If this value is exceeded, an alarm will be triggered. (Unit:
min-1)

Create a program so that the spindle speed fluctuation detection ON (G26) is

commanded while the main or sub spindle is rotating.
Command in a single block independently.
Command G25 (Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF) before changing the
rotating direction or executing threading (tapping, die cutting).
When turning the main power ON, G25 (Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF) is
effective.
Commanding G26 will turn the spindle fluctuation detection ON, and G25 will turn
the spindle fluctuation detection OFF.
The commanded amount for P, Q, R and I will be stored in the parameters even if
G25 is commanded. Therefore, the P, Q, R and I data set (stored) in the
parameters will be available just by commanding G26.
Initial parameter data are shown below.
Parameter No. Setting data Unit Actual
P No. 4914 3000 ms 3 seconds
Q No. 4911 10 0.1% 1%
R No. 4912 20 0.1% 2%
I No. 4913 50 min-1 50min-1

The machine enters G25 state (Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF) when
turning the power on.
An alarm will be triggered when the parameter(R, I) exceeds the larger rotation of
the permissible fluctuation ratio for determining that the rotation speed is abnormal
and the rotation fluctuation range.

8-51
8-10-9 Reference Point Return (G28)

The commanded axis will move to the intermediate point by rapid traverse, and will then
return from the intermediate point to the reference point by rapid traverse.

Format

G28 U(X)････V(Y)････W(Z)･･････ ;

U(X)
V(Y) Coordinates of the intermediate point
W(Z)

Command this after offset cancellation.

For further details, please refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL published by CNC
manufacturer (FANUC).

8-52
8-10-10 The Second Reference Point Return (G30)

The commanded axis will move to the intermediate point by rapid traverse, and will then
return from the intermediate point to the second reference point by rapid traverse.
(The operation is the same principal as the reference point return (G28), with the exception of
returning to the second reference point.)

Format

G30 U(X) V(Y) W(Z) ;

U(X)
V(Y) Coordinates of the intermediate point
W(Z)

The second reference point must be set in the parameter (No. 1241) beforehand
with the machine coordinate system for each axis. (The initial value is 0 for each
axis.)
Command this after offset cancellation.

For further details, please refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL published by CNC
manufacturer (FANUC).

8-53
8-10-11 Threading (G32)

This is used to execute straight, taper, front (scroll) and continuous threading.

Parts of the lead at the beginning and end of threading will be incorrect due to
delays in the servo system (in accelerating or decelerating).
Therefore, the program must compensate for these inaccurate parts.
Single block stop will not work in the G32 command block.
G32 command cannot perform chamfering. (Use G92 or G76 for chamfering.)
The following operations are ignored during threading.
Feed override operation ･･･ It is considered to be 100%
Feed hold operation
Threading (G32) can only be commanded in G99 mode (feed per revolution).
Do not command an M code when commanding continuous threading. If an M code
is commanded, the machine will wait at that block and will not perform continuous
threading.
Do not command the constant surface speed control (G96) (the thread lead will be
inaccurate).

Format

G32 X(U) Z(W) F Q ;

X(U)
End point coordinate
Z(W)
F Thread lead
Shift amount of the threading start angle
Use this command when cutting multiple threads.
Q
This is not required when cutting a single thread.
Example: With Q180000, threading start angle shifts 180 .

For the example of use, please refer to “G92 Threading cycle” in section "8-10-18
Single Canned Cycle (G90, G92, G94)".

8-54
 Thread lead: L=0.8mm
δ1=3.0mm
δ2=0.8mm
Cutting depth per time =0.1mm

<Program example>
T300 M3 S1600 ;
G0 X8.0 Z8.0 T3;
G0 X3.73 ;
G32 W8.8 F0.8 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z8.0 ;
;
G0 X3.53 ;
G32 W8.8 F0.8 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z8.0;
;

8-55
 Thread lead: L=0.7mm
δ1=2.4mm
δ2=0.6mm
Cutting depth per time =0.2mm

<Program example>
T300 M3 S1400 ;
G0 X8.0 Z8.6 T3 ;
G0 X3.6 ;
G32 U2.0 W8.0 F0.7 Q0 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z8.6 ;
;
G0 X3.6 ;
G32 U2.0 W8.0 F0.7 Q180000 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z8.6 ;
;
G0 X3.2 ;
G32 U2.0 W8.0 F0.7 Q0 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z8.6 ;
;
G0 X3.2 ;
G32 U2.0 W8.0 F0.7 Q180000 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z8.6 ;
;

LZ/LX of taper thread

a 45 ····················· Lead is LZ.

a 45 ····················· Lead is LX.

8-56
 Thread lead: L=0.75mm
δ1=2.0mm
δ2=0.5mm
Cutting depth per time =0.15mm

<Program example>
T300 M3 S1200 ;
G0 X8.0 Z9.0 T3;
G0 X3.2 ;
G32 U1.5 W4.0 F0.75 ;
G32 Z17.0 F0.75 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z9.0 ;
;
G0 X2.9 ;
G32 U1.5 W4.0 F0.75 ;
G32 Z17.0 F0.75 ;
G0 X8.0 ;
G0 Z9.0 ;
;

8-57
8-10-12 Variable Lead Threading (G34)

This command is used to perform variable lead threading.

Parts of the lead at the beginning and end of threading will be incorrect due to
delays in the servo system (In accelerating or decelerating).
Therefore, the program must compensate for these inaccurate parts.
Single block stop will not work in the G34 command block.
G34 command cannot perform chamfering.
The following operations are ignored during threading.
Feed override operation It is considered to be 100%
Feed hold operation
Threading (G34) can only be commanded in G99 mode (feed per revolution).
Do not command the constant surface speed control (G96).
(The thread lead will be inaccurate.)
The "threading cycle retract" function is not available.

Format

G34 X(U) Z(W) F K Q ;

X(U)
End point coordinate
Z(W)
F Lead at start point
K Increment and decrement amount of lead per screw revolution
Shift amount of the threading start angle
Use this command when cutting multiple threads.
Q
This is not required when cutting a single thread.
Example: With Q180000, threading start angle shifts 180 .

This is the same method as threading with G32 except for the increment or
decrement of lead (K) command.

For further details on G34, please refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL published
by CNC manufacturer (FANUC).

8-58
8-10-13 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40, G41, G42)

Tool wear offset may not complete the offset when executing taper and/or arc turning by a tool
with rounded nose. These G codes can automatically calculate the error amount and execute
compensation.

Compensation on the Z-X plane

Command code

Position the parts drawing so that the machining direction is from right to left, and decide
the codes by using the bottom part from the central line of the following figure.
The offset direction of rounded tool nose will be determined by commanding the bar
position against the tool advance direction.

G code Tool offset direction

G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 When the bar is located on the right side of the tool advance direction
G42 When the bar is located on the left side of the tool advance direction

These G codes are modal. Do not re-command G41 in G41 mode.

Also, do not re-command G42 in G42 mode.
Command G40 for the area where tool nose radius compensation is unnecessary.
When using this function on the Z-X plane (selected when power is turned ON.),
select Z-X plane (command G18).

8-59
Data registration necessary for machine operation

Input the tool nose R measurement into address R of the tool wear
offset number to be compensated.
Tool nose R
dimension
“R”

Input imaginary tool nose No.0 No.9 into address T of the tool wear
offset number to be compensated.

Imaginary tool
nose number
“T”

When performing milling, input imaginary tool nose No.0 or No.9 into address T.

Refer to “7-9-1 Tool Wear Offset (Wear Offset) Screen” for details on setting the
tool nose R dimension and the imaginary tool nose number.

8-60
Startup block

STARTUP is the beginning block, which changes the mode from G40 to G41 or G42 mode.
This block executes tool nose radius compensation and the center of tool nose R moves to a
position vertical to the programmed path of the next block.
U and W are the directions of the imaginary tool nose as seen from the center of tool nose R.
Command “1” or “ 1” to the values of U and W.

8-61
Cancellation block

The G40 block is called "cancellation block"

Command U and K as instructed below.

Turning Boring
Axis
G41 (G42) (G41) G42
X-axis G40 U1 K1 G40 U1 K 1 G40 U 1 K 1 G40 U 1 K1

If there is no axis move-command in two continuous blocks during tool nose radius
compensation, it will act as a cancellation.
The tool nose R compensation will not function in the G71 G76 and G92 cycles.

The tool nose R compensation will not function by MDI input.

It is not possible to carry out internal machining of an arc that is smaller than the
radius of the tool nose.
Grooves smaller than the tool nose diameter cannot be machined.
When machining a step smaller than the radius of the tool nose, command the step
as a straight line.
When the offset No. 00 is commanded with a T code, the block will be a cancel
block.

8-62
Program example
Turning
Tool nose R dimension R=0.2
Imaginary tool nose number T=4

<Program example>
T200 ;
G0 X11.0 Z 0.5 T2 M3 S4000 ;
G1 X2.6 F0.2 ;
G41 U 1 W1;
G1 X4.0 Z0.2 F0.03 ;
G1 Z3.0 F0.04 ;
G1 X7.464 W3.0 ;
G4 U0.05;
G1 X9.6 F0.05 ;
G1 X10.6 W0.5 F0.03 ;
G40 U1 K1;
G0 X11.0 T0;

Boring
Tool nose R dimension R=0.1
Imaginary tool nose number T=1

<Program example>
T1400 ;
G0 X0 Z5.0 M3 S2000 ;
G50 X6.0;
G0 X9.4 T14 ;
G42 U1 W1;
G1 X8.0 W0.7 F0.03;
G1 W3.8 F0.04;
G2 X6.0 W1.0 R1.0 F0.03;
G1 X4.0 F0.04;
G40 U 1 K1;
G0 Z5.0;
G0 T0;

8-63
Compensation on the Y-Z plane

Command code

Position the product drawing so that the machining direction is from right to left, and
decide the codes by using the following figure that shows the bottom side of the product
from the central line. The offset direction of the rounded tool nose will be determined by
commanding the bar position against the tool advance direction.

G code Tool offset direction

G40 Cancel tool nose R compensation
G41 When the bar is on the left-side of the tool advance direction
G42 When the bar is on the right-side of the tool advance direction

These G codes are modal. Do not re-command G41 in the G41 mode.
Also, do not re-command G42 in G42 mode.
Command G40 for the area where tool nose radius compensation is unnecessary.
When using this function on Y-Z plane, select Y-Z plane by G19.

8-64
Data registration necessary for machine operation

Input the tool nose R dimension and imaginary tool nose number into the offset screen
beforehand
Input the tool nose R measurement into address R of the tool wear
offset number to be compensated.
Tool nose R
dimension
“R”

Input imaginary tool nose No. 0 No. 9 into address T of the tool wear
offset number to be compensated.

Imaginary tool
nose number
“T”

When performing milling, input imaginary tool nose No.0 or No.9 into address T.

Refer to “7-9-1 Tool Wear Offset (Wear Offset) Screen” for details on setting the
tool nose R dimension and the imaginary tool nose number.

8-65
Startup block

The beginning block, which changes the mode from the G40 to the G41 or G42 mode, is
called STARTUP. This block executes tool nose radius compensation and the center of the
tool nose R moves to a position vertical to the programmed path of the next block.
V and W are the directions of the imaginary tool nose as seen from the center of the tool
nose R. Command “1” or “–1” to them.

Cancellation block

A block of G40 is called "cancellation block"

Command the V and K as instructed below.

Turning Boring
Axis
(G41) G42 G41 (G42)
Y1-axis G40 V1 K 1 G40 V1 K1 G40 V 1 K1 G40 V 1 K 1

If there is no axis move-command in two consecutive blocks during tool nose R

compensation, it will act as a cancellation.
The tool nose R compensation will not function in the G71 G76 and G92 cycles.

The tool nose R compensation will not function by MDI input.

Internal machining of an arc smaller than the tool nose radius is not possible.
Grooves smaller than the tool nose diameter cannot be machined.
Command the step by a straight line when machining a step smaller than the radius
of the tool nose.
When commanding the offset No. by T code as 00, the offset amount will be zero.

8-66
Program examples
Turning

Tool nose R dimension R=0.2

Imaginary tool nose number T=2

<Program example>
T400;
G50 Y 24.0;
G19 G0 Y11.0 Z 0.5 T4 M3 S4000 ;
G0 X0;
G1 Y2.6 F0.2 ;
G42 V 1 W1;
G1 Y4.0 Z0.2 F0.03 ;
G1 Z3.0 F0.04 ;
G1 Y7.464 W3.0 ;
G4 U0.05;
G1 Y9.6 F0.05 ;
G1 Y10.6 W0.5 F0.03 ;
G40 V1 K1;
G18;
G0 Y11.0 T0;

Boring

Tool nose R dimension R=0.1

Imaginary tool nose number T=1

<Program example>
T1400;
G19 G0 Y0 Z5.0 M3 S2000;
G50 Y6.0;
G0 Y9.4 T14;
G41 V1 W1;
G1 Y8.0 W0.7 F0.03;
G1 W3.8 F0.04;
G3 Y6.0 W1.0 R1.0 F0.03;
G1 Y4.0 F0.04;
G40 V 1 K1;
G18;
G0 Z5.0;
G0 T0;

8-67
8-10-14 Coordinate System Setting, Maximum Spindle Speed Clamp (G50)

Coordinate system setting

Format
G50 X(U) Y(V) Z(W) C(H) ;

X, Y, Z and C Currently displayed absolute position will be changed to the

Absolute command commanded value.

U, V, W and H Currently displayed absolute position will shift by the

Incremental command commanded value.

In the case of commanding G50 for the C-axis, put the C-axis coordinate system
back to the original position before commanding M9 (C-axis OFF).
G50 is a non-modal code and is only available in the commanded block. Other G
codes, M, S and T codes cannot be commanded in the block with G50 command.
Command G50 after cancellation of the tool offset and tool nose R compensation.

Maximum spindle speed clamp

When using the constant surface speed control, the maximum spindle speed can be fixed.

Format
G50 S ;

Upper limit setting of maximum spindle speed

S The maximum spindle speed will be fixed at this upper limit value during
constant surface speed control (G96).

Example: G50 S2000 ; The maximum spindle speed is fixed at 2,000 min-1.

This command is only available during G96 (constant surface speed control) mode.
It does not function in G97 mode.

8-68
8-10-15 Macro Program Call (G65 G67)

Macro simple call

G65 P L <argument specification > ;

Program number to call

P This calls a macro program of a program number specified with address P.

Repetition count
L Macro program is executed “L” times. If “L” is omitted, 1 time is assumed.

When an argument is required for the macro program, use argument specification.

Refer to section “8-13 Macro Program (G65~G67)” for details.

Macro modal call

G66 P L <argument specification> ;

G0 (Axis movement command)

Program number to call

P This calls a macro program of a program number specified with address P.

Repetition count
L Macro program is executed “L” times every time axis movement command is
instructed. If “L” is omitted, 1 time is assumed.

When an argument is required for the macro program, use argument specification.

Refer to section “8-13 Macro Program (G65~G67)” for details.

G67: Macro modal call cancellation

8-69
8-10-16 Multiple Canned Cycles (G70 G76)

These are canned cycle commands that make programming easier. By commanding a finishing
shape program, the rough-cutting tool path midway through machining will be automatically
determined.

G code Name
G70 Finishing cycle
G71 Outer diameter rough cutting cycle
G72 End face rough cutting cycle
G73 Closed loop cutting cycle
G74 End face cut-off cycle
G75 Outer diameter cut-off cycle
G76 Automatic threading cycle

The G70 G73 commands are only valid in the Z-X plane in MEMORY mode.
When machining with G71 G73, G70 (Finishing cycle) can be used.
Tool nose R compensation, Direct drawing dimension programming and
Chamfering corner R are unavailable.
Command G0 in the block that follows the G70 to G76 cycle.
The F, S and T codes with G70 ignore the F, S and T codes in the block with G71,
G72 or G73. The F, S and T codes commanded between the sequence numbers
“ns” ~ “nf” will be valid instead.

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for more
information.

End face cut-off cycle (G74)

Cutting chip disposal is possible in the cycle shown below. Omitting the X (U) and P will
move the Z-axis only and it is possible to execute the deep hole drilling cycle.

8-70
 Format
G74 R(e) ;
G74 X(U) Z(W) P( i) Q( k) R( d) F(f) ;

Return amount (without a sign)

This command is modal, and is valid until the another value is commanded.
e
It can also be set by parameter (No. 5139), and the parameter value can be
changed by the program command.
X X component at point B
U Incremental amount of A→B
Z Z component at point C
W Incremental amount of A→C
Movement amount in X direction (radius specification).
i
This is commanded without a sign (+ or ).
Cutting depth in Z direction
k
This is commanded without a sign (+ or ).
d Relief amount of tool at cutting bottom
f Feed rate

Example:

<Program example>
G0 X8.0 Z0 ;
G74 R0.5 ;
G74 X2.0 Z20.0 P2000 Q5000 R1.0 F0.05 ;

Automatic threading cycle (G76)

This code performs the threading cycle shown in the diagram.

8-71
Format

G76 P(m)(r)(a) Q( dmin) R(d) ;

G76 X(U) Z(W) R(i) P(k) Q( d) F(L) ;

Repetitive count in finishing (1 99)

This command is modal and is valid until another value is commanded.
m
It can also be set by parameter (No.5142), although the parameter value will be
changed by a program command.
Thread chamfering amount 00~99
Regard the lead as L, command with a 2-digit numerical value 00~99 in the unit
r of 0.1L, within the range of 0.0L~9.9L. This command is modal and is valid until
another value is commanded. It can also be set by parameter (No.5130),
although the parameter value will be changed by the program command.
Angle of tool nose (angle of thread ridge)
One of six kinds of angles can be selected: 80 , 60 , 55 , 30 , 29 and 0 .
Specify this angle value as a 2-digit number. This command is modal and is valid
a until another value is commanded. Also, it can be set by parameter (No.5143),
although the parameter value will be changed by the program command.
“m”, “r” and “a” are all commanded together by address P.
Example) Command P021260 when m=2, r=1.2 and a=60 .
Minimum cutting depth
If the one-time cutting depth ( d n – d n–1) becomes smaller than dmin, it
dmin will be clamped to dmin. This command is modal and is valid until another
value is commanded. It can also be set by parameter (No. 5140), although the
parameter value will be changed by the program command.
Finishing allowance
This command is modal and is valid until another value is commanded. It can
d
also be set by parameter (No.5141), although the parameter value will be
changed by the program command.
Taper amount (difference of thread radius)
i
If i=0, straight threading will be performed.
Height of thread (Distance in X-axis direction is specified as a radial value).

d Cutting depth of 1st cut (radial value)

L Thread lead (same as G32)

8-72
Example:
Program example when machining M10 P1.5, threading length 14mm
(including the incomplete thread after chamfering)
When the tool is attached to Wedge-type 15mm overhang tool holder [0G102]

<Program example>
G00 X12.0 Z13.0 M23 ; ·······································
G76 P021060 Q50 R0.05 ; ···································
G76 X7.83 Z30.0 (W17.0) R0 P1010 Q500 F1.5 ; ·····
The value Z includes the shift amount (15 + 1 mm) of tool tip.

Adjust the value of “G0 Z__ ;“ according to the tool tip position.
Z in the program above is:
Z = 16.0mm (tool tip position) 3.0mm (clearance) = 13.0mm
Details of the command are as follows:
Minimum cutting depth 0.05mm (radius value)
Finishing allowance 0.05mm (radius value)
G76 P02 10 60 Q50 R0.05
Angle of tool nose 60
Chamfering amount 1 pitch
Repetitive count in finishing 2 times
G76 X7.83 Z30.0 (W17.0) R0 P1010 Q500 F1.5 ;
Thread lead 1.5mm
Coordinate of the cutting First cutting depth 0.5mm (Radius value)
end point Height of thread 1.01mm (Radius value)
Taper amount 0 (Radius value on thread)
Z= 16.0 mm (tool tip position) +14.0 mm (Thread length) = 30.0
W= 17.0mm (Z-axis movement distance when threading)
= 14.0 mm (Thread length) + 3.0mm (clearance)

8-73
Cutting feed rate will be fixed at 100% during threading cycle regardless of the
OVERRIDE switch .

By pressing the FEED HOLD button during threading when threading cycle
retract is used, chamfering will be executed immediately and the program will return
to the start point P.

If the START button is pressed again, the threading which is currently being
executed will be restarted from the beginning.

If “threading cycle retract” has not been added to the function, and the FEED HOLD

button is pressed during threading, the threading cycle will continue until point C,
where retraction is complete.

If the machine is in the M23 state (Chamfering ON), thread chamfering will be
performed at the moment G76 is commanded.
The parameter No.5130 is used as a chamfering amount when M23 (Chamfering
ON) is commanded during G92 (Threading cycle) operation.

8-74
8-10-17 Canned Cycle for Drilling (G80, G83~G85, G87, G89)

The canned cycles for drilling simplify the specified movement with a few blocks by using one
block command.

Command these codes on the Z-X plane (G18).

G87, 89 are not available on PATH2.

~ operations will be executed as one

cycle.
: Rapid feed traverse to point “R”.
: Hole machining to the bottom of hole
: Dwell time at the bottom of hole
: Return to the R point or initial point

For further details, please refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL published by CNC
manufacturer (FANUC).

Canned cycle for drilling cancel (G80)

Commanding G80 will cancel the canned cycle for drilling (G83 G85, G87, G89) and will
execute normal operation.

Front drilling cycle (G83)

Format

G83 Z(W) R Q P F ;

Z(W) Coordinate command at the bottom of hole

R Distance from the initial point to point R commanded by incremental value
Cutting depth for each cutting feed, commanded as a radial value (Command
Q
Q1000 when 1mm)
P Dwell time at the bottom of hole (Command P1000 for a 1-second dwell)
F Cutting feed rate

8-75
Movement pattern

With a Q command, the feed is intermittent. Without a Q command, the cutting feed
continues all the way to the bottom of the hole in one movement.

(1) If there is no Q command

(2) If there is a Q command

When parameter No. 5101-bit2=0

Set amount “d” into parameter No.5114.

When parameter No. 5101-bit2=1

Set amount “d” into parameter No.5115.

8-76
Front tapping cycle (G84)

Format

G84 Z(W) R P F ;

Z(W) The coordinate command at the bottom of hole

R Distance from the initial point to point R commanded by incremental value
P Dwell time at the bottom of hole (Command P1000 for a 1-second dwell)
F Thread pitch

Movement pattern

Front boring cycle (G85)

Format

G85 Z(W) R P F ;

Z(W) The coordinate command at the bottom of hole

R Distance from the initial point to the point R commanded by incremental value
P Dwell time at the bottom of hole (Command P1000 for a 1-second dwell)
F Cutting feed rate

Movement pattern

8-77
Side drilling cycle (G87)

Format

G87 X R Q P F ;

X Coordinate command at the bottom of hole

R Distance from the initial point to point R
Q Cutting depth for each cutting feed (command Q1000 when 1mm.)
P Dwell time at the bottom of hole (Command P1000 for a 1 second dwell)
F Cutting feed rate

Movement pattern

Side boring cycle (G89)

Format

G89 X (U) R P F ;

X(U) Coordinate command at the bottom of hole

R Distance from the initial point to point R commanded by incremental value
P Dwell time at the bottom of hole (Command P1000 for a 1 second dwell)
F Cutting feed rate

Movement pattern

8-78
8-10-18 Single Canned Cycle (G90, G92, G94)

By using this function, it is possible to simplify the cutting operation such as "cutting in
turning (threading) retract return" without commanding G0, G1 and G32.

As a principle, the M, S and T commands as cutting conditions shall be commanded

in the block before the blocks of G90, G92 and G94.
The canned cycle is valid in the area from the blocks after the G90, G92 or G94 block
to the block just before another G code in 01 group (G0, G1 etc.).

To cancel the canned cycle, command G0 (pay attention when in MDI mode).
The program will stop after completing “cutting in turning (threading) retract

return” while the SINGLE BLOCK key is lit.

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for more
information.

Single canned cycle table

(R): Rapid traverse, (F): Cutting feed

8-79
Threading cycle (G92)

Tool nose R compensation cannot be used.

An inaccurate thread will be created at the start and end of threading.
Thus, when determining the start and end positions, the following cautions will be
required.

In the drawing above, portions 1 at cutting start and 2 at cutting end will have
inaccurate leads. Use the following formula to calculate the approximate value of
1 and 2.
L S L: Tread lead
1= 4
1800 S: Spindle speed
L S
2=
1800

There are limits related to the spindle speed and thread lead.
L S Maximum cutting feed rate( mm/min)
Cutting feed rate will be fixed at 100% during thread cycle regardless of the
OVERRIDE switch .
If threading cycle retract has been added to the function, and the FEED HOLD button

is pressed during threading, chamfering will start immediately and the

program will return to start point P.

If the START button is pressed again, the threading which is currently being
executed will be restarted from the beginning.

If “threading cycle retract” has not been added to the function, the threading cycle will

continue until point C, where retraction is complete even if FEED HOLD button is
pressed during threading,

8-80
 G92 is a modal code, so the blocks from G92 onwards will execute threading cycle
only by a cut- in depth command in the direction of the X1-axis.
If M23 (chamfering ON) is active when G92 is commanded, the chamfering will be
performed.
The amount of chamfering can be set into parameter No 5130 in a range of 0.1 to
12.7L by 0.1L increments.
The parameter No. 5130 is used for “r : Chamfering amount” as well in G76
(Automatic threading cycle). This command is modal so if G76 changes the
chamfering amount, it is necessary to set parameter No. 5130 again.

(a) Straight thread cycle

Format
G92 X(U) Z(W) F Q ;

X(U)
End point coordinate
Z(W)
F Thread lead
Shift amount of the threading start angle
Use this command when cutting multiple threads.
Q
This is not required when cutting a single thread.
Example: With Q180000, the threading start angle shifts 180 .

The following cycle to will be executed.

Straight thread

<Program example>
T400 M3 S1000 ;
G0 X11.0 Z8.0 T4 M23 ;
G92 X7.37 W8.0 F1.25 ;
X7.02 ;
X6.72 ;
X6.52 ;
X6.37 ;
X6.24 ;
X6.22 ;
G0 T0 ;
;

8-81
(b) Taper threading cycle

Format

G92 X(U) Z(W) R F Q ;

X(U)
End point coordinate
Z(W)
R Distance from B to A’ in the X direction (Difference of the radius)
F Thread lead
Shift amount of the threading start angle
Use this command when cutting multiple threads.
Q
This is not required when cutting a single thread.
Example: With Q180000, the threading start angle shifts 180 .

The following cycle to will be executed.

For X, command the absolute position data of point B.

The sign of address R is specified by the direction viewing from point B to the line
reaching to A’.

Taper threading
<Program example>
T500 M3 S1000 ;
G0 X11.0 Z9.0 T5 M23 ;
G92 X9.0 W9.0 R 1.0 F0.8 ;
X8.6 ;
X8.4 ;
X8.2 ;
G0 T0 ;
;

8-82
8-10-19 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97)

This is used to control the spindle speed so as to change the constant surface speed value in
accordance with the X-axis position.

Constant surface speed control ON command

Format
G96 S ;

Constant surface speed (m/min for “mm” input, ft/min for “inch” input)
S
The constant surface speed control remains active until G97 is commanded.

Constant surface speed control OFF command

Format
G97 S ;

Spindle speed. (min-1)

S If S is not specified, the spindle speed will be set to the speed of the G96
command just before G97 command.

Maximum spindle speed clamp

Format
G50 S ;

Spindle speed. (min-1)

S The maximum spindle speed for the constant surface speed control is specified
with “S” after G50. This command will fix the maximum spindle speed.

Constant surface speed control cannot be used in the threading process.

G97 is selected when the power is turned on.

These codes are valid during T100 T600 (T700), T1100 T1400 selection
commands on PATH1, and T2100~T2400 selection commands on PATH2.
Maximum spindle speed clamp (fixing) is available during the command of constant
surface speed control ON (G96).
Also, this S value is memorized during constant surface speed control OFF (G97),
and will be valid again when the program is returned to G96 (this memory will be
deleted if the main power is turned OFF ( )).
Constant surface speed control regulates the surface speed in correspondence with
the X-axis moving command position in the program, and offset amount will not be
added.

8-83
8-10-20 Feed Function Specification (G98, G99)

These functions will set the cutting feed of the F command to mm/rev or mm/min.

G99 is selected on both PATH1 and PATH2 when the power is turned on.
The feed command for the power-driven tool will become valid with the rotation
command after the T code.

Feed per minute (G98)

Commanding G98 will execute the following F command in “mm/min”.

If G98 is commanded on PATH1, the feed unit of the X1, Y1 and Z1-axes will be “mm/min”.
If G98 is commanded on PATH2, the feed unit of the X2 and Z2-axes will be “mm/min”.

If G98 is commanded on PATH2 during M142 (X and Y-axes changeover control

ON), the feed unit of the X1, Y1 and Z2-axes will be “mm/min”.

For mm input, feed unit is [mm/min].

For inch input, feed unit is [inch/min].

Feed per revolution (G99)

Commanding G99 will execute the following F command in “mm/rev”.

If G99 is commanded on PATH1, F command for the X1, Y1, and Z1-axes will be executed
in “mm/rev” according to the main spindle rotation.
If G99 is commanded on PATH2, F command for the X2 and Z2-axes will be executed in
“mm/rev” according to the sub spindle rotation.

If G99 is commanded on PATH2 during execution of M142 (X and Y axes

changeover control), the feed unit of the X1, Y1 and Z2-axes will be “mm/rev”
according to the sub spindle rotation.

For mm input, feed unit is [mm/rev].

For inch input, feed unit is [inch/rev].

8-84
8-10-21 Cylindrical Interpolation (G107)

This function is for machining the rolled-out shape of a cylinder with the Z1 and C1-axes, or
the Z2 and C2-axes to perform machining with linear interpolation (G1) and circular
interpolation (G2, G3).

Format

G107 C ; Cylindrical interpolation ON (C: radial value)

G107 C0 ; Cylindrical interpolation OFF (Cancel)

[PATH1]
G1 G18 H0 W0 ; ·························· Linear interpolation, Plane selection for cylindrical
interpolation
G107 C ; ······························· Cylindrical interpolation ON, radial value command
(Set the C1-axis as a linear axis parallel to the X1-axis.)
G2(G3) Z(W) C(H) R F ;
G107 C0 ; ································· Cylindrical interpolation OFF
G18 ; ········································· Z-X plane selection

Command in a single block independently.

It is necessary to command G18 H0 W0 (Z-C plane) in advance.
Command G18 (Z-X plane) after G107 C0 (Cylindrical interpolation OFF).
Cylindrical interpolation cannot be commanded during the positioning mode (G0).
Command G1 in the same block with G107 (Cylindrical interpolation ON).

Refer to section "8-14-17 Cylindrical Interpolation" for details.

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for
details.

8-85
8-10-22 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G112, G113)

G112 (Polar coordinate interpolation ON) [Command on PATH1]

This function assumes that rotary movement of C1-axis is linear movement of Y1-axis
(hypothetical Y1-axis). When machining by the polar coordinate interpolation, the contour of
the workpiece looks as if it was machined with X1 and Y1-axes, by commanding movement for
X1-axis and C1-axis (hypothetical Y1-axis).

Format (Command G112 and G113 in a single block independently)

G112 : Polar coordinate interpolation ON

G113 : Polar coordinate interpolation OFF

[PATH1]
G112 ; Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G2 (G3) X(U) C(H) R F ;
G113 ; Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
;

G112 (Polar coordinate interpolation ON) [Command on PATH2]

This function assumes that rotary movement of C2-axis is linear movement of Y1-axis
(hypothetical Y1-axis). When machining by the polar coordinate interpolation, the contour of
the workpiece looks as if it was machined with X2 and Y1-axes, by commanding movement for
X2-axis and C2-axis (hypothetical Y1-axis).

Format (Command G112 and G113 in a single block independently)

G112 : Polar coordinate interpolation ON

G113 : Polar coordinate interpolation OFF

[PATH 2]
G112 ; Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G2 (G3) X(U) C(H) R F ;
G113 ; Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
;

Refer to section "8-14-19 Polar Coordinate Interpolation" for details.

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for
details.

8-86
8-10-23 Coordinate System Setting (G125, G130, G131, G132, G133)

G125 is not available on PATH2.

G130, G131, G132 and G133 are not available on PATH1.

Z1-axis coordinate system setting (G125) [Command on PATH1]

Format

G125 ; ······· The machining zero point is set by the Z1-axis machining start position set on
the MACHINING DATA screen (Z START POSITION).
G125 Z ··· The current position of the Z1-axis is set to the commanded absolute position.
G125 Z0 ···· The point where Z0 is commanded (bar end position at the time of the cut-off
process) becomes the absolute zero point.

Command G125 in a single block independently.

When only commanding G125, command after setting the data of the Z1-axis
machining start position (Z START POSITION).
When G125 is set, do not command G50 for the Z1-axis.
Before commanding G125, cancel the Z1-axis wear offset and tool nose radius
compensation.

Z2-axis coordinate system setting (G130, G131, G132, G133) [Command on PATH2]

Format

G130 ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting cancel

G131 ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting for workpiece pick-up (standard collet use)
G131 B ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting for workpiece pick-up (long boss collet use)
G132 ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting for back machining
G133 ; Storage of Z2-axis workpiece projection length

Command these codes in single blocks independently.

G131 B : collet boss length (B = Long boss collet Standard collet)
Command G131 while the Z1-axis has stopped and while the wear offset on
PATH2 is cancelled.
After commanding G131, the Z1-axis movement will not reflect on the absolute
position of the Z2-axis. To reflect the movement, command G131 again.
Command G131, G133 while the Z-axis has stopped on PATH1.

For details on the commanding method, please refer to “8-14-3 Parts Pick-up
Process”.

G131: Z2-axis coordinate system setting for workpiece pick-up

It makes the Z2-axis coordinate system match the Z1-axis coordinate system

8-87
G132: Z2-axis coordinate system setting for back machining
By commanding G132 at the time of back machining, Z2-axis coordinate system is set to
make the end face of the workpiece clamped by sub collet become Z=0 at the tip of the
selected tool.

When commanding G132, the following requirements are necessary beforehand.

1. Execute G133 (storage of Z2-axis workpiece projection length).
2. Set the Z2-axis geometry offset
E.g) Z=121mm 88mm (tool tip position) = 33.0

G133: Storage of Z2-axis workpiece projection length

Command G133 at the time of workpiece pick-up to save the Z2-axis workpiece projection
length.

Command G133 when setting Z2-axis coordinate system for back machining with
G132 command.

8-88
8-10-24 Tool Selection Path Commands (G170, G171, G172)

CAUTION
When the Y1-axis machining tool in the following condition is installed in T200,
T300, T400, T500, T600, T700, first retract the X1-axis in the plus direction from
the bar outer diameter, then command the tool selection after G171, G172.
Condition: When the tool tip position is in the minus Y1-axis direction
compared to the normal position of the X1-axis machining tool.

By commanding G171, G172 (tool selection path) in MEMORY mode, the tool selection
path in consideration of the condition of tool installation will be determined.

Refer to section “8-8 Tool Function (T function), Tool select position” for details.

Tool selection path command cancel (G170) [Command on PATH1]

This command cancels Tool selection path command (direct) (G171) or Tool selection path
command (indirect) (G172), moves the Y1-axis after moving the X1-axis to 40.0 regardless of
the value of “MATERIAL DIAMETER [#531]” on the MACHINING DATA screen.
However, only the Y1-axis will move if the X1-axis current position is in the plus direction
from 40.0 when commanding tool selection.

G170 is a modal command.

Command G170 in a single block independently.

Tool selection path command (direct) (G171) [Command on PATH1]

When the next tool selection is commanded, the tool moves to the tool selection position via
the position that is determined under consideration of the maximum value of the tool
geometry offset.

Format

G171 ; Tool selection path command (direct)

Tool selection path

When changing the tool, this command will move the X1-axis to the position of
[Bar diameter + 1.0mm + maximum geometry offset value of X1-axis] and will then move
the Y-axis.
However, only the Y1-axis will move if the X1-axis current position is in the plus direction
from the position commanded with G171, when commanding tool selection.

8-89
 The bar diameter must be set in “Bar diameter [#531]” on the MACHINING DATA
screen beforehand.
Set the maximum machining diameter as an initial setting.
G171 is a modal command.
Command G171 in a single block independently.

Refer to “7-10-5 Machining Data Screen” for details on setting on the MACHINING
DATA screen.

Tool Selection Path Command (indirect) (G172) [Command on PATH1]

When the next tool selection is commanded, positioning will be carried out to the tool
selection position via the position under consideration of the retractable amount of tools.

Format
G172 X ; X: Tool retract amount

Tool selection path

When changing the tool, this command will move the X1-axis to the position of [Bar diameter
+ 1.0mm + maximum geometry offset value of X-axis + X1 value commanded with
G172X ] and will then move the Y1-axis.
X value commanded with G172 X :The projection length from the standard tool nose
position is commanded as a diametrical value.
Example: If the projection length is 4mm, command “G172 X8.0”.

Value of the bar diameter must be set beforehand in “BAR DIAMETER [#531]” on
the MACHINING DATA screen.
Set the maximum machining diameter as an initial setting.
G172 is a modal command.
Command “G172 X “ in a single block independently.
When X is omitted in the G172 command, the retract amount will be considered as
“0”.
The retract amount commanded with G172 will be kept until the next time G172 is
commanded. This amount will be cancelled when the main power is OFF ( ) or by
emergency stop, but will not be cancelled by pressing the RESET key.
The retract amount commanded with G172 is the incremental value with a plus or a
minus sign.

Refer to section “7-10-5 Machining Data Screen” for details on setting on the
MACHINING DATA screen.

8-90
8-10-25 Polygon Machining (G250, G251)

This command rotates a bar material and the cutter (Y power-driven tool) of the polygon
machining unit [0M191] at a certain ratio, and a polygonal shape will be machined. [Command
on PATH1]

Format

G250 ; Polygon machining OFF

G251 P Q ; Polygon machining ON

Rotation ratio of P (Main spindle speed) and Q (Rotation speed of

Y-power driven tool)
Command “P1 Q2” under the rotation ratio 1:2.
Machining two planes (180 degrees) with one blade of the three-blade
P, Q cutter will form a hexagon. The machined surface will be slightly convex.
Command “P1 Q3” when the rotation ratio is 1:3.
Machining three planes (120 degrees) with one blade of the three-blade
cutter will form a nine-sided shape. The machined surface will be slightly
concave.

Polygon machining format

[PATH1]
M4 S ; Main spindle reverse rotation command
G25 ; Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF
M127 ; Reference point return of polygon axis
G50 A0 ; Setting the tool phase
G0 A ; Shifting the tool phase A3.6 = 360°
G251 P Q ; Polygon machining
Q (plus) for commanding Main spindle M3
Q (minus) for commanding Main spindle M4
G0 X0 ; Alignment of material and the polygon cutter
(Input “X 57.0” into the tool geometry offset)
;
G250; Polygon machining OFF

Refer to section “8-14-16 Polygon Machining” for details.

8-91
8-10-26 Geometry Offset Input (G265)

This function inputs geometry offset amounts into the geometry offset screen by program
commanding.

Format

G265 T X Y Z Q ;

T Tool number
X X1-axis geometry offset amount
Y Y1-axis geometry offset amount
Z Z1-axis geometry offset amount
Q Q1: PATH1, Q2: PATH2

Example: G265 T500 X10.0 Y5.0 Z1.0 Q1 ;

10.0 is inputted into the X1-axis geometry offset amount, 5.0 is inputted into the Y1-axis
geometry offset amount and 1.0 is inputted into the Z1-axis geometry offset amount of tool
T500.

Command G265 in a single block independently.

After commanding tool selection or performing tool selection operation, the offset
amounts inputted into the GEOMETRY OFFSET screen become effective.

This function can be commanded from either PATH1 or 2.

The offset values of the omitted geometry offset addresses will not be replaced.
E.g.: In the case of G265 T100 X0.5 Q1 ; the offsets of Y and Z will not be
replaced.

8-92
8-10-27 Machining Data Setting (G266)

Each item of machining data shown in the following table is inputted into the MACHINING
DATA screen.

Format

G266 A W S X Z F B ;

Common
Contents
Variable
A Bar diameter (mm) #531
W Part length (mm) #530
S Cut-off spindle speed (min-1) #529
X Cut-off end position (mm) #524
Z Z1-axis machining start position (mm) #525
F Cut-off feed rate (mm/rev) #522
B Cut-off tool width (mm) #528

Example: G266 A12.0 W26.0 S2000 X 2.0 Z25.0 F0.02 B2.0 ;

The following values will be set.

A Bar diameter #531 12.0

W Part length #530 26.0 (mm)
S Cut-off spindle speed #529 2000 (min-1)
X Cut-off end position #524 2.0 (mm)
Z Z-axis machining start position #525 25.0 (mm)
F Cut-off feed rate #522 0.02(mm/rev)
B Cut-off tool width #528 2.0 (mm)

Command G266 in a single block independently.

When starting operation of the machining program, set the data on the
MACHINING DATA screen in advance.
Command Machining data setting at the top of the program on PATH1.
Command all arguments. If an argument is omitted, alarm No. 3686 will be
displayed.

8-93
8-10-28 Tool Life Management Data Setting (G267)

Each item of tool life management data shown in the following table is inputted into the TOOL
LIFE MANAGEMENT screen by program command.

Format

G267 T D P C Q ;

Address word Contents

T Tool number
D D0: OFF (invalid) D1: ON (valid)
P Preset value
C Counter value
Q Q1: PATH1, Q2: PATH2

Example: G267 T500 D1 P30000 C1000 Q1 ;

The counter of T500 will be valid, 30000 will be inputted into the preset value and 1000 will
be inputted into the counter value.

Command this code in a single block independently.

T and Q cannot be omitted.
If omitted, alarm No. 3689 will be displayed.
On the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen, set the keep relay for the
tool unit to be used to “YES”, before inputting tool life management data.
Do not set the counter value with address C during continuous operation,
otherwise the counter function of the tool life management will be invalid.
Command address C in a mode other than continuous operation, such as MDI.

G267 is not available on PATH2.

8-94
8-10-29 Auto Cut-off (G300)

With this command, select tool T100 and execute the cut-off process based on the data on the
MACHINING DATA screen.

Format

G266 A W S X Z F B ;
G125 ;
G300 ;

Before commanding Auto cut-off, set the spindle speed, cut-off end position and
cut-off feed rate on the MACHINING DATA screen in advance.
The position of cut-off tool (tool tip) positioning becomes X24.0.
It is recommended to command Machining data setting (G266) at the top of the
program on PATH1.
Command this function in a single block independently.
Do not command Auto cut-off when performing cut-off with a tool other than T100.
Match the cut-off end point commanded with G266 and the X pos. at cut-off
commanded in the program.
Cut-off operation is performed when ABS pos. of X1-axis (including wear offset)
the cut-off end point commanded with G266.
After Auto cut-off is executed, the machine enters the M26, M5, M11, G97 and T0
state.
When using the stopper, do not command G300 in the machining program.
Otherwise, X-axis will retract and alarm No. 1722 will be displayed after the
cutting-off is complete

Refer to “8-14-2 Program Beginning” for details on the command method.

8-95
8-10-30 X Cross Rigid Tapping Cycle (G784)

A sequence operation of tapping can be carried out.

Machining Reverse revolution, retract

Format [Command on PATH1]

M38 ; Power-driven tool motor stops.

G784 X(U) F M36 S ;

X(U) Coordinate command at the bottom of hole (cutting depth)

F Thread pitch
S Tool rotation speed
Right-handed tapping
M36
Command M37 (reverse rotation) for left-hand screw.

Command M38 before commanding G784.

However, an alarm may occur when commanding M38 just before G784 block.
In this case, command G4 (dwell) or any code other than M38 between M38 and
G784.
G18 plane will be selected during execution of G784.
After completing a sequence operation of tapping, the work plane will return to the
plane selected before G784. However, if the sequence operation is suspended, the
G18 plane will still be selected.

G784 is not available on PATH2.

8-96
8-10-31 Y Cross Rigid Tapping Cycle (G884)

A sequence operation of tapping can be carried out.

Machining Reverse revolution, retract

Format [Command on PATH1]

G884 Y(V) F M36 S ;

Y(V) Coordinate command at the bottom of hole (cutting depth)

F Thread pitch
S Tool rotation speed
Right-handed tapping
M36
Command M37 (reverse rotation) for left-hand screw.

Command M38 before commanding G884.

However, an alarm may occur when commanding M38 just before G884 block.
In this case, command G4 (dwell) or any code other than M38 between M38 and
G884.
G17 plane will be selected during execution of G884.
After completing a sequence operation of tapping, the work plane will return to the
plane selected before G884. However, if the sequence operation is suspended, the
G17 plane will still be selected.

G884 is not available on PATH2.

8-97
8-10-32 Block Skip on PATH2 Single Operation (G900 J**)

At the time of the PATH2 single operation, the program will be skipped from the
“G900 J**” block to the sequence number “N**” block.

Format

[PATH2]

01234 ;

M200 ;
Program beginning
M20 ;

Back machining

T2900 ;
Part ejection

M4 S2000 ;
T2000 ;
G900 J50 ;
Part pick-up
Cut-off
N50 ;
M99 ;

When the format above is programmed, the program will stop with one cycle.

Then only press the PATH2 key to light up the lamp, and by pressing the START

button , only the parts which are picked up by sub spindle will be machined.

When machining parts picked up by the sub spindle with the T11 T14 back
machining tools, the program above cannot complete the machining process.

8-98
8-10-33 Front/Back Off-Center Rigid Tapping Cycle (G984)

A sequence operation of tapping can be carried out.

Machining Reverse rotation, retract

Format [Command on PATH1]

G984 Z(W) F M36 (M56) S ;

Z(W) Coordinate command at the bottom of hole (cutting depth)

F Thread pitch
S Tool rotation speed
<When machining with power-driven tool on PATH1>
Right-handed tapping: Command M36 (forward rotation).
Left-handed tapping: Command M37 (reverse rotation).
M36 (M56)
<When machining with power-driven tool on PATH2>
Right-handed tapping: Command M56 (forward rotation).
Left-handed tapping: Command M57 (reverse rotation).

Command M38 (M58) before commanding G984.

However, an alarm may occur when commanding M38 (M58) just before G984
block.
In this case, command G4 (dwell) or any code other than M38 (M58) between M38
(M58) and G984.
G18 plane will be selected during execution of G984.
After completing a sequence operation of tapping, the work plane will return to the
plane selected before G984. However, if the sequence operation is suspended, the
G18 plane will still be selected.

Refer to section “8-14-11 Cross Drilling / Cross Rigid Tapping” for details on the
example of use.

8-99
8-11 Auxiliary Functions (M Functions)

M code Table 1/3

PATH
code Description Remarks
1 2
M0 Program stop
M1 Optional stop

M3 Spindle forward rotation

M4 Spindle reverse rotation
PATH1: Main spindle
M5 Spindle stop
PATH2: Sub spindle
M6 Spindle clamp
M7 Spindle unclamp
M8 C-axis ON PATH1: C1-axis
M9 C-axis OFF PATH2: C2-axis
PATH1: Main collet
M10 Collet clamp PATH2: Sub collet
Note) Sub collet
maintains the
M11 Collet unclamp condition of turning
main power OFF

M14 Air blow ON

M15 Air blow OFF

M20 One cycle stop

M21 Error detect ON
M22 Error detect OFF
M23 Chamfering ON
M24 Chamfering OFF
Invalid when AIR CUT
M25 Coolant 1 ON
key is ON
M26 Coolant 1 OFF
M27 Broken cut-off tool detection ON
M27 Workpiece pick-up/parts ejecting detection

M29 Rigid tapping

M36 Power-driven tool motor forward rotation PATH2:

M37 Power-driven tool motor reverse rotation Available only in
M38 Power-driven tool motor stop M172 mode

M40 Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON PATH1/PATH2 wait for

M41 Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF each other.
Codes with the mark are automatically selected when the power is turned on.

CAUTION
Command M codes in gray ( ) in a single block independently.

8-100
 M code Table 2/3

PATH
code Description Remarks
1 2
M54 C1-C2 synchronous control ON PATH1/PATH2 wait for
M55 C1-C2 synchronous control OFF each other.
Power-driven tool motor for back forward
M56
rotation
Power-driven tool motor for back reverse
M57
rotation
M58 Power-driven tool motor for back stop

M62 Automatic bar feeder feed torque OFF

M63 Automatic bar feeder feed torque ON
M64 Chip conveyor ON
M65 Chip conveyor OFF

M68 Z-axis torque limiter ON PATH1: Z1-axis

M69 Z-axis torque limiter OFF PATH2: Z2-axis

M75 PATH 2 machining block skip valid

M76 PATH 2 machining block skip invalid
M77 Single block stop invalid
M78 Single block stop valid

M80 No barstock detection ON

M81 No barstock detection OFF
M82 Spindle synchr. rotation control ON PATH1/PATH2 wait for
M83 Spindle synchr. rotation control OFF each other.
M84 Parts conveyor ON
M85 Parts conveyor OFF

M88 Cutting feed override 100% ON

M89 Cutting feed override 100% OFF

M98 Subprogram call

M99 End of program
M100 High-accuracy machining mode 1 ON
M101 High-accuracy machining mode 1 OFF

M110 Sub collet clamp

M111 Sub collet unclamp

M117 Parts separator type A pick-up

M118 Parts separator type A ejection
Codes with the mark are automatically selected when the power is turned on.

CAUTION
Command M codes in gray ( ) in a single block independently.

8-101
 M code Table 3/3

PATH
code Description Remarks
1 2
M120 Parts ejector advance/retract
M121 Parts ejector advance (adjust)

Reference point return of power-driven tool

M127
motor

M142 X and Y axes changeover control ON PATH1/PATH2 wait for

M143 X and Y axes changeover control OFF each other.

M152 Spare M code 1 ON

M153 Spare M code 1 OFF
M154 Spare M code 2 ON
M155 Spare M code 2 OFF
M156 Spare M code 3 ON
M157 Spare M code 3 OFF
M158 Spare M code 4 ON
M159 Spare M code 4 OFF

M190 Stopper selection confirmation

M192 One block geometry offset cancel

M1000 Coolant 2 pump motor ON (adjust)

M1005 Coolant 2 for sleeve holder ON

M1006 Coolant 2 for sleeve holder OFF
M1007 Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit ON
M1008 Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit OFF
M1009 Coolant 2 for guide bush ON
M1010 Coolant 2 for guide bush OFF
M1011 Coolant 2 for back attachment ON
Ignored when AIR CUT
M1012 Coolant 2 for back attachment OFF
key is ON.
M1013 Coolant 2 for thread whirling ON
M1014 Coolant 2 for thread whirling OFF
M1015 Coolant 2 for sub spindle ON
M1016 Coolant 2 for sub spindle OFF

M1019 Initial coolant 2 supply (adjust)

M1020 Coolant 2 pump & valves 1 4 (adjust)

M200 M899 are “Wait” codes.

Codes with the mark are automatically selected when the power is turned on.

CAUTION
Command M codes in gray ( ) in a single block independently.

8-102
 M codes that are followed by after “M code : Description” in this
section includes the “Wait” function between PATH1 and PATH2 programs.

“Wait” functions (M code) can be cancelled by pressing the RESET key .

“Wait” functions are valid only when both PATH1 and PATH2 keys are
selected simultaneously.

In the case of when PATH1 or PATH2 is selected (single operation),

“Wait” function is ignored and the M code immediately finishes in the program
operation.

Program stop command

M0: Program stop PATH1: PATH2:

Commanding M0 in the MEMORY mode will stop the program execution after

the current block is completed. Press the START button to resume the
program.

The main spindle rotation will stop after the program stops by M0. However, if
"ROTATE SPINDLE AT M00" on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen
is set to YES, the main spindle will continue rotating.

Optional stop command

M1: Optional stop PATH1: PATH2:

When the OPTIONAL STOP key lamp is lit, the program will stop at the

position executed M1 in the MEMORY mode . Press the START button to

resume the program operation.

Spindle rotation commands

M3: Spindle forward rotation PATH1: PATH2:

This code will rotate the spindle in the forward direction.

M4: Spindle reverse rotation PATH1: PATH2:

This code will rotate the spindle in the reverse direction.

M5: Spindle stop PATH1: PATH2:

This code will stop the spindle rotation.

M3 and M4 cannot be commanded during C-axis ON (M8) or spindle clamp (M6)

commands. (Command M9 for M3 execution.)

8-103
Spindle clamp/unclamp commands

M6: Spindle clamp PATH1: PATH2:

This code will clamp the spindle.

M7: Spindle unclamp PATH1: PATH2:

This code will unclamp the spindle.

This cannot be commanded during the spindle rotation. (Command M5 for M6

execution.)

C-axis control ON/OFF commands

M8: C-axis ON PATH1: PATH2:

This code turns the C-axis control on.

M9: C-axis OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code turns the C-axis control off.

M5 operation is executed at the same time as M8 automatically.

M7 operation is executed at the same time as M9 automatically.

Collet clamp/unclamp commands

M10: Collet clamp PATH1: PATH2:

Commanding this code on PATH1 will clamp the main collet, and the MAIN

COLLET key lamp will light up.

Commanding this code on PATH2 will clamp the sub collet, and the SUB COLLET

key lamp will light up.

M11: Collet unclamp PATH1: PATH2:
Commanding this code on PATH1 will unclamp the main collet, and the MAIN

COLLET key lamp will turn off.

Commanding this code on PATH2 will unclamp the sub collet, and the SUB

COLLET key lamp will turn off.

8-104
Air blow ON/OFF commands

M14: Air blow ON PATH1: PATH2:

This code starts blowing air from the sub-spindle air blow unit.

M15: Air blow OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code stops blowing air from the sub-spindle air blow unit.

One cycle stop command

M20: One cycle stop PATH1: PATH2:

In every M20 execution, it adds a counter value by 1.

When the ONE CYCLE key lamp is lit, the program stops at the M20
execution.

Pressing the START button will resume the automatic operation.

Error detect ON/OFF commands

M21: Error detect ON PATH1: PATH2:

This code is used to avoid corner roundness.

M22: Error detect OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code is used to smoothly connect the blocks.

Chamfering ON/OFF commands

M23: Chamfering ON PATH1: PATH2:

Executes diagonal chamfering at the threading-end-position when executing G92
(Threading cycle), G76 (Multiple-thread cutting cycle).

M24: Chamfering OFF PATH1: PATH2:

Does not execute diagonal chamfering at the threading-end-position when executing
G92 (Threading cycle), G76 (Multiple-thread cutting cycle). Command when there is
a relief groove for thread.

8-105
Coolant ON/OFF commands

M25: Coolant 1 ON PATH1: PATH2:

Starts up the coolant motor, and coolant will be discharged.
The coolant will be discharged when the COOLANT1 key is ON, and will not be
discharged when the key is OFF.

When the chip conveyor is controlled from the machine side, this M code will
transmit the signal to turn the chip conveyor ON.

M26: Coolant 1 OFF PATH1: PATH2:

It stops the coolant 1 pump motor.
However, it does not stop when M25 is commanded on PATH2.

When the chip conveyor is controlled from the machine side, this M code will cancel
the signal to turn the chip conveyor ON.

Broken cut-off tool detection command

M27: Broken cut-off tool detection PATH1: PATH2:

This code executes broken cut-off tool detection after the parts pick-up process.

Workpiece pick-up/ejecting detection commands

M27: Workpiece pick-up detection PATH1: PATH2:

This is commanded while the sub collet is clamped.
If the workpiece pick-up process fails, the machine will enter the feed hold state and
an alarm will be triggered.

M27: Parts ejecting detection PATH1: PATH2:

This is commanded while the sub collet is unclamped.
If the workpiece ejection fails, the machine will enter the feed hold state and an

alarm will be triggered. After ejecting the parts, press the START button to
resume the operation.

M27 (parts pick-up detection, parts ejection detection) will be ignored while the AIR

CUT key lamp is flashing.

These functions cannot be used when Parts Ejector with Guide Tube [0M471~
0M475] is installed.

8-106
Rigid tapping

M29: Rigid tapping PATH1: PATH2:

The rigid tapping mode will be commanded.
<Program format>
;
G99 M5 ; Feed/rev. spindle stop
M29 S__ (Q__) ; S: Rigid tap rotation speed, (Q: Threading direction)
G84 W__ F__ ; W : Rigid tap machining length, F : Thread pitch
G80 ; Rigid tap mode cancel

Rigid tap rotation speed command (S command) is equal to 1500 min-1 or less.
The value of S F is equal to 10000 mm/min or less.
G99 commands are required in advance.
Command the blocks of M29 and G84 consecutively.
For left-handed tapping on PATH1, command “Q 1” in the M29 block.
For left-handed tapping on PATH2, command “Q 2” in the M29 block.

Power-driven tool motor rotation commands

M36: Power-driven tool motor forward rotation PATH1: PATH2:

The power driven tool will rotate in the forward direction.
Command the speed S at the same time.

M37: Power-driven tool motor reverse rotation PATH1: PATH2:

The power driven tool will rotate in the reverse direction.
Command the speed S at the same time.

M38: Power-driven tool motor stop PATH1: PATH2:

The power driven tool will stop.

In order to command rotation of the power-driven tool motor, command “S” in the
same block with M36 or M37 after main spindle stop (M5).

8-107
Z1-Z2 synchronous control commands

M40: Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON PATH1: PATH2:

With this code, the Z2-axis will move in synchronization with the Z1-axis when the
Z1-axis movement is commanded.

Do not issue the Z-axis movement command on PATH2 during M40 (Z1-Z2
synchronous control ON).
In M100 mode (high-accuracy machining mode 1 ON), M40 cannot be commanded.

This code can be cancelled by pressing the RESET key .

This code is only valid when the PATH1 and 2 keys are lit (Simultaneous operation

between PATH1 and 2) in MEMORY mode .

M41: Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code will cancel the M40.

C1-C2 synchronous control commands

M54: C1-C2 synchronous control ON PATH1: PATH2:

With this code, the C2-axis will move in synchronization with the C1-axis when the
C1-axis movement is commanded on PATH1.

Do not issue the C2-axis movement command on PATH2 during M54 (C1-C2
synchronous control ON).

This code can be cancelled by pressing the RESET key .

This code is available only when the PATH1 and 2 keys are lit (Simultaneous
operation between PATH1 and 2).

M55: C1-C2 synchronous control OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code will cancel M54.

8-108
Power-driven tool motor for back machining commands

M56: Power-driven tool motor for back forward rotation PATH1: PATH2:
This code will rotate the power-driven tool in the forward direction.
Command the spindle speed (S command) at the same time.

M57: Power-driven tool motor for back reverse rotation PATH1: PATH2:
This code will rotate the power-driven tool in the reverse direction.
Command the spindle speed (S command) at the same time.

M58: Power-driven tool motor for back stop PATH1: PATH2:

The power-driven tool will stop.

Command rotation of the power-driven tool motor in the same block with, or after
the tool selection command.

Automatic bar feeder feed torque ON/OFF commands

M62: Automatic bar feeder feed torque OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code turns the automatic bar feeder feed torque off.

M63: Automatic bar feeder feed torque ON PATH1: PATH2:

This code turns the automatic bar feeder feed torque on.

Chip Conveyor ON/OFF commands

These codes are valid for the chip conveyor connected to the terminal block XT931 (wire
numbers 70, 71) for the start/stop signal.

M64: Chip conveyor ON PATH1: PATH2:

This will transmit the signal to turn on the chip conveyor.

M65: Chip conveyor OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This will cancel the signal transmitted to turn on the chip conveyor.
The machine is in the M65 state "Chip conveyor OFF" when turning the power on.

The machine unconditionally enters M65 status "Chip conveyor OFF" when the
cutting room door is open.

8-109
Z-axis torque limiter ON/OFF commands

M68: Z-axis torque limiter ON PATH1: PATH2:

When commanded on PATH1, this code will limit the Z1-axis servo motor torque.
When commanded on PATH2, this code will limit the Z2-axis servo motor torque.
At this time, the rapid traverse rate of all axes will decelerate to 15 % or less.
If an alarm is triggered, it can be cancelled by turning the main power (main
breaker) OFF.

M69: Z-axis torque limiter OFF PATH1: PATH2:

When this code is commanded, it will cancel the limit for the servo motor torque.

Do not put the Z-axis movement command in the same block with M68 or M69.

8-110
PATH2 machining block skip commands

M75: PATH2 machining block skip valid PATH1: PATH2:

The slash code "/" blocks until “PATH2 machining block skip cancel” (M76) will be
skipped.
The skip conditions are classified into types in shown in the following tables.
They are based on the data inputted into the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting)
screen.
YES CHECK PARTS EJECT SIGNAL AT M75
NO USE PARTS EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER

Executes “skip”
AIR CUT key is flashing
Sub collet unclamp Executes “skip”
Sub collet clamp + Push rod advance Executes “skip”
Sub collet clamp + Push rod retract Does not execute “skip”

NO CHECK PARTS EJECT SIGNAL AT M75

YES USE PARTS EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER

Executes “skip”
AIR CUT key is flashing
Unclamp Executes “skip”
Sub collet
Clamp Does not execute “skip”

NO CHECK PARTS EJECT SIGNAL AT M75

NO USE PARTS EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER

Executes “skip”
AIR CUT key is flashing
Unclamp Executes “skip”
Sub collet
Clamp Does not execute “skip”

While the AIR CUT key is flashing, the blocks with a slash code “/” until
PATH2 machining block skip invalid (M76) will be skipped even when the sub collet
is clamped.
Do not use slash codes “/” in the block which comes after the M76 block.
If slash codes are used, the block will be skipped.
When M81 is commanded in the M75 state, an alarm will be triggered.
Command M81 after commanding M76.

If there is a succession of slash code "/" blocks, all of them will be skipped.

M76: PATH2 machining block skip invalid PATH1: PATH2:

This code will cancel M75.

8-111
SINGLE BLOCK commands

M77: Single block stop invalid PATH1: PATH2:

This code will not stop the operation until the next single block stop valid command

(M78) even if the SINGLE BLOCK key lamp is lit.

M78: Single block stop valid PATH1: PATH2:

This code will cancel the single block stop invalid (M77).

No barstock detection commands

M80: No barstock detection ON PATH1: PATH2:

When the “no barstock” signal is transmitted, this code executes the programs with
slash codes "/" until M81 “no barstock detection OFF”.
When the “no barstock” signal is not transmitted, this code skips the programs with
slash codes "/" until M81 “no barstock detection OFF”.

In the initial setting, M80 is not a “Wait” command.

To use M80 on PATH2 as a “Wait” command, set “USE M80 AS WAITING CODE”
on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen to “YES”.
Programs with "/" codes between M80 and M81 will not be executed when the “no
barstock” signal is not transmitted.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

M81: No barstock detection OFF PATH1: PATH2:

When the “no barstock” signal is transmitted, this code executes the programs with
slash codes "/" from M80. During “no barstock”, add the slash codes "/" to the
necessary programs between M80 and M81.

8-112
Spindle synchronous rotation control ON/OFF commands

M82: Spindle synchronous rotation control ON PATH1: PATH2:

Main and sub spindles are controlled by synchronous rotation or phase
synchronization.

Be sure to put both the main and sub spindles into the G25 state when
commanding M82.
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection is necessary during spindle
synchronous rotation control or phase synchronization control, execute G26 after
commanding M82.
To use phase synchronization control with M82, set “PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION
AT M82” on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen to “YES”.
Command M82 during the spindle rotation.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.
Refer to section “8-14 Program Pattern, Program Pattern” for details of the
program example.

M83: Spindle synchronous rotation control OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code cancels synchronous rotation control or phase synchronization control of
the main and sub spindles.

Parts Conveyor Command

M84: Parts conveyor ON PATH1: PATH2:

This will start up the parts conveyor.
It will stop automatically in approximately 8 seconds (Set in the PMC TIMER No.6).

M85: Parts conveyor OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This will stop the parts conveyor.

Cutting feed override 100% ON/OFF commands

M88: Cutting feed override 100% ON PATH1: PATH2:

This code executes the cutting feed rate with a commanded program value.
The override (0 150%) setting will be ignored, and set to 100% instead.

Cutting feed override 100% ON is invalid when the torque limiter of servo monitor
function is ON.

M89: Cutting feed override 100% OFF PATH1: PATH2:

The cutting feed rate will be the speed obtained by multiplying the override
(0 150%) by the commanded program value, and override setting will be available.

8-113
Sub program call command

M98: Subprogram call PATH1: PATH2:

e.g.) M98 P51234; will call the program O1234 and repeat it five times.

End of program command

M99: End of program PATH1: PATH2:

This is commanded at the ends of the main and sub programs on PATH1.
When this is commanded in the main program on PATH1, the program will return
to the head of the main program on PATH1. When commanded in the sub program
on PATH1, the program will also will return to the main program on PATH1.

High-accuracy machining mode ON/OFF

M100: High-accuracy machining mode 1 ON PATH1: PATH2:

This is used to make the movement smooth on the PATH which is not performing
machining. This will prevent influence of the movement on the machining surface.

This code cannot be commanded during M40 (Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON).

This code can be cancelled by pressing the RESET key .

M101: High-accuracy machining mode 1 OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This code turns off “High-accuracy machining mode” and selects standard mode.

Sub-collet clamp/unclamp commands

M110: Sub-collet clamp PATH1: PATH2:

This code will clamp the sub collet, and the SUB COLLET key will light up.

M111: Sub-collet unclamp PATH1: PATH2:

This code will unclamp the sub collet, and the SUB COLLET key lamp will
turn off.

These codes are available only when the PATH1 and 2 keys are lit (simultaneous

operation between PATH1 and 2) in MEMORY mode .

8-114
Parts separator type A pick up/ejection commands

M117: Parts separator type A pick up PATH1: PATH2:

M117 A . B . F
The Z2-axis will move to the coordinate specified with address A at the rapid
traverse rate.
The Z2-axis will move to the coordinate specified with address B at the feed rate
specified with address F.

M118: Parts separator type A ejection PATH1: PATH2:

1) The chute moves and positions into place.
2) Z2-axis retracts.
3) The chute turns in the ejecting direction while Z2-axis moves to parts ejecting
position
4) After 1.0 second, the chute turns back towards the original position.
5) The chute turns to 45 position while X2-axis moves.

These codes cannot be commanded when no program is registered in PATH2 of

CNC memory.
Register one or more programs in PATH2 of CNC memory before commanding
M117 or M118.

Parts ejector advance/retract command

M120: Parts ejector advance/retract PATH1: PATH2:

The push rod of the parts ejector retracts after it advanced with this code.
Command this code at T2000 or T2900 position during the sub spindle stop and
unclamp (M11) to eject the part.

Parts ejector advance (adjust) command for the sub spindle PATH1: PATH2:

M121: Parts ejector advance (adjust)

The push rod of the parts ejector advances with this code.
Command this when replacing the ejector pin (the push rod will retract with
M120). Command this code at T2000 or T2900 position while the sub spindle is
stopped and sub collet is unclamped (M11).

Reference point return of power-driven tool motor PATH1: PATH2:

M127: Reference point return of power-driven tool motor

This code will execute the reference point return of power-driven tool motor.

8-115
X and Y-axes changeover control ON/OFF commands

M142: X and Y-axes changeover control ON PATH1: PATH2:

This will control commands for the X1 and Y1-axes on PATH1 by a command on
PATH2.

Do not command X1 or Y1-axis movement on PATH1 during M142 (X1 and

Y1-axes changeover control ON).
When commanding G984 (back off-center rigid tapping) on PATH2, Y1-axis control
on PATH2 is not possible.

M143: X and Y-axes changeover control OFF PATH1: PATH2:

This will cancel M142.

Do not command Z2-axis movement in 2 blocks (3 blocks during tool nose R

compensation) from M143 block on PATH2 during M142 (X1 and Y1-axes
changeover control ON).

Spare M code ON/OFF commands

M152: Spare M code 1 ON

This command turns on the contact signal of the spare M code output 1. (It closes).

M153: Spare M code 1 OFF

This command turns off the contact signal of the spare M code output 1. (It opens).

M154: Spare M code 2 ON

This command turns on the contact signal of the spare M code output 2. (It closes).

M155: Spare M code 2 OFF

This command turns off the contact signal of the spare M code output 2. (It opens).

M156: Spare M code 3 ON

This command turns on the contact signal of the spare M code output 3. (It closes).

M157: Spare M code 3 OFF

This command turns off the contact signal of the spare M code output 3. (It opens).

M158: Spare M code 4 ON

This command turns on the contact signal of the spare M code output 4. (It closes).

M159: Spare M code 4 OFF

This command turns off the contact signal of the spare M code output 4. (It opens).

8-116
Stopper selection confirmation command

M190: Stopper selection confirmation PATH1: PATH2:

This code confirms that T900 (stopper) is selected at the program beginning when
T900 is used as the stopper.
If T900 is not selected, alarm No. 1722 will be triggered.

CAUTION
Be sure to command this code at the program beginning when using Stopper
[0M497].

One block geometry offset cancel command

M192: One block geometry offset cancel PATH1: PATH2:

This makes geometry offset invalid in G0 and G1 commanded in the same block as
M192.

Format
M192 G Z (F );
G G0 or G1
Z(Absolute command) Coordinate value after movement (End point coordinate)
F Feed rate (for G1)

This M code is a non-modal command. This is valid only in the commanded block.
Command this code at the beginning of the block.
Be sure to command this code together with G0 or G1.

Use
When the tool tip position of each tool mounted on the front drilling unit differs depending
on the tool, and the geometry offset of Z direction has been set, collision can occur between
the workpiece and the tool adjacent to the currently selected tool at the time of tool
selection. In order to prevent the above situation, the geometry offset should be cancelled
and the workpiece should be retracted.
Sample program
[PATH1]
T1100 ;
:
Machining program
:
M192 G0 Z 1.0 ; ················
T1200 ;
G0 Z 1.0 ;

8-117
 Difference between the Z1-axis movement with M192 and without M192

Coolant 2 pump motor ON (for adjustment)

M1000: Coolant 2 pump motor ON (adjust) PATH1: PATH2:

This code adjusts the discharge pressure of coolant 2 motor of Coolant Unit
2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].

The coolant 2 pump motor will start up with this M code, but coolant will not be
discharged.

Press the RESET key to cancel this M code.

Coolant 2 ON/OFF Commands PATH1: PATH2:

Type No. of
Commands Optional
Accessories
M1005: Coolant 2 for sleeve holder ON
【0M466】 13-18
M1006: Coolant 2 for sleeve holder OFF
M1007: Coolant 2 for back 4 spindle unit ON
【0M467】 13-19
M1008: Coolant 2 for back 4 spindle unit OFF
M1009: Coolant 2 for guide bush ON
【0M468】 13-20
M1010: Coolant 2 for guide bush OFF
M1011: Coolant 2 for back attachment ON
【0M469】 13-21
M1012: Coolant 2 for back attachment OFF
M1013: Coolant 2 for thread whirling ON
【0M495】 13-22
M1014: Coolant 2 for thread whirling OFF
M1015: Coolant 2 for sub spindle ON
【0M461】 13-15
M1016: Coolant 2 for sub spindle OFF

8-118
 Coolant 2 ON/OFF should be commanded on the same PATH.
The standard coolant 1 pump motor will also start up with these M codes.
Coolant 2 OFF command will not stop the coolant 1 pump motor.

The coolant will be discharged when the COOLANT 2 key is turned ON, and will not
be discharged when the COOLANT 2 key is OFF.

Initial coolant supply (for adjustment)

M1019: Initial coolant supply (adjust) PATH1: PATH2:

This is to be commanded when carrying out initial coolant supply of Coolant Unit
2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].

Refer to section “13-14 Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431], Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa
[0M462], Coolant Valve 2.5MPa [0M493], Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488]
Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489]” or “13-14 Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457],
Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa [0M494], Coolant Valve 6.9MPa [0M492], Coolant Unit
Signal Cable [0M488]” for details.

Coolant 2 pump & valves1 4 ON (for adjustment)

M1020: Coolant 2 pump & valves1 4 ON (adjust) PATH1: PATH2:

This is for commanding when refilling coolant for Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or
Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].

Refer to section “13-14 Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431], Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa
[0M462], Coolant Valve 2.5MPa [0M493], Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488]
Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489]” or “13-15 Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457],
Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa [0M494], Coolant Valve 6.9MPa [0M492], Coolant Unit
Signal Cable [0M488]” for details.

8-119
Wait commands

M200 M899: Wait

All the M codes from M200 to M899 can be used as wait commands.
During simultaneous operation between PATH1 and 2, the program will not
proceed to the next block until the same 3-digit M code on PATH1 is executed on
PATH2.

If one of the following alarms is triggered during the execution of a wait M code
(including M40, M41, M80, M82, M83, M142 and M143), the machine will enter the
single block stop state and will force those waiting to finish.
- Alarm No.2071 ················ LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL
- Alarm No.2075 ················ NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER
- Alarm No.2077 ················ PART EJECT ERROR

When the keep relay “K02-bit1” is set to “1”, which resumes program operation
without returning to the head of the program, cancel the alarm and check that the
wait M codes match each other. Then resume the program operation.
If the wait M codes do not match, resume the program after moving the cursor to the

same wait M code on the other PATH in EDIT mode.

8-120
8-12 Sub Program Function

In the case of a fixed command sequence or the repeat patterns existing in the program, the
program can be simplified by registering them into the CNC memory as a sub program.

Commanding method

M98 P ;

Sub program number (4-digit integral number)

Repeating times (4-digit available) ········· Can be omitted when a single call.
Sub program call

M99 P ;
When this is commanded at the end of the sub program, the program will return to the
sequence number specified with P in the calling program.
When this is commanded in the main program, the program will return to the sequence
number specified with P in the main program.

The sub program can only be called in MEMORY mode.

It cannot be called in MDI mode.

Multiplicity (Nesting) of sub program calls can be up to 10 levels.

To call a sub program with a program number of 5-digit or more,

M98 P L

Sub program number Repeating times

(integral number with 5-digit or more)
To call a file name,
M98 < > L

File name of a sub program Repeating times

Program flow

<Main program> To sub program <Sub program>

O2234 ； O3234 ;
N1; N1 ;
N2;
N2 ;
N3 M98 P33234;
N4； N3 ;
N5; N4 M99 ;
N6 M99; To main program

8-121
8-13 Macro Program (G65 G67)

It is possible to store the special programs covering a group of instructions (commands) in the
part program memory. A sequence of programs can be called and executed with G65 or G66.
This special program is called a macro program. Follow the same way as the sub program to
create and record the macro program.

However, the following points are different from the sub program.
"Variables" can be used
"Operations" are available for variables and constants
"Controls" such as conditional jump are available
These functions can create macro programs with complex operations or judgments over a wide
range of applications.
Specifying the arguments when calling the macro program from the main program allots the
actual numbers to the value of variables in the macro program.
Therefore, the macro program will be executed as a series of concrete programs accompanied
by tool movement. The word "macro" may be used in this manual instead of “macro program”.

8-122
Macro program call command

The table below shows five ways to call a macro program.

No. Calls Code Remarks

1 Simple call G65
2 Modal call G66 G67: Cancel
3 Optional G code call G
4 M code call M
5 T code call T Up to 4-digit

Macro Simple Call (G65)

G65 P L <argument specification> ;

P: Program number to call
L: Repetition count (1 time if “L” is omitted)
With the command above, the macro program specified with P is called and repeated “L”
times.
Use <argument specification > when the arguments must be specified in the macro
program.

Macro Modal Call (G66, G67)

G66 P L <argument specification> ;

P: Program number to call
L: Repeat count of operation (1 time if “L” is omitted)
With the command above, the macro program specified by P will be called and repeated
“L” times. After that, the specified macro program will be executed “L” times every time
an axis movement command is executed.
Use <argument specification > when the arguments must be specified in the macro
program.

G67 ;
With the command above, the modal call mode will be canceled.

The differences between the macro program call (G65, G66) and the sub program
call (M98) are shown below.
With a macro program call, an argument (data passed to a macro) can be specified.
However, an argument cannot be specified with a sub program call.
In the case when another CNC command is specified in a block of sub program
call, execute the CNC command first, and then call the sub program.
However, a macro program in the block of macro program call can be called without
executing any program.
In the case when another CNC command is specified in a block of sub program
call, the operation stops by single block execution.
However, the operation in a block of macro program call does not stop by single
block execution.

8-123
Argument specification

Argument represents the actual value given to the variable used in the macro program.
Therefore, the object of argument specification is to assign the actual numbers to each
variable.
This argument assignment is provided with two types, type I and II. Both can be used freely.

Argument Specification I
Argument specification is possible with all the addresses (21 altogether) excluding G, L, N,
O and P. Only I, J and K must be specified in alphabetical order.
All other addresses can be specified in any order.

Argument Specification II
10 sets of arguments composed of A, B, C and I, J, K as 1 set can be assigned.
In this case, it is necessary to specify the arguments of I, J and K in alphabetical order.

Argument specification types I and II can be mixed and used.

If the same variables are repeated by mistake, the latter argument will be effective.
Only specify I, J and K in alphabetical order for both type I and II.
All other addresses can be specified in any order.
Signs (plus, minus) and decimal points can be used in the argument specification for all
the addresses.
In the block with G65 or G66, be sure to command G65 or G66 before specifying any
arguments.

Macro Program Summary

Combining the following command groups creates a macro program.

Variables
Local variables (#1~#33)
Common variables (#100~#199, #500~#999)
System variables (#1000~)

Operations
Arithmetic operations ( , , , )
Function operations (SIN, COS, ROUND, )

Controls
Divergence commands (IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTO n)
Repetition commands (WHILE [<Condition expression>] DO m)
These commands can create macro programs with complex operations and/or judgments
over a wide range of applications. Thus, the macro programs can be made by
programming the CNC functions themselves, such as simple machining cycles similar to
sub programs and complex canned cycles, and they will be stored in the unit.

8-124
Variables

Specify the address with variables instead of numerical values in the macro programs in
advance. When these variables are called during execution, the value stored in the variable
area can be taken out as the address value.
Variables comprise of local variables, common variables and system variables and can be
distinguished by their respective variable numbers.
Actual numerical values can be put into the local variable by the argument specification on
macro call commanded by G65 or G66.

Local Variables (#1 #33)

The local variables are used locally in each individual macro.
This means that the variable area (#1 #33) is maintained independently every time macro
call is carried out. Certain values and/or calculation results in the macro can be stored by
argument specification.
Thus, the variables #1, #2, #3, … will be different values if the time they are called is
different even if they are in the same macro.
These local variables will be reset and recorded by argument specification in every macro
call. However, unspecified variables will become <empty> (vacant). When connecting
power to and resetting the machine, all local variables will be <empty> (vacant).

8-125
Common Variables (#100 #199, #500 #999)
Common variables can be used commonly for all macros.
You can refer to the results calculated by certain macro in the other macro.
Common variables are classified into the following two types of which clear conditions
differ from each other.

#100~#199: Common variables are <empty> when connecting power to the machine.
However, it will be <empty> even with the reset operation when the
parameter No.6001-bit6=0 is set.
#500~#999: Common variables will not be cleared by the operation above.

Do not use the following macro variables because they are being used as standard.
PATH1 side: #144~#150, #521, #522, #524, #525, #527~#531.
PATH2 side: #137, #138, #143 #150, #526
To make the common variables (#100~#199) empty with the reset operation, set the
parameter “No.6001-bit6=0”.

System Variables
The variables, of which applications are determined by the system, are described below.

Interface input signal : #1000 #1031

#1032~#1035
Interface output signal : #1100~#1131
#1132~#1135

Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center

System) published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for details.

8-126
Operations

Calculation is possible with the following operations in variables or between variables and
constants.
The operation formula is expressed by: #i=<formula>
It is a general arithmetic operation, which combines variables and constants with arithmetic
operators and/or functions. The following operators and functions can be used.
The constants can also be substituted for #j and #k in the following format instead.

Constants Definition and Substitution

#i = #j Definition, Substitution
#i = #〔#j + #k〕 Indirect specification

Addition Operation
#i = #j + #k Addition
#i = #j – #k Subtraction
#i = #j OR #k Logical sum (at every bit of 32 bits)
#i = #j XOR #k Exclusive OR (at every bit of 32 bits)

Multiplication Operation
#i = #j #K Product
#i = #j / #K Quotient
#i = #j AND #k Logical product (at every bit of 32 bits)

Functions
#i = SIN〔#j〕 Sine (degree)
#i = COS〔#j〕 Cosine (degree)
#i = TAN〔#j〕 Tangent (degree)
#i = ATAN〔#j〕/〔#k〕 Arc Tangent
#i = SQRT〔#j〕 Square root
#i = ABS〔#j〕 Absolute
#i = BIN〔#j〕 Conversion from BCD to BIN
#i = BCD〔#j〕 Conversion from BIN to BCD
#i = ROUND〔#j〕 Round off
#i = FIX〔#j〕 Truncation of decimal portion
#i = FUP〔#j〕 Rounding up of decimal

8-127
Controls

The following two commands are used to control the macro program cycle.
Divergence commands: IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTO n;
Repetition commands: WHILE [<Conditional expression>] DO m;

Divergence Commands
IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTO n;
The program will jump to the block with sequence No. n in the same program when the
<conditional expression> above is correctly formatted.
The variables or expressions instead of n can also change the block to which the
program jumps.
If a condition is false, the program will not jump but go to the next block.

Simple jump command is possible by omitting IF [<Conditional expression>].

8-128
EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE can be used for conditional expressions and are written as
shown in the table below.

Conditional expressions Meaning

#i EQ #j (#i = #j)
#i NE #j (#i≠#j)
#i GT #j (#i > #j)
#i LT #j (#i < #j)
#i GE #j (#i≧#j)
#i LE #j (#i≦#j)
Constants or <Expressions> can be used in place of #i and #j.

Repetition Command
WHILE [<Conditional expression>] DO m; (m=1, 2 and 3)

END m;

This command repeats the blocks from [DO m] to [END m] so long as the conditional
expression is correctly formatted.
If the condition is false, the program will jump to the block after [END m].

When commanding the program without WHILE [Conditional expression], the programs
from [DO m] to [END m] repeat infinitely.

8-129
Registration of macro programs

Registering the Macro Programs

To register and edit the macro programs, use the same method as the usual part program
and sub program.
Thus, there is no capacity limit for macro programs themselves. The sum of part programs,
sub programs and macro programs will be stored up to the memory capacity limit of the
part program.

Usage Classification of the Program Numbers

The table below expresses the use classified by program numbers.
Select and use them when necessary.

Do not use the following program numbers:

PATH1 side: O9010, O9011, O9012, O9020, O9021, O9022
PATH2 side: O9002, O9003, O9010, O9011, O9012, O9821, O9822

Program number Classification

O0001 O7999 Free recording, deleting and editing
If parameter No.3202-bit0=1 is set, deleting and editing the program
O8000 O8999
will not be possible.
If parameter No.3202-bit4=1 is set, deleting and editing the program
O9000 O9999
will not be possible.

8-130
NOTE

With the MDI Operation

The macro call can also be specified in MDI mode. However, it is not possible to call a

macro program by switching the mode to MDI during automatic operation.

With Address Search

Sequence No. search in the macro program by address search is unavailable.

With the SINGLE BLOCK

Even while a macro program is being executed, the blocks other than the ones with macro
call, arithmetic calculations and control commands can be stopped by single block.
The blocks with macro call (G65, G66, G67) do not stop even when the single block mode is
on.
The blocks with an arithmetic calculation and blocks with a control command can be
stopped by single block execution when setting the parameter (No.6000-bit5=1).
Note that when the program stops by single block at the macro statement, the block will
be regarded as one without movement during the tool radius compensation mode.
In this case, proper compensation may not be performed correctly.

With the Optional Block Skip

"/" used on the right side of arithmetic calculations or used in the brackets [ ] is
regarded as the division operator, but not regarded as the optional block skip code.

With the Feed Hold

When feed hold is activated during macro statement execution, the program will stop
after execution of the macro program. (The machine also stops by reset and/or alarm
activation.)

With the Multiple Canned Cycle

Macro cannot be used in the multiple repetitive canned cycles (G71, G72 and G73).

Multiplicity (Nesting)
Macro calls are up to 5 levels.
Sub program calls with the macro calls are up to 15 levels.
WHILE-DO repeat sequences are up to 3 levels.
Formula [ ] is up to 5 levels.

8-131
8-14 Program Pattern

Program pattern

[PATH1] [PATH2]
O1234 ; O1234 ;
A) G266 A W S B Z X F ; G130 ;
G125 ; G99 M5 ;
G300 ; G0 T0 ;
B)
G170 ; G28 W0 ;
G40 G97 M9 ; M200 ;
G99 M3 S500 ; M20 ;
M11 ; M75 ;
G0 Z0 T0 ;
B) M200 ; / Back machining
M20 ; /(EJECT) ;
M10 ; /T2900 M5
G171 ; /G0 Z40.0 ;
T100 ; /M11 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z 0.5 M25 ; /G4 U1.0 ;
M27 ; /M84 ;
Front machining E) /G28 W0 ;
/M27 ;
M500 ;
/M14 ;
(CUT-OFF) ; /T2000 ;
T100 M3 S2000 ; /G4 U1.0 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z***.* T1 ; /M15 ;
M82 ;
C) M76 ;
M600 ;
M500 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M610 ;
M83 ;
M4 S2000 ; (Pick-up)
T2000 ;
M80 ; G900 J50 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W-0.5 ; M11 ;
D) /G0 W#528 ; M82 ;
/M98 P7000 ; G131 ;
M81 ; G0 Z-5.0 ;
M99 ; M68 ;
M14 ;
G98 G1 Z**.* F2000 ;
M15 ;
G99 M10;
M69 ;
C) M600 ;
M610 ;
M68 ;
G0 W-20.0 ;
M69 ;
M83 ;
G0 T0 ;
G28 W0 ;
G130 ;
M5 ;
M27 ;
N50 M99 ;

8-132
 Command machining conditions at * sections.

Refer to section “8-14-6 Program Pattern When Using Stopper” for details on the
example of using stopper [0M497].

A)
Refer to section “8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System
Setting” for details.

B)
Refer to section “8-14-2 Program Beginning” for details.

C)
Refer to section “8-14-3 Parts Pick-up Process” for details.

D)
Refer to section “8-14-4 Bar Replacement Program” for details.

E)
Refer to section “8-14-5 Parts Ejection Process” for details.

8-133
8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System Setting

[PATH1]
O1234 ;
G266 A W S B Z X F ;

Common
Contents
Variable
A BAR DIAMETER (mm) or (inch) #531
W PART LENGTH (mm) or (inch) #530
S SPINDLE SPEED (min-1) (cut-off spindle speed) #529
X CUT-OFF END POSITION (mm) or (inch) #524
Z Z1 START POSITION (mm) or (inch) (Z-axis machining start position) #525
F CUT-OFF FEED RATE (mm/rev) #522
B CUT-OFF TOOL WIDTH (mm) or (inch) #528

G125 ; Setting of Z1-axis machining reference point

The Z0 position (machining reference point) in the program becomes the position
commanded by G266 Z from the Z1-axis machine reference point.

Setting example of Z (Z START POSITION #525) for Guide bush version

Z= 205 mm (overall part length) (margin
When using a right-hand cut-off tool
length 5~20 mm approx.)
Z= 205 mm (overall part length) (margin
When using a left-hand cut-off tool
length 20~30 mm approx.)

Setting example of Z (Z START POSITION #525) for Non-guide bush version

When using a right-hand Z= 30 mm (overall part length) (margin
cut-off tool length 5~20 mm approx.)
SB-12R
When using a left-hand Z= 30 mm (overall part length) (margin
cut-off tool length 20~30 mm approx.)
When using a right-hand Z= 50 mm (overall part length) (margin
cut-off tool length 5~20 mm approx.)
SB-16R/20R
When using a left-hand Z= 50 mm (overall part length) (margin
cut-off tool length 20~30 mm approx.)

Command G266 on PATH1.

When starting the machining program, set the data on the MACHINING DATA
screen beforehand.
Setting can be carried out by either inputting with the address/data keys or by
inputting with the program.

Common variables (#522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530 and #531) set on the
MACHINING DATA screen can be used for cut-off process etc.

8-134
For details on the position commands of each axis, refer to “Appendix 5 Relational
Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders” and section “8-4 Coordinate System”.

8-135
8-14-2 Program Beginning

[PATH1]

O1234 ; ······························· Program number

G266 A W S B Z X F ; ··· Setting of machining data
G125 ; ································ Setting of Z1-axis machining reference point
G300 ;································· Auto cut-off
G170 ; ································ Tool selection path command cancel
G40 G97 M9 ; ······················ Tool nose radius compensation cancel, constant surface
speed control OFF, spindle clamp, C1-axis OFF
G99 M3 S500 ; ····················· Feed per revolution, main spindle forward rotation, 500min-1
M11 ; ·································· Main collet unclamp
G0 Z0 T0 ; ··························· Move to Z0 in rapid traverse, tool position offset cancel
M200 ; ································ Wait for M200 on PATH2
M20 ; ·································· One cycle stop
M10 ; ·································· Main collet clamp
G171 ; ································ Path selection direct command
T100 ; ································· Cut-off tool selection (T100 is exclusive for the cut-off tool)
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z 0.5 M25 ; ·· Cut-off tool retracts from bar in rapid traverse, coolant ON
M27 ; ·································· Broken cutoff tool detection ON

:
Be sure to set the data on the MACHINING DATA screen before executing the auto
cut-off at .
When the X1-axis workpiece coordinate is at a position less than the cut-off end
position, auto cut-off at will not be executed.
In the case of executing cut-off at a tool position other than T100, do not command
auto cut-off at .

:
The above program is an example of using a right-hand cut-off tool and with no
machining performed on the end face of the workpiece.
In the case of using a left-hand cut-off tool or performing machining on the end face
of the workpiece, change the value of Z at .

When installing a chip with a width of 2.0mm into a

12 12mm left-hand cut-off tool, becomes G0 Z10.0 T0 ;
(Z= 12.0 2.0)
When performing machining of 0.1mm on the end face of the
workpiece with a right-hand cut-off tool, becomes
G0 Z 0.1 T0 ;
When installing a chip with a width of 2.0mm into a
12 12mm left-hand cut-off tool, and performing machining
of 0.1mm on the end face of the workpiece becomes
G0 Z9.9 T0 ; (Z= 12.0 2.0 0.1)

: Command M200 (Wait M code) in the block before M20.

8-136
 Refer to section “8-9 Broken Cut-off Tool Detector” for details on M27.
Refer to section “8-14-6 Program Pattern When Using Stopper” for details on the
example of using stopper [0M497].

[PATH2]

O1234 ; ······························· Program number

G130 ; ································ Z2-axis coordinate system setting cancel
G99 M5 ; ····························· Feed per revolution, sub spindle stop
G0 T0 ; ······························· Tool wear offset cancel
G28 W0 ; ····························· Z2-axis reference point return
M200 ; ································ Wait for M200 on PATH1
M20 ; ·································· One cycle stop
M75 ; ·································· PATH2 machining block skip available (Jump to M76)

: Command M200 (Wait M code) in the block before M20.

For details on the position commands of each axis, refer to section “Appendix 5
Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders” and “8-4 Coordinate System”.

8-137
8-14-3 Parts Pick-up Process

Create a program using G131 (Z2-axis coordinate system setting for parts pick-up)

Command G130 or G131 in a single block independently.

Be sure to command the Z1-axis coordinate system (G125) before commanding
G131.
Command G131 when the Z1-axis has stopped and when wear offset on PATH2
has been cancelled.
After commanding G131, the Z1-axis movement will not reflect on the absolute
position of the Z2-axis. To reflect it, command G131 again.

Program example

[PATH1] [PATH2]
(CUT-OFF) ; M4 S2000 ; (Pick-up)
T100 M3 S2000 ; Cut-off tool selection T2000
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z***.* T1 ; Cut-off positioning G900 J50 ;
M11 ;
M82 ; M82 ; Synchronous rotation control ON
G131 ; Setting of Z2-axis coordinate system for
parts pick-up
G0 Z 5.0 ;
M68 ; Z2-axis torque limiter ON
M14 ; Air blow ON
G98 G1 Z**.* F2000 ;
M15 ; Air blow OFF
G99 M10 ; Feed per revolution, sub collet clamp
M69 ; Z2-axis torque limiter OFF
M600 ; (Wait) M600 ; (Wait)
G1 X#524 F#522 ; (Cut-off process)
M610 ; (Wait) M610 ; (Wait)
M68 ; Z2-axis torque limiter ON
G0 W 20.0 ; Parts pick-up retract position
M69 ; Z2-axis torque limiter OFF
M83 ; M83 ; Synchronous rotation control OFF
M80 ; G0 T0 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ; G28 W0 ; Z2-axis reference point return
(No bar stock
/G0 W2.0 ; G130 ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting cancel
/M98 P7000 ; detection) M5 ; Sub spindle stop
M81 ; M27 ; Parts pick-up detection ON
M99 ; End of Program N50 ;
; M99 ; End of Program
;

Codes in grey are wait codes.

The Z2-axis coordinate system is set to make the end face of the workpiece become Z0.
Cancel the Z2-axis coordinate system setting at the time of parts pick-up, and return to
the standard coordinate system.

8-138
Relational diagram of parts pick-up

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

The maximum projection length from the end face of the sub spindle for pick-up is 30mm.

G131 ;
G0 Z 5.0 ; Positional diagram
The end face of the sub spindle (Z2-axis) positions “5mm” from the cut-off end face of the
bar.

8-139
8-14-4 Bar Replacement Program

[PATH1]
M80 ;
/G0 X(#531+1.0) W 0.5 ;
/G0 W#528 ;
/M98 P7000 ;
M81 ;
M99 ;

Always add a “/” (slash code) at the head of the PATH of each block between M80
and M81. These blocks will be executed only when the no barstock signal is
transmitted from the bar feeder.
Determine the subprogram O7000 according to the following specifications.
Refer to the following program example and register the subprogram into the CNC
memory beforehand.

Refer to section “8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System

Setting” for details on #522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530 and #531.
Refer to section “8-14-6 Program Pattern When Using Stopper” for details on the
example of using stopper [0M497].

Program
Bar feeder specifications Machine specifications
example
Revolving guide bush
Standard specification Guide PROG.1
Stationary guide bush
bush
Revolving guide bush
Automatic Inching specification version PROG.2
(Profile bar stock version)
bar feeder Standard specification Non-guide
bush PROG.3
Inching specification Profile bar stock version
version

8-140
Guide bush version
Automatic bar feeder (PROG.1) Automatic bar feeder (PROG.2)
(Standard version) (Inching version)
Stationary guide bush
Revolving guide bush Revolving guide bush
[PATH1] [PATH1]
O7000 ; O7000 ;
G1 U 2.0 F0.015 ; G1 U 2.0 F0.015 ;
G0 U2.0 M26 ; G0 U2.0 M26 ;
G4 U3.0 ; G4 U3.0 ;
M3 S500 ; M3 S500 ;
G1 W 50.0 F3.0 ; G1 W-50.0 F3.0 ;
M5 ; M3 S300;
M62 ; M62 ;
M11 ; M11 ;
M0 ; G0 W50.0 ;
M10 ; N10 M0 ;
M63 ; G0 W 50.0 ;
G4 U3.0 ; M10 ;
M3 S500 ; M63 ;
G1 W50.0 F2.0 M25 ; G4 U3.0 ;
M3 S#529 ; M3 S500 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ; G1 W50.0 F2.0 M25 ;
M99 ; M3 S#529 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M99 ; ;

When using the inching version, set “ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0” to “YES” on the
KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.
Please change the value of U in the deburring process according to the shape
of the cut-off tool nose.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

8-141
Non-guide bush version(Push rod: Finger type)
Automatic bar feeder (PROG.3)
(Standard/inching specification)
[PATH1]
O7000 ;
G1 U 2.0 F0.015 ;
G0 U2.0 M26 ;
G4 U3.0;
M5 ;
M62 ;
M11 ;
M0 ;
M10 ;
M63 ;
G4 U3.0 ;
M25 ;
M3 S#529 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M99 ;

When using the inching version, set “ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0” to “YES” on the
KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen. In addition, change to “M3 S300”.
Command the deburring process as necessary.
Modify the value U__ of the deburring process appropriately according to the
tool tip shape of cut-off tool.

8-142
8-14-5 Parts Ejection Process

[PATH2]
Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478]

/T2900 M5 ; Parts ejection position, Sub spindle stop

/G0 Z40.0 ;
/M11 ; Sub collet unclamp
/G4 U1.0 ; Dwell 1 second
/M84 ; Parts conveyor ON
/G28 W0 ; Z2-axis reference point return
/M27 ; Parts ejection detection ON
/M14 ; Air blow ON
/T2000 ;
/G4 U1.0 ; Dwell 1 second
/M15 ; Air blow OFF

[PATH2]
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]

/T2900 M5 ; Parts ejection position, Sub spindle stop

/G0 Z40.0 ;
/M11 ; Sub collet unclamp
/G4 U1.0 ; Dwell 1 second
/M84 ; Parts conveyor ON
/M14 ; Air blow ON
/M120 ; Parts ejector advance/retract
/T2000 ;
/M15 ; Air blow OFF

Command “Sub spindle stop” (M5) before parts ejection.

Command parts ejector advance/retract (M120) after sub collet unclamp (M11).

8-143
8-14-6 Program Pattern When Using Stopper

This chapter describes program patterns when using Stopper [0M497] in Non-Guide Bush
Version.

CAUTION
Pay attention to collision between the workpiece and the stopper when
performing milling with the cross drill at T3100.
Command T900 (stopper) while paying attention to collision between the bar and
the stopper.
Do not give an excessive impact to the stopper.
Before unclamping the main collet to feed the bar, set the clearance between the
bar and the stopper to 5mm or less.
T900 is used as the stopper. Therefore, be sure to start automatic operation
during T900 selection (X 1.0).
T900 selection cannot be commanded while the main collet is unclamped and
M63 is commanded.

When using Stopper [0M497], set the keep relay K09-bit7 to “1”.

Refer to section “13-31 Stopper [0M497] <Exclusive for Non-Guide Bush Version>”
for details on the stopper.
Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details on the
keep relay.

8-144
Drawing-1

Drawing-2

8-145
Program pattern

Command the machining condition at “ ” sections

Refer to section “8-14-1 Machining Data Setting, Z1-axis Coordinate System

Setting” for details on G266, G125, #522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530, #531.

When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the finger-type
O1234
M190 ; If T900 has not been selected, alarm No.1722 will
be displayed
G266 A** W** S** X** Z** F** B** ; Machining data setting
G125 Z1 axis coordinate system setting
G170 ;
G40 G97 M9 ;
G99 ;
M11 ;
G0 Z0.1 T0 ; Machining amount of workpiece end face 0.1mm
M200 ;
M20 ;
M10 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] W-0.5 T0 M25 ;
;
:
Front machining
:
(CUT-OFF)
T100 M3 S**** ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z***.* T1 ;
M82 ;
M600 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M610 ;
M83 ;
;
M80 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ;
/M98 P7000 ;
M81 ;
M5 ;
G0 W 1.0 ; When using left-handed cut-off tool:
W= (Tool width Tip width) 1.0
E.g. W = (12.0 2.0) 1.0 = 11.0
M27 ; Broken cutoff tool detection ON
T900 ; Stopper selection
G0 X[#531+1.0] ;
G98 G1 X1.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 ;
M99 ;

8-146
When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the push/pull-type
O1234
M190 ; If T900 has not been selected, alarm No.1722 will
be displayed
G266 A** W** S** X** Z** F** B** ; Machining data setting
G125 Z1 axis coordinate system setting
G170 ;
G40 G97 M9 ;
G99 ;
M63 Automatic bar feeder torque ON
G4 U0.5
M11 ;
G0 Z 0.1 T0 ; Machining amount of workpiece end face 0.1mm
M200 ;
M20 ;
M10 ;
M62 Automatic bar feeder torque OFF
G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 T0 M25 ;
;
:
Front machining
:
(CUT-OFF)
T100 M3 S**** ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z***.* T1 ;
M82 ;
M600 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M610 ;
M83 ;
;
M80 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ;
/M98 P7100 ;
M81 ;
M5 ;
G0 W 1.0 ; When using left-handed cut-off tool:
W= (Tool width Tip width) 1.0
E.g. W = (12.0 2.0) 1.0 = 11.0
M27 ; Broken cutoff tool detection ON
T900 ; Stopper selection
G0 X[#531+1.0] ;
G98 G1 X1.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 ;
M99 ;

8-147
Bar Replacement program
When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the finger-type
PATH1
O7000 ;
G1 U 2.0 F0.015 ;
G0 U2.0 M26 ;
G4 U3.0 ;
M5 ;
M62 ;
M11 ;
M0 ;
M10 ;
M63 ;
G4 U3.0 ;
M25 ;
M3 S#529 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M99 ;

When using the inching version, select “YES” for “ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0” on
the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen. In addition, please change M5
to M3 S300.
Command the deburring process as necessary.
Change the value U of the deburring process in accordance with the shape of
the cut-off tool.

8-148
When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the push/pull-type
PATH1
O7100 ;
M26 ;
M5 ;
G4 U1.0 ;
G0 W 20.0 ;
M63 ; Automatic bar feeder torque ON
M11 ;
G4 U1.0 ; Eject remnant bar to front
M0 ; Remnant bar confirmation
M27 ; Stopper selection
T900;
G0 X[#531+1.0] ;
G98 G1 X1.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 ;
M0 ; Supply new bar
M10 ;
G4 U1.0 ;
M62 ; Automatic bar feeder torque OFF
G0 X[#531+1.0] W-0.5 M25 ;
T100 ;
G99 M3 S1500 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] W20.5 ;
W20.5 = ( W 20.0 0.5)
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M99 ;

When using the inching version, select “YES” for “ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0” on
the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen. In addition, please change M5
to M3 S300.

8-149
8-14-7 Spindle Indexing

Main spindle indexing

Absolute or incremental commands are available for indexing.

Address of angle command

Command method Address

Absolute Command the angle of the end point C
Incremental Command the angle difference to the end point H

Command codes related to C1-axis indexing

M6 ; ················· Main spindle clamp

M7 ; ················· Main spindle unclamp
M8 ; ················· C1-axis ON
M9 ; ················· C1-axis OFF (M7 is also processed simultaneously)
G0 C ; or G0 H ; ········· Angle indexing

Program example

[PATH1]
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle reference point indexing
M6 ; Main spindle clamp

M7 ; Main spindle unclamp

G0 C90.0 ; Indexing to 90 position from the reference point
M6 ; Main spindle clamp

M7 ; Main spindle unclamp

G0 H180.0 ; Indexing to 180 position from current position
(270 position from the reference point)
M6 ; Main spindle clamp

M9 ; C1-axis OFF
;

If the spindle is commanded to rotate 360.0° or more with the address C, the
spindle will rotate within the range of 0 ~ 360.0°. The spindle will not rotate beyond
360.0°.

The direction of positive indexing equals to the M3 direction of main spindle

rotation.
The selected rotation direction will be the direction with the shortest distance to the
angle.

8-150
Sub spindle indexing

Absolute or incremental commands are available for indexing.

Address of angle command

Command method Address

Absolute Command the angle of the end point C
Incremental Command the angle difference to the end point H

Command codes related to C2-axis indexing

M6 ; ················· Sub spindle clamp

M7 ; ················· Sub spindle unclamp
M8 ; ················· C2-axis ON
M9 ; ················· C2-axis OFF (M7 is also processed simultaneously)
G0 C ; or G0 H ; ········· Angle indexing

Program example

[PATH2]
M8 ; C2-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Sub spindle reference point indexing
M6 ; Sub spindle clamp

M7 ; Sub spindle unclamp

G0 C90.0 ; Indexing to 90 position from the reference point
M6 ; Sub spindle clamp

M7 ; Sub spindle unclamp

G0 H180.0 ; Indexing to 180 position from current position
(270 position from the reference point)
M6 ; Sub spindle clamp

M9 ; C2-axis OFF
;

If the spindle is commanded to rotate 360.0° or more with the address C, the
spindle will rotate within the range of 0 ~ 360.0°. The spindle will not rotate beyond
360.0°.

The direction of positive indexing equals to the M4 direction of sub spindle rotation.
The selected rotation direction will be the direction with the shortest distance to the
angle.

8-151
8-14-8 Turning

Machining drawing

Program example

[PATH1]
T200 M3 S5000 ;
G0 X8.0 Z 0.5 T2 ;
G0 X1.0 ;
G1 X3.0 Z0.5 F0.02 ;
G1 Z15.0 F0.03 ;
G4 U0.05 ;
G1 X4.0 F0.03 ;
G2 X6.0 W1.0 R1.0 F0.02 ;
G1 Z25.0 F0.04 ;
G4 U0.03 ;
G1 X8.0 W1.0 F0.02 ;

8-152
8-14-9 Circular Interpolation

Machining drawing
(1) Program example
[PATH1]
T200 M3 S5000 ;
G0 X8.0 Z 0.5 T2 ;
G0 X3.0 ;
G1 Z3.0 F0.03 ;
G3 X7.0 Z5.0 R2.0 F0.02 ;
G1 X8.0 F0.05 ;
G0 T0 ;

(2) Program example

[PATH1]
T300 M3 S5000 ;
G0 X8.0 Z6.0 T3 ;
G1 X7.0 F0.03 ;
G2 X3.0 Z8.0 R2.0 F0.02 ;
G1 Z11.5 F0.03 ;
G1 X8.0 F0.1 ;
G0 T0 ;

Z dimension (Z ) above includes tool

width (2mm).

Command the plane selection before executing the circular interpolation.

*G18 (Z-X plane) is selected when the power is turned on.

Refer to section “8-10-3 Circular Interpolation (G2, G3)” for details.

8-153
8-14-10 Front Drilling / Front Rigid Tapping

Command G99 and M5 before M29.

Command the M29 block and G84 block consecutively.
The program example illustrates right-handed tapping.
The maximum rotation speed during rigid tapping is 1500min 1.
Adjust the value of Z__ according to the tool tip position.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

For details on M29, please refer to section “8-11 Auxiliary Functions (M Functions)”.

Machining drawing

8-154
Program example
[PATH1]
G0 Z 0.5 T0 ; Z1-axis retract
;
T1100 M3 S2000 ; Center drill selection, main spindle forward rotation
G0 Z4.5 T11 ; Positioning to machining start position
G1 W4.0 F0.03 ; Center drilling
G4 U0.05 ;
G1 Z4.5 F0.2 ; Workpiece retract
G0 T0 ;
;
T1200 M3 S2500 ; Drill selection, main spindle forward rotation
G0 Z4.0 T12 ; Positioning to machining start position
G1 W14.3 F0.04 ; Drilling
G1 Z4.0 F0.2 ; Workpiece retract
G0 T0 ;
;
T1300 M5 ; Tap selection, main spindle stop
G99 G0 Z4.0 T13 ; Positioning to machining start position
M29 S1000 ; Rigid tapping rotation command
G84 W9.0 F0.8 ; Rigid tapping
G80 ;
G0 Z 0.5 ; Workpiece retract
G0 T0 ;

8-155
8-14-11 Cross Drilling / Cross Rigid Tapping

E.g.1) X1-axis

Tools are attached so that the tool tip is positioned to the center of the guide bush
or main spindle by X0 command.
The tool shift amount (7 or 11 mm) in the Z-axis direction is added to the value of
Z__ in advance.
The program example illustrates right-hand tapping. For left-hand tapping, change
from M36 to M37.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Machining drawing

8-156
Program example
[PATH1]
T3100 M5 ; Center drill selection, main spindle stop
G0 X11.0 Z24.0 T7 ; Positioning to machining start position
M36 S3000 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle indexing
M6 ; Main spindle clamp
G1 U 8.0 F0.02 ; Centering
G4 U0.02 ;
G1 U11.0 F0.2 ; Tool retract
G0 T0 ;

T3200 ; Pilot hole drill selection

M36 S2200 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
G0 X11.0 Z24.0 T8 ; Positioning to machining start position
G1 U 24.0 F0.05 ; Pilot hole drilling
G1 U24.0 F0.05 ; Tool retract
G0 T0 ;

M38 ; Power-driven tool stop

T3300 ; Tap selection
G0 X11.0 Z28.0 T9 ; Positioning to machining start position
G784 U 15.0 F0.8 M36 S1000 ; Rigid tapping
M38 ; Power-driven tool stop
M9 ; C1-axis OFF, main spindle unclamp
G0 X11.0 T0 ; Tool retract

8-157
E.g.2) Y1-axis

Set the tool unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.
Tool is attached so that the tool tip is positioned to the center of the guide bush or
main spindle by Y0 command.
The tool shift amount (11 mm) in the Z-axis direction is added to the value of Z__.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

8-158
Program example
[PATH1]
T3523 M5 ; Center drill selection, main spindle stop
G0 Y11.0 Z26.0 T7 ; Positioning to machining start position
M36 S3000 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle indexing
M6 ; Main spindle clamp
G1 V 8.0 F0.02 ; Centering
G4 U0.02 ;
G1 V8.0 F0.2 ; Tool retract
G0 T0 ;

T3522 ; Pilot hole drill selection

M36 S2200 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
G0 Y11.0 Z26.0 T8 ; Positioning to machining start position
G1 V 24.0 F0.05 ; Pilot hole drilling
G1 V24.0 F0.05 ; Tool retract
G0 T0 ;

M38 ; Power-driven tool stop

T3521 ; Tap selection
G0 Y11.0 Z26.0 T9 ; Positioning to machining start position
G884 V 15.0 F0.8 M36 S1000 ; Rigid tapping
M38 ; Power-driven tool stop
M9 ; C1-axis OFF, main spindle unclamp
G0 Y11.0 T0 ; Tool retract

8-159
8-14-12 Front Off-Center Drilling / Front Off-Center Rigid Tapping

Set the tool unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational) screen.

Adjust the value of Z__ according to the tool tip position.
The program example illustrates right-hand tapping. For left-hand tapping, change
from M36 to M37.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

8-160
Program example
[PATH1]
G0 Z 0.5 T0 ; Z1-axis retract
T3423 M5 ; Tool selection, main spindle stop
G0 X3.0 Z10.0 T21 ; Positioning to machining start position
M36 S2000 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle indexing
M6 ; Main spindle clamp
G1 W2.5 F0.03 ; Centering
G4 U0.1 ;
G0 Z10.0 F1.0 Workpiece retract
G0 T0 ;

T3422 ; Tool selection

M36 S3800 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
G0 X3.0 Z10.0 T22 ; Positioning to machining start position
G1 W13.8 F0.04 ; Drilling
G1 Z10.0 F1.0 ; Workpiece retract
G0 T0
;
M38 ; Power-driven tool stop
T3421 ; Tap selection
G0 X3.0 Z10.0 T21 ; Positioning to machining start position
G984 W9.5 F0.5 M36 S1500 ; Rigid tapping
M7 ; Main spindle unclamp
G0 Z 0.5 M38 ; Workpiece retract, Power-driven tool stop
M9 ; C1-axis OFF
G0 T0 ;

8-161
8-14-13 Milling

Tool is attached so that the tool tip is positioned to the center of the guide bush or
main spindle by X0 command.
The tool shift amount (7 mm) in the Z-axis direction is added to the value of Z__.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Machining drawing

Program example
[PATH1]
T3200 M5 ; Tool selection, main spindle stop
M36 S2500 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation 2500min-1
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle reference point indexing
G0 Y 14.0 M6 ; End mill positioning, main spindle clamp
G0 X6.0 Z20.0 T9 ; End mill positioning
G1 Y10.0 F0.02 ; Milling
G1 X11.0 F0.04 ; End mill retract
G0 T0 ; Offset cancel
M9 ; C1-axis OFF, main spindle unclamp
M38 ; Power-driven tool stop

8-162
8-14-14 Slotting

Tool is attached so that the tool tip is positioned to the center of the guide bush or
main spindle by X0 command.
Set the tool unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

Program example
[PATH1]
G0 Z0 T0 ;
T3300 M5 ; Tool selection, main spindle stop
M36 S600 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle reference point indexing
G0 X0 Y34.0 T3 M6 ; Cutter positioning, main spindle clamp
G0 Z3.0 ; Z1-axis positioning
G1 Y 12.0 F0.03 ; Slotting
G1 Z0 F0.2 ; Z1-axis retract
G0 X40.0 T0 ; Cutter retract, offset cancel
M9 ; C1-axis OFF, main spindle unclamp
M38 ; Power-driven tool stop

8-163
8-14-15 Thread Whirling

Set the unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.

Be sure to use Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] when
using Thread Whirling Unit for Outer [68172]

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.
Refer to section “8-8 Tool Function (T Function)” for details on Tool geometry offset.
Refer to section “10-4-2 Installing and Adjusting the Power-Driven Tool Unit” for
details on the tooling precautions.

Machining drawing

8-164
 How to calculate the cutting point coordinate of the tool nose
In the case of “X0, Y0” when T3500 is selected, the cutting point coordinate of the tool nose
is calculated by the following formulas.
Y= 2×(W 10.0)× sin , Z=(W 10.0) /cos
Accordingly, the cutting point coordinate is Y= Y, Z= 11.0 Z.

Program example

[PATH1]
G0 Z0 T0 ; Z1-axis retract
T3500 M36 S1600 ; T3500 selection, power-driven tool motor forward rotation
G50 X12.0 ; Coordinate system setting
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 X7.0 C0 T35 ; X, Z axis positioning, main spindle indexing
G0 V 0.671 ; Cutting point move, positioning to the machining start
G1 Z3.0 F0.2 ; position
M1013 ; Coolant2 for thread whirling ON
G1 H6120.0 W42.5 F0.5 ; Thread whirling machining H= W 360.0/L
G1 X12.0 F0.5 ; Cutter retract
M1014 ; Coolant2 for thread whirling OFF
G0 Z0 ; Z1-axis retract
M9 ; C1-axis OFF
M38 ; Power-driven tool motor stop
G0 T0 ;

: Command Y for V .
: For the value of Z , command 11 Z (clearance between the bar and the cutting
point of the tool in Z-axis direction).
: Command the thread core diameter for X .

The calculation method of a tooth lead angle

An example of the calculation method is indicated below for reference.

Please calculate the tooth lead angle according to the product shape.

(A tooth lead angle of outer diameter of thread) 1=tan 1 (L/ D1)

(A tooth lead angle of core diameter) 2=tan 1(L/ D2)
(A tooth lead angle) = ( 1+ 2)/2

8-165
8-14-16 Polygon Machining

Set the unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.

Be careful of a collision between the bar and the tool unit when the selected tool is
positioned.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

Command G25 (spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF) before executing polygon
machining.

Polygon cutter rotation will stop when the RESET key is pressed during
polygon machining.
To stop the rotation of the polygon cutter temporarily while polygon machining is

commanded, use the MAIN SPINDLE key.

(The POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS AUTO/OFF keys are invalid).
The main spindle and the cutter will rotate in the same direction and perform
machining.
The installing nut of the cutter is a right-hand screw, therefore command M4
(reverse rotation) for the main spindle on PATH1.
Be sure to command M127 (reference point return of power-driven tool) and G50
A0 (setting the tool phase) before polygon machining in order to determine the
rotating start position of the tool.

8-166
 Refer to section “8-8 Tool Function (T Function)” for details on the tool geometry
offset.
Refer to section “10-4-2 Installing and Adjusting the Power-Driven Tool Unit” for
details on the tooling precautions.

Program example
A hexagon of WAF 9mm will be formed using a 60 three-blade cutter.
[PATH1]
T3300 M4 S900 ; T3300 selection, power-driven tool motor reverse rotation
G25 ; Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF
M127 ; Reference point return of power-driven tool
G50 A0 ; A-axis coordinate system setting (setting the tool phase)
G0 A0.1 ; Shifting the tool phase
G251 P1 Q 2 ; Polygon machining ON
G0 X11.0 Z5.0 T24 ;
G0 X6.0 F0.3 ;
G1 X9.0 W1.5 F0.02 ;
G1 Z10.0 F0.03 ;
G1 Z11.0 F0.05 ;
(G26) ; (Spindle speed fluctuation detection ON)
G250 ; Polygon machining OFF

: Command the tool phase shift amount for A .

Tool phase shift is carried out. Perform actual machining once for tool phase
alignment.
Commanding the tool phase shift “G0 A3.6” will rotate the cutter once (360 ).
Commanding “G0 A0.01” will perform the tool phase shift by 1 degree.
Commanding the tool phase shift “G0 A+” will shift the machining shape in the main
spindle M4 direction.
When changing the rotation speed, or changing the gear position by attaching or
removing the polygon machining unit, perform actual machining and carry out
adjustment again.

Command of P Q .

Rotation ratio of P (Main spindle speed) and Q (Rotation speed of

Y-power driven tool)
Command “P1 Q2” or “P1 Q2” under the rotation ratio 1:2.
Machining two planes (180 degrees) with one blade of the three-blade cutter,
P, Q a hexagon will be formed. The machined surface will be slightly convex.
Command “P1 Q3” or “P1 Q3” when the rotation ratio is 1:3.
Machining three planes (120 degrees) with one blade of the three-blade
cutter, a nine-sided shape will be formed. The machined surface will be
slightly concave.
Q (plus) for commanding Main spindle M3
Q
Q (minus) for commanding Main spindle M4

8-167
8-14-17 Cylindrical Interpolation

The tool shift amount (9 mm) in Z-axis direction is added to the value of Z__.
The feed rate commanded during the cylindrical interpolation mode is the feed rate
on the developed cylindrical surface.
On a cylindrical interpolation, tool path with G2 and G3 will be the reverse of the
standard (i.e. G2: CCW, G3: CW).
Work coordinate system setting (G50) cannot be commanded during cylindrical
interpolation.
Rapid traverse positioning (G0, G28, etc) cannot be commanded during the
cylindrical interpolation mode.
Do not command cylindrical interpolation ON/OFF during tool nose radius
compensation (G41, G42). However, tool nose radius compensation during
cylindrical interpolation mode is available.
Cylindrical interpolation is available in G99 mode.
It is necessary to command G18 H0 W0 (Z-C plane) in advance.
Command G18 (Z-X plane) just after G107 C0 (Cylindrical interpolation OFF).
Cylindrical interpolation cannot be commanded during the positioning mode (G0).
Command G107 (Cylindrical interpolation ON) in G1 mode.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

8-168
Machining drawing (rolled-out drawing)

Program example
T3300 M5 ;
M8 ;
M36 S1000 ;
G0 X8.0 Z19.0 C0 T3 ;
G1 W3.0 C0 F0.04 ; ···················· P1
G1 G18 H0 W0 ; Z-C plane
G107 C2.5 ; Cylindrical interpolation ON (C: radial value)
G1 C30.0 F0.04 ; ························ P2
G2 W4.5 C90.0 R5.0 F0.04 ; ········· P3
G1 W6.0 C125.0 F0.04 ;··············· P4
G3 W4.0 C170.0 R7.0 F0.04 ; ······ P5
G1 C200.0 F0.04 ; ······················· P6
G1 W 13.0 C280.0 F0.04 ; ··········· P7
G2 W 4.5 C360.0 R8.0 F0.04 ; ······ P8
G107 C0 ; Cylindrical interpolation OFF
G18 ; Z-X plane
M9 ;
M38 ;
G0 T0 ;

8-169
8-14-18 Helical Interpolation

Adjust the value of Z__ according to the tool tip position.

Set the unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

Milling depth = 180 / Z = 0.5mm

8-170
 Program example
[PATH1]
G0 Z 0.5 T0 ; Z1-axis retract
T3521 M5 ; Tool selection, main spindle stop
M36 S4000 ; Power-driven tool forward rotation
G0 X15.0 Z10.0 T21 ; Machining start position
M8 ; C1-axis ON
G0 C0 ; Main spindle indexing
M6 ; Main spindle clamp
G17 G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z10.5 R7.5 F0.05 ; Helical interpolation on X-Y plane (G17)
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z11.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z11.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z12.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z12.5 R70.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z13.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z13.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z14.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z14.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z15.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 15.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z16.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z16.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z17.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z17.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z18.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z18.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z19.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X-15.0 Y0 Z19.5 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X15.0 Y0 Z20.0 R7.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X 15.0 Y0 Z20.5 R7.5 F0.05 ; Machining length 10.0mm position
G3 X15.0 Y0 R R7.5 F0.05 ; Does not execute Z1-axis cutting but executes
G3 X 15.0 Y0 R7.5 F0.05 ; flat machining of the end face.
G1 Y 1.0 F0.05 ; Retract
G0 Z10.0 ;
G18 ; Return to Z-X plane (G18)
M38 ; Power-driven tool stop
M9 ; C1-axis OFF
G0 T0 ;
G99 ; Feed per revolution

8-171
8-14-19 Polar Coordinate Interpolation

Adjust the value of Z__ according to the tool tip position.

Set the unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.
In polar coordinate interpolation, G2 and G3 machining is performed in the reverse
direction of the normal machining (G2: clockwise, G3: counterclockwise).

Press the RESET key to enter G113 mode.

G1 G4, G40 G42, G65, G98, and G99 can be commanded during G112 mode.
G0 cannot be commanded during G112 mode.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

8-172
 Program example

[PATH1]
G0 Z 0.5 T0 ;
T3422 M5 ;
M36 S1000 ;
G98 ;
M8 ;
G0 X14.0 Z14.5 C0 T23 ;················· P1
G112 ; ·········································· Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G1 W5.0 F200.0 ;
G1 X8.0 C4.0 ; ······························ P2
G1 X 4.0 ; ···································· P3
G3 X 9.0 H 2.5 R2.5 F150.0 ; ········· P4
G1 C0 F200.0 ; ······························ P5
G3 X0 C 4.5 R4.5 F150.0 ; ············· P6
G1 X8.0 F200.0 ; ··························· P7
G1 C4.0 ; ···································· P8
G113 ; ·········································· Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G0 X20.0 Z14.5 T0 ;
M9 ;
M38 ;
G99 ;

8-173
8-14-20 Back Drilling / Back Rigid Tapping

Machining drawing

Adjust the value Z__ of Z2-axis according to the tool installation length.

Program example
[PATH2]
M75 ;
/T2100 M3 S2000 ; Centering drill selection, Sub spindle forward rotation
/G0 Z24.5 T1 ; Position to machining start position
/G1 W3.5 F0.03 ; Center drilling
/G4 U0.05 ;
/G1 Z19.5 F0.2 ; Workpiece retract
/G0 T0 ;
;
/T2200 M3 S2200 ; Pilot drill selection, Sub spindle forward rotation
/G0 Z24.5 T2 ; Position to machining start position
/G1 W8.0 F0.05 ; Pilot hole drilling
/G1 Z24.5 F0.2 ; Workpiece retract
/G1 W7.5 F0.1 ; Position to machining start position
/G1 W6.3 F0.05 ; Pilot hole drilling
/G1 Z24.5 F0.2 ; Workpiece retract
/G0 T0 ;
;
/T2300 M5 ; Tap selection, Sub spindle stop
/G99 G0 Z24.5 T3 ; Position to machining start position
/M29 S1000; Rigid tapping rotation command
/G84 W9.5 F0.8 ; Rigid tapping
/G80
/G0 Z0 T0 ;
M76 ;

8-174
8-14-21 Back Boring

Machining drawing

Adjust the value Z__ of Z2-axis according to the tool installation length.

Program example

[PATH2]
/T2100 M3 S2400 ; Boring tool selection, sub spindle forward rotation
/M100 ;
/G0 X0 Z32.5 T2 ;
/G50 X6.0 ; X6.0 is the boring tool tip position.
/G0 X8.4 ; Position to machining start position
/G1 X7.0 W0.7 F0.03 ;
/G1 W4.3 F0.04 ;
/G2 X6.0 W0.5 R0.5 F0.03 ;
/M101 ;
/G4 U0.1 ;
/G1 Z32.5 F0.5 ; Workpiece retract
/G0 T0 ;
;

: Command “High-accuracy machining mode 1 ON” for back before machining.

: Command “High-accuracy machining mode 1 OFF” for back after machining.

Refer to section “8-11 Auxiliary Functions (M Functions)” for details.

8-175
8-14-22 Back Off-center Drilling / Back Off-center Rigid Tapping

E.g.1) Machining with back 4-spindle unit

Adjust the value Z__ of X2-axis according to the tool installation length.
Program example shows right-handed threading. Change from M56 to M57 in order
to perform left-handed threading.

Machining drawing

8-176
Program example

[PATH2]
M75 ;
/T2200 M5 ; Centering drill selection, Sub spindle stop
/M8 ; C2-axis ON
/G0 C0 ; Sub spindle indexing
/M6 ; Sub spindle clamp
/M56 S2000 ; Forward rotation of power-driven tool on back 4-spindle unit
/G0 X3.0 Z18.5 T22 ; Positioning at machining start position
/G1 W3.5 F0.03 ; Center drilling
/G4 U0.05 ;
/G1 Z18.5 F0.2 ; Tool retract
/G0 T0 ;
;
/T2300 ; Pilot drill selection
/M56 S3100 ; Forward rotation of power-driven tool on back 4-spindle unit
/G0 X3.0 Z18.5 T23 ; Positioning at machining start position
/G1 W13.8 F0.04 ; Pilot hole drilling
/G1 Z18.5 F0.2 ; Workpiece retract
/G0 T0 ;

/T2400 ; Tap selection

/M58 ; Power-driven tool motor for back stop
/G0 X3.0 Z18.5 T24 ; Positioning at machining start position
/G984 W9.5 F0.8 M56 S1000 ; Rigid tapping
/G0 T0 ;
/M9 ; C2-axis OFF
M76

8-177
E.g.2) Machining with front tool post

Adjust the value Z__ of Z2-axis according to the tool installation length.
Set the tool unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.
The program example illustrates right-handed tapping.
Change from M36 to M37 in order to perform left-handed tapping.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

Machining drawing

8-178
Program example

[PATH1] [PATH2]

G28 W0 ;
T2000 ;
/M8 ;
/G0 C0 ;
G0 Z 0.5 T0 ; /M6 ;
T3521 ; (Center drilling) /T3521 ;
M290 M290 ;
G0 X3.0 T21 ;
M300 ; M300 ;
/G0 Z28.0 T21 ;
/M36 S2000 ;

Centering
/G1 W4.0 F0.03 ;
/G4 U0.1 ;
/G0 Z28.0 ;
/G0 T0 ;
M310 ; M310 ;
G0 T0 ;
T3522 ; (Pilot hole drilling) /T3522 ;
M320 ; M320 ;
G0 X 6.0 T22 ;
M330 ; M330 ;
G0 T0 ;
/G0 Z28.0 T22 ;
Pilot hole

/M36 S1600 ;
drilling

/G1 W13.8 F0.04 ;

/G1 Z28.0 F0.1 ;
/G0 T0 ;;
M340 ;
M340 ;
T3523 ; (Tapping)
/T3523 ;
M350 ;
M350 ;
G0 X 6.0 T23 ;
M360 ;
M360 ;
/G0 Z28.0 M38 T23 ;
Tapping

/G984 W9.5 F0.8 M36 S1000 ;

/G99 ;

/M9 ;
M370 ; M370 ;
G0 T0 ; /G0 T0 ;

M codes in grey ( ) are wait codes.

Adjust the centering position by the X1 and Y1-axes tool wear offset on PATH1 as
necessary.
Adjust the machining depth by the Z2-axis tool wear offset.

8-179
8-14-23 Back Polar Coordinate Interpolation

E.g.1) Machining with back 4-spindle unit

When selecting a tool, be careful of a collision with the bar during the tool
positioning.
Create a program with the (+) ( ) axis directions assuming that the workpiece is
fixed and the tool is moving.

When pressing the RESET key, the machine will enter G113 mode.
G1 G4, G40 G42, G65, G98 and G99 can be commanded during G112 mode.
G0 cannot be commanded during G112 mode.

Refer to section “8-10-22 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G112, G113)” for details.

Machining drawing

8-180
Program example

[PATH2]

/T2200 M5 ;
/M56 S1000 ;
/G98 ;
/M8 ;
/G0 X14.0 Z38.5 C0 T22 ; ···························· P1
/G112 ; ····················································· Polar coordinate interpolation ON
/G1 W5.0 F200.0 ;
/G1 X8.0 C4.0 ; ·········································· P2
/G1 X 4.0 ; ··············································· P3
/G3 X 9.0 H 2.5 R2.5 F150.0 ; ···················· P4
/G1 C0 F200.0 ; ········································· P5
/G3 X0 C 4.5 R4.5 F150.0 ; ························· P6
/G1 X8.0 F200.0 ;······································· P7
/G1 C4.0 ; ··············································· P8
/G113 ; ····················································· Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
/G0 X20.0 ;
/G0 X38.5 ;
/G0 T0 ;
/M9 ;
/M58 ;
/G99 ;

8-181
E.g.2) Machining with front tool post

When selecting a tool, be careful of a collision with the bar during the tool
positioning.
Create a program with the (+) ( ) axis directions assuming that the workpiece is
fixed and the tool is moving.
Set the unit on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen.

When pressing the RESET key, the machine will enter G113 mode.
G1 G4, G40 G42, G65, G98 and G99 can be commanded during G112 mode.
G0 cannot be commanded during G112 mode.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details on
the keep relay conversational setting.
Refer to section “8-10-22 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G112, G113)” for details on
G112.

Machining drawing

8-182
Program example
[PATH1] [PATH2]
G0 Z 0.5 T0 ;
M300 ; M300 ;
; M75
T3523 ; /T3523 M5 ;
; /M36 S1000 ;
; /G98 ;
; /M8 ;
; /G0 X14.0 Z43.0 C0 T23 ; P1
; /G112 ; Polar coordinate interpolation ON
; /G1 W5.0 F200.0 ;
; /G1 X8.0 C4.0 ; P2
; /G1 X 4.0 ; P3
; /G3 X 9.0 H 2.5 R2.5 F150.0 ; P4
; /G1 C0 F200.0 ; P5
; /G3 X0 C 4.5 R4.5 F150.0 ; P6
; /G1 X8.0 F200.0 ; P7
; /G1 C4.0 ; P8
; /G113 ; Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
; /G0 X14.0 ;
; /G0 Z43.0 ;
; /G0 T0 ;
; /M9 ;
; /M38 ;
; /G99 ;
; M76
M310 ; M310 ;

8-183
8-14-24 Simultaneous Machining for PATH1 and 2

Command G99 and M5 before M29.

Command the M29 block and G84 block consecutively.
The program example illustrates right-handed tapping.
The maximum rotation speed during rigid tapping is 1500min 1.
Adjust G0 Z in the Z direction according to the tool installation length and part
length.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Machining drawing

8-184
Program example

[PATH1] [PATH2]
T1100 M3 S2000 ; T1100 M3 S2000 ;
M300 ; --------------------------------------------------------- M300 ;
G0 Z1.5 T11 ; G0 Z26.5 T11 ;
G1 W4.0 F0.03 ; Center drilling G1 W2.5 F0.03 ; Center drilling
G4 U0.1 ; G4 U0.1 ;
G0 Z0 ; G0 Z26.5 ;
G0 Z0 ;
M310 ; --------------------------------------------------------- M310 ;
G0 T0 ; G0 T0 ;
T1200 M3 S2000 ; T1200 M3 S3000 ;
M320 ; --------------------------------------------------------- M320 ;
G0 Z1.5 T12 G0 Z26.5 T12 ;
; G1 W8.5 F0.04 ; Drilling
G1 W13.8 F0.04 ; Drilling for pilot hole G4 U0.1 ;
G4 U0.1 ; G0 Z26.5 ;
G0 Z0 ; G0 Z0 ;
M330 ; --------------------------------------------------------- M330 ;
G0 T0 ; G0 T0 ;
T1300 M5 ; M5 ;
G99 G0 Z1.5 T13
;
M29 S600 ;
G84 W9.5 F0.8 ; Tapping
G80 ;
G0 Z 0.5 ;
G0 T0 ;

8-185
8-14-25 Z1-Z2 axis Synchronous Control

M40 command (Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control ON) is available only while

PATH1 and PATH2 are selected, and the program operates in

MEMORY mode.
During Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control, Z2-axis movement cannot be commanded.
In addition, the synchronous command will remain effective even when the mode is

switched to HANDLE mode. Z2-axis moves synchronously upon Z1-axis

movement.
When executing commands on PATH1 that do not move the machine components
and only change the workpiece coordinate system (such as work coordinate system
shift or geometry offset), the command will not reflect on the Z2-axis work
coordinate system.
When commanding the tool wear offset and tool nose radius compensation on
PATH1, the Z2-axis movement path is shifted by the offset amount, but it will not be
set as an offset amount (the offset vector will not be made).

Synchronization will turn off when the RESET key is pressed.

Be careful of tool collision between a tool unit and the sub spindle.
Command G130 and G131 in a single block independently.
Be sure to command the Z1-axis coordinate system (G125) on PATH1 before
commanding G131.
Z1-axis coordinate system setting (G125) [command on PATH1].
Command G131 when the Z1-axis has stopped.
After commanding G131, the Z1-axis movement will not reflect on the absolute
position of the Z2-axis. To reflect the movement, command G131 again.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Machining drawing

8-186
Program example

Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 12mm [0G102]

[PATH1] [PATH2]
T400 M3 S1000 ; M82 ;
G0 X10.0 Z36.0 T4 ; G131 ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting
for parts pick-up
M82 ; G0 Z 5.0 ;
M40 ; Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON M68 ;
M110 ; G98 G1 Z7.0 F2000 ;
G92 X6.55 W34.0 F1.0 ; G99 ;
X6.20 ; M69 ;
X5.95 ; M40 ; Z2-axis movement command
X5.75 ; M41 ; not possible at this time
X5.65 ; M83 ; Z2-axis movement command
X5.60 ; G4 ; not possible because after M41
G0 T0 ; G0 T0 ;
M111 ; G28 W0 ;
M41 ; Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF G130 ; Z2-axis coordinate system
M83 ; setting cancel

8-187
8-14-26 X and Y axes Changeover Control

Do not command the X1 or Y1-axis movement and/or any tool select command
within the 2 blocks on PATH1 after commanding M143 (X and Y-axes changeover
control OFF).
Do not command the X1 or Y1-axis movement and/or any tool selection on PATH1
during M142 execution.

Pressing the RESET key will cancel the M142 command (X and Y-axes
changeover control ON).
*1) Be sure to command the X1-axis move command after the coordinate system
setting (G50 X__ ).
Coordinate systems are set for the imaginary X1 and Y1-axes on PATH2.
Therefore, they will be not reflected in the display of the POS screen (current
positions of the real axes).
When executing G984 (back off-center rigid tapping) on PATH2, Y1-axis control on
PATH2 is not possible.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:

SB-12R: 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R: 2.0mm

Machining drawing

8-188
Program example

[PATH1] [PATH2]
; ;
T1400 M3 S2000 ; M75 ;
G0 Z5.0 T14 ; M3 S2400 ;
G1 W4.5 F0.03 ; M142 ; (Wait)
G4 U0.1 ; T1100 ;
G0 Z0 T0; /G50 X4.0 ; *1)
; /G0 X8.4 Z28.0 T11; *1)
T1300 M3 S1800 ; /G1 X7.0 W0.7 F0.01;
G0 Z5.0 T13 ; /G1 W4.3 F0.03 ;
G1 W12.0 F0.05 ; /G2 X6.0 W0.5 R0.5 F0.02 ;
G1 Z5.0 F0.5; /G1 X4.5 F0.04 ;
G1 W11.0 F0.5 ; /G1 Z28.0 F0.5 ;
G1 W8.0 F0.05 ; /G0 X4.0 T0 ;
G1 Z5.0 F0.5; /G50 X0 ;
G0 Z0 T0; /G28 W0 M5 ;
; M143 ; (Wait)
T1200 M3 S2500 ; M76 ;
G50 X6.0 ; ;
G0 X7.5 Z5.0 T12 ;
G1 W6.5 F0.03 ;
G4 U0.1 ;
G1 X4.5 F0.04 ;
G1 Z5.0 F0.5 ;
G0 X6.0 Z 0.5 T0 ;
G50 X0 ;
;
M142 ; (Wait)
T1100 ;
M143 ; (Wait)

8-189
8-14-27 Re-clamp Machining

The following units are required.

Parts Ejector with Guide Tube [0M471 ~ 0M475]
Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476]
Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) Warning Plate (Japanese/English) [0M476A]
Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]

Machining drawing

8-190
 Program example

1) When a workpiece is clamped with the sub collet and re-clamping is performed

[PATH1] [PATH2]
O1234 ; O1234 ;
G266 A10.0 W280.0 S2000 B2.0 Z0.0 X 1.0 F0.03 ; G130 ;
G125 ; G99 ;
G300 ; M5 ;
G170 ; G0 T0 ;
G40 G97 M9 ; T2000 ;
G99 M3 S500 ; M200 ;
M11 ; M20 ;
G0 T0 Z0 ; M75 ;
M200 ;
M20 ;
M10 ;
G171 ;
T100 ;
G0 Z21.0 Z 0.5 M25 ;
M27 ;

(Front Machining)
T200 M3 S4000 ; (/Back Machining)
G0 X11.0 Z 0.5 T2 ;
G1 X4.6 F0.2 ;
G1 X6.0 Z0.2 F0.03 ;
G1 Z8.0 F0.04 ;
G4 U0.05 ;
G1 X9.6 F0.05 ;
G1 X10.6 W0.5 F0.03 ;
G0 X11.0 T0 ; M76 ;

M500 ; M500 ;

T100 M3 S500 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z10.5 T1 ;
M82 ; M82 ;
G900 J30 ;
G131 ;
M11 ;
M68 ;
Pick-up Positon 1 G0 Z 30.0 ;
M69 ;
G130 ;
N30 ;

M600 ; M600 ;
M68 ;
G98 G1 Z150.0 F2000.0;
G99 ;
M69 ;

M610 ; M610 ;

8-191
 G900 J40 ;

M80 ; M80 ;
/M98 P7001 ; Call sub program of /M98 P7001 ;
/M81 ; intermediate bar /M81 ;
/M99 ; absence check (No /M99 ;
M81 ; barstock detection) . M81 ;
Carry out bar N40 ;
M620 ; absence check before M620 ;
re-clamp.

M110 ;
G4 U0.5 ; Return to the
M11 ; starting position of
G0 Z0 ; Z1-axis machining.
G125 Z150.0
M10 ; Absolute Pos is
G4 U0.5 ; commanded at the
M111 ; time of re-clamp.
G4 U0.5 ;

T100 M3 S2000 ;
M68 ;
G98 G1 X[#531+1.0] Z282.0 F2000.0 T1 ;
G99 ;
M69 ;
M630 ; M630 ;
G900 J50 ;
G131 ;
M68 ;
M14 ;
Pick-up Position 2 G98 G1 Z255.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 M10 ;
M15;
M69 ;
M40 ; M40 ;
G1 X9.0 F#522 ;
G1 X11.0 F#522 ;
G1 Z281.3 F0.3 ;
G1 X9.6 Z282.0 F0.02 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M41 ; M41 ;
G4 ;
M68 ;
G0 W 20.0 ;
M69;
M83 ; M83 ;
M80 ; G0 T0 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ; G28 W0 ;
/G0 W#528 ; G130 ;
/M98 P7000 ; M5 ;
M81 ; M99 ;
M99 ;

8-192
Codes in gray are wait codes.
Z1-axis machining start position
Adjust the value of Z__ ; according to Z1-axis effective stroke and the specified value in
Z__ .
In this example:
Z = 155mm (Z1-axis effective stroke) 150mm ( Z__ ) 5mm (margin approx. 5.0 20.0)
= 0.0
The value of Z__; is Z-axis coordinate + cut-off tool width.
Example: Z = 8.5mm ( Z-axis coordinate) 2mm (cut-off tool width) =10.5
Pick-up position 1
Adjust the value of Z__ ; according to the part projection length from the end face of sub
spindle (set in Pick-up position 2) and the clearance between the workpiece at front
machining and the workpiece at the sub spindle.
Example: Z = 25mm (workpiece projection length) 5mm (clearance) = 30.0
Adjust the value of Z__ ; according to Z1-axis effective stroke.
Enter the value of Z__ into Z__ ; .
Adjust the value of Z__ ; according to the part length and the cut-off tool.
Example:
Z = 280mm (Part length) 2mm (cut-off tool width) + 0mm (shift amount of cut-off tool tip)
= 282.0
Pick-up position 2
Adjust the value of Z__ ; according to the part length and the part projection length from
the end face of sub spindle.
Example: Z = 280mm (Part length) 25mm (Part projection length) = 255.0

The maximum pick-up part projection amount from the end face of the sub spindle is
30mm.

Refer to section “8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System

Setting” for details on #522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530, #531.
Refer to section “8-5 Soft OT Function by Tool” for detail on Z1-axis effective stroke.
Refer to section “Appendix 5 Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders” and
“8-4 Coordinate Systems” for detail on the position command of each axis.

8-193
2) When a workpiece is re-clamped with the bar stock gripping unit [57418]

Refer to section “13-1 Barstock Gripping Unit [57418]” for details.

T400 M5 ;
G0 X11.0 Y14.0; Section of the above-mentioned program
G98 G1 X6.0 F500.0 ; O1234 is changed to the program on the left.
M62 ;
G99 ;
M11 ;
G0 Z0 ;
G125 Z150.0 ;
M10 ;
G4 U0.5 ;
M63 ;
G0 X18.0 ;

8-194
 Subprogram of intermediate bar absence check
[PATH1]
O7001 ;
M9 ;
T100;
G99 G0 X[#531+1.0] M3 S#529 T1 ;
M82 ;
M800 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M810 ;
M83 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ;
G0 W#528 ;
M98 P7000 ;
M99 ;

[PATH 2]
O7001 ;
M11 ;
M82 ;
M68 ;
G0 Z65.0 ;
M69 ;
M10 ;
M800 ;
M810 ;
M68 ;
G0 W 20.0 ;
M69 ;
M83 ;
G28 W0 M5 ;
M99 ;

Codes in gray are wait codes.

Standard bar replacement program (O7000) is called.

Common variables (#522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530 and #531) set on the
MACHINING DATA screen can be used for cut-off process etc. on PATH1.

Refer to section “8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System

Setting” for details on #522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530 and #531.
Refer to section “8-14 Progoram Pattern Coordinate Systems” and “Appendix 5
Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders” for detail on the position command
of each axis.
Refer to section “8-14-4 Bar Replacement Program” for detail on the standard bar
replacement program.

8-195
8-14-28 Chamfering and Corner R

Chamfering and corner R can be inserted between two blocks which intersect at a right angle.

Format
Z-X plane

Item Format Tool movement

(G18 ;)
G1 Zb I i F ;
Chamfering Z X
G1 X F ;

Moves as a d c

(G18 ;)
G1 Xb K k F ;
Chamfering X Z
G1 Z F ;

Moves as a d c

(G18 ;)
G1 Zb R r F ;
Corner R Z X
G1 X F ;

Moves as a d c

(G18 ;)
G1 Xb R r F ;
Corner R X Z
G1 Z F ;

Moves as a d c

8-196
Y-Z plane

Item Format Tool movement

(G19 ;)
G1 Yb K k F ;
Chamfering Y Z
G1 Z F ;

Moves as a d c

(G19 ;)
G1 Zb J j F ;
Chamfering Z Y
G1 Y F ;

Moves as a d c

(G19 ;)
G1 Yb R r F ;
Corner R Y Z
G1 Z F ;

Moves as a d c

(G19 ;)
G1 Zb R r F ;
Corner R Z Y
G1 Y F ;

Moves as a d c

8-197
Machining drawing

Program example

Standard program Program with chamfering and corner R

; ;
T200 M3 S3200 ; T200 M3 S2000 ;
G0 X17.0 Z 0.5 T2 ; G0 X17.0 Z 0.5 T2 ;
G1 X8.0 F0.2 ; G1 X8.0 F0.2 ;
G1 Z8.0 F0.03 ; G1 Z8.0 F0.03 ;
G1 X11.6 F0.04 ; G1 X12.0 K0.2 F0.04 ;
G1 X12.0 W0.2 F0.04 ;
G1 Z13.5 F0.05 ; G1 Z14.0 R0.5 F0.05 ;
G3 X13.0 Z14.0 R0.5 F0.05 ;
G1 X17.0 F0.05 ;
G0 T0 ; G1 X17.0 F0.05 ;
; G0 T0 ;
;

This function cannot be used with direct drawing dimension programming.

For details on setting, please refer to section ”7-1-2 Setting of Chamfering Corner
R/Direct Drawing Dimension Programming”.

8-198
8-14-29 Direct Drawing Dimension Programming

Angles of straight lines, chamfering values, corner R values, and other dimensional values on
machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting these values.
In addition, the chamfering and corner R can be inserted between straight lines with an
optional angle.

To instruct angles of straight lines, chamfering values or corner R values, command with a
comma (,).
,A : Angles of straight line
,C : Chamfering value
,R : Corner R values

Format of Z-X plane (G18)

G18 ;
G1 X Z F ;
G1 Z F ;
G1 Z ,Aa1 F ;
G1 X F ;
G1 X ,Aa2 ,Cc F ;
G1 Z ,Rr F ;
G1 X F ;
G1 Z F ;

8-199
Format of Y-Z plane (G19)

G19 ;
G1 Y Z F ;
G1 Z F ;
G1 Z ,Aa1 F ;
G1 Y F ;
G1 Y ,Aa2 ,Cc F ;
G1 Z ,Rr F ;
G1 Y F ;
G1 Z F ;

8-200
Machining drawing

Program example

Standard program Program with direct drawing dimension

programming
; ;
T200 M3 S3200 ; T200 M3 S3200 ;
(G18 ;) (G18 ;)
G0 X17.0 Z-0.5 T2 ; G0 X17.0 Z 0.5 T2 ;
G1 X5.002 F0.2 ; G1 X5.002 F0.2 ;
G1 X7.854 Z7.587 F0.04 ; G1 Z8.0 ,A10.0 ,R0.5 F0.04 ;
G3 X8.839 Z8.0 R0.5 F0.04 ;
G1 X11.0 F0.05 ; G1 X12.0 ,C0.5 F0.05 ;
G1 X12.0 Z8.5 F0.05 ;
G1 Z13.5 F0.06 ; G1 Z14.0 ,R0.5 F0.06 ;
G3 X13.0 Z14.0 R0.5 F0.06 ;
G1 X17.0 F0.06 ; G1 X17.0 F0.06 ;
G0 T0 ; G0 T0 ;
; ;

Direct drawing dimension programming cannot be used with chamfering and corner
R.

For details on setting, refer to section “7-1-2 Setting of Chamfering Corner R/Direct
Drawing Dimension Programming”.

8-201
8-15 Program Example for the Test Piece

8-202
 [PATH1] [PATH2]
O1234 ; O1234 ;
G266 A12.0 W26.0 S2000 B2.0 Z25.0 X 2.0 F0.02 ; G130 ;
G125 ; G99 M5 ;
G300 ; G0 T0 ;
G170 ; T2000 ;
G25 ; M200 ;
G40 G97 M9 ; M20 ;
G99 M3 S500 ; M75 ;
M11 ; /T2100 M3 S2000 ;
G0 Z0 T0 ; /G0 Z37.0 T21 ;
M200 ; /G1 W5.0 F0.05 ;
M20 ; /G4 U0.1 ;
M10 ; /G0 Z0 ;
G171 ; /G0 T0 ;
T100 ;
G0 X21.0 Z 0.5 M25 ; /T2200 M3 S2500 ;
M27 ; /G0 Z37.0 T22 ;
/G1 W10.3 F0.05 ;
T1100 M3 S2000 ; /G1 Z0 F0.2 ;
G0 Z4.5 T11 ; /G0 T0 M5 ;
G1 W5.0 F0.05 ;
G4 U0.1 ; /T2300 ;
G0 Z 0.5 ; /G99 G0 Z37.0 T23 ;
G0 T0 ; /M29 S800 ;
/G84 W7.0 F0.8 ;
T1200 M3 S1500 ; /G80 ;
G0 Z4.5 T12 ; /G0 Z10.0;
G1 W14.0 F0.05 ; /G0 T0
G0 Z 0.5 ; /G28 W0 ;
G4 U0.5 ;
G0 Z4.5 /T2900 M5 ;
G1 W13.5 F0.3 ; /G0 Z40.0 ;
G1 W2.5 F0.05 ; /M11 ;
G0 Z 0.5 ; /G4 U1.0 ;
G0 T0 M5 ; /M84 ;
/G28 W0 ;
T1300 ; /M27 ;
G99 G0 Z4.5 T13 ; /M14 ;
M29 S800 ; /T2000 ;
G84 W12.0 F1.0 ; /G4 U1.0 ;
G80 ; /M15 ;
G0 Z 0.5 ; M76 ;
G0 T0 ;

8-203
 [PATH1] [PATH2]
T300 M3 S3000 ;
G26 ;
G0 X13.0 Z 1.0 T3 ;
G0 X5.0 ;
G41 G1 U 1 W1 F0.05 ;
G1 X8.0 Z0.5 F0.04 ;
G1 Z2.0 F0.05 ;
G1 X9.85 W1.0 F0.04 ;
G1 Z8.0 F0.05 ;
G1 X13.0 Z11.5 F0.04 ;
G40 G1 U1 K1 F0.05 ;
G0 T0 ;

T3100 M5 ;
M8 ;
M36 S2000 ;
G0 C0 ;
M6 ;
G0 X13.0 Z19.0 T31 ;
G1 X8.6 F0.05 ;
G4 U0.1 ;
G0 X13.0 ;
M7 ;
G0 H180.0 ;
M6 ;
G1 X8.6 F0.05 ;
G4 U0.1 ;
G0 X13.0 ;
G0 T0 ;

T3200 ;
M36 S3000 ;
G0 X13.0 Z19.0 T32 ;
G1 X1.0 F0.04 ;
G1 X13.0 ;
M7 ;
G0 H180.0 ;
M6 ;
G1 X1.0 F0.04
G0 X13.0 ;
G0 T0 ;
M38 ;
M9 ;

8-204
 [PATH1] [PATH2]
T500 M3 S1000 ;
G0 X13.0 Z15.0 M23 T5 ;
G92 X9.5 W7.0 F1.5 ;
X9.3 ;
X9.0 ;
X8.8 ;
X8.6 ;
X8.4 ;
X8.2 ;
X8.08 ;
X8.03 ;
G0 X13.0 M24 ;
G0 T0 ;

T200 M3 S2500 ;
G0 X13.0 Z22.0 T2 ;
G1 X11.0 F0.03 ;
G4 U0.2 ;
G1 X11.4 F0.3 ;
G1 W0.4 F0.3 ;
G1 X13.0 W 0.8 F0.03 ;
G1 W0.8 F0.3 ;
G1 X11.4 F0.3 ;
G1 X13.0 W0.8 F0.03 ;
G1 X13.0 F0.3 ;
G0 T0 ;

T400 M3 S3000 ;
G0 X13.0 Z25.5 T4 ;
G41 G1 U-1 W-1 F0.05
G1 X10.0 W1.5 F0.03 ;
G1 W1.5 F0.05 ;
G1 X8.0 W1.0 F0.03 ;
G1 X13.0 F0.3 ;
G40 G1 U1 K1 F0.05
G0 T0 ;
M500 ; M500 ;

T100 M3 S2000 ; M4 S2000 ;

G0 X13.0 Z28.0 T1 ; T2000 ;
G900 J50 ;
M11 ;
M82 ; M82 ;
G131 ;
G0 Z 5.0 ;
M68 ;
M14 ;
G98 G1 Z14.0 F2000 ;
M15 ;
G99 M10 ;
(G133 ;)
M69 ;

8-205
 [PATH1] [PATH2]
M600 ; M600 ;
G1 X 2.0 F0.02 ;
M610 ; M610 ;
M68 ;
G0 W 20.0 ;
M69 ;
M83 ; M83 ;
G0 T0 ;
M80 ; G28 W0 ;
/G0 X13.0 W 0.5 ; G130 ;
/G0 W2.0 ; M5 ;
/M98 P7000 ; M27 ;
M81 ; N50 ;
M99 ; M99 ;

8-206
8-16 Program Reference Data

8-207
 Standard feed rate
A= Carbide tip
B= Insert tip (mm/rev)

Material
BsBM SUM S45C SUS
Machining process
A 0.05 0.15 0.03 0.07 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.03
Side turning
B 0.1 0.4 0.05 0.3 0.05 0.25 0.05 0.1
A 0.02 0.05 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.02
Cutting in
B 0.04 0.08 0.03 0.06 0.02 0.05 0.02 0.04
A 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.02
Grooving
B 0.05 0.08 0.05 0.15 0.05 0.1 0.03 0.05
A 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.02
Chamfering
B 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.03 0.05
A 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.04 0.015 0.03 0.01 0.02
Boring
B 0.05 0.15 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.07 0.03 0.05
SKH
Drilling 0.05 0.15 0.03 0.15 0.02 0.1 0.02 0.07
Drill
A 0.02 0.04 0.01 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.007 0.012
Cutting-off
B 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.07 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.05

Cutting speed(m/min)

Turning Inside turning Drilling

(Carbide) (Carbide) (HSS)
Free cutting steel SUM 100 150 50 100 20 50
Brass BsBM 120 250 60 120 40 90
Aluminum AL 100 200 50 120 60 100
Carbon steel S45C 60 120 40 80 15 25
Stainless SUS 40 100 30 70 5 20

Cutting speed (m/min) 1000

Main spindle speed(min-1) ＝
Diameter dimension (mm)

Main spindle speed for tapping and die cutting

Steel Brass
M3 P0.5 500min-1 600min-1
M4 P0.7 500min-1 550min-1
M5 P0.8 450min-1 500min-1
M6 P1.0 400min-1 500min-1
M8 P1.25 350min-1 450min-1

Main spindle speed for end mill

Brass Steel Stainless steel

Cutting speed m/min 15 40 10 30 5 20
Feeding speed mm/brade 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.04 0.01 0.02

8-208
Single point thread data (JIS/ISO Tolerance grade: 6g)

Insert tip
Thread Outer Root
Pitch Nose R
diameter diameter diameter
P R
D d1
* M 3.0 0.50 2.93 2.28 0.05
M 3.0 0.35 2.94
* M 3.5 0.60 3.42 2.63 0.05
M 3.5 0.35 3.44
* M 4.0 0.70 3.91 2.97 0.05
M 4.0 0.50 3.93 3.28 0.05
* M 4.5 0.75 4.41 3.40 0.05
M 4.5 0.50 4.43 3.78 0.05
* M 5.0 0.80 4.90 3.82 0.05
M 5.0 0.50 4.93 4.28 0.05
M 5.5 0.50 5.43 4.78 0.05
* M 6.0 1.00 5.88 4.60 0.10
M 6.0 0.75 5.91 4.89 0.05
* M 7.0 1.00 6.88 5.60 0.10
M 7.0 0.75 6.91 5.89 0.05
* M 8.0 1.25 7.87 6.22 0.10
M 8.0 1.00 7.88 6.60 0.10
M 8.0 0.75 7.91 6.89 0.05
* M 9.0 1.25 8.87 7.22 0.10
M 9.0 1.00 8.88 7.60 0.10
M 9.0 0.75 8.91 7.89 0.05
* M 10.0 1.50 9.85 7.83 0.10
M 10.0 1.25 9.87 8.22 0.10
M 10.0 1.00 9.88 8.60 0.10
M 10.0 0.75 9.91 8.89 0.05
* M 11.0 1.50 10.85 8.83 0.10
M 11.0 1.00 10.88 9.60 0.10
M 11.0 0.75 10.91 9.89 0.05
* M 12.0 1.75 11.83 9.44 0.10
M 12.0 1.50 11.85 9.82 0.10
M 12.0 1.25 11.87 10.21 0.10
M 12.0 1.00 11.88 10.60 0.10
* M 14.0 2.00 13.82 11.25 0.20
M 14.0 1.50 13.85 11.83 0.10
M 14.0 1.00 13.88 12.60 0.10
M 15.0 1.50 14.85 12.83 0.10
M 15.0 1.00 14.88 13.60 0.10
* M 16.0 2.00 15.82 13.25 0.20
M 16.0 1.50 15.85 13.83 0.10
M 16.0 1.00 15.88 14.60 0.10

8-209
 Insert tip
Thread Outer Root
Pitch Nose R
diameter diameter diameter
P R
D d1
M 17.0 1.50 16.85 14.83 0.10
M 17.0 1.00 16.88 15.60 0.10
* M 18.0 2.50 17.79 14.48 0.20
M 18.0 2.00 17.82 15.25 0.20
M 18.0 1.50 17.85 15.83 0.10
M 18.0 1.00 17.88 16.60 0.10
* M 20.0 2.50 19.79 16.48 0.20
M 20.0 2.00 19.82 17.25 0.20
M 20.0 1.50 19.85 17.83 0.10
M 20.0 1.00 19.88 18.60 0.10

Give priority to the JIS standard for the size of the screw.
Threading of thin screws may not always be possible because the barstock may bend due
to threading resistance.
Screws with the * mark are coarse screws.
The nose R sizes vary depending on the type of insert tip.
When using an insert tip of nose R which differs from the threading dimensions list,
root diameter d’1 can be calculated with the following formula.
R’ : nose R of insert tip to be used
d’1 = d1 + (R’ R) 2

8-210
Prepared hole diameter for tapping (JIS/ISO Tolerance grade: 6H)

Thread dia.× Recommended Thread dia.× Recommended

Pitch pilot hole diameter Pitch pilot hole diameter
1.0×0.25 0.75 3.5 0.6 2.90
1.0×0.2 0.80 3.5 0.35 3.15
1.1×0.25 0.85 4.0 0.7 3.30
1.1×0.2 0.90 4.0 0.5 3.50
1.2×0.25 0.95 4.5 0.75 3.75
1.2×0.2 1.00 4.5 0.5 4.00
1.4×0.3 1.10 5.0 0.8 4.20
1.4×0.2 1.20 5.0 0.5 4.50
1.6×0.35 1.25 5.5 0.5 5.00
1.6×0.2 1.40 6.0 1.0 5.00
1.7×0.3 1.40 6.0 0.75 5.25
1.7×0.2 1.50 7.0 1.0 6.00
1.8×0.35 1.45 7.0 0.75 6.25
1.8×0.2 1.60 8.0 1.25 6.75
2.0×0.4 1.60 8.0 1.0 7.00
2.0×0.25 1.75 8.0 0.75 7.25
2.2×0.45 1.75 9.0 1.25 7.75
2.2×0.25 1.95 9.0 1.0 8.00
2.3×0.4 1.90 9.0 0.75 8.25
2.5×0.45 2.05 10.0 1.5 8.50
2.5×0.35 2.15 10.0 1.25 8.75
2.6 0.45 2.15 10.0 1.0 9.00
3.0 0.5 2.50 10.0 0.75 9.25
3.0 0.35 2.65

8-211
8-212
9. Automatic and Manual Operations
This chapter explains the procedures for automatic and manual operations.
There are two methods of automatic operation - MDI operation and MEMORY operation.

WARNING
Always close all doors and turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to
MACHINING .
Never machine beyond the machine specifications.
Never put your hand(s) into the machine.
Check the status of operation as needed, and be careful of the status of the
cutting chips, the coolant amount and discharge, tool damage and wear, and
guide bush seizure.
Major accidents can occur if any trouble is neglected.
Be sure to stop the machine and remove the cutting chips regularly.
If cutting chips become entangled or clogged in the material or tools, the
effectiveness of the coolant will decline considerably and can be the cause of
fire.
Keep away from the cover mounted on the guide tube of the parts ejector with
guide tube. This cover is exposed on the lower part, so parts of your body can
easily be caught by the guide tube.

9-1
9-1 MDI Operation

Execute MDI operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Press either the PATH1 key or PATH2 key to select a PATH in which
programs are to be registered.

If the PATH at which MDI was inputted and the PATH selected by the PATH

keys , are different, the MDI command will not be executed.

The PATH selected by the PATH keys will operate simultaneously.
Pay attention to the operation.

It is also possible to select multiple PATHs and command in MDI mode.

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the [MDI] soft key to display the following screen.

The program number “O0000” is automatically inserted.

A maximum of 511 characters in a program can be created and executed.

9-2
(5) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH for MDI input.

The selected PATH will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen.

(6) Input 1 block of a program by pressing the address key and then numerical key
repeatedly.

(7) Press the EOB key then press the INSERT key .
1 block of the program will be registered.
(8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) to create the whole program.

For details on editing the program, please refer to section “7-5 Program Editing” for
details.

(9) Close the doors of the machine body.

MDI operation cannot be started while a door is open.

(10) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

(11) Press the START button .

Automatic operation by the created program will be started.

Coordinate display: for the inch version, the data display will be . .
Press the [ABSOLUTE] soft key to display the current position display screen for
the workpiece coordinate system.
Press the [RELATIVE] soft key to display the current position display screen for the
relative coordinate system.
Press the [ALL] soft key to display the current overall position display screen.

9-3
9-2 Memory Operation

Execute MEMORY operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Press the PATH1 key and/or PATH2 key to light up the lamp(s) and select
the PATH(s) for executing MEMORY operation.

The PATHs selected by the PATH keys will operate simultaneously.

Pay attention to the operation.

(2) Press the MEMORY key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key to display the following screens.

Screen 1

(5) Search for the execution programs separately on PATH1 and PATH 2.

For details on searching a program, refer to section “7-4-1 Program Number

Search”.
For details on creating a program, refer to section “7-2-1 Registering a Program in
the Memory with the Address/Numerical Keys”.

(6) For simultaneous operation, confirm that the correct program number is displayed on
each PATH.

9-4
 Press the [PROGRAM] soft key to switch over between screen 1 and 2.
Press the [CHECK] soft key to display screen 3.

Screen 2

Screen 3

9-5
(7) Close the doors of the machine body.

MEMORY operation cannot be started while a door is open.

(8) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

(9) Press the START button .

Automatic operation will be started according to the program registered in memory.

Coordinate display: for the inch version, the data display will be . .

9-6
9-3 Manual Handle Retrace Operation
Manual handle retrace is a method of manual operation.
Movement of the machining program can be checked with the electronic handwheel.
The program operates according to the handle feed magnification and rotation speed of the
electronic handwheel.

WARNING
The spindles rotate by the command speeds.
The feed rate of the axes is determined by the handle rotation amount per hour
and handle feed magnification, therefore the machining conditions will differ
from the program.
Be careful of the cutting feed rate when performing actual machining.
If the machining conditions do not match, the bar material and tools may
become damaged.

This operation functions only in MEMORY mode.

This operation does not function when an alarm is displayed.
Do not perform backward movement when machining a bar material.
The movement from the program is advanced in the forward direction is
memorized. Therefore, it is not possible to suddenly advance the program in the
reverse direction.
When advancing the program in the forward direction, it can be reversed to the
memorized movement.
However, backward movement is not possible with certain G codes, M codes or
any T code.
Backward movement is possible with the following G codes:
G0~G4, G17~G19,G25, G26, G28, G30, G40~G42, G50, G65~G67, G70~G75,
G80, G83, G85, G87, G89, G90, G94, G98, G99
Backward movement is not possible with wait M codes preceding M200.
When it is not possible, one of the following operator messages will be displayed
according to the corresponding PATH.
PATH1: 2044 PATH1 NO REVERSING
PATH2: 2045 PATH2 NO REVERSING
When forward movement is performed, the retrace operation will be resumed and
the message will be cleared.
If forward movement cannot be performed, perform backward movement once.
If forward movement cannot be performed after backward movement, perform a
bigger backward movement than the previous one.
To perform forward movement, perform backward movement until backward
movement is prohibited on the corresponding PATH.

9-7
 Feed rate of the axes is determined by the handle rotation amount per hour and the
handle feed magnification.
However, it will not be faster than the rapid traverse of the program.
The upper limit of rapid traverse speed is normally 5%.
After the operation has been stopped by M0, M1 or M20, the operation will resume
by turning the handle for 2 seconds or more continuously.
Backward movement is not always possible in Cylindrical interpolation mode
(G107) and Polar coordinate interpolation mode (G112).
Backward movement of programmable data input (G10) is possible.
Be aware that the parameters and the offset amounts altered in the forward
movement are irreversible.

Single block operation is invalid.

The [NO CHAG.] message displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen means
that the direction of program execution cannot be changed.
If [NO CHAG.] is displayed during forward movement, backward movement cannot
be performed and vice versa.
When the [CHECK] soft key is pressed to display the check screen, the movement
of the program can be checked.

Forwards (forward movement)

Turning the handle clockwise will
make the program move forwards.
The program is executed from the head
of the program towards the program
end.

Backwards (backward movement)

Turning the handle counter-clockwise
will make the program move
backwards.
The program is executed from the
program end towards the head of the
program.

Follow the procedure below to operate manual handle retrace.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

Press the ZERO RETURN key to light up the lamp.

Then press the MAIN SPINDLE ON key and the SUB SPINDLE ON key
to light up their lamps.

9-8
(4) Press the PATH1 and/or PATH2 keys to select the PATH(s) for executing
manual handle retrace.

The PATHs selected by the PATH keys will operate simultaneously.

Pay attention to the operation.

(5) Press the MEMORY key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the PROGRAM key .

(7) Search the execution programs separately on PATH1 and PATH2.

For details on searching a program, please refer to section “7-4-1 Program Number
Search”.

(8) When executing simultaneous operation, confirm that the correct program number is
displayed on each PATH.
(9) Close the doors of the machine body.

Manual handle retrace operation cannot be started while a door is open.

(10) Press the HANDLE RETRACE key to light up the lamp.

[RETRACE MODE : VALID] will be temporarily displayed on the screen, then the
screen returns to the previous screen.

The lamp of the MEMORY key flashes.

(11) Adjust the handle feed magnification with the HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION

keys .

The bigger the handle feed magnification, the faster machine movement becomes.
Feed rate of the axes is determined by the handle rotation amount per hour and the
handle feed magnification. However, it will not be faster than the rapid traverse of
the program.
The upper limit of rapid traverse speed is normally 5%.

9-9
(12) Turn the handle clockwise (forwards).
The program executes in proportion to the rotation amount of the handle.
To make the machine movement smaller, either move the handle slowly or make the
handle feed magnification smaller.
Retrace mode becomes valid and the movement is memorized.

The movement is memorized from the moment the program is advanced in the
forward direction. Therefore, it is not possible to suddenly advance the program in
the reverse direction. When advancing the program in the forward direction, it can
be reversed to the memorized movement.
However, the backward movement is not possible for certain G codes, M codes or
any T code.
The backward movement is possible with the following G codes:
G0~G4, G17~G19,G25, G26, G28, G30, G40~G42, G50, G65~G67, G70~G75,
G80, G83, G85, G87, G89, G90, G94, G98, G99
The backward movement is not possible with wait M codes preceding M200.
When it is not possible, one of the following operator messages will be displayed
according to the corresponding PATH.
PATH1: 2044 PATH1 NO REVERSING
PATH2: 2045 PATH2 NO REVERSING
When forward movement is performed, the retrace operation will be resumed and
the message will be cleared.
If an alarm message is displayed, remove the cause of the alarm and press the

RESET key . Press the HANDLE RETRACE key and resume retrace
operation from the top of the program.
The backward movement is not always possible in Cylindrical interpolation mode
(G107) and Polar coordinate interpolation mode (G112).
Backward movement of programmable data input (G10) is possible; however, be
aware that the parameters and the offset amounts altered in forward movement are
irreversible.

The [M.H.RTR.] message will be displayed at the bottom-right part of the CNC
screen.

The START button lights up.

The program executes in proportion to the rotation amount of the handle.
To make the machine movement smaller, either move the handle slowly or make
the handle feed magnification smaller.
Single block operation is invalid.

(13) Stop the handle. The program stops.

The START button remains lit up.

9-10
(14) Turn the handle counter-clockwise (backwards).
The program executes in proportion to the rotation amount of the handle.
To make the machine movement smaller, either move the handle slowly or make the
handle feed magnification smaller.

The movement is memorized from the moment the program is advanced in the
forward direction. Therefore, it is not possible to suddenly advance the program in
the reverse direction. When advancing the program in the forward direction, it
cannot be reversed to the memorized movement.
However, the backward movement is not possible for certain G codes, M codes or
any T code.
It is possible with the following G codes:
G0~G4, G17~G19,G25, G26, G28, G30, G40~G42, G50, G65~G67, G70~G75,
G80, G83, G85, G87, G89, G90, G94, G98, G99
Not possible with wait M codes preceding M200.
When the backward movement is not possible, one of the following operator
messages will be displayed according to the corresponding PATH.
PATH1: 2044 PATH1 NO REVERSING
PATH2: 2045 PATH2 NO REVERSING
When forward movement is performed, the retrace operation will be resumed and
the message will be cleared.
If an alarm message is displayed, remove the cause of the alarm and press the

RESET key . Press the HANDLE RETRACE key and resume retrace
operation from the top of the program.
If forward movement cannot be performed after performing backward movement,
perform a bigger backward movement than the previous one.
To perform forward movement, perform backward movement until backward
movement is prohibited on the corresponding PATH.
The backward movement is not always possible in Cylindrical interpolation mode
(G107) and Polar coordinate interpolation mode (G112).
Backward movement of programmable data input (G10) is possible; however, be
aware that the parameter and the offset amount altered during forward movement
are irreversible.

(15) When manual handle retrace operation is finished, press the HANDLE RETRACE

key to turn off the lamp.

The [M.H.RTR.] massage displayed at the bottom-right part of the screen will
disappear.

The lamp of the MEMORY key lights up.

The FEED HOLD button lights up.

9-11
MEMO

9-12
10. Setting and Adjustment

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and accidents.

Be sure to use tool units listed in “Appendix 4. List of Tool Holders”.

Using an undesignated tool unit will cause machining defects or machine collision.
Carry out preparation and adjustment of the machine while under the supervisor’s
control.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.
Never leave any tools or tool units on the machine after use. Always keep them
organized.

10-1
10-1 Installing and Adjusting the Main Collet

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.
Always check that the collet gripping force is sufficient. If the collet gripping force
is insufficient, the material may fly out from the spindle and is very dangerous.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
Be sure to adjust the position of the toggle when the type of collet has been
changed.
To adjust the position of the toggle, insert the bar into the collet and carry out
steps (17) (21) shown in the following procedure.
In the non-guide bush version, in order to prevent injury, avoid touching the
edges of tools during installation or adjustment etc.

Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

10-2
The structure of the main collet is shown below.

10-3
Carry out the procedure below to install the collet and adjust the gripping force.
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the headstock room door.

(5) Loosen the two knob screws and remove the cover .
(6) Remove the cap (right-hand screw), then insert the spring and the collet into
the inner diameter of the sleeve . Insert the sleeve into the main spindle in
accordance with its key and tighten the cap .
To attach/detach the cap , insert the pipe into the cap , then hook a hook spanner
onto the hole of the pipe and insert the handle into the hole of the toggle
holder .
(7) Insert a bar into the collet .
(8) Loosen the screw to release the adjusting nut .
(9) Loosen the screws and pull out the shaft
(10) Insert the handle until it contacts the bottom of the hole of the shifter lever ,
and then move the shifter lever manually to check the gripping force.

Alarm EX1012 will be displayed while checking the gripping force.

To not display alarm EX1012, press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.

(11) Adjust the gripping force.

Turn the adjusting nut in the forward direction of the main spindle rotation (to
the front) for a stronger gripping force.
Turn the adjusting nut in the reverse direction of the main spindle rotation (to the
back) for a weaker gripping force.
(12) After adjusting the gripping force, tighten the screw and fix the adjusting nut to
the main spindle.
(13) Insert the shaft and tighten the screws .

(14) After the adjustment, press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

(15) Press HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(16) Press the MAIN COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the collet.
(17) Loosen the nut (left-hand screw) and nut (right-hand screw).
(18) Turn the buckle so that the toggle is placed on the shaded part E (slant line) (see
the following drawing) of the shifter and the clearance between the end of the
toggle and the shifter will be the value in the following table.
SB-12R 0.5mm~1.5mm
SB-16R/20R 1.0mm~2.0mm

10-4
 To turn the buckle , hook the spanner onto the piston and loosen the nuts
(2 pcs. each) beforehand.

Turn the buckle to the front to move the shifter to the left, and turn the
buckle to the back to move the shifter to the right.

(19) Tighten the nut (left-handed screw) and nut (right-handed screw) to fix the
buckle .

(20) Press the MAIN COLLET key to turn off the lamp.
The collet unclamps.

(21) Confirm that the toggle is placed on the shaded part F (cross line) of the shifter
(confirm that the toggle is not placed on the slope portion).
(22) Close the doors of the machine body.

(23) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(24) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(25) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.
(26) Mount the cover with the two knob screws .
(27) Close the headstock room door.

(28) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-5
10-2 Installing and Adjusting the Guide Bush
<Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.
Check that the clearance between the guide bush and the bar is adequate.
If the guide bush is excessively tightened, it may cause a seizure of the bar
and/or a fire.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during installation or
adjustment etc.
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and accidents.

The guide bush is the heart of the Swiss type automatic lathe, and has the most
influence on machining accuracy. Therefore, handle the guide bush with the
greatest possible care.
Be sure to use tool units listed in “Appendix 4. List of Tool Holders”.
Using an undesignated tool unit will cause machining defects and/or machine
collision.
Execute the reference point return of all axes before starting this work.

Lapping the inner diameter of the guide bush with a bar is recommended to prevent
guide bush seizure and variations in machining dimensions caused by fluctuation of
the outer diameter dimension.

10-6
10-2-1 Installing and Adjusting the Stationary Guide Bush

Carry out the procedure below to install and adjust the stationary guide bush.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(5) Insert the guide bush in accordance with the key of the sleeve , and fix it with
the adjusting nut .
(6) Insert the sleeve into the bush body , and fix the sleeve by tightening the
screw .

Make sure that the screw comes into contact with the flat surface on the outer
diameter of the sleeve .

(7) While turning the bar by hand, move the bar from side to side to check for any strong
resistance (tightness). Adjust the clearance between the guide bush and bar at these
areas by turning the adjusting nut .

Turn the adjusting nut with the pipe .

Generally, the smaller the bar diameter, the smaller the clearance should be
between the guide bush and the bar.

(8) Loosen the screw , move the sleeve left and right until the longitudinal position of
the guide bush equals the length shown in the drawing.
(9) Fix the sleeve by tightening the screw .

10-7
10-2-2 Installing and Adjusting the Revolving Guide Bush

<SB-12R>

Carry out the procedure below to install and adjust the revolving guide bush.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

The rapid traverse setting of the RAPID OVERRIDE switch is effective.

(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

10-8
(5) Remove the three screws and the clamp ring .
(6) Insert the guide bush in accordance with the key of the sleeve and fix the guide
bush by turning the adjusting nut .
(7) Fix the clamp ring by tightening the three screws temporarily.
(8) Attach the jig onto the sleeve . And then, fix the jig with the knob screw to
lock the rotation of the sleeve .
(9) Pass a bar through the guide bush .
(10) Adjust the clearance between the guide bush and the bar by inserting the bar into
the guide bush and turning the bar by hand and moving the bar from side to side to
check for any strong resistance (tightness) at these areas.

To adjust the clearance between the guide bush and the bar by turning the
adjusting nut with the pipe .
Generally, the smaller the bar diameter, the smaller the clearance should be
between the guide bush and the bar.

(11)After adjusting the clearance, tighten the three screws to fix the adjusting nut
with the clamp ring .
(12)Check the clearance between the guide bush and the bar again.
(13)Pull out the bar from the guide bush .
(14)Loosen the knob screw and remove the jig so that the sleeve can rotate.
(15) Close the doors of the machine body.

(16) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-9
<SB-16R/20R>

Carry out the procedure below to install and adjust the revolving guide bush.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

The rapid traverse setting of the RAPID OVERRIDE switch is effective.

(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

10-10
(5) Loosen the one screw of the adjusting nut until the screw head protrudes
approximately 1mm from the edge of the adjusting nut head.

(6) Press the MAIN SPINDLE key to turn off the lamp.
(7) Insert the guide bush in accordance with the key of the sleeve .
(8) Fix the jig with the knob screw to lock the rotation of the guide bush and the
sleeve .
(9) Turn the adjusting nut to fix it to the guide bush .
(10) Pass a bar through the guide bush .
(11) Adjust the clearance between the guide bush and the bar by inserting the bar into
the guide bush and turning the bar by hand and moving the bar from side to side to
check for any strong resistance (tightness) at these areas.

To adjust the clearance between the guide bush and the bar by turning the
adjusting nut with the pipe .
Generally, the smaller the bar diameter, the smaller the clearance should be
between the guide bush and the bar.

(12)After adjusting the clearance, tighten the one screw of the adjusting nut to lightly
fix the adjusting nut .
(13)Check the clearance between the guide bush and the bar again.
(14)Pull out the bar from the guide bush , and tighten the screw of the adjusting nut
to fix the adjusting nut .
(15)Loosen the knob screw and remove the jig so that the sleeve can rotate.
(16) Close the doors of the machine body.

(17) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-11
10-2-3 Replacing the Revolving Guide Bush with the Stationary Guide Bush

Follow the steps below to replace the synchr. revolving guide bush [1L311 1L319] with the
stationary guide bush [1L328, 1L329].
To remove the stationary guide bush and re-install the synchr. revolving guide bush
[1L311 1L319], carry out the following steps in reverse order.

It is necessary to adjust the tension of the belt when the stationary guide bush is
replaced with the synchr. revolving guide bush.
On the occasion of replacing the stationary guide bush with the revolving guide
bush, or the revolving guide bush with the stationary guide bush, please refer to
section “5-1 Piping of the Pneumatic Unit” in the installation manual and carry out
adjustment of the air purge amount.

Refer to section “12-2-2 6-Month Inspection, Inspection of the Belts” for details
on adjusting the belt tension.

10-12
10-13
Follow the steps below to replace the synchr. revolving guide bush with the stationary guide
bush.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(5) Remove the five screws and dismount the cover .
(6) Remove the four screws and dismount the cover .
(7) Remove the three screws and dismount the cover .
(8) Remove the four screws and detach the fixture .

Keep the removed screws , fixture and cover outside the machine to
avoid misplacement.

(9) Loosen the one screw .

(10) Loosen the four screws and move the counter unit all the way to the guide bush
side.
(11) Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .
(12) Remove the belt between the synchr. revolving guide bush and the counter unit (belt
width 10mm), and the belt between the main spindle and the counter unit (width
13mm).

Keep the removed belt between the synchr. revolving guide bush and the
counter unit in a safe place outside the machine to avoid misplacement.
In order to prevent interference with Z1-axis sliding, fix the removed belt which
was between the main spindle and the counter unit, to the counter unit .

(13) Remove the four screws and dismount the synchr. revolving guide bush .
(14) Mount the stationary guide bush with the four screws
(15) Move the counter unit all the way to the outer cover, and lightly tighten the one
screw .
(16)Fix the counter unit by tightening the four screws .
(17)Fix the cover by tightening the four screws .
(18) Fix the cover by tightening the five screws .
(19) Remove the air hose from the joint . Insert the cap into the end of the joint .
(20)Carry out the setting of air purge flow amount

Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure

Adjustment of the Air Purge Amount” for details on setting the air purge flow.

10-14
10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.
Always check that the collet gripping force is sufficient.
If the collet gripping force is insufficient, the material could fly out from the
spindle, which is very dangerous.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during this work.

10-15
The structure of the sub collet is shown below.

10-16
 CAUTION
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and accidents.

Be sure to use tool units listed in “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

Using an undesignated tool unit will cause machining defects and/or machine
collision.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, memory or macro mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

Carry out the procedure below to install the collet and adjust the gripping force.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the SUB COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the collet.
(6) While under supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(7) Loosen the two knob screws and remove the cover .
(8) Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .
(9) Remove the cap (right-handed screw).

To remove the cap , hook a hook spanner onto the cap and insert the
handle into the hole of the toggle holder .

(10) Insert the spring and the collet into the inner diameter of the sleeve .
(11) Insert the sleeve into the sub spindle in accordance with its key and tighten the
cap .
(12) Loosen the screw and release the adjusting nut .
(13) Loosen the screw and pull out the shaft .
(14) While the bar is inserted in the collet, insert the handle into the hole of the
shifter lever , and move the shifter lever manually to check the gripping force.
(15) Adjust the gripping force.
For a stronger gripping force, turn the adjusting nut in the direction of the sub
spindle forward rotation (to the back).
For a weaker gripping force, turn the adjusting nut in the direction of the sub
spindle reverse rotation (to the front).

10-17
(16) After the adjustment is completed, tighten the screw and fix the adjusting nut to
the sub spindle.
(17) Insert the shaft and tighten the screw .
(18) Replace the cover with the two screws .

(19) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(20) Press the SUB COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the collet.
(21) Turn the piston to adjust so that the toggle is placed on the slanted line part E of
the shifter , and the edge of toggle does not contact the shifter (the clearance
should be 2.0~3.0mm, see the figure below).
Before turning the piston , loosen the nut (right handed screw).

Turn the piston to the front to move the shifter to the right.
Turn the piston to the back to move the shifter to the left.

(22) Tighten the nut to fix the piston .

(23) Press the SUB COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the collet.
(24) Check that the toggle is placed on the shaded section (cross line) F of the shifter .

10-18
(25) Close the doors of the machine body.

(26) Press the PATH2 key to light up the lamp.

(27) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(28) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.
(29) Execute the sub collet clamp command (PATH2: M10) and check if the operation has
completed.
(30) Open the cutting room door and mount the cover with two knob screws .
(31) Close the cutting room door.

(32) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-19
10-4 Installing and Adjusting the Tool Units

10-4-1 Installing and Adjusting the Tools

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during tool
replacement and adjustment.
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and/or accidents.

Be sure to use tool units listed in “Appendix 4. List of Tool Holders”.

If an undesignated tool unit is used, machining defects or machine collision may
occur.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

10-20
 Installing the tools

Carry out the procedure below to install tools and input geometry offset values.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Execute a command to select the tool number to mount a tool (T100; etc).
(10) Command the bar diameter. (G00 X bar diameter ;)
(11) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(12) For Guide bush version, pull the bar out from the guide bush.
For Non-guide bush version, pull the bar out from the main collet.
(13) Loosen the two screws .
(14) Insert the tool into the tool-attaching groove of the tool holder .

10-21
(15) Make the tool lightly touch the outer diameter of the bar to determine the position of
the tool in the diametric direction. Then lightly tighten the two screws to the
degree that the tool does not fall.

(16) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(17) Press the AXIS DIRECTION key and use the electronic handwheel to retract the
tool in the diametrical direction.
(18)Tighten the two screws to fix the tool.

10-22
Installing a tool with the tool select function.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the [T-SLCT] soft key to display the TOOL SELECT screen.

(6) Press the [X/Y] soft key to display X DIRECTION .

(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POS”, then input the desired
position of tool positioning.
(8) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “RELEASE POS”, then input the desired
retract position.
(9) Move the cursor to the tool number for installing a tool (T100~T600 or T100~T700).
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(11) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the X-axis position of the currently selected tool is less than X40.0, the X-axis will
move to X40.0 and tool selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the
approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

When the positioning (tool selection) is complete, release the DOOR OPEN button .
(12) For Guide bush version, pull out the bar from the guide bush.
For Non-guide bush version, pull the bar out from the main collet.
(13) Loosen the two screws .

10-23
(14) Insert the tool into the tool-attaching groove of the tool holder .
(15) Make the tool lightly touch the outer diameter of the bar to determine the position of
the tool in the diametrical direction. Then tighten the two screws lightly to the
degree that the tool does not fall.

(16) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to the retract (release) position and the START button will
go out.
When the positioning (tool selection) is complete, release the DOOR OPEN

button .
(17) Tighten the two screws to fix the tool.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while pressing down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.
If no program is registered on PATH1 and/or PATH2 of memory, the tool select
function cannot be executed. When using the tool select function, register at least 1
program on both PATH1 and PATH2 of the CNC memory beforehand.

10-24
When the START button is released, the operation starts.

If the DOOR OPEN button is pressed after pressing the START button ,
tool selection will not be performed.
Negative values (minus) cannot be inputted into the approach position.
In the case of pressing a function key to switch to a different screen, press the

CUSTOM key to select the TOOL SELECT screen again.

In the case of pressing a mode key to switch to a different screen, press the

MACRO key to select the TOOL SELECT screen again.

Every push of the [CURSOR] key will move the cursor to the T number area and to
the GEOMETRY OFFSET area alternately.
To input geometry offset, first select a T number with the cursor keys, then press
the [CURSOR] soft key to move the cursor to the GEOMETRY OFFSET area.
Next, move the cursor to the desired axis and input a geometry offset value.
The electronic handwheel will be enabled by pressing the [HANDLE] soft key.
Pressing an AXIS DERECTION key and turning the handwheel will move the
selected axis.

10-25
Installation of the Wedge Type 15 mm Overhang Tool Holder [48105, 0G102]

Execute the reference point return of the X1, Y1 and Z2-axes before starting this
work.

The fit position of the “Wedge Type 15 mm Overhang Tool Holder 12mm” [0G102] is T400 or
T500.
The fit position of the “Wedge Type 15 mm Overhang Tool Holder 10 mm” [48105] is T400,
T500 or T600.

10-26
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Execute a command to select the tool number to mount a tool (T500; etc).
(10) Command the bar diameter. (G00 X bar diameter ;)
(11) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(12) For Guide bush version, pull out the bar from the guide bush.
For Non-guide bush version, pull the bar out from the main collet.
(13) Remove the two screws from the fit position of the wedge type 15mm overhang tool
holder .
(14) Remove the fixture .
(15) Fix the wedge type 15mm overhang tool holder with the two screws while
pressing its face C against face D of the tool holder .
(16) Insert the tool between the wedge type 15mm overhang tool holder and the
fixture . Make the tool lightly touch the outer diameter of the bar to determine the
position of the tool in the diametrical direction. Then tighten the two screws
lightly.

(17)Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(18)Press the AXIS DIRECTION key and use the electronic handwheel to retract the
tool in the diametric direction.
(19) Determine the position of the tool in the diametric direction, and fix the tool at
that position with the two screws .
(20) Set the following keep relay to “YES” on the KEEP RELAY (conversational setting)
screen, according to the position where the wedge type overhang tool holder is
installed.
USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T4.
USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T5.
USE OVERHANG TOOL HOLDER ON T6.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details on the
KEEP RELAY conversational setting screen.

10-27
Center height offset
Center height offset by turning (geometry offset)
Inputting of the geometry offset can be performed by keying-in.

(1) Install the tools.

Refer to “ Installing the tools” for details.

(2) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(3) Press the [GEOM. OFFSET] soft key to display the GEOMETRY OFFSET screen.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Move the cursor to the [Y] offset data position of the tool number to be adjusted in
order to lower the top position of the tool.
(6) Press [ ], [0], [.] and [5] data keys respectively.
(7) Press the [+INPUT] soft key.
(8) Close the cutting room door.
(9) Execute a tool selection command once, except for the tool currently being adjusted.
(10) Execute the tool selection command of the tool currently being adjusted.
The geometry offset value will be valid.
(11) Cut the end face of the bar.
(12) Open the cutting room door.
(13) Measure the diameter of the dowel.
(14) Move the cursor to the [Y] axis offset data of the tool number of the installed tool.
Enter the offset data and press the [+ INPUT] soft key to set the data. (Input a
diametrical value for the Y-axis.)
(15) Repeat steps (8) (14) to set the offset value of the Y-axis until there is no dowel.
(16) Close the cutting room door.
(17) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-28
Center height offset by measuring (geometry offset)
Inputting of the geometry offset can be performed by keying-in.
(1) Measure dimension A, from the bottom to the tool nose, of all the tools to be installed
(see the drawing below). Note down the dimensions.
(2) Install the tools.

Refer to “ Installing the tools” for details.

(3) Press the OFFSET/SETTING key .

(4) Press the [GEOM. OFFSET] soft key to display the GEOMETRY OFFSET screen.

(5) Calculate the offset amount with the following formula. Then, press the cursor keys to
move the cursor to the [Y] offset data position of the tool number with a tool installed.
Enter the calculated offset data and press the [INPUT] soft key to set the data.
[Geometry offset data] = (Reference data dimension A) 2
Reference data for [0M103]:12.000mm for “mm” version, 0.5000 inch for
“inch” version.)
Reference data for [0M104]:10.000mm for “mm” version, 0.3750 inch for
“inch” version.)

(6) Execute a tool selection command once, except for the tool currently being adjusted.
Then execute the tool selection command of the tool currently being adjusted.
The geometry offset value becomes valid.
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) shown above for all tool numbers with tools installed.
(8) Close the doors of the machine body and turn the CONTROL MODE switch to
MACHINING .

10-29
Center height offset by tool select function (geometry offset)
With this function, tool geometry offset will automatically be inputted.

If this function is used while a tool is mounted on the adjacent right position of the
selected tool, a collision may occur between the bar and the tool depending on the
bar diameter. Therefore be alert during operation.
For each tool holder, the bar diameter which can fit within the range of tool moving
area is as follows:
- When using Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103]: Max.10mm
- When using Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104]: Max: 7mm

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Install the tool.

Refer to “ Installing the tools” for details.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the [T-SLCT] soft key to display the TOOL SELECT screen.

10-30
(7) Press the [X/Y] soft key to display Y DIRECTION .

(8) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “DIAMETER (ACT)” and input the
measured bar diameter.

If the inputted bar diameter exceeds the following value, a message “COLLISION
BETWEEN MATERIAL WITH T ” will be displayed on the screen.
- When using Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103]: Max.10mm
- When using Wedge Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104]: Max: 7mm
However, when T6 of Wedge Type 6 Station Tool Holder 12mm or T7 of Wedge
Type 7 Station Tool Holder 10mm is selected, this message will not be displayed.

(9) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to “RELEASE POS”, and input the desired
retract position.
(10)Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to the desired T number for adjusting the
center height.

10-31
(11) Close the doors of the machine body.

(12)While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then, the tool positions to POS. X=25.0, Y= [bar diameter
(measured value) + 2mm]. When the tool selection and positioning is completed, the

START button will flash.

When the positioning (tool selection) is complete, release the DOOR OPEN button .
After the positioning is completed, a message “START: MOVE TO X0” will be
displayed.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while pressing down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.
If no program is registered in PATH1 and/or PATH2 of the CNC memory, the tool
select function cannot be executed. When using the tool select function, register at
least 1 program in both PATH1 and PATH2 of the CNC memory beforehand.

10-32
(13) If the bar and the tool do not collide with each other even when moving to POS. X=0,

press the START button again, while holding down the DOOR OPEN button .
The X-axis moves to POS. X0. At this time, the Y-axis does not move.
If a collision can occur, press the [HANDLE] soft key to turn the HANDLE mode ON.

Press the AXIS DIRECTION key and use the electronic handwheel to move
the Y-axis so that a collision does not occur.

Press the AXIS DIRECTION key and use the electronic handwheel to move
the X-axis to POS. X=0.

(14)Press the AXIS DIRECTION key and use the electronic handwheel to project the
bar out from the guide bush accordingly.

(15)Press the AXIS DIRECTION key and use the electronic handwheel to match the
Y-axis with the bar diameter.
(16)Press the [YSET] soft key.
The Y-axis geometry offset is set.
At this time, HANDLE mode will be turned OFF automatically.
A message “PRESS START BUTTON RELEASE X&Y AXES.” is displayed.

(17) Press the START button , while holding down the DOOR OPEN button .
The Y-axis moves 0.2mm from the current position coordinate, then the X-axis
moves to the inputted release position.

(18) Turn the CONTROL MODE switch to MACHINING .

10-33
Removing the tools

Execute reference point return of X1, Y1 and Z2-axes before starting this work.

Follow the procedure below to remove the tools.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Open the cutting room door.
(6) Loosen the screws or (2pcs. each).
(7) Remove the tool or from the groove.

If the fixture has been embedded into the groove, remove one of the screws ,
and insert it into the hole of the fixture and lift the fixture .
If the fixture has been embedded into the groove, remove one of the screws ,
and insert it into the hole of the fixture and lift the fixture .

10-34
Relational dimension diagram of the tool of overhang tool holder and the back 4-spindle unit

CAUTION
Install the tool into the overhang tool holder so that it fits within the dimension
range indicated in the drawing below, while paying attention to avoid collision
with the back 4-spindle unit. Installing the tool incorrectly will cause machine
collisions and/or accidents.

10-35
10-4-2 Installing and Adjusting the Power-Driven Tool Unit

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Close all the doors before starting machine operation.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during tool
replacement and adjustment.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

10-36
Using an undesignated tool unit will cause machining defects or machine collision.
Be sure to use tool units listed in “Appendix 4. List of Tool Holders”.
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and accidents.
When installing/removing a cutting tool with the collet, be sure to hook/attach work
tools onto the fixed hole or 2 flat surface section (H-cut) etc. of the same tool
number.
When operating the machine on which 5 Spindle Cross Drill Unit ER11/16 [0M151]
or High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16 [0M157] is installed, attach a cartridge
type power-driven tool unit or the cover onto T3300 and T3400, a cartridge
type power-driven tool unit , the cover or 4 spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111]
onto T3500.
When installing a cartridge type power-driven tool unit into T3500 of 5-spindle
Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] or High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16
[0M157], install a cartridge type power-driven tool unit such as milling unit or Idler
Shaft [0M189] into T3400
Depending on the conditions for installing power-driven tools, keep relay setting
may be required.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details on the
keep relay conversational setting.

10-37
Precautions when installing the power-driven tool units

When installing the power-driven tool unit, apply some grease on the gear tooth face of
the power-driven tool unit in advance.

Apply some grease on the gear tooth face of the power-driven tool unit
periodically.
(Application intervals vary depending on the conditions of use, such as the use of
water-soluble coolant etc.)
The recommended grease is “Multemp LRL No. 3” by KYODO YUSHI CO. LTD.
Never mix the grease with different brands as this will lower its efficiency.
Oil lubrication is applied to the power-driven tool unit of the main tool post.
However, if the power-driven tool motor rotates while oil film is not adhered to the
gear tooth face, heat generation and damage of the tooth face will be caused.
Be sure to apply some grease to the gear tooth face.

10-38
Installing the cutting tools

10-39
Installation procedure
Follow the steps below to install cutting tools onto the cross drilling unit.
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(5) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp

(6) Loosen the cap and install the cutting tool into the sleeve . Determine the
projection length of the cutting tool from the cap depending on the cutting depth
and the condition of cutting chips.

For details on the maximum tool projection length, refer to section “Appendix 5
Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders Power-driven tool unit”.

(7) Use a stopper spanner and exclusive spanner for the cap to tighten the cap
so that the cutting tool is fixed into the sleeve .
(8) Close the doors of the machine body.

(9) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-40
Installing the tools with the tool selection function

(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to a tool number (T3100~T3400 or T3500) for installing the cutting
tool.
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

(11)Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.
(12) Install the cutting tool onto the power-driven unit.
Ensure that the tool projection length is shorter than the assumed length.
(13) For Guide bush version, pull the bar out from the guide bush.
For Non-guide bush version, pull the bar out from the main collet.
(14) Make the cutting tool gently touch the end face of the bar, then lightly tighten the
cap .

(15) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(16) Use a stopper spanner and exclusive spanner for the cap to tighten the cap
so that the cutting tool is fixed into the sleeve .
(17) For Guide bush version, put the bar back into the guide bush.
For Non-guide bush version, put the bar back into the main collet.
(18) Close the doors of the machine body.

(19) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-41
Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while pressing down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

10-42
Installation and adjustment of slotting unit [54153, 54154]

Tool select number for this unit [54153, 54154] is T3300.

When this unit is installed, tool units cannot be installed into T3400.
When this unit is installed, power-driven tool units cannot be installed into T3500.
Only 4-spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] can be installed.

The reference position of Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] is shown in the drawing below.

10-43
Installation procedure for the slotting unit

(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command tool selection (T3300) for installing the slotting unit .
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to light up the lamp.

(12) Mount the cover with the two screws .

(13) Insert the slotting unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
Match the pin of Slotting unit to the reference groove of the tool unit
installation surface.

It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(14) Fix the slotting unit with the screws and (2pcs. each).
(15) Close the doors of the machine body.

(16) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING

10-44
Installing Slotting Unit [54153], [54154] with the tool selection function

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready status.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to the tool number (T3300) for installing the slotting unit .
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Mount the cover with the two screws .

(13) Insert the slotting unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
Match the pin of Slotting unit to the reference groove of the tool unit
installation surface.

10-45
 It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(14) Fix the slotting unit with the screws and (2pcs. each).

(15) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(16) Close the doors of the machine body.

(17) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

How to replace the cutter

The number of collars is determined according to the number of cutters to be used.

Adjust the position of cutter with thickness “T” of collars . Collars are to be made by
the user. Make the collar in accordance with the shape shown in the “Shape of Collar ”.
Follow the steps below to replace the cutter .
(1) Remove the two screws and dismount the support .
(2) Remove the nut . Use the spanner catching position indicated in the figure.
(3) Detach the collars and cutters from the spindle .
(4) Insert the replacement collars and cutters into the spindle .
(5) Fix the collars and cutters with the nut .
(6) Mount the support and fix it with the two screws .

10-46
Installation and adjustment of Milling Unit ER16 [33150, 57155] and ER11 [57163]

The tools of Milling Unit ER16 [33150, 57155] and ER11 [57163] are gripped and fixed by the
collet.
The reference length (the tool tip position: the center position of the guide bush when moving
to X0.0) and the maximum projection length of the milling tools are shown in the drawing
below (positioning X0.0, Y0.0 when selecting T3300). The projection length of the milling
tools must be the maximum values in the drawing below or less.

Remove the installation hole cover of the installing position of the unit beforehand.
Keep the installation hole covers and screws (4pcs.) outside the machine after
they have been removed for the installation of the unit.

10-47
Installation procedure
Follow the steps below to install Milling Unit ER16 [33150, 57155] and ER11 [57163].
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command tool selection (T3300~T3500) for installing the milling unit .
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the milling unit into the installation hole so that the drain hole faces the
main spindle side, as shown in the figure.
(13) Fix the milling unit with the four screws .
(14) Close the doors of the machine body.

(15) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

For details on installation of the tools, refer to “ Installing the cutting tools”.

10-48
Installing Milling Unit ER16 [33150, 57155] and ER11 [57163]with the tool selection
function
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to a tool number (T3300~T3500) for installing the milling unit .
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the X-axis position of the currently selected tool is less than X40.0, the X-axis will
move to X40.0 and tool selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the
approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the milling unit into the installation hole so that the drain hole faces the
main spindle side, as shown in the figure.
(13) Fix the milling unit with the four screws .

10-49
(14) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(15) Close the doors of the machine body.

(16) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-50
Installation and adjustment of 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] and High Speed
Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158]

When using the front drilling unit, fix the sleeve for the 4-spindle Sleeve Holder
[0M111] with the screws from the rear side.
Installing position of this unit is T3400 or T3500.
When installing the tool unit, move the tool post closer to the operator beforehand.

Refer to section “10-4-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sleeve on the 4-Spindle Sleeve
Holder” for details.

The tool of the front drilling unit is gripped and fixed by the collet.
The maximum tool projection length from the face of the cap is as shown in the drawing
below. (When T3423 is selected, X1=0.0, Y1=0.0)
Set the cutting tool so that its projection length becomes less than the maximum projection
length indicated in the drawing below.

10-51
10-52
Installation procedure
Follow the steps below to install 3-spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High
Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158].

(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command tool selection (T3400 or T3500) for installing the power-driven tool unit .
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the power-driven tool unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
Match the pin of the power-driven tool unit to the reference groove of the tool
unit installation surface.

It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(13) Fix the power-driven tool unit with the screws and (2pcs. each).

(14) To grip the cutting tool with the collet, hook a spanner onto the spanner catching
position to tighten the collet.
(15) Close the doors of the machine body.

(16) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-53
Installation procedure (tool selection function)
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to a tool number (T3400 or T3500) for installing the power-driven tool
unit .
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the power-driven tool unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
Match the pin of the power-driven tool unit to the reference groove of the tool
unit installation surface.
(13) Fix the power-driven tool unit with the screws (2pcs. each).

10-54
(14) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(15) Close the doors of the machine body.

(16) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-55
Installation and adjustment of Sleeve Holder [0M111]

Installing position of this unit is T3500.

Sleeve Holder [0M111] is to be used exclusively for one machine. Do not use
[0M111] on the different serial numbered machine, even on the same model
machine.

10-56
Installation procedure
Follow the steps below to install Sleeve Holder [0M111].

(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command tool selection (T3500) for installing the sleeve holder .
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.
(12) Insert the sleeve holder into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
Match the key of the sleeve holder to the reference groove of the tool unit
installation surface.

Do not loosen the screws that are fixed to the key .

It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(13) Gently tighten the screws (2pcs.) and screws to fix the sleeve holder lightly.
(14) Press the sleeve holder in direction (to the front).
(15) Tighten the screw .
(16) Tighten the screw .
(17) Tighten the two screws .

Be sure to carry out steps (14) ~ (17) in this exact number order to obtain the same
installation accuracy every time the sleeve holder is installed.

(18) Close the doors of the machine body.

(19) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-57
Installing Sleeve Holder [0M111]with the tool selection function
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen is displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to the tool number (T3500) for installing the sleeve holder .
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the sleeve holder into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
Match the key of the sleeve holder to the reference groove of the tool unit
installation surface.

10-58
 Do not loosen the screws that are fixed to the key .
It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(13) Gently tighten the screws (2pcs.) and screws to fix the sleeve holder lightly.
(14) Press the sleeve holder in direction (to the front).
(15) Tighten the screw .
(16) Tighten the screw .
(17) Tighten the two screws .

Be sure to carry out steps (14) ~ (17) in this exact number order to obtain the same
installation accuracy every time the sleeve holder is installed.

(18) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(19) Close the doors of the machine body.

(20) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-59
Installation and adjustment of Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171]

Installing position of this unit is T3500.

When installing this unit, it is necessary to install Idler Shaft [0M189] into T3400 in
advance.
Remove the installation hole cover of the installing position of the unit beforehand.
Keep the installation hole covers and screws outside the machine after they have
been removed for the installation of the unit.
Adjust the angle of the thread whirling unit outside the machine before mounting
the unit onto the machine.

10-60
Installation procedure
Follow the steps below to install Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171]

(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command tool selection (T3500) for installing the thread whirling unit .
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.
(12) Insert the idler shaft into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
(13) Fix the idler shaft with the two screws .
(14) Insert the thread whirling unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
At this time, match the pin of the thread whirling unit to the reference groove
of the tool unit installation surface.

It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(15) Gently tighten the screws (2pcs.) and screws to fix the thread whirling unit .
(16) Close the doors of the machine body.

(17) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-61
Installing Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171] with the tool selection function
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to the tool number (T3500) for installing the thread whirling unit .
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the idler shaft into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
(13) Fix the idler shaft with the two screws .
(14) Insert the thread whirling unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
At this time, match the pin of the thread whirling unit to the reference groove
of the tool unit installation surface.

10-62
 Do not loosen the screws that are fixed to the pin .
It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(15) Gently tighten the screws (2pcs.) and screws to fix the thread whirling unit .

(16) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(17) Close the doors of the machine body.

(18) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-63
Cutter holder shape and installation
Prepare a cutter holder and a cutter with an inscribed circle tool tip diameter of 12mm as
shown in the following drawing.

The thread whirling cutter and holder are to be provided by the user.
Please contact STAR MICRONICS for details.

Carry out the following procedure to install the cutter holder.

(1) Mount the cutter holder onto the thread whirling unit body with the three screws .

10-64
 Angle adjustment

Follow the steps below to carry out angle adjustment of Thread Whirling Unit [0M171].

(1) Loosen the three screws .

(2) Incline the unit in a tooth lead angle against the plate .
At this time, set the angle according to the scale shown in the figure as a guide.
(Minimum scale: 1 )
(3) Tighten the three screws to fix the unit and the plate .

When the tooth lead angle is 0 ~10 , use the hole .

When the tooth lead angle is 10 ~20 , use the hole .

10-65
Installation and adjustment of Polygon Machining Unit [0M191]

Installing position of this unit is T3300 or T3400.

Remove the installation hole cover of the installing position of the unit beforehand.
Keep the installation hole covers and screws outside the machine after they have
been removed for the installation of the unit.

10-66
Follow the steps below to install Polygon Machining Unit [0M191]
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command tool selection (T3300 or T3400) for installing the polygon machining unit .
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.
(12) Insert the polygon machining unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
At this time, match the pin of the polygon machining unit to the reference
groove of the tool unit installation surface.

It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying excessive force
to it.

(13) Gently tighten the screws (2pcs. each) to fix the polygon machining unit .
(14) Close the doors of the machine body.

(15) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-67
Installing Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] with the tool selection function
(1) Put the machine into machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to a tool number (T3300 or T3400) for installing the polygon
machining unit .
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Press the POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to turn off the lamp.

(12) Insert the polygon machining unit into the installation hole as shown in the figure.
At this time, match the pin of the polygon machining unit to the reference
groove of the tool unit installation surface.

10-68
 Do not loosen the screws that are fixed to the pin .
It is important to maintain the accuracy of the reference groove of the tool unit
installation plane to install the tool unit accurately. Install/remove the tool unit
carefully to avoid deformation of the groove caused by applying an excessive
force to it.

(13) Gently tighten the screws (2pcs. each) to fix the polygon machining unit .

(14) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .

The X-axis will move to POS. 40.0 and the START button will go out.
(15) Close the doors of the machine body.

(16) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-69
Relational dimensions of cutter installation

Fix the polygon cutter in the rotating direction with the two pins (outer diameter
3d8) and fix in the axis direction with the nut . Dimensions of the part for installing
polygon cutter are shown below.

10-70
10-4-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sleeve on the 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Close all the doors before starting machine operation.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during tool
replacement and adjustment.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

Sleeves for main/back machining can be attached to the 4-spindle sleeve holder.
Sleeves can roughly be categorized into drilling, tapping and boring types.

10-71
 The figure below illustrates the dimensional relation of the guide bush when the 4-spindle
sleeve holder is selected.
When Z2=0, T1200 is selected

10-72
Installation procedure

Follow the procedure below to install the sleeve for the 4-spindle sleeve holder.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Press the PROGRAM key .

The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1

(9) Command a tool number (T1100 ~ T1400) of the tool on the 4-spindle sleeve holder.
(10) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING , and open the doors of the machine body.

(11) Loosen the cap (for boring sleeves, loosen the set screws) to attach the cutting tool
to the sleeve .

Determine the projection amount of the cutting tool from the end face of the
cap in accordance with the machining depth and the condition of the cutting
chips.

(12) Tighten the cap (for boring sleeves, tighten the set screws) to fix the cutting tool
to the sleeve .
(13) Loosen the screw and insert the sleeve into the 4-spindle sleeve holder .

If the projection amount of the cutting tool is large, it will not be possible to insert
sleeves into the 4-spindle sleeve holder after tool selection.
In this case, carry out steps (11) and (12) before commanding tool selection in step
(9). Be careful of collision at the time of tool selection.
When using 3-spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155], High Speed 3Sp.
Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] or Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] on T3400,
remove the eight screws from the 4-spindle sleeve holder once, and re-attach
the eight screws from the rear side. In addition, set “FOR 0M111, SETTING
SCREWS FROM REAR” to YES on the KEEP RELAY conversational setting
screen.
When installing tools into the 4-spindle sleeve holder, fix all the tools in the same
direction (fix from the front side of machine, or from the rear side of machine).

10-73
 Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details on the
KEEP RELAY conversational setting screen.

(14) Move the sleeve in the longitudinal direction, and adjust the longitudinal position of
the cutting tool .
(15) After the adjustment, fix the sleeve with the screw so that the screw touches
the flat surface of the sleeve .
(16) Repeat steps (9) ~ (15) to install all the necessary sleeves.
(17) Close the cutting room door.

(18) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-74
Follow the procedure below to install a sleeve with the tool selection function.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.

(5) Press the MACRO key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the AIR CUT key to make the lamp flash.
The TOOL SELECT screen will be displayed.
(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to “APPROACH POSITION” and input the
desired position of tool positioning.
(8) Move the cursor to a tool number (T1100 ~ T1400) for installing the sleeve.
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(10) While holding down the DOOR OPEN button , press the START button .
If the current X-axis position is less than X40.0, the X-axis will move to X40.0 and tool
selection will be performed. Then the tool will position to the approach position.

When tool selection and tool positioning is complete, the START button will flash.

Even if the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is set to 25% or 100%, rapid
traverse override will be fixed at 5% during tool selection (0% and 1% are valid).
Setting of the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch is valid while the doors are
closed.

Even when the DOOR OPEN button is not pressed while the doors are
closed, the movement will be performed.

If you release your finger from the DOOR OPEN button during tool selection,

the movement will be interrupted. Then, if the START button is pressed again

while holding down the DOOR OPEN button , the movement will be resumed.

(11) Loosen the cap (for boring sleeves, loosen the set screws) to attach the cutting tool
to the sleeve .

Determine the projection amount of the cutting tool from the end face of the
cap in accordance with the machining depth and the condition of the cutting
chips.

10-75
(12) Tighten the cap (for boring sleeves, tighten the set screws) to fix the cutting tool
to the sleeve .
(13) Loosen the screws and insert the sleeve into the 4-spindle sleeve holder .

If the projection amount of the cutting tool is large, it will not be possible to insert
sleeves into the 4-spindle sleeve holder after tool selection.
In this case, carry out steps (11) and (12) before commanding tool selection in step
(10). Be careful of collision at the time of tool selection.
When using 3-spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155], High Speed 3Sp.
Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] or Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] on T3400,
remove the eight screws from the 4-spindle sleeve holder once, and re-attach
the eight screws from the rear side.

(14) Move the sleeve in the longitudinal direction, and adjust the longitudinal position of
the tool .
(15) After the adjustment, fix the sleeve with the screw so that the screw touches
the flat surface of the sleeve .
(16) Repeat steps (7) ~ (15) to install all the necessary sleeves.
(17) Close the cutting room door.

(18) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

10-76
10-4-4 Installing and Adjusting the Tool Unit on the Back 4-Spindle Unit

Sleeves for back 4-spindle unit can be mounted to the back 4-spindle unit. Also, power-driven
tool unit can be mounted by using Drive Unit for Power-driven Tool B [0M457].

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Close all the doors before starting machine operation.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during tool
replacement and adjustment.
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and/or accidents.

When installing a tool holder not listed in “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”, refer to
the dimensions shown in the relational dimension drawings.
Remove the installation hole cover of the installing position of the unit beforehand.
Keep the installation hole covers and screws outside the machine after they have
been removed for the installation of the unit.
Be sure to attach the installation hole covers to the positions that are not in use.

Dimensions of the back 4-spindle unit and the sub spindle, as well as dimensions
relating to the installation of working tools and sleeve are shown below.

10-77
Refer to the drawing below for details on the relational dimensions of the back 4-spindle unit,
sub spindle and working tools.

10-78
Installation and adjustment of the drill sleeves

(1) Tighten the two screws to fix the sleeve

.
(2) Loosen the cap and install the cutting tool into the sleeve .
Determine the projection length of the cutting tool from the cap according to the
machining depth and conditions of the cutting chips.
(3) Tighten the cap to fix the tool into the sleeve .

Installation and adjustment of the boring sleeve

If a tool unit is installed in the position adjacent to the position where the boring
sleeve is installed, set screws cannot be tightened.
Remove the tool units installed in the positions adjacent to the boring sleeve
position beforehand.

(1) Tighten the two screws to fix the sleeve

.
(2) Loosen the set screws and install the cutting tool into the sleeve .
Determine the projection length of the cutting tool from the sleeve according to the
machining depth and conditions of the cutting chips.
(3) Tighten the set screws to fix the tool to the sleeve .

10-79
Installation and adjustment of the milling unit

In order to use this unit, it is necessary to use this unit with Drive Unit for
Power-Driven Tool Type B [0M457].

(1) Tighten the two screws to fix the unit

.
(2) Loosen the cap and install the tool into the unit .
Determine the tool projection length from the cap according to the
machining depth and conditions of the cutting chips.
(3) Hook a spanner onto the 2-flat surface sections and tighten the cap to fix the
cutting tool to the unit .

10-80
Installation and adjustment of Adjustable Slotting Unit 45B [69165]

It is important to keep the accuracy of the reference hole of the tool unit
mounting surface in order to attach the tool unit accurately. Attach or remove the
tool unit carefully so as to prevent the reference hole from deformation due to
applying excessive force to it.
When installing this unit, set the “USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T23” to “YES” on the
KEEP RELAY conversational setting screen beforehand.
In order to use this unit, it is necessary to use this unit with Drive Unit for
Power-Driven Tool Type B [0M457].
When this unit is installed, there will be restrictions on the adjacent mounting
positions (T2200, T2400) for the tool unit installation and machining range.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Insert the slotting unit into the installation hole of T2300 as shown in the figure.
(6) Fix the slotting unit with the screw and two screws .

10-81
Adjusting the height of the cutter

CAUTION
There is a risk of breaking this unit by the rotating parts touching the
non-rotating parts in the unit, when adjusting the height (position) of the cutter
beyond the range of 1mm from dimension A (12mm) in the figure.
The gap between the center height of the machine and the center height of this
unit in the vertical plane is 2mm.
The cutter may collide with this unit depending on the cutter width and mounting
height (position).

The height (position) of the cutter is determined by the collar width.

Determine the width and number of the cutter collar so that dimension B
becomes 22mm according to the width of the cutter to be used. Please prepare
collars separately.
It is possible to carry out fine adjustment of the cutter height (position) in the range
of 1mm from dimension A (12mm).

10-82
Carry out the steps below to adjust the height (position) of the cutter.

(1) Loosen the bolt and turn the screw to the right so that the spindle case can be
unfixed. Excessive screwing-in of the screw leads to breakage of the unit.
Do not screw in the screw more than the unfixed state of the spindle case .
(2) Turn the spindle case with the exclusive spanner (26mm across face) and adjust
height (position) of the cutter. Turning the spanner CCW when viewing from above
makes the center height of the cutter higher and turning CW makes it lower.
(3) After height adjustment of the cutter is completed, loosen the screw (turn to left)
and tighten the bolt to fix the spindle case securely.

10-83
Installation and adjustment of Adjustable Slotting Unit 30A [69166]

It is important to keep the accuracy of the reference hole of the tool unit
mounting surface in order to attach the tool unit accurately. Attach or remove the
tool unit carefully so as to prevent the reference hole from deformation due to
applying excessive force to it.
When installing this unit, set the “USE SLOTTING UNIT AT T23” to “YES” on the
KEEP RELAY conversational setting screen beforehand.
In order to use this unit, it is necessary to use Drive Unit for Power-Driven Tool
Type B [0M457] together.
When this unit is installed, there will be restrictions on the adjacent mounting
positions (T2200, T2400) for the tool unit installation and machining range.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Insert the slotting unit into the installation hole of T2300 as shown in the figure.
(6) Fix the slotting unit with the three screws .

10-84
Adjusting the height of the cutter

CAUTION
There is a risk of breaking this unit by the rotating parts touching the
non-rotating parts inside the unit, when adjusting the height (position) of the
cutter beyond the range of 1mm from dimension A (13mm) in the figure.
The gap between the center height of the machine and the center height of this
unit in the vertical plane is 2mm.
The cutter may collide with this unit depending on the cutter width and mounting
height (position).

The height (position) of the cutter is determined by the collar width.

Determine the width and number of the cutter collar so that dimension B
becomes 10mm according to the width of the cutter to be used.
Please prepare collars separately. It is possible to carry out fine adjustment of the
cutter height (position) in the range of 1mm from dimension A (13mm).

10-85
Carry out the steps below to adjust the height (position) of the cutter.

(1) Loosen the bolt and turn the screw to the right so that the spindle case can be
unfixed. Excessive screwing-in of the screw leads to breakage of the unit.
Do not screw in the screw more than the unfixed state of the spindle case .
(2) Turn the spindle case with the exclusive spanner (26mm across face) and adjust
height (position) of the cutter. Turning the spanner CCW when viewing from above
makes the center height of the cutter higher and turning CW makes it lower.
(3) After height adjustment of the cutter is completed, loosen the screw (turn to left)
and tighten the bolt to fix the spindle case securely.

10-86
Installation and adjustment of 3-spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151]

It is important to keep the accuracy of the reference hole of the tool unit
mounting surface in order to attach the tool unit accurately. Attach or remove the
tool unit carefully so as to prevent the reference hole from deformation due to
applying excessive force to it.
In order to use this unit, it is necessary to use Drive Unit for Power-Driven Tool
Type B [0M457] together.
When installing this unit, set the “USE 3 SPINDLE BACK DRILL AT T21” to YES on
the KEEP RELAY conversational setting screen beforehand.

Carry out the steps below to install 3-spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151].

(1) Insert the 3-spindle back drilling unit into the installation hole of T2100.
(2) Fix the 3-spindle back drilling unit with the two screws .
(3) Loosen the cap and insert the cutting tool.
Determine the tool projection length from the cap according to the
machining depth and conditions of the cutting chips.
(4) Hook a spanner onto the 2-flat surface section and tighten the cap to fix the
cutting tool to the unit.

10-87
10-4-5 Precautions of Tooling

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Close all the doors before starting machine operation.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during tool
replacement and adjustment.
Install the tool units and attachments into the machine correctly.
Installing them incorrectly will cause machine damage and accidents.

Be sure to use tool units listed in “Appendix 4. List of Tool Holders”.

Using an undesignated tool unit will cause machining defects and/or machine
collision.
When using a bar with the diameter of over 20mm, clearance between each tool
unit, attachments and cutting tools in adjacent positions becomes smaller, so
please be careful of collision.

For details on tool units, please refer to “Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”.

10-88
Precautions when performing back machining with 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111, 0M112]
Collision between the back machining tool and the sub spindle
A maximum of 4 back machining tools can be installed onto the 4-spindle sleeve holder if
the collision area shown in the figure below is avoided.

As shown in the figure, install the drills so that the tool tips of T1100~T1400 back
machining tools align.

If the machining amount is deeper than the end face of sub spindle cap, the tool
next to the currently selected tool will collide with the sub spindle cap.

If no tool is mounted on the positions adjacent to the selected tool, drilling deeper than
the end face of sub spindle cap is possible.

10-89
Precautions when Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] is used
Collisions between 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] and the back ATT.

When Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] is used and slotting is performed with the sub spindle,
do not move the sub spindle in the X2 direction beyond the position indicated in the
figure. Also, do not move the tool post in the Y1 direction beyond the position indicated
in the figure.
When no sleeve is installed in the sleeve holder [0M111], the sub spindle and tool post
can be moved closer to each other until the clearance of 10.75mm in the figure becomes
1mm (Min.).

10-90
Collision between Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] and the bar
A collision may occur between the slotting unit and the bar during the axis movement
when T3500 (T1100 T1400: when 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] is used) selection is
commanded at T100 T600 (T700), T3100 or T3200 position, and vice-versa.
Be sure to move the end face of the bar to the range (max. 8mm) shown in the drawing
below before tool selection to avoid a collision during the axis movement.

10-91
Precautions when Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is used
To avoid collision between this unit (including cutters) and the bar, and collision between the
tool units (including cutting tools) installed adjacent to this unit and the bar, be sure to move
the bar in the Z1 direction before commanding tool selection or positioning.
Tooling examples when the polygon machining unit is used are shown below.
(Bar diameter in the drawings: 20mm)
Command axis movement appropriately according to the bar diameter and tool tip position,
by referring to the dimensions indicated in the drawings.

E.g. 1
Tool number Tool unit
T3300 Polygon Machining Unit [0M191]
T3400 Milling Unit ER16 [33150]
T3500 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111]

10-92
E.g. 2
Tool number Tool unit
T3300 Milling Unit ER16 [33150]
T3400 Polygon Machining Unit [0M191]
T3500 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111]

10-93
E.g. 3
Tool number Tool unit
T3300 Milling Unit ER16 [33150]
T3400 Polygon Machining Unit [0M191]
3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155]
T3500
(for cross drilling)

10-94
Precautions when 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] and Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] are
used together
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is used at T3300
When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is used at T2100 and Polygon Machining
Unit [0M191] is used at T3300, Y1-axis can move up to Y1= 506.0.
At this time, the clearance between 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] and Polygon
Machining Unit [0M191] becomes narrow as shown in the drawing, therefore cutting
chips may easily get stuck in between the units. Consider the effectiveness of coolant
running towards the units and carry out proper tooling to remove cutting chips.

When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is used at T2100 and Polygon Machining
Unit [0M191] is used at T3300, T3500 cannot be used. In addition, there will be
restrictions on the machining range of T3400.

10-95
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is used at T3400
When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is installed in T2100 and Polygon Machining
Unit [0M191] is installed in T3400, Y1-axis can move up to Y1= 584.0.
At this time, the clearance between 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] and Polygon
Machining Unit [0M191] becomes narrow as shown in the drawing, therefore cutting
chips may easily get stuck in between the units. Consider the effectiveness of coolant
running towards the units and carry out proper tooling to remove cutting chips.

When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is used at T2100 and Polygon Machining
Unit [0M191] is used at T3400, there will be restrictions on the machining range of
T3500.

10-96
Precautions when 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] and 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit
[0M155] / High Speed 3-Sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] are used together.

When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is installed in T2100, and 3-Spindle Counter Face
Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3-Sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] is installed in
T3400, Y1-axis can move up to Y1= 584.0.
At this time, the clearance between 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] and 3-Spindle
Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3-Sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158]
becomes narrow as shown in the drawing, therefore cutting chips may easily get stuck in
between the units. Consider the effectiveness of coolant running towards the units and carry
out proper tooling to remove cutting chips.

When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is used at T2100, and 3-Spindle Counter
Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3-Sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] is
used at T3400, there will be restrictions on the machining range of T3500.

10-97
Precautions when Slotting Unit [69165, 69166] is used
Collision between T2200 T2400 tool and sub spindle
With reference to the drawing below, execute the axis movement command according to the
shape of the workpiece and the tool tip positions of T2200 and T2400.

Adjustable Slotting Unit 45B [69165] Adjustable Slotting Unit 30A [69166]

10-98
Precautions when ejecting parts
Collision between the T2400 tool and the sub spindle
When parts ejecting operation is performed on T2900, the following restrictions apply in
order to avoid collisions between the sub spindle cap cover and the T2400 tool.

When the tool projection length of T2400 from the unit installation surface is 78mm and
88mm, the maximum diameter of cutting tool should be 8mm.
When installing the cutting tool with a diameter larger than 8mm, the maximum tool
projection length should be 78mm from the unit installation surface.

10-99
Precautions when T2400 is selected
Collision between the sub spindle cap cover and the ejection chute
When T2400 is selected, the following restrictions apply in order to avoid collisions between
the sub spindle cap cover and the ejection chute.

When T2400 is selected, do not move the sub spindle in the +X2 direction while Z2-axis
positions within the range of Z2=40.0~49.0.
Also, when T2400 is selected, do not execute movement in the +Z2 direction beyond
Z2=40.0 while the sub spindle is at POS. X2 0.

10-100
Relational dimensions at parts pick-up, when sub spindle is at the maximum advance position

The clearance between the tool and the end face of sub spindle cap is 1.5mm for 12 tool, and
3.5mm for 10 tool. Note that the clearance of 3.5mm for 10 tool cannot be decreased any
further.

10-101
Precautions when Stopper [0M497] is used
Collision between Stopper [0M497] and the bar
The following restrictions apply in order to avoid collisions between Stopper [0M497] and
the bar.

After selecting T3100, movement in +Y1 direction will be impossible.

When 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] or High Speed 5-Sp. Cross Drill
Unit ER11/16 [0M157] is used, T3100 tool cannot machine the bar with the diameter
larger than 20.

10-102
10-5 Installing and Adjusting Other Devices

10-5-1 Parts Ejection Detector

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Close all the doors before starting machine operation.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts of the machine.

Execute the reference point return of the Z2-axis before starting this work.
This unit cannot be used with Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475].
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

10-103
Adjustment of the switch position

For details on the adjustment of the switch position, refer to section “13-28 Parts
Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479, 0M479A 0M479E] or “13-29 Parts Ejector with
Spring [0M478, 0M478A 0M478F], depending on the parts ejector to be used.

Operation check

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during this work.

This is a safety device. Therefore be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
If this malfunctions, contact STAR MICRONICS immediately.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Loosen the two knob screws and remove the cover .
(6) Remove the three screws and the cover .
(7) Push the ejector pin with a finger and make the ejector pin flush with the face of
the collet .
Check that the pilot lamp of the proximity switch turns off at this position.
(8) Release the ejector pin and check that the pilot lamp of the proximity switch
lights up.
(9) Mount the cover with the three screws .
(10) Mount the cover with the two knob screws .

10-104
Alarm messages

If a parts ejection/pickup error is detected with M27, the following alarm messages will
appear on the screen. When detecting a parts ejection failure, the machine enters the single
block stop state. When detecting a parts pickup failure, the machine enters the feed-hold
state and the main/sub spindle motors, power-driven tool motor and coolant motor will stop.

1126 PART PICK UP ERROR ·········· Parts pickup error

2077 PART EJECT ERROR ············· Parts ejection error

Program example

Parts ejection detection Parts pick up detection

[PATH2] [PATH2]

M5 ; Sub spindle stop M82 ;

G0 T0 ; Offset cancel G131 ;
G28 W0 ; Z2-axis reference point return G0 Z 1.0 ;
T2900 ; Parts ejection position selection M68 ;
G0 Z40.0 ;Advance to Z2-axis ejection G98 G1 Z15.0 F2000;
position
M11 ; Sub collet unclamp G99 ;
G4 U0.5 ; Dwell 0.5sec. G69 ;
G28 W0 ; Z2-axis reference point return M500 ;
M27 ; Parts ejection detection ON Cutting-off
M510 ;
M68 ;
M83 ;
G0 T0 ;
G130 ;
M5 ;
M27 ; Parts pick-up detection ON
M99 ;

Make sure that one of the tools (T100 T600 (T700)) is selected on PATH1 when
the parts ejection is commanded.

10-105
10-5-2 Changing from Guide Bush Version to Non-Guide Bush Version

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Close all the doors before starting machine operation.

CAUTION
Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts inside the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during this work.

Always press the [FINISH] soft key and START button after checking the
contents on the cursor position.
Pressing them accidentally may cause machine damage and/or accidents.

Execute the reference point return of the Z2-axis before starting this work.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, memory or macro mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

10-106
10-107
10-108
10-109
<Changing from Revolving Guide Bush to Non-Guide Bush Version>
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) After pressing the MACRO key , press the soft key until the [GB/NGB] soft key
appears.

10-110
(5) Press the [GB/NGB] soft key to display the following screen.

(6) Press the START button at the display position of “PRESS START, MOVE CHANGE
POS.”.
(7) Press the [FINISH] soft key after moving to the change position.
(8) Remove the five screws and dismount the cover .
(9) Remove the four screws and dismount the cover .

10-111
(10)While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(11)Remove the three screws and dismount the cover .
(12)Remove the four screws and the fixture .

Keep the removed screws , fixture and cover outside the machine to
avoid misplacement.

(13)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE JOINT OF GB DRIVE
UNIT”.
(14)Loosen the screw .
(15)Loosen the four screws and move the revolving guide bush drive unit to the guide
bush side.
(16)Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .
(17)Remove the belt between the main spindle and the revolving guide bush drive unit (belt
width; 13mm).
(18)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE SPINDLE COUNTER
BELT”.
(19)Remove the belt between the revolving guide bush and the revolving guide bush drive
unit (belt width; 10mm).
(20)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE RGB COUNTER BELT”.

Hook the removed belts on the hook (2 places) so as not to disturb Z1-axis
sliding.

(21)Remove the adjusting nut and the guide bush .

For details on installing the guide bush , please refer to section “10-2 Installing
and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>”.

(22)Insert the jig into the sleeve and fix it with the two screws .

For the revolving guide bush, make sure that the key matches with the D-cut
surface of the jig when inserting the jig into the sleeve .

Use Jig for G.B. [1L421~1L423, 1L427, 1H429, 1H431, 1H432] or Jig for G.B. Body
[1L426, 1L431] as the jig in accordance with the version of guide bush.

10-112
 For details on the jig for guide bush, please refer to section “13-38 Jig for G.B.
VNC20 [1L421], R20 [1L422], R16, P16 [1L423], S13 [1L427], S12 [1H429], S10,
P10 [1H431], T7 [1H432], Jig for G.B. Body [1L426, 1L431]”.

(23)Remove the four screws and dismount the guide bush body .
(24) Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE GB BODY”.

The guide bush weighs approximately 5kg, so please be careful when dismounting
it.
Keep the removed guide bush body , screws , cover and screw outside
the machine to avoid misplacement.

(25)Remove the two screws and the jig .

(26)Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .
(27)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE Z1-AXIS BALLSCREW
COVER”.

Z1-axis ballscrew cover is the cover .

Keep the removed screw , cover outside the machine to avoid misplacement.

(28)Mount the cover with the six screws .

(29)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “MOUNT SPINDLE TOP COVER”.
(30)Remove the piping for air purge from the joint of the tool post.
(31)Remove the cap attached to the joint on the headstock, and then attach it to the
joint located on the tool post.
(32)Move the revolving guide bush drive unit to the exterior side fully and tighten the
screw slightly.
(33)Tighten the four screws .
(34)Mount the cover with the four screws .
(35)Mount the cover with the five screws .
(36)Close the doors of the machine body.
(37)When the Z1-axis can be moved to Z1=0 in the non-guide bush version without any

collision, press the START button at the display position of “PRESS CYCLE START
HEADSTOCK MOVE TO Z=0 OF NGB”.

When stopping the Z1-axis movement halfway, OT500 (+Z1) alarm will occur.
After pressing the [CAN] soft key, cancel the alarm by moving the Z1-axis in the
direction of “-Z1” in HANDLE mode.
By pressing the [CAN] soft key, the display position will return to the position of
“PRESS START, MOVE CHANGE POS.”.

10-113
(38)Press the [FINISH] soft key after completing the movement of the headstock.
(39)Open the doors of the machine body.
(40)Insert the piping for air purge into the joint on the headstock.
(41)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “INTERCHANGE AIR PURGE
HOSE, CAP”.
(42)Carry out the flow adjustment of air purge. Adjust the air purge flow as shown below,
according to the coolant type

Coolant type Nut , valve Nut , valve

3-1/4 turns from 9 turns from closed
Water-insoluble
closed position position
SB-16R/20R
7 turns from closed 9 turns from closed
Water-soluble
position position
2-3/4 turns from 6 turns from closed
Water-insoluble
closed position position
SB-12R
6-1/4 turns from 6 turns from closed
Water-soluble
closed position position

Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure” for
details on the air purge flow adjustment.

(43)Mount the cover with the four screws .

(44)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “MOUNT TOOL POST COVER”.
“COMPLETED” will be displayed on the following screen.

10-114
<Changing from Stationary Guide Bush to Non-Guide Bush Version>
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) After pressing the MACRO key , press the soft key until the [GB/NGB] soft key
appears.

(5) Press the [GB/NGB] soft key to display the following screen.

10-115
(6) Press the START button at the display position of “PRESS START, MOVE CHANGE
POS.”.
(7) Press the [FINISH] soft key after moving to the change position.
(8) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(9) Remove the adjusting nut and the guide bush .

For details on installing the guide bush , please refer to section “10-2 Installing
and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>”.

(10)Insert the jig into the guide bush body and fix it with the two screws after
removing the sleeve .

Use Jig for G.B. [1L421~1L423, 1L427, 1H429, 1H431, 1H432] or Jig for G.B. Body
[1L426, 1L431] as the jig in accordance with the version of guide bush.

For details on the jig for guide bush, please refer to section “13-38 Jig for G.B.
VNC20 [1L421], R20 [1L422], R16, P16 [1L423], S13 [1L427], S12 [1H429], S10,
P10 [1H431], T7 [1H432], Jig for G.B. Body [1L426, 1L431]”.

(11)Remove the four screws and guide bush body .

(12)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE STATIONARY GB
BODY”.

The guide bush weighs approximately 5kg, so please be careful when dismounting
it.
Keep the removed guide bush body , screws , cover and screw outside
the machine to avoid misplacement.

(13)Remove the two screws and the jig .

(14)Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .
(15)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE Z1-AXIS BALLSCREW
COVER”.

Z1-axis ball screw cover is the cover .

Keep the removed screw , cover outside the machine to avoid misplacement.

(16)Mount the cover with the six screws .

10-116
(17)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “MOUNT SPINDLE TOP COVER”.
(18)Remove the piping for air purge from the joint of the tool post.
(19)Remove the cap attached to the joint on the headstock, and then attach it to the
joint located on the tool post.
(20)Close the doors of the machine body.
(21)When the Z1-axis can be moved to Z1=0 in the non-guide bush version without any

collision, press the START button at the display position of “PRESS CYCLE START
HEADSTOCK MOVE TO Z=0 OF NGB”.

When stopping the Z1-axis movement halfway, OT500 (+Z1) alarm will occur.
After pressing the [CAN] soft key, cancel the alarm by moving the Z1-axis in the
direction of “-Z1” in HANDLE mode.
By pressing the [CAN] soft key, the display position will return to “PRESS START,
MOVE CHANGE POS.”.

(22)Press the [FINISH] soft key after completing the movement of the headstock.
(23)Open the doors of the machine body.
(24)Insert the piping for air purge into the joint on the headstock.
(25)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “INTERCHANGE AIR PURGE
HOSE, CAP”.
(26)Carry out the flow adjustment of air purge. Adjust the air purge flow as shown below,
according to the coolant type

Coolant type Nut , valve Nut , valve

3-1/4 turns from 9 turns from closed
Water-insoluble
closed position position
SB-16R/20R
7 turns from closed 9 turns from closed
Water-soluble
position position
2-3/4 turns from 6 turns from closed
Water-insoluble
closed position position
SB-12R
6-1/4 turns from 6 turns from closed
Water-soluble
closed position position

Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure” for
details on the air purge flow adjustment.

(27)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “ADJUST AIR PURGE FLOW
RATE”.
(28)Mount the cover with the four screws .

10-117
(29)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “MOUNT TOOL POST COVER”.
“COMPLETED” will be displayed on the following screen.

10-118
10-5-3 Changing from Non-Guide Bush Version to Guide Bush Version

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during work.

Always press the [FINISH] soft key and the START button after checking
the contents on the cursor position.
Pressing them accidentally may cause the machine damage and accidents.

Execute the Z2-axis reference point return before starting this work.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

10-119
10-120
10-121
10-122
<Changing from Non-Guide Bush Version to Revolving Guide Bush>
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) After pressing the MACRO key , press the soft key until the [GB/NGB] soft key
appears.

10-123
(5) Press the [GB/NGB] soft key to display the following screen.

(6) Press the START button at the display position of “PRESS START, MOVE CHANGE
POS.”.
(7) Press the [FINISH] soft key after moving to the change position.
(8) At the display position of “PRESS [RGB], CHANGING TO RGB”, press the [RGB] soft key
when changing from the non-guide bush version to the revolving guide bush.

10-124
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(10)Remove the four screws and dismount the cover .
(11)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE TOOL POST COVER”.

Keep the removed screw , cover outside the machine to avoid misplacement.

(12)Move the automatic bar feeder so that the headstock does not collide with the
automatic bar feeder even when the Z1-axis moves to Z=0 of Guide bush version.
(13)Close the doors of the machine body.

(14)Press the START button at the display position of “PRESS CYCLE START
HEADSTOCK MOVE TO Z=0 OF GB”.

After completing the movement of the headstock, the FEED HOLD button will be lit.

When stopping the Z1-axis movement halfway, OT500 (-Z1) alarm will occur.
After pressing the [CAN] soft key, cancel the alarm by moving the Z1-axis in the
direction “+Z1” in HANDLE mode.
By pressing the [CAN] soft key, the display position will return to the position of
“PRESS START, MOVE CHANGE POS.”.

(15)Press the [FINISH] soft key after completing the movement of the headstock.
(16)Open the doors of the machine body.
(17)Remove the cap attached to the joint located on the tool post, and then attach it to the
joint on the headstock. Insert the piping for air purge into the joint of the tool post.
(18)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “INTERCHANGE AIR PURGE
HOSE, CAP”.
(19)Carry out the flow adjustment of air purge. Adjust the air purge flow as shown below,
according to the coolant type.

Coolant type Nut , valve Nut , valve

3-3/4 turns from closed Close
Water-insoluble
SB-16R/20R position
Water-soluble 6 turns from closed position Close
2-1/2 turns from closed Close
Water-insoluble
SB-12R position
Water-soluble 5 turns from closed position Close

10-125
 Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure” for
details on the air purge flow adjustment.

(20)Remove the six screws and dismount the cover .

(21)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE SPINDLE TOP COVER”.

Keep the removed screw and cover outside the machine to avoid
misplacement.

(22)Mount the cover with the two screws .

(23)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “MOUNT Z1-AXIS BALLSCREW
COVER”.
(24)Fix the jig to the tool post with the two screws .

Use Jig for G.B. [1L421~1L423, 1L427, 1H429, 1H431, 1H432] or Jig for G.B. Body
[1L426, 1L431] as the jig in accordance with the version of guide bush.

(25)Insert the guide bush body into the tool post along the jig and fix it with the four
screws . Tighten them with a torque of 33Nm.

For the revolving guide bush, make sure that the key matches with the D-cut
surface of the jig when inserting the guide bush body into the sleeve along
the jig .

(26)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “FIX GB BODY”.
(27)Remove the two screws and the jig .
(28)Remove the five screws and dismount the cover .
(29)Remove the four screws and dismount the cover .
(30)Loosen the screw .
(31)Loosen the four screws and move the revolving guide bush drive unit to the guide
bush side.
(32)Mount the belt between the guide bush body and the revolving guide bush drive
unit .
(33)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “FIX RGB COUNTER BELT”.
(34)Mount the belt between the main spindle and the revolving guide bush drive unit .
(35)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “FIX SPINDLE COUNTER BELT”.
(36)Mount the adjusting nut and the guide bush .

10-126
 For details on installing the guide bush , please refer to section “10-2 Installing
and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>”.

(37)Mount the cover with the two screws .

(38)Move the revolving guide bush drive unit up to the limit of exterior side and tighten the
screw slightly.
(39)Tighten the four screws .
(40)Adjust tension of the belts .

For details on adjusting the tensions of the belts , please refer to section “12-2-2
6-Month Inspection Inspection of the belts”.

(41)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “ADJUST BELT TENSION”.
(42)Mount the fixture with the four screws .
(43)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “FIX JOINT OF GB DRIVE UNIT”.
“COMPLETED” will be displayed on the following screen.

(44)Mount the cover with the three screws .

(45)Mount the cover with the four screws .
(46)Mount the cover with the five screws .
(47)Close the doors of the machine body.

10-127
<Changing from Non-Guide Bush Version to Stationary Guide Bush>
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) After pressing the MACRO key , press the soft key until the [GB/NGB] soft key
appears.

(5) Press the [GB/NGB] soft key to display the following screen.

10-128
(6) Press the START button at the display position of “PRESS START, MOVE CHANGE
POS.”.
(7) Press the [FINISH] soft key after moving to the change position.
(8) At the display position of “PRESS [RGB], CHANGING TO RGB”, press the [SGB] soft key
when changing from the non-guide bush version to the stationary guide bush.
(9) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(10)Remove the four screws and dismount the cover .
(11)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE TOOL POST COVER”.

Keep the removed screw , cover outside the machine to avoid misplacement.

(12)Move the automatic bar feeder so that the Z1-axis does not collide with the automatic
bar feeder even when the Z1-axis moves to Z=0 of Guide bush version.
(13)Close the doors of the machine body.

(14)Press the START button at the display position of “PRESS CYCLE START
HEADSTOCK MOVE TO Z=0 OF GB”.

After completing the movement of the headstock, the FEED HOLD button will be lit.

When stopping the Z1-axis movement halfway, OT500 (-Z1) alarm will occur.
After pressing the [CAN] soft key, cancel the alarm by moving the headstock in the
direction “+Z1” in HANDLE mode.
By pressing the [CAN] soft key, the display position will return to “PRESS START,
MOVE CHANGE POS.”.

(15)Press the [FINISH] soft key after completing the movement of the headstock.
(16)Open the doors of the machine body.
(17)Remove the cap attached to the joint located on the tool post, and then attach it to the
joint on the headstock.
Insert the piping for air purge into the joint of the tool post.
(18)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “INTERCHANGE AIR PURGE
HOSE, CAP”.

10-129
(19)Carry out the flow adjustment of air purge. Adjust the air purge flow as shown below,
according to the coolant type.

Coolant type Nut , valve Nut , valve

1-3/4 turns from closed Close
Water-insoluble
SB-16R/20R position
Water-soluble 3 turns from closed position Close
1-1/2 turns from closed Close
Water-insoluble
position
SB-12R
2-1/2 turns from closed Close
Water-soluble
position

Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure” for
details on the air purge flow adjustment.

(20)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “ADJUST AIR PURGE FLOW
RATE”.
(21)Remove the six screws and dismount the cover .
(22)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “REMOVE SPINDLE TOP COVER”.

Keep the removed screw and cover outside the machine to avoid misplacement

(23)Mount the cover with the two screws .

(24)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “MOUNT Z1-AXIS BALLSCREW
COVER”.
(25)Fix the jig to the tool post with the two screws .

Use Jig for G.B. [1L421~1L423, 1L427, 1H429, 1H431, 1H432] or Jig for G.B. Body
[1L426, 1L431] as the jig in accordance with the version of guide bush.

(26)Insert the guide bush body into the tool post along the jig and fix it with the four
screws . Fix them with a torque of 33Nm.

10-130
(27)Press the [FINISH] soft key at the display position of “FIX STATIONARY GB BODY”.
“COMPLETED” will be displayed on the following screen.

(28)Remove the two screws and the jig .

(29)Mount the adjusting nut and the guide bush .

For details on installing the guide bush , please refer to section “10-2 Installing
and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>”.

(30)Close the doors of the machine body.

10-131
10-5-4 Adjustment When Using the Profile Bar Stock Version

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during work.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, memory or macro mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.
The synchronous revolving guide bush [1L311~1L319] is required when machining
a profile barstock.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.
Always obtain approval from the machine supervisor first when inspecting or
adjusting the machine.

10-132
Position adjustment of the rotation direction of the main profile collet and profile guide bush
Exclusive for Guide bush version

Carry out this procedure only for Guide bush version . It is not necessary for
Non-guide bush version .

When machining a profile bar, the profile collet inside the main spindle and the profile guide
bush inside the revolving guide bush must be at the same position in the rotating direction.
Follow the procedure below to align the position of the rotating direction of the collet and the
guide bush.

10-133
(1) Installation of the profile collet and the profile guide bush into the machine must be
completed beforehand.

Refer to sections “10-1 Installing and Adjusting the Main Collet” and “10-2 Installing
and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>”.

Mark the key groove position of the profile collet and profile guide bush in advance.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.

(3) Execute the reference point return for all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the headstock room and cutting room doors.
(5) Remove the five screws and dismount the cover .
(6) Remove the four screws and dismount the cover .
(7) Remove the three screws and dismount the cover .
(8) Remove the two knob screws and dismount the cover .
(9) Loosen one screw to make the pulley move in the rotating direction freely.
Hook a spanner (32mm across face) onto the collar when loosening the screw .
(10)Insert the handle into the hole of toggle holder to fix the spindle.
(11)Pull the bar (profile barstock) out of the main spindle. Then adjust the position of the
rotating direction of the bar and guide bush by turning the pulley in the rotating
direction, and match the mark positions of the profile collet and profile guide bush.
(12)Insert the bar (profile barstock) into the guide bush.
(13)Remove the handle which is inserted into the hole of the toggle holder .
(14)Close the doors of the machine body.
(15)Command main collet clamp (PATH1: M10).
(16)Open the doors of the machine body.
(17)Tighten the one screw . The tightening torque is roughly 33Nm.
Unhook the spanner (32mm across face) after tightening the screw .

CAUTION
Insufficient tightening of the screw can lead to loosening of the pulley .
Tighten the screw carefully with the specified torque.

(18)Attach the cover with the two knob screws .

(19)Attach the cover with the three screws .
(20) Attach the cover with the four screws .
(21)Attach the cover with the five screws .
(22) Close the doors of the machine body.
(23)Command main collet unclamp (PATH 1: M11).
(24)Take the bar (profile barstock) out of the machine.

10-134
Adjusting the power-driven tool machining position and profile barstock rotating direction position

To machine a profile barstock, the power-driven tool machining position and the profile
barstock rotating direction position must be adjusted.
Follow the procedure below to adjust the spindle indexing.

(1) “ Position adjustment of the rotation direction of the main profile collet and profile
guide bush” must be completed beforehand.
(2) Install the main profile collet and profile guide bush into the machine.

Refer to sections “10-1 Installing and Adjusting the Main Collet” and “10-2 Installing
and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>”.

Installation of the profile guide bush of (1) and (2) is only for Guide bush version .
It is not necessary for Non-guide bush version .

(3) Execute the reference point return for all axes.

(4) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(5) Move the Z1-axis to 90.0 (3.5433inch) position with the electronic handwheel.
For Non-guide bush version, move the Z1-axis to 50.0 (1.9685inch) position.
(6) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(7) Pull out the bar (profile barstock) from the main spindle and insert it into the guide
bush.
Adjust the projection amount of the bar (profile barstock) from the guide bush end face,
so that it can be measured by an indicator.
For Non-guide bush version, pull out the bar (profile barstock) from the main spindle.
Adjust the projection amount of the bar (profile barstock) from the main spindle end
face, so that it can be measured by an indicator.
(8) Close the cutting room door.

(9) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp. Command the main collet
clamp (PATH1: M10).
(10)Command main C-axis ON, then command main spindle reference point indexing
(PATH1: M8 ; G0 C0).
(11)Open the cutting room door.

10-135
(12)Measure the angle difference “ ﾟ” between the calculated indexing position required for
the barstock and the actual position indexed by the reference point indexing command.

Attach the magnetic stand with indicator to the gang tool post (X-axis/Y-axis table) and
put the measuring terminals of the indicator onto the flat surface of the profile
barstock. While watching the POSITION screen, move the Y-axis slowly in

HANDLE mode and read the fluctuation amounts of the indicator and the Y-axis.

Fluctuation amount of the indicator (mm)

tan =
Fluctuation amount of the Y-axis (mm)

If the flat surface of the profile barstock is small, measure during actual machining.
Consider all values of “ ” as plus values. (max. 360 )
(13)Take the magnetic stand with indicator out of the machine.
(14)Close the cutting room door.
(15)Command Main C-axis OFF (PATH1: M9).
(16)Calculate the input value " " by the angle difference " º", and add the value to
parameter No.4135 on PATH1 before inputting.
= 10000 (Figures less than a decimal point are rounded.)

Refer to section “11-4-1 PARAMETER (SETTINGS) Screen” for details.

(17)Repeat steps (10) ~ (16). The angle difference “ ” will be 0 when the fluctuation
amount of the indicator reads 0.
(18)Take the bar (profile barstock) out of the machine.

10-136
Adjusting the sub spindle

(1) Install the sub profile collet and the profile guide bush into the machine.

Refer to sections “10-2 Installing and Adjusting the Guide Bush <Exclusive for
Guide Bush Version>” and “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.

Installation of the profile guide bush of (1) is only for Guide bush version . It is not
necessary for Non-guide bush version .

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.

(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervision of the machine controller, turn the CONTROL MODE key

switch to SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Insert a short profile bar into the sub collet. Adjust the projection amount of the profile
barstock from the sub spindle end surface to a degree that it can be measured by an
indicator.

(6) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the SUB COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the sub collet.
(8) Close the cutting room door.

(9) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(10)Command sub spindle indexing. (PATH2 : M8 ; G0 C0 ;)
(11)Select T2100.
(12)Open the cutting room door.
(13)Attach a magnet stand and measure the angle difference.

Attach the magnet stand onto the tool post (X/Y axis table) and position the measuring
terminals of the indicator onto the flat surface of the profile bar stock. Move the Y axis

slowly in HANDLE mode while watching the position screen at the same time.
Check the amount of variation of the indicator and Y-axis.
Fluctuation amount of the indicator(mm)
tan =
Fluctuation amount of the Y-axis(mm)
However, if the flat surface of the profile barstock is small, measure with actual
machining.
Consider all values of “ º” as plus values (max. 360 ).

10-137
(14)Take the magnetic stand with indicator out of the machine
(15)Close the cutting room door.
(16)Command C2-axis OFF. (PATH2 : M9 ;)
(17)Calculate the input value " " by the angle difference " º", then add and input the value
into parameter No.4135 (S1) on PATH2.
= 10000
(18)Repeat steps (10) ~ (17). The angle difference “ ” will be 0 when the fluctuation
amount of the indicator reads 0.
(19)Take the bar (profile barstock) out of the machine.

10-138
Position adjustment of synchronous phase.

Set “PHASES SYNCHRONIZATION AT M82” to YES on the KEEP RELAY

(conversational setting) screen before carrying out the position adjustment of
synchronous phase.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

(1) “ Position adjustment of the rotation direction of the main profile collet and profile
guide bush” must be completed beforehand.

Carry out step (1) for Guide bush version only. It is not necessary for Non-guide
bush version .

(2) “ Adjusting the power-driven tool machining position and the profile barstock rotation
direction position” must be completed beforehand.
(3) Close the doors of the machine body.
(4) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(5) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the doors of the machine body.

(6) Insert a bar (profile barstock) from the main spindle side into the guide bush.
(Make the bar project out approximately 100mm from the guide bush face.)

For Non-guide bush version, press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the

lamp, and press the AXIS DIRECTION key to move the Z-axis to 50.0
(1.9685inch) with the electronic handwheel. Insert the bar (profile barstock) into the
main spindle. (Make the bar project out approximately 100mm from the end face of
main spindle.)
(7) Close the doors of the machine body.

(8) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(9) Press the PATH1 and PATH2 keys to light up their lamps.
(10)Select T100.
(11)Command main collet clamp (PATH1: M10).

(12)Press the CUSTOM/GRAPH key .

10-139
(13)Press the [MCG SET] soft key to display the MACHINING DATA screen.

(14)Press the [PHASE] soft key to display the screen for phase adjustment.

10-140
(15)Press the START button .

Do not press the RESET key until step (18) is completed. If the RESET key

is pressed, repeat the procedure from step (13).

(16)Press the [START] soft key.

“ADJUST-ON” will be displayed at the bottom-left part of the screen.

10-141
(17)Open the cutting room door.

(18)Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp, and press the SUB

COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the sub collet.
(19)Move the Z2-axis to the guide bush side while adjusting the phase in the forward (M3)
direction to insert the profile barstock into the sub collet.

(20)Press the SUB COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the sub collet.
(21)Press the [APPLY] soft key.

(22)Press the SUB COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the sub collet.
(23)Retract the Z2-axis to take the bar out from the sub collet.
(24)Close the cutting room door.

(25)Press the RESET key .

(26)Carry out steps (13) ~ (18).
(27)Move the Z2-axis to the guide bush side to insert the bar into the sub collet.
For Non-guide bush version, move the Z2-axis to the main spindle side to insert the bar
into the sub collet.

(28)Press the SUB COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the sub collet.

10-142
(29) Confirm that the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is 2 or less.
If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is 2 or less, carry out step (31) ~ (34).
If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is greater than 2, carry out the
procedure from step (30).
(30) If the value is greater than 2 in step (29), press the [+1] soft key the same amount of
times as the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2.
E.g.) If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is 5, press the [+1] soft key five
times.

(31) Press the SUB COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the sub collet.
(32) Retract the Z2-axis to pull out the profile bar from the sub collet.
(33) Close the cutting room door.

(34) Press the RESET key .

(35) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(36) Repeat steps (26) ~ (28).
(37)If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is 2 or less, carry out the procedure
from step (31) to (34).
If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is greater than 2:
When the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is less than the last one, press
the [+1] soft key the same amount of times as the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO
ERROR S2.
E.g.) If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is 3, press the [+1] soft key
three times.
When the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is greater than the last one,
press the [ 1] soft key the same amount of times as the value of SPINDLE
SYNCHRO ERROR S2.
E.g.) If the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 is 8, press the [ 1] soft key
eight times.
(38)Repeat steps (36) and (37) until the value of SPINDLE SYNCHRO ERROR S2 becomes
2 or less.

10-143
MEMO

10-144
11. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the procedure for taking measures if trouble occurs with the machine.

11-1 Notification of Trouble

When notifying STAR MICRONICS of trouble, check the items described in “Appendix 8
Trouble Notes”, enter the items of confirmation (tick the check boxes), and fax it to STAR
MICRONICS or your dealer.

Company name Machine model

Division Serial number
Person in charge
CNC manufacturer
Tel. number
Fax number Delivery date

PATH1 (CH1)
Alarm PATH2 (CH2)
(CH3)
When the main power turns to ON *What are the contents
in the program (MDI)?
When the MACHINE READY button is pressed
When returning to the zero point
When operating the machine in HANDLE mode
Status of occurrence
When operating the machine in MDI mode *
When operating a program with AIR CUT *
When operating continuous machining
Others

Today ( / )
Since ( ) days ago,
Date of occurrence
( ) week(s) ago,
( ) month(s) ago

All the time

Once after every ( ) pieces of part machining
Frequency of
every ( ) minute(s)
occurrence
every ( ) hour(s)
every ( ) day(s)

Position of each axis, Position of each tool or attachment, Spindle rotation,

Light-up status of buttons etc.
Machine status

11-1
11-2 Contents of Alarms and Troubleshooting

If any trouble occurs with the machine, the contents are displayed through messages on the
screen.
If any trouble occurs, check if a related message is displayed. Then take necessary measures
according to the contents of troubles.

When resuming machine operation after removing the cause of the alarm, please
thoroughly grasp the related positions of each part inside the machine, and confirm
that there is no problem.

For detail on alarms, refer to sections “11-2-2 List of CNC Alarms" of this manual
and “A. Alarm List” in the MAINTENANCE MANUAL of the CNC manufacturer
(FANUC).

11-2-1 How to Check Alarms

Alarm screen display

(1) Press the MESSAGE key to display the ALARM MESSAGE screen.

11-2
Displaying the HELP screen

If the help mark is displayed on the left side of an alarm number, details of the alarm
can be seen on the HELP screen.

(1) Press the cursor keys , to move the cursor to the alarm number to be
referred.

(2) Press the HELP key to display the HELP screen.

11-3
(3) If the contents of the help extend to several pages, press the PAGE keys , to
switch between the pages.

(4) If the contents of the help cannot be displayed at a time, press the cursor keys ,

to scroll the screen.

11-4
When an alarm number without the help mark is selected and the HELP

key is pressed, FANUC help screen will be displayed.

As this HELP screen is displayed on the program screen, the program screen will

be displayed when the HELP key is pressed to close the HELP screen.
The alarm message screen will not be displayed.

11-5
Alarm/Message history screen display

(1) Press the MESSAGE key .

(2) Press the [HISTORY] soft key or the [MSGHIS] soft key to display the ALARM
HISTORY screen or the MESSAGE HISTORY screen.

(3) Use the PAGE key or to display alarm/message history on other screens.

The alarm history records up to 50 alarms occurred in the CNC. When the records
exceed 50, data will be automatically deleted in the chronological order.
The message history records up to 32 messages occurring in the CNC.
When the records exceed 32, data will be automatically deleted in the chronological
order.
To delete the entire alarm history:
(1) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
(2) Press the [CLEAR] soft key.

11-6
11-2-2 List of CNC Alarms

No. Message Contents

EX1000 EMERGENCY STOP In the emergency stop state.
MAIN SPINDLE SPEED Main spindle speed exceeds the permissible
EX1001
DETECTION deflection rate R in G26.
EX1002 BAR FEEDER ALARM Malfunction of automatic bar feeder.
EX1003 MAIN SPINDLE ALARM Malfunction of main spindle
Main spindle clamp (M6) is commanded
EX1005 LACK OF COMMAND M5 without commanding Main spindle stop
(M5).
Broken cut-off tool is detected or the broken
EX1006 CUT-OFF TOOL BROKEN cut-off tool detection signal has been
disconnected.
Main collet clamp confirmation signal has
been disconnected.
EX1011 SQ301 HAS DISCONNECTED Main collet clamp confirmation switch has
turned OFF, even though unclamp
command has not been issued.
Main collet clamp confirmation signal has
short-circuited.
EX1012 SQ301 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED
Main collet clamp confirmation switch has
turned ON without clamp command.
When automatic bar feeder is used
(K00-bit0=1) during MEMORY mode,
EX1013 LACK OF COMMAND M63 START button was pressed without
commanding M63 after alarm No. 1011 was
displayed.
Coolant flow volume is lower than the
EX1017 COOLANT FLOW ALARM
specified value.
Electromagnetic contactor KM001 has not
EX1020 KM001 CONTACT ERROR
functioned due to adhesion etc.
EX1021 PARITY ERROR Malfunction of OVERRIDE switch.
Machine is not ready. Press MACHINE
EX1022 MACHINE IS NOT READY
READY button.
M code command completion signal has not
EX1023 PATH1 M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM returned on PATH1, or an invalid M code
was commanded.
EX1024 T100 IS NOT SELECTED Select T100.
After commanding M20, one cycle is not
EX1025 CYCLE TIME OVER completed even after the elapse of time set
in PMC data table D500.
Main spindle rotation was commanded
during C1-axis ON mode (M8).
Main/sub spindle synchronous rotation
EX1027 LACK OF COMMAND M9 command was issued while C1-axis was
ON (M8).
Main spindle rigid tapping command was
issued while the C1-axis was ON (M8).
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC One of the electro-magnetic contactors does
EX1030
CONTACTOR ERROR not function because of adhesion etc.
Machine enters the one cycle stop
EX1031 M20 STOP
condition.
EX1033 CHIP CONVEYOR ALARM Malfunction of chip conveyor.
EX1037 SAFETY SELF CHECK ALARM Contact STAR MICRONICS.
One of fuses FU700 - FU704 inside P.C.B.
EX1043 FU700-704 ARE BLOWN
A701 has tripped.

11-7
 No. Message Contents
Over-current protection function of the
EX1046 SAFETY RELAY MODULE ALARM safety relay module (A010) has been
triggered.
Failure of power supply unit (A061) inside
EX1047 POWER SUPPLY HAS BROKEN
electrical cabinet.
EX1050 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ERROR Malfunction of door lock system.
When using the automatic bar feeder,
Air-cut mode is not available.
BAR FEEDER SETTING
EX1053 Even though the automatic bar feeder cable
MISMATCH
is connected, the keep relay K00-bit0 is not
set to 1.
LACK OF S-COMMAND FOR Spindle speed “S” is not specified when
EX1104
M36/M37 M36/M37 is commanded on PATH1.
LACK OF S-COMMAND FOR Spindle speed “S” is not specified when
EX1105
M36/M37 M36/M37 is commanded on PATH2.
LACK OF S-COMMAND FOR Spindle speed “S” is not specified when
EX1106
M56/M57 M56/M57 is commanded on PATH2.
EX1120 SUB SPINDLE ALARM Malfunction of sub spindle.
Sub collet clamp confirmation signal has
been disconnected.
EX1121 SQ311 HAS DISCONNECTED Sub collet clamp confirmation switch has
turned OFF, even though unclamp
command has not been issued.
1) Sub collet clamp confirmation signal has
short-circuited.
EX1122 SQ311 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED
2) Sub collet clamp confirmation switch has
turned ON without clamp command.
EX1126 PART PICK UP ERROR Parts pick-up failed.
M code command completion signal has not
EX1131 PATH2 M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM returned or an invalid M code was
commanded on PATH 2.
Spindle synchronous rotation error
There is speed difference in synchronous
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS rotation between the main and sub-spindle.
EX1133
ALARM Commanded main spindle speed has
become higher than maximum sub spindle
speed when M82 is commanded.
Main or sub spindle indexing was
commanded during spindle synchronous
EX1134 LACK OF COMMAND M83
rotation, or Main C-axis ON (M8) was
commanded.
Manual reference point return of X2-axis
EX1135 EXECUTE Z2 AXIS ZERO RETURN was executed before completing reference
point return of Z2-axis.
While a tool of T2000 T2900 was selected,
EX1140 X2-AXIS JOG FEED START button was pressed after moving
X2-axis manually.
When Parts Separator Type A [0H414] is
used, separator advance command (M117)
and Z2-axis movement command were
EX1141 Z2-AXIS FEED INTERLOCK
issued while a tool other than T100 was
selected, or X2-axis is at the position except
for 1.0 X2 10.0.

11-8
 No. Message Contents
After pressing RESET key during
automatic operation, START button was
EX1142 REWIND TO TOP OF PROGRAM
pressed without rewinding to the head of
program.
Torque limiter is applied to one of servo
EX1143 TORQUE LIMIT ALARM
motor axes.
Torque limiter ON was commanded
during Z1-Z2 axes synchronous rotation.
EX1144 TORQUE LIMIT INTERLOCK
Z1-Z2 axes synchronous rotation was
commanded during torque limiter ON.
SUB SPINDLE SPEED Sub spindle speed exceeds the permissible
EX1146
DETECTION deflection rate R in G26.
Ejector advance (M120/M121) was
commanded while the sub collet was
clamped.
Sub collet clamp (M10) was commanded
while the ejector was at the advanced
position.
Ejector advance (M120/M121) was
PARTS EJECTION UNIT
EX1147 commanded when the sub spindle was
INTERLOCK
rotating.
Sub spindle rotation (M3/M4) was
commanded while the ejector was at the
advanced position.
Ejector advance (M120/M121) was
commanded while a tool other than T2000
and T2900 was selected
Sub spindle rotation (M3/M4) was
commanded while sub spindle was
clamped.
Main/sub spindle synchronous rotation
(M82) was commanded while sub spindle
EX1151 LACK OF COMMAND M7
was clamped.
SUB SPINDLE key was turned ON while
sub spindle was clamped.
C-axis command was carried out while
sub spindle was clamped
Sub spindle clamp (M6) was commanded
EX1152 LACK OF COMMAND M5 without commanding sub spindle stop
(M5).
Sub spindle clamp command (M6) was
issued during main/sub spindle
EX1153 LACK OF COMMAND M83 synchronous rotation.
C-axis ON (M8) was commanded during
spindle synchronous rotation.
Sub spindle rotation command was
executed during C-axis control mode.
EX1154 LACK OF COMMAND M9
Sub spindle rigid tapping command was
executed during C-axis control mode.
Confirmation signal for advance end of sub
EX1155 SQ313 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED spindle clamp pin has short-circuited while
sub spindle was unclamped.
Confirmation signal for advance end of sub
EX1156 SQ313 HAS DISCONNECTED spindle clamp has been disconnected after
commanding sub spindle clamp.

11-9
 No. Message Contents
When Parts Separator Type A [0H414] is
used, X2-axis movement command in JOG
EX1162 X2-AXIS FEED INTERLOCK
was issued while Z2-axis was not at
reference point.
Sub collet clamp cannot be executed
EX1180 SUB SPINDLE SIGNAL ALARM because sub spindle signal was transmitted
incorrectly.
PATH2 INDIVIDUAL START M142/M143 was commanded during single
EX1183
INVALID operation of PATH2.
COOLANT AIR BLOW Sub spindle air blow and coolant blow are
EX1187
INTERLOCK commanded at the same time.
Main spindle clamp signal has
EX1300 SQ303 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED
short-circuited.
Main spindle clamp signal has been
EX1301 SQ303 HAS DISCONNECTED
disconnected.
C-axis movement was commanded during
EX1305 LACK OF COMMAND M7
M6 state on PATH.
SHEET key or START button was pressed
EX1710 KEY SIGNAL ERROR for 10 seconds or more, or DOOR OPEN
button was pressed for 30 seconds or more.
Collet was clamped or unclamped in
EX1711 SPINDLE STOP INCOMPLETE
manual mode during spindle rotation.
Main spindle stop has not been confirmed
EX1712 SPINDLE STOP ALARM
after commanding main spindle stop.
One of the door switches is disconnected or
EX1713 DOOR SWITCH ERROR
short-circuited.
EX1715 KA101 OR KA102 ERROR Contact of relay KA101 or KA102 is welded.
Interlock associated with M100 has
EX1720 M100 COMMAND INTERLOCK
functioned.
<Non guide bush version>
STOPPER HAS NOT BEEN
EX1722 M190 was commanded while stopper was
SELECTED
not selected.

11-10
 No. Message Contents
2030 MAIN SPINDLE KEY IS INVALID MAIN SPINDLE key is invalid.
2031 SUB SPINDLE KEY IS INVALID SUB SPINDLE key is invalid.
STOP TURNING THE
2041 Stop turning the handwheel.
HANDWHEEL
2042 SELECT ALL PATHS Select all PATHs.
Reverse movement on PATH 1 is prohibited
2044 PATH 1 NO REVERSING
in the manual handle retrace function.
Reverse movement on PATH 2 is prohibited
2045 PATH 2 NO REVERSING
in the manual handle retrace function.
A count up notice of the tool life
2047 COUNT UP (PREDICTION) management by tool No. counter function
has been notified.
CONTROL MODE key switch is set at
2050 SETTING MODE
SETTING MODE.
When main spindle was rotating in
MEMORY mode, MAIN SPINDLE key was
2056 MAIN SPINDLE KEY IS OFF turned OFF to stop the rotation. Then
START button was pressed without turning
MAIN SPINDLE key ON.
When sub spindle was rotating in
MEMORY mode, SUB SPINDLE key was
2057 SUB SPINDLE KEY IS OFF turned OFF to stop the rotation. Then
START button was pressed without turning
SUB SPINDLE key ON.
ARE YOU SURE THAT STOPPER When starting in MEMORY mode, has the
2060
HAS BEEN SELECTED? stopper [0M497] (T900) been selected?
When running a program in MACHINING
2061 OVERRIDE IS NOT 100% mode, OVERRIDE switch is not set at
100%.
MACHINING mode has been selected while
2062 CLOSE THE DOOR IMMEDIATELY
door is open.
BAR FEEDER IS EXCHANGING
2067 Bar feeder is exchanging materials.
MATERIALS
2070 COUNT UP Standard counter has counted up.
2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL Coolant oil level has dropped.
2073 LOW LEVEL OF LUBRI. OIL Lubricant oil level has dropped.
NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BAR There is no bar stock in automatic bar
2075
FEEDER feeder.
AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER NOT Ready signal of automatic bar feeder is
2076
READY OFF.
2077 PART EJECT ERROR Parts ejection failed.
POWER DRIVEN TOOLS KEY IS START button was pressed while POWER
2080
OFF DRIVEN TOOLS key was OFF.
Voltage of CNC backup battery has
2081 CNC BATTERY ALARM
dropped.
M25 was commanded while COOLANT1
2083 COOLANT1 KEY IS OFF
key was OFF.
One of the maintenance timers has reached
2084 MAINTENANCE TIME OVER
the set time.
TOOL LIFE COUNTER COUNT Tool life management by tool No. counter
2085
UP has counted up.
Parts quantity has reached the specified
value with the M code set on the parts
2086 COUNT UP(CNC OPTION)
quantity and running time display function
of CNC manufacturer (FANUC).

11-11
No. Message Contents
SIGNAL FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE
Automatic fire extinguisher sensor signal
2087 EXTINGUISHER HAS
has been disconnected.
DISCONNECTED
COOLANT2 ON M-code was commanded
2091 COOLANT2 KEY IS OFF
while COOLANT2 key was OFF.
Voltage of absolute pulse coder backup
2094 ABS SERVO BATTERY ALARM
battery is lower than the specified value.
Attempt was made to start program
ARE YOU SURE OF “AIR-CUT”
2095 operation while AIR CUT key was ON
MODE?
(flashing) in MEMORY mode.
START button was pressed under PATH2
2097 ARE YOU SURE OF PATH2 MODE?
single operation in MEMORY mode.

11-12
 No. Message Contents
The program of the cut-off process has
MC3008 PROGRAM END RESET ON
finished. Press RESET key.
The program of the cut-off process was
MC3010 COOLANT 1 KEY IS OFF
executed while COOLANT 1 key was OFF.
When commanding G784 (X cross rigid
MC3021 G784/SETTING ERROR tapping cycle), argument setting or M code
is improper.
When commanding G884 (Y cross rigid
MC3024 G884 SETTING ERROR tapping cycle), argument setting or M code
is improper.
When commanding G984 (front/back
MC3025 G984 SETTING ERROR off-center rigid tapping cycle), argument
setting or M code is improper.
When commanding sub spindle indexing
(G250 on PATH2), there was no angle
designation (C or H address).
At angle designation of sub spindle
MC3072 G250 SETTING ERROR
indexing (G250 on PATH2), absolute
command (C address) and incremental
command (H address) are executed at the
same time.
Only addresses M, S, C and H can be
TOOL SELECTION FORMAT
MC3601 commanded in the same block with the tool
ERROR
selection command.
TOOL SELECTION COMMAND
Cancel tool nose radius compensation before
MC3602 CANNOT BE EXECUTED DURING
commanding tool selection.
G41 G42 MODE
Execute the tool selection below on each
PATH.
TOOL NUMBER IS OUT OF PATH1: T100~T700, T1100~T1400,
MC3604
RANGE T3100~T3523
PATH2: T1100~T1400, T2000, T2100~T2400,
T2900, T3421~T3523

11-13
 No. Message Contents
Tool selection cannot be executed due to
T-CODE INTERLOCK
interlock. Check the axis position.
Details of the Contents
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0 when 7-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 6-station tool holder is
T200
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0 when 7-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 6-station tool holder is
installed.
T300
Z2-axis is located beyond 176.0 when 6-station tool holder is
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T4.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0 when 7-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 6-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 176.0 when 6-station tool holder is
T400
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T5.
MC3611 Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when 6-station tool holder is
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T4.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0 when 7-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 6-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 176.0 when 6-station tool holder is
T500
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T6.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when 6-station tool holder is
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T4 or T5.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0 when 7-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when 7-station tool holder is
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T5 or T6.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 6-station tool holder is
T600
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when 6-station tool holder is
installed and overhang tool holder is attached on T5.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.

11-14
 No. Message Contents
Tool selection cannot be executed due to
T-CODE INTERLOCK
interlock. Check the axis position.
Details of the Contents
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when overhang tool holder is
T700 attached on T6.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 50.0.
T1100
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
T1400
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 200.0 when 7-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 6-station tool holder is
installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when Slotting Unit is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 120.0 when Polygon Machining Unit is
T3100 used at T33.
Z2-axis is located beyond 190.0 when Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle
is used and 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 180.0 when Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle
is used and 4 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when Slotting Unit is used.
MC3611 Z2-axis is located beyond 138.0 when Polygon Machining Unit is
used at T34.
Z2-axis is located beyond 120.0 when Front Drilling Unit are used at
T35.
Z2-axis is located beyond 120.0 when Polygon Machining Unit is
T3200
used at T33.
Z2-axis is located beyond 145.0 when Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle
is used and 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 180.0 when Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle
is used and 4 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is
installed and Milling Unit is used at T35.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when Front Drilling Unit is used at
T35 for cross drilling.
Z2-axis is located beyond 169.5 when Slotting Unit is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 152.0 in the condition other than those
listed above.
Z2-axis is located beyond 138.0 when Thread Whirling Unit is used.
T3300
Z2-axis is located beyond 120.0 when Polygon Machining Unit is
used at T33 or T34.
Z2-axis is located beyond 79.0 when Front Drilling Unit is used at
T34 or T35.
Z2-axis is located beyond 145.0 when Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle
is used and 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.

11-15
 No. Message Contents
Tool selection cannot be executed due to
T-CODE INTERLOCK
interlock. Check the axis position.
Details of the Contents
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is
installed and Milling Unit is used at T35.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when Front Drilling Unit is used at
T35 for cross drilling.
Z2-axis is located beyond 79.0 when Front Drilling Unit is used at
T34 or T35.
T3400
Z2-axis is located beyond 79.0 when Polygon Machining Unit is used
at T33 or T34.
Z2-axis is located beyond 50.0 in the condition other than those listed
MC3611 above.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is
installed and Milling Unit is used at T35.
Z2-axis is located beyond 195.0 when Front Drilling Unit is used at
T35 for cross drilling.
Z2-axis is located beyond 138.0 when Thread Whirling Unit is used.
T3500 Z2-axis is located beyond 79.0 when Front Drilling Unit is used at
T35.
Z2-axis is located beyond 145.0 when Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle
is used and 5 Spindle Cross Drilling Unit is installed.
Z2-axis is located beyond 0.1 when Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
is used.
POWER-DRIVEN TOOL
Cancel constant surface speed control mode
MC3612 SELECTION CANNOT BE
before commanding tool selection.
EXECUTED DURING G96
G170 G171 OR G172 COMMAND IS Command G170, G171 or G172 in a single
MC3615
NOT SINGLE BLOCK block independently.
Command G130 in a single block
MC3620 G130 FORMAT ERROR
independently.
Only address B can be commanded in the
MC3621 G131 FORMAT ERROR
same block as G131.
Only addresses Z and W can be commanded
MC3622 G125 FORMAT ERROR
in the same block as G125.
Command G132 in a single block
MC3623 G132 FORMAT ERROR
independently.
Command G133 in a single block
MC3624 G133 FORMAT ERROR
independently.
G131 COMMAND HAS BEEN
MC3628 EXECUTED DURING Z1 AXIS Command G131 during Z1-axis stop.
MOVEMENT
G131 COMMAND CANNOT BE Since there is no G125 code, G131 cannot be
MC3630
EXECUTED commanded.
Parts projection amount of the sub spindle
G132 COMMAND CANNOT BE
MC3631 cannot be calculated. Correct the G133 code
EXECUTED
or the machining data.
G130 COMMAND CANNOT BE
Cancel tool nose radius compensation before
MC3635 EXECUTED DURING G41 G42
commanding G130.
MODE
G131 COMMAND CANNOT BE
Cancel tool nose radius compensation before
MC3636 EXECUTED DURING G41 G42
commanding G131.
MODE

11-16
 No. Message Contents
G125 COMMAND CANNOT BE
Cancel tool nose radius compensation before
MC3637 EXECUTED DURING G41 G42
commanding G125.
MODE
G132 COMMAND CANNOT BE
Cancel tool nose radius compensation before
MC3638 EXECUTED DURING G41 G42
commanding G132.
MODE
Since there is no G133 code, G132 cannot be
G132 COMMAND CANNOT BE
MC3642 commanded (parts projection amount from
EXECUTED
the sub spindle cannot be calculated).
G133 COMMAND CANNOT BE Since there is no G131 code, G133 cannot be
MC3643
EXECUTED commanded.
When Z1-axis machining start position is
MACHINING START POSITION greater than 491.0, or when Z value of G125
MC3646
OF Z1 AXIS IS IMPROPER Z ; is minus value and POS (ABS) =0 of
Z1-axis is on the plus side of the Z1 +OT.
G133 COMMAND CANNOT BE
Cancel tool nose radius compensation before
MC3648 EXECUTED DURING G41 G42
commanding G133.
MODE
Only addresses T, X, Y, Z and Q can be
MC3677 G265 FORMAT ERROR
commanded in the same block as G265.
T AND Q COMMANDS ARE Addresses T and Q must be commanded in
MC3678
NECESSARY IN G265 G265.
T OR Q VALUE IN G265
MC3679 T or Q value of G265 is out of range.
COMMAND IS OUT OF RANGE
T VALUE IN G265 COMMAND IS
MC3680 T value (ID number) of G265 is out of range.
OUT OF RANGE
Y VALUE IN G265 COMMAND IS
MC3681 Argument of Y in G265 is out of range.
OUT OF RANGE
Only addresses A, X, W, S, Z, B and F can
MC3685 G266 FORMAT ERROR
be commanded in the same block as G266.
LACK OF ARGUMENT IN G266 Arguments A, X, W, S, Z, B and F must all
MC3686
COMMAND be specified in G266.
ARGUMENT IN G266 COMMAND Either A, X, W, S, Z, B and F value of
MC3687
IS OUT OF RANGE G266 command is out of range.
T AND Q COMMANDS ARE Addresses T and Q must be commanded in
MC3689
NECESSARY IN G267 COMMAND G267.
Only addresses T, D, P, C and Q can be
MC3690 G267 FORMAT ERROR
commanded in the same block as G267.
ARGUMENT IN G267 COMMAND Either D, P, C or Q value of G267 command
MC3691
IS OUT OF RANGE is out of range.
TOOL NUMBER IS OUT OF
MC3692 Invalid tool number has been commanded.
RANGE
Command other than Z and W was
specified in the same block as G120/G121.
MC3812 WORK COORDINATE SET ERROR
G120/G121 was commanded in G41 (G42)
state.
Only addresses G, Z and F can be
MC3850 M192 FORMAT ERROR
commanded in the same block as M192.
Only addresses U, V, W, X, Y, Z, R, P, Q and
MC3858 G87 FORMAT ERROR F can be commanded in the same block as
G87.
More than one axis is commanded for
MC3859 G87 FORMAT ERROR
drilling at G87.

11-17
 No. Message Contents
Only addresses U, V, W, X, Y, Z, R, P and F
MC3860 G89 FORMAT ERROR can be commanded in the same block as
G89.
When commanding G89, more than one axis
MC3861 G89 FORMAT ERROR
is selected for drilling.

11-18
11-2-3 Causes and Measures of CNC Alarms

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.

Always obtain approval from the machine controller first when inspecting or
adjusting the machine.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly identified by others.

In this section, cause analysis of alarms: number 1000s and 2000s are explained. The causes
are classified into the following three types.
A: Causes which can be removed by the operator
B: Causes which can be removed by qualified servicing personnel of the user
C: Causes which can be removed by qualified servicing personnel of STAR MICRONICS

The operator should not remove cause types B and C.

EX1000 EMERGENCY STOP

CAUSES REMARKS
A
EMERGENCY STOP button has
been pressed.
CONTROL MODE key switch has been
turned to MACHINING for 30
seconds while headstock room or cutting
room door is open.
B Breaker has tripped.
Thermal relay has tripped.
Fire extinguisher has functioned.

Refer to the ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM.

C Emergency stop circuit is disconnected. Refer to the lighting of LEDs (HL701

HL714) on P.C.B (A701) in the cabinet to
have an understanding of the conducting
status.
Electric fuse in the safe relay module Turn the power OFF and ON again, and
(A010) is burnt out. put the machine into machine ready state.

11-19
EX1001 MAIN SPINDLE SPEED DETECTION

CAUSES REMARKS
A Cutting load on main spindle is too large.
There is an error in the “G26 Pp Qq Rr Ii”
command on PATH1.
C Check spindle-related parameters
(PATH1).
Spindle running signal does not turn ON
even after 5 seconds since the rotation
command is issued.

EX1002 BAR FEEDER ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
B Problem on automatic bar feeder If this alarm is triggered unnecessarily,
check the error signal interface of
automatic bar feeder.
C If this alarm is triggered unnecessarily,
check the conduction of the error signal of
cabinet.

EX1003 MAIN SPINDLE ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A If the alarm cannot be canceled by

pressing RESET key , turn the main

power OFF ( ) once and then turn it ON
( ) again.
C Check spindle-related parameters
(PATH1).
Check main spindle motor (M501) and
amplifier (A301).

EX1005 LACK OF COMMAND M5

CAUSES REMARKS
A Main spindle clamp (M6) is commanded
Command main spindle stop (M5) before
without commanding Main spindle stop
main spindle clamp (M6).
(M5).

EX1006 CUT-OFF TOOL BROKEN

CAUSES REMARKS
A Broken cut-off tool is detected.
C Advance end auto switch (SQ251) for
the broken cut-off tool detection is faulty,
or the installation position is incorrect.

11-20
EX1011 SQ301 HAS DISCONNECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
C Proximity switch (SQ301) for main collet
clamp confirmation has been
disconnected, or the installation position
is incorrect.
Main collet clamp confirmation switch
has turned OFF, even though the
unclamp command has not been issued.

This alarm will not be displayed when AIR CUT key is ON.
If this alarm is triggered in MEMORY mode, while automatic bar feeder is being
used (K00-bit0=1), the torque of automatic bar feeder will turn OFF.

EX1012 SQ301 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED

CAUSES REMARKS
C Proximity switch (SQ301) for main collet
clamp confirmation has short-circuited,
or the installation position is incorrect.
Main collet clamp confirmation switch
has turned ON, even though the clamp
command has not been issued.

This alarm will not be triggered when AIR CUT key is ON.

EX1013 LACK OF COMMAND M63

CAUSES REMARKS
A While automatic bar feeder torque was
turned OFF by alarm No.1011, START Press RESET key first, then

button was pressed without Command M63 on PATH 1 in MDI

commanding M63. mode.

11-21
EX1017 COOLANT FLOW ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A Coolant handle is closed. Open the coolant handle.
The amount of coolant in the tank is Check the amount of coolant in the tank.
insufficient.
B Coolant motor connector (XS001) has Check the connection of coolant motor
been disconnected. connector (XS001).
Follow the procedure in section “13-5
Setting of coolant flow detector [0M459]
Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]” to adjust
is incorrect.
setting.
C Electro-magnetic contactor KM202 has
malfunctioned.
Coolant flow detector [0M459] is faulty
or signal cable has been disconnected.
Problem on coolant motor.
Coolant motor power cable has been
disconnected.

EX1020 KM001 CONTACTOR ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
C Contact of electromagnetic contactor Replace electromagnetic contactor
(KM001) is permanently closed due to a (KM001).
problem with adhesion etc. If KM001 is adhered, alarm No. 1030 will
be displayed at the same time.

EX1021 PARITY ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
A This alarm is triggered when override
switch positions between scales for 10
seconds or more. Please be careful
during maintenance.
B Please check the input signal status
(DGN) of OVERRIDE switch.
If the DGN differs from the one on the
operation panel, replace override switch.
Refer to the ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM.

EX1022 MACHINE IS NOT READY

CAUSES REMARKS
A
MACHINE READY button has not Press MACHINE READY button
been pressed. .

11-22
EX1023 PATH1 M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A An illegal M code was commanded on Modify the program.
PATH1.
C M code command completion signal on Find out why the completion signal has
PATH1 has not returned. not returned.

EX1024 T100 IS NOT SELECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
A Broken cut-off tool detection ON (M27) Command T100 before commanding
was commanded without selecting T100. broken cut-off tool detection ON (PATH1:
M27).

EX1025 CYCLE TIME OVER

CAUSES REMARKS
A Feed speed is lowered by feed override
Check the OVERRIDE switch setting.
function.
Related spindle has stopped even though Modify the program.
feed per revolution (G99) is commanded.
B There is a setting error of one-cycle timer
(PMC data table D500).
C Find out why it takes time.

EX1027 LACK OF COMMAND M9

CAUSES REMARKS
A Main spindle rotation command was Command C1-axis OFF (M9) to enable
executed during C1-axis ON (M8). rotation of the main spindle.

EX1030 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC CONTACTOR ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
C One of the electro-magnetic contactors Replace the faulty electro-magnetic
(KM001, KM202, KM203 and KM205) contactor.
becomes permanently closed due to
adhesion etc. of the contact.

EX1031 M20 STOP

CAUSES REMARKS
This is used for customer version.
If this alarm is triggered, refer to the specifications of each customer version
for more details.

11-23
EX1033 CHIP CONVEYOR ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A Check that chip conveyor is wired This alarm is triggered when machine
correctly. stops with one cycle stop (M20).
Check that emergency stop button on
conveyor control panel is unlocked.
B Check the status of chip conveyor.
Check the cable connection between chip
conveyor and the CNC.
Check if the thermal relay or torque Refer to the manual by manufacturer of
limitter of chip conveyor is ON. chip conveyor for details.
C Check the continuity status of the error If this alarm is triggered even when chip
signal wiring of chip conveyor. conveyor is not installed, DIP switch
SA770(1) on P.C.B. (A701) in the cabinet
may be OFF. Set it to ON.

EX1037 SAFETY SELF CHECK ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
C Contact STAR MICRONICS.

EX1043 FU700-704 ARE BLOWN

CAUSES REMARKS
B One of fuses FU700 FU704 inside the
cabinet has tripped.

EX1046 SAFETY RELAY MODULE ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
C Over-current protection function of the
safety relay module (A010) has been
triggered.
All LEDs of this module have turned
OFF during operation of the over-current
protection. The alarm automatically
clears the moment the over-current is
resolved.
Malfunction of the safety relay module
(A010).

EX1047 POWER SUPPLY HAS BROKEN

CAUSES REMARKS
C (1) Turn OFF the power once.
(2) Turn ON the power again.
If it is reset by turning the power ON again, the capacity of the 24Vdc line may
be exceeded.
If it is not reset by turning the power ON again, the power supply (A061) is
faulty.

11-24
EX1050 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
A Door lock mechanism is faulty.
C Check that PMC DGN “X47-bit7”
or “X48-bit4” is set to “1” in 30 seconds
after CONTROL MODE key switch is
turned to MACHINING .
If it is “0”, timer (KT401) may be faulty.

EX1053 BAR FEEDER SETTING MISMATCH

CAUSES REMARKS
A When air-cut operation is commanded

while AIR CUT key is ON, press the

emergency stop button of automatic bar
feeder.
Set the keep relay to K00-bit0 (BF.P) = 1.
C Check that DIP switch SA771(7) is set at
OFF ( ).

EX1104 LACK OF S COMMAND FOR M36/M37

CAUSES REMARKS
A Spindle speed “S” is not specified when Stop the main spindle with M5 before
M36/M37 is commanded on PATH1. commanding the rotation of the
power-driven tool motor, then command
“S” in the same block with M36 or M37.

EX1105 LACK OF S COMMAND FOR M36/M37

CAUSES REMARKS
A Spindle speed “S” is not specified when Stop the main spindle with M5 before
M36/M37 is commanded on PATH2. commanding the rotation of the
power-driven tool motor, then command
“S” in the same block with M36 or M37.

EX1106 LACK OF S COMMAND FOR M56/M57

CAUSES REMARKS
A Spindle speed “S” is not specified when Stop the main spindle with M5 before
M56/M57 is commanded on PATH2. commanding the rotation of the
power-driven tool motor, then command
“S” in the same block with M56 or M57.

11-25
EX1120 SUB SPINDLE ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A If the alarm cannot be canceled by

pressing RESET key , turn main

power OFF ( ) once then turn it ON ( )
again.
C Improper setting of the sub Check spindle-related parameters
spindle-related parameters (PATH2). (PATH2).
Check sub spindle motor (M502) and
amplifier (A302).

EX1121 SQ311 HAS DISCONNECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
C Proximity switch (SQ311) for sub collet
clamp confirmation has been
disconnected, or the installation position
is incorrect.
Sub collet clamp confirmation switch has
turned OFF, even though the unclamp
command has not been issued.

This alarm will not be displayed when AIR CUT key is ON.

EX1122 SQ311 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED

CAUSES REMARKS
C Proximity switch (SQ311) for main collet
clamp confirmation has short-circuited,
or the installation position is incorrect.
Sub collet clamp confirmation switch has
turned ON, even though the clamp
command has not been issued.

This alarm will not be displayed when AIR CUT key is ON.

EX1126 PART PICK UP ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
A There is no part in the sub collet.
C Proximity switch (SQ252) is faulty or
the installation position is incorrect.
Collet mechanism is faulty.

11-26
EX1131 PATH2 M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A An illegal M code was commanded on Modify the program.
PATH2.
C M code command completion signal on Find out why the completion signal has
PATH2 has not returned. not returned.

EX1133 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A Main spindle speed has exceeded the Main spindle speed cannot exceed the
maximum sub spindle speed. maximum sub spindle speed when the
spindle synchronous rotation control ON
(M82) is commanded.
Speed error during spindle synchronous
rotation has occurred.
C Synchronous control was not performed Check the error amounts of the main and
properly. sub spindles with DGN No. 425.

EX1134 LACK OF COMMAND M83

CAUSES REMARKS
A Spindle indexing was commanded during Command main/sub spindle synchronous
spindle synchronous rotation. rotation control OFF (M83).
Spindle clamp (PATH1: M6) or C-axis
ON (PATH1: M8) was commanded
during spindle synchronous rotation.

EX1135 EXECUTE Z2 AXIS ZERO RETURN

CAUSES REMARKS
A X2-axis was returned to the reference Carry out manual reference point return
point manually before reference point of Z2-axis first.
return of Z2-axis.

EX1140 X2 AXIS JOG FEED

CAUSES REMARKS
A After tool selection of T2000 T2900, the
X2-axis was moved manually and Press RESET key to cancel the
alarm. Then check the tool position and
START button was pressed.
press START button again.

11-27
EX1141 Z2 AXIS FEED INTERLOCK

CAUSES REMARKS
A When Parts Separator Type A [0H414] is
used, separator advance command
(M117) and the Z2-axis movement
command were issued while a tool other
than T100 was selected, or X2-axis is at
the position except for 1.0 X2 10.0.

EX1142 REWIND TO TOP OF PROGRAM

CAUSES REMARKS
A Operation mode has been changed
during program operation. (1) Press RESET key in EDIT mode.
(2) Restart program operation.
RESET key was pressed during
program operation.

EX1143 TORQUE LIMIT ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
A One of servo motors has overloaded After turning the main power OFF, turn the
while “TORQUE LIMITER” is set at main power ON again.
“ON” on SERVO MONITOR screen.
Cutting load was too large or collision
has occurred.
C Improper setting of PMC data Check the setting values of the PMC data
(D624 to D632). table (D624 to D632).
One of servo motors has overloaded. Check servo monitor.

EX1144 TORQUE LIMIT INTERLOCK

CAUSES REMARKS
A Torque limiter ON (M68) command was
issued during Z1-Z2 axis synchronous
control ON (while M40 was valid).
Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control ON
command (M40) was issued during
torque limit ON (M68 valid).

EX1146 SUB SPINDLE SPEED DETECTION

CAUSES REMARKS
A Cutting load on sub spindle is Modify the program.
excessively large.
“G26 Pp Qq Rr Ii” command on PATH2
is incorrect.
C Check the spindle-related parameters
(No.4000s).
Speed arrival signal (DGN No.
Speed arrival signal turned OFF during
F1045-bit3) occurs in 5 seconds after it
rotation of the sub spindle.
has turned OFF. Check F1045-bit3.

11-28
EX1147 PARTS EJECTION UNIT INTERLOCK

CAUSES REMARKS
A Ejector advance command (M120/M121)
cannot be issued while the sub collet is
clamped.
Sub collet clamp command (M10) cannot
be issued while the ejector has advanced.
Ejector advance command (M120/M121)
cannot be issued while parts separator
has retracted.
Sub spindle rotation command (M3/M4)
cannot be issued while the ejector has
advanced.

EX1151 LACK OF COMMAND M7

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sub spindle rotation command (M3/M4) Command the sub spindle unclamp (M7).
cannot be issued while sub spindle is
clamped.
Main· Sub spindle synchronous rotation
(M82) cannot be issued while sub spindle
is clamped.
Sub spindle cannot be rotated by
pressing the SUB SPINDLE key while
sub spindle is clamped.
Angle indexing cannot be issued while
sub spindle is clamped.

EX1152 LACK OF COMMAND M5

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sub spindle clamp command (M6) cannot Command sub spindle stop command
be issued during sub spindle rotation. (M5).

EX1153 LACK OF COMMAND M83

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sub spindle clamp (M6) cannot be issued Command main sub spindle synchronous
during synchronous rotation of the main· rotation control OFF (M83).
sub spindles.
C-axis ON (M8) was issued during Command M8 after commanding M83 on
synchronous rotation of main sub both PATH 1 and 2.
spindles.

EX1154 LACK OF COMMAND M9

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sub spindle rotation was executed Command C-axis control OFF (M9).
during C-axis control.
Rigid tapping of sub spindle was
executed during C-axis control.

11-29
EX1155 SQ313 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sensor for sub spindle clamp pin Check if the air is being supplied
advance end turned ON while sub adequately.
spindle was unclamped.
C The auto switch for sub spindle clamp pin
advance end (SQ313) is faulty or the
installation position is incorrect.

EX1156 SQ313 HAS DISCONNECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sensor for the sub spindle clamp pin Check if the air is being supplied
advance end does not turn ON after a adequately.
certain period of time since sub spindle
clamp command is issued.
C Auto switch for sub spindle clamp pin
advance end (SQ313) is faulty or the
installation position is incorrect.

1162 X2 AXIS FEED INTERLOCK

CAUSES REMARKS
A When using Parts Separator Type A When using Parts Separator Type A
[0H414], X2-axis movement command [0H414], carry out movement of X2-axis
was issued while Z2-axis was not located while Z2-axis is located at its reference
at its reference point. point.

EX1180 SUB SPINDLE SIGNAL ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
C Sub collet clamp cannot be executed 1. Check the set value of PMC timer
because sub spindle signal is No.39.
transmitted incorrectly. 2. Check that PMC DGN F1288-bit0 is
stably “1” during synchronous rotation
of the main and sub spindles.
3. Check that both PMC DGN F1288-bit0
and F1289-bit0 are stably “1” during
phase synchronization of the main and
sub spindles.

EX1183 PATH2 INDIVIDUAL START INVALID

CAUSES REMARKS
A Single operation on PATH2 is not
available while the keep relay of “Use
M142/M143” is selected.

11-30
EX1187 COOLANT AIR BLOW INTERLOCK

CAUSES REMARKS
A Sub spindle air blow and coolant blow Modify the program so that sub spindle
were commanded at the same time. air blow and coolant blow are not
commanded at the same time.

EX1300 SQ303 HAS SHORT-CIRCUITED

CAUSES REMARKS
A Main spindle clamp signal (PMC DGN X)
has short-circuited.
B Re-adjust the sensor position.
C If main spindle clamp signal is always “1”,
replace the sensor.

EX1301 SQ303 HAS DISCONNECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
A Main spindle clamp signal (PMC DGN
X5.1) has been disconnected.
B Re-adjust the sensor position.
C If main spindle clamp signal is always “0”,
replace the sensor.

EX1305 LACK OF COMMAND M7

CAUSES REMARKS
A C-axis movement was commanded
Command main spindle unclamp (M7).
without commanding M7.

EX1710 KEY SIGNAL ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
A
SHEET key or START button was
pressed for 10 seconds or more.
DOOR OPEN button was pressed for 30
seconds or more.

C Check the PMC DGN to confirm whether

or not a SHEET key, START button

or DOOR OPEN button has
short-circuited.

EX1711 SPINDLE STOP INCOMPLETE

CAUSES REMARKS
A Collet was clamped or unclamped in
manual mode during spindle rotation.

11-31
EX1712 SPINDLE STOP ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
C Spindle stop has not been confirmed
after commanding spindle stop.
In this case, it is considered to be an
“error status” and machine enters
emergency stop status.

EX1713 DOOR SWITCH ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
C One of the door switches is Check PMC DGN.
disconnected or short-circuited. PMC DGN X9.0: Changes to 1 when closing
headstock room door
PMC DGN X9.1: Changes to 1 when closing
cutting room door
PMC DGN X48.5: Changes to 1 when closing
all doors
Close all doors to check disconnection.
If one of PMC DGN (X9.0, X9.1 or X48.5) is “0”,
it is disconnected.
Open the headstock room door only.
If PMC DGN (X9.0, X48.5) are both “1”, the
headstock room door is short-circuited.
Open the cutting room door only.
If PMC DGN (X9.1, X48.5) are both “1”, the
cutting room door is short-circuited.
Please refer to ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM for details.

EX1715 KA101 OR KA102 ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
C Contact of relay KA101 or KA102 is
adhered.

EX1720 M100 COMMAND INTERLOCK

CAUSES REMARKS
A Interlock function is active with M100. M100 was commanded during
synchronous operation of Z1 and Z2 axes
(M40), and Z1 and Z2 axes changeover
control ON or X and Y axes changeover
control ON.
Modify the program.
Synchronous operation of Z1 and Z2 axes
(M40), and Z1 and Z2 axes changeover
control ON or X and Y axes changeover
control ON were commanded during
M100 execution.
Modify the program.

11-32
EX1722 STOPPER HAS NOT BEEN SELECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
A When using stopper on <Non guide bush Stopper (T900) has not been selected
version>, M190 was commanded while when commanding M190.
stopper (T900) was not selected. Select stopper (T900) first, then start the
program.

11-33
2030 MAIN SPINDLE KEY IS INVALID

CAUSES REMARKS
A
MAIN SPINDLE key is invalid. MAIN SPINDLE key was pressed
while in C1-axis ON (M8) or while main
spindle was clamped.
This alarm can be cancelled by pressing

RESET key or START button .

2031 SUB SPINDLE KEY IS INVALID

CAUSES REMARKS
A
SUB SPINDLE key is invalid. SUB SPINDLE key was pressed
while in C2-axis ON (M8) or while sub
spindle was clamped.
This alarm can be cancelled by pressing

RESET key or START button .

2041 STOP TURNING THE HANDWHEEL

CAUSES REMARKS
A Forward movement of manual handle Stop turning the handwheel.
retrace was performed for 3 seconds or
more under a stop condition (M1, M20
etc.)

2042 SELECT ALL PATHS

CAUSES REMARKS
A All PATHs have not been selected. Select all PATHs.

2044 PATH 1 NO REVERSING

CAUSES REMARKS
A Reverse movement on PATH1 is Resume retrace operation with forward
prohibited. movement.

2045 PATH 2 NO REVERSING

CAUSES REMARKS
A Reverse movement on PATH2 is Resume retrace operation with forward
prohibited. movement.

2047 COUNT UP (PREDICTION)

CAUSES REMARKS
A Count attainment of tool life management The count value will reach the preset
by tool No. counter function has been value during the “Non-stop time period”
notified. set in the counter.

11-34
2050 SETTING MODE

CAUSES REMARKS
A CONTROL MODE key switch is set at

SETTING mode.
If SETTING is selected, the machine will stop with M20 unconditionally.

2056 MAIN SPINDLE KEY IS OFF

CAUSES REMARKS
A During main spindle rotation in
Turn MAIN SPINDLE key ON
MEMORY mode, MAIN SPINDLE
before pressing START button .
key was turned OFF to stop the

rotation. Then START button was

pressed without turning MAIN

SPINDLE key ON.

2057 SUB SPINDLE KEY IS OFF

CAUSES REMARKS
A During sub spindle rotation in
Press SUB SPINDLE key ON before
MEMORY mode, SUB SPINDLE
pressing START button .
key was turned to stop the

rotation. Then START button was

pressed without turning SUB SPINDLE

key ON

2060 ARE YOU SURE THAT STOPPER HAS BEEN SELECTED?

CAUSES REMARKS
A Check if T900 has been selected.

2061 OVERRIDE IS NOT 100%

CAUSES REMARKS
A When running a program in 1) Set OVERRIDE switch and RAPID
TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch to
MACHINING mode, OVERRIDE
100%.
switch is not set at 100%.
2) When resuming the program, press

START button .

11-35
2062 CLOSE THE DOOR IMMEDIATELY

CAUSES REMARKS
A If closing the opened door or turning
MACHINING mode has been
CONTROL MODE key switch to
selected while a door is open.
SETTING mode is not carried out
within 30 seconds, machine will enter the
emergency stop state.

2067 BAR FEEDER IS EXCHANGING MATERIALS

CAUSES REMARKS
A
START button was pressed while START button .is invalid during the
bar feeder is exchanging materials. exchange.

2070 COUNT UP

CAUSES REMARKS
A Standard counter has counted up. (1) Reset standard counter.
(2) To restart program operation, press

START button .

Do not press RESET key at this time.

Please refer to section “7-$_CTRRFH_$ Counter Screen” for details on

operating the counter.

2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL

CAUSES REMARKS
A Coolant oil level has dropped. Replenish with coolant.
The program stop status varies according to the setting of keep relays.
In any case, the main/sub spindle motors, power-driven tool motor and coolant
motor stop.

Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details.

C Coolant flow switch (SL001) has a

problem or the installation position is
incorrect.

11-36
2073 LOW LEVEL OF LUBRI. OIL

CAUSES REMARKS
A Lubricant oil level has dropped. (1) Replenish with lubricant oil.
(2) To restart program operation, press

START button .

Do not press RESET key at this time.

The message disappears as soon as the program operation is started.

C Flow switch (SL003) of the centralized

lubrication unit has a malfunction.

2075 NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER

CAUSES REMARKS
A Automatic bar feeder is out of stock. Reload materials on automatic bar feeder.
B If automatic bar feeder is not
equipped with the all barstock
completion signal, set DIP switch
SA771(6) on P.C.B (A701) in the
cabinet to ON ( ).
If this alarm is triggered
unnecessarily, check the interface of
the all barstock completion signal of
automatic bar feeder.
C If this alarm is triggered unnecessarily,
check the conduction of the all barstock
completion signal of automatic bar feeder
on the cabinet side.

2076 AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER NOT READY

CAUSES REMARKS
A Automatic bar feeder is not ready. Reload materials on automatic bar feeder.
B If the automatic bar feeder is not
equipped with the preparation
completion signal, set DIP switch
SA771(8) on the P.C.B (A701) in the
cabinet to ON ( ).
If this alarm is triggered
unnecessarily, check the interface of
the preparation completion signal of
the automatic bar feeder.
C If this alarm is triggered unnecessarily,
check the conduction of the preparation
completion signal of automatic bar feeder
on the cabinet side.

11-37
2077 PART EJECT ERROR

CAUSES REMARKS
A A workpiece remains in sub collet.
Press RESET key to check inside
sub spindle.
Turn CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING while under the

supervision of machine controller. Then
open the door and take out the workpiece.

C Proximity switch (SQ252) is faulty

or the installation position is incorrect.
Sub spindle mechanism is faulty.

2080 POWER-DRIVEN TOOL AUTO KEY IS OFF

CAUSES REMARKS
A (1) Press POWER DRIVEN TOOLS
START button was pressed while
the lamp on POWER DRIVEN TOOLS key to light up the lamp.
(2) To restart program operation, press
key was off.
START button .

2081 CNC BATTERY ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
B Voltage of CNC backup battery is lower (1) Stop the machine running.
than the specified value. (2) Replace CNC backup battery.
Machine continues running even when this alarm is triggered.

For details on battery replacement, please refer to section “12-2-3 How to

Replace the Battery Replacement of CNC memory backup battery”.

11-38
2083 COOLANT 1 KEY IS OFF

CAUSES REMARKS
A (1) Turn COOLANT1 key to
When SETTING mode has been ON ( ).
selected, M25 was commanded while (2) To restart program operation, press
COOLANT1 key was set at OFF ( ).
START button .
When MACHINING mode has been

selected, START button was

pressed while COOLANT1 key was set
at OFF ( ).

Do not press RESET key at this time.

The message disappears as soon as COOLANT1 key is turned to ON ( ).

This alarm will not be triggered while the lamp on AIR CUT key is ON.

2084 MAINTENANCE TIME OVER

CAUSES REMARKS
B One of the maintenance timers has (1) Stop the machine running.
reached the set time. (2) Check the areas requiring
maintenance.
(3) Clear the value of the timer that has
reached the set time.
Machine continues running even when this alarm is triggered.
To prevent this alarm, set the keep relay to K02-bit2 = 1.

For details on setting the keep relay, please refer to section “11-4-3 PMC
PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen”.

11-39
2085 TOOL LIFE COUNTER COUNT UP

CAUSES REMARKS
A Tool life management by tool No. (1) Reset the count-up condition of tool life
counter has counted up. management by tool No. counter.
(2) To restart program operation, press

START button .

Do not press the RESET key at this time.

The message disappears as soon as the program operation is started.

If this alarm is triggered, machine will stop with one cycle stop (M20), and the
main/sub spindle motors, power-driven tool motor and coolant motor stop.

For details on operating tool life management by tool No. counter, please refer
to section “7-10-7 Tool Life Management by Tool No. Counter”.

2086 COUNT UP (CNC OPTION)

CAUSES REMARKS
A CNC optional counter has counted up. (1) Cancel the count-up condition of CNC
optional counter.

(2) Press RESET key to cancel the

alarm.
(3) To restart program operation, press

START button .
If this alarm is triggered, machine will stop with one cycle stop (M20), and
main/sub spindle motors, power-driven tool motor and coolant motor stop.

For details on operating the CNC optional counter, refer to the USER’S
MANUAL of the CNC manufacturer (FANUC).

2087 SIGNAL FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER HAS DISCONNECTED

CAUSES REMARKS
C When an automatic fire extinguisher is
installed, check the continuity of sensor
and the input line to CNC of sensor
disconnection signal.
If this alarm is triggered even when automatic fire extinguisher is not installed,
DIP switch SA771(3) on P.C.B (A701) in the cabinet may be set to OFF.
If this alarm is triggered, machine stops by one cycle stop (M20), and main/sub
spindle motors, power-driven tool motor and coolant motor stop.

11-40
2091 COOLANT 2 KEY IS OFF

CAUSES REMARKS
A (1) Turn COOLANT2 key to
When SETTING mode has been ON ( ).
selected, coolant 2 ON command was (2) To restart program operation, press
executed while COOLANT2 key was set
at OFF ( ). START button .

When MACHINING mode has been

selected, START button was

pressed while COOLANT2 key was
set at OFF ( ).

Do not press RESET key at this time.

The message will be cleared as soon as COOLANT2 ON/OFF key is

turned ON ( ).

This alarm will not be triggered while the lamp on the AIR CUT key is
ON.

2094 ABS SERVO BATTERY ALARM

CAUSES REMARKS
B The voltage of the battery for absolute (1) Stop the machine.
pulse coder is lower than the specified (2) Replace the battery for absolute pulse
value. coder.
The machine continues running even when this alarm is triggered.

For details on battery replacement, please refer to section "12-2-3 How to

Replace the Battery Replacement of the absolute pulse coder backup battery"
for details on battery replacement.

2095 ARE YOU SURE OF “AIR-CUT” MODE?

CAUSES REMARKS
A
START button was pressed while Press START button again to start
air-cut operation.
AIR CUT key was ON.

11-41
2097 ARE YOU SURE OF PATH2 MODE?

CAUSES REMARKS
A An attempt was made to execute PATH2
single operation. Press START button again to
execute PATH2 single operation.

This alarm will not be triggered when SINGLE BLOCK key is ON.

11-42
11-3 How to Check the PMC DGN

Display the DGN check screen (PMC MANTENANCE screen) and check the input/output
signal status.
To display the screen, follow the procedure below.

(1) Press the SYSTEM key .

(2) Press the key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
(3) Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

(4) Press the key until the [STATUS] soft key appears.
(5) Press the [STATUS] soft key.
(6) Press the data keys to input an ADDRESS number.
(7) Press the [SEARCH] soft key.

Follow the steps below to display the status inside the CNC.

(1) Press the SYSTEM key .

(2) Press the [DGNOS] soft key.
(3) Press the data keys to input a DGN number and press the [No. SRH] soft key
to search.

Refer to the “DGN Table (DI/DO)” section of “ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM” and the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for more
information.

11-43
11-4 How to Check the Parameters

Display the PARAMETER screen and check the setting of parameters.

Refer to “OPERATOR’S MANUAL” published by CNC manufacturer (FANUC) for

details.

11-4-1 PARAMETER (SETTINGS) Screen

(1) Press the SYSTEM key .

(2) Press the [PARAM] soft key to display the PARAMETER screen.
(3) Refer to the STAR "Parameter list" distributed with the machine.

(4) Press the CHANGE key to select a PATH for checking the parameters.

11-44
Re-writing the Parameter (Setting)

Follow the procedure below to change the parameter (setting) data.

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PATH1 or PATH2 key to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the OFFSET key .

(5) Press the [SETTING] soft key.

(6) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen with the PAGE keys , .

(7) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to [PARAMETER WRITE = ].

(8) Press the [1] data key and then the INPUT key . (This makes parameter re-writing
possible.)
Alarm SW0100 will be displayed.

(9) Press the SYSTEM key .

(10) Press the [PARAM] soft key.

11-45
(11) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to the number of a parameter to change.
There are two methods to search the number of a parameter to change.

One method is by using the PAGE keys , or the CURSOR keys ,

, or .
The other method is as follows:
1) Press the [(OPRT)] key.
2) Press the data keys to input a parameter number.
3) Press the [NO. SRH] key.
(12) Press the data keys to input a numerical value.

(13) Press the INPUT key .

The [INPUT] soft key can also be used for inputting.
The [+INPUT] soft key can be used for inputting incrementally.

(14) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to OFF ( ).

(The value “PARAMETER WRITE= 1” set in step (8) changes to “0”.)

(15) Press the RESET key to cancel alarm SW0100.

If alarm PW0000 is displayed at this time, turn the main power OFF once.

11-46
11-4-2 PMC PARAM (TIMER) Screen

Displaying the PMC PARAM (TIMER) Screen

(1) Press the SYSTEM key .

(2) Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
(3) Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

(4) Press the soft key until the [TIMER] soft key appears.
(5) Press the [TIMER] soft key.

Changing the PMC PARAM (TIMER) Setting Data

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the OFFSET key .

(4) Press the [SETTING] soft key.

(5) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen with the PAGE keys , .
(6) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to [PARAMETER WRITE = ].

(7) Press the [1] data key and then the INPUT key . (This makes parameter
re-writing possible.)

(8) Press the SYSTEM key .

11-47
(9) Display the PMC PARAM (TIMER) screen.

1. Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
2. Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

3. Press the soft key until the [TIMER] soft key appears.
4. Press the [TIMER] soft key.
(10) Press the cursor keys and the PAGE keys to move the cursor to a parameter to change.
(11) Press the data keys to input a numerical value.

(12) Press the INPUT key .

(13) After setting the data of PMC PARAM (TIMER), turn the MEMORY INPUT key

switch to OFF ( ).
(The value “PARAMETER WRITE= 1” set in step (7) changes to “0”.)

(14) Press the RESET key to cancel alarm SW0100.

11-48
Timers of the sheet keys

Sheet key name Timer No. Initial setting (mS)

PATH1 150 0
CHANGE 151 0
PATH2 152 0
PATH2 BLOCK SKIP 153 0
SUB COLLET UNCLAMP/CLAMP 154 200
SUB SPINDLE ON/OFF 156 0
EDIT 158 0
MEMORY 159 0
MDI 160 0
MACRO 161 0
HANDLE 163 0
ZERO RETURN 164 0
AUTO POWER OFF 166 0
AIR CUT 168 0
OPTIONAL STOP 169 0
PATH1 BLOCK SKIP 170 0
ONE CYCLE 171 0
SINGLE BLOCK 172 0
X1 AXIS SELECT 174 0
Y1 AXIS SELECT 175 0
Z1 AXIS SELECT 173 0
X2 AXIS SELECT 176 0
Z2 AXIS SELECT 177 0
POWER DRIVEN TOOLS ON/OFF 178 0
MAIN SPINDLE ON/OFF 180 0
SETTING mode 182 0
COOLANT1 KEY
MACHINING mode 24 1000
SETTING mode 183 0
COOLANT2 KEY
MACHINING mode 25 1000
HANDLE RETRACE KEY 184 0
AUX1 190 0
AUX2 191 0
MAIN COLLET 196 200
×1 205 0
×10 206 0
×100 207 0

The setting unit is 8mS.

Changeover between SETTING mode and MACHINING mode is only available for
COOLANT1 and COOLANT2 sheet keys.

11-49
11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen

Displaying the PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen

(1) Press the SYSTEM key .

(2) Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
(3) Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

(4) Press the soft key until the [KEEPRL] soft key appears.
(5) Press the [KEEPRL] soft key.

Changing the PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Setting Data

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the OFFSET key .

(4) Press the [SETTING] soft key.

(5) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen by pressing the PAGE keys , .
(6) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to [PARAMETER WRITE = ].

(7) Press the [1] data key and then the INPUT key . (This makes parameter
re-writing possible.)

11-50
(8) Press the SYSTEM key .
(9) Display the PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) screen.

1. Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
2. Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

3. Press the soft key until the [KEEPRL] soft key appears.
4. Press the [KEEPRL] soft key.
(10) Press the cursor keys and the PAGE keys to move the cursor to a keep relay to change.
(11) Press the [1] or [0] data key.

(12) Press the INPUT key .

(13) After setting the data of PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY), turn the MEMORY INPUT key

switch to OFF ( ).
(The value “PARAMETER WRITE= 1” set in step (7) changes to “0”.)

(14) Press the RESET key to cancel alarm SW0100.

11-51
Keep relay functions
Bit
Address Relay Function Remarks
No.
Set to “1” to use the automatic
0 BF.P
bar feeder.
Set to “1” to apply a single block Set the keep relay to
stop instead of applying the feed K01-bit4 (OCY.P) = 0.
hold immediately, when the Be sure to use
1 SBK.P
coolant level in the tank drops. Coolant Flow
Detector [0M459]
for this setting.
Set to “1” to not stop the spindle
K00 2 M00.P with the M0 command.
Set to “1” to apply an emergency
3 EMG.P stop at M0 after completing all
bar feeding.
Set to “1” to use the M80
5 M80.P
command as a wait command.
Set to “1” to mute the buzzer
6 BZ.P sound when pressing the sheet
keys on the operation panel.
Set to “1” to apply one-cycle stop Set the keep relay to
instead of applying the feed hold K00-bit1 (SBK.P) = 0.
immediately, when the coolant Be sure to use
4 OCY.P
level in the tank drops. Coolant Flow
K01
Detector [0M459]
for this setting.
Set to “1” to perform spindle
6 SPHS.P
phase synchronization control.
Set to “1” to disable the alarm
(No. 1142) that occurs when reset
is applied during automatic
1 RWD.P operation, or when the START

button is pressed after

changing the mode.
Set to “1” to not display the time
2 TIME.P up alarm (No. 2084) of the
K02 maintenance timer.
Set to “1” to disable alarms No.
4 ALM.P
1014, 1015 and 1140.
Set to “1” to maintain the same
condition of main collet clamp/
unclamp when the main power
5 CC.P
was turned off last time, to the
time of turning the main power
ON.
Set to “1” to display the operator
message (No. 2067) when the
K03 7 M0MSG.P START button is pressed
during M0 stop at the time of
exchanging materials.

11-52
 Bit
Address Relay Function Remarks
No.
Set to “1” to not turn the spare
0 DO1.P
DO1 OFF with emergency stop.
Set to “1” to not turn the spare
1 DO2.P
DO2 OFF with emergency stop.
K04
Set to “1” to not turn the spare
2 DO3.P
DO3 OFF with emergency stop.
Set to “1” to not turn the spare
3 DO4.P
DO4 OFF with emergency stop.
Set to “1” to skip the slash “/” codes
between M75 and M76 blocks
3 WKEJ.P when there is no part detected by
K05 parts ejection detector (in the
non-proximity status).
Set to “1” to use Coolant Unit 2.5
6 2.5MP.P MPa [0T431].

Set to “1” to set the run signal of

chip conveyor (prepared by the
0 CHIP.P user) to be constantly ON. (OFF
only during emergency stop)
K06
Set to “1” to make the warning
2 PATB.P buzzer of Beacon [0T427] effective.
Set to “1” to enable coolant ON
6 COLON.P (M25) in AIR CUT mode.
Set to “1” to switch the condition
that triggers alarm No. 1053, from
K07 0 RDY.P the error signal to the preparation
completion signal of the automatic
bar feeder.
Set to “1” to use Overhang Tool
2 SFT4.P
Holder [0G102, 48105] at T400.
Set to “1” to use Overhang Tool
3 SFT5.P
Holder [0G102, 48105] at T500.
K08 Set to “1” to use Overhang Tool
5 SFT6.P
Holder [0G102, 48105] at T600.
Set to “1” to use Wedge Type 7
7 T7.P Station Overhang Tool Holder
[0M104].

11-53
 Bit
Address Relay Function Remarks
No.
Set to “1” to use Parts Separator
1 SEP.P Type A [0H414].
K09
Set to “1” when using Parts
7 STP.P
Stopper Unit [0M497].
Set to “0” when the no barstock
signal of the automatic bar feeder
2 WEL.P interface adopts contact type “a”
(open), and set to “1” for contact
K12 type “b” (close).
Set to “1” to stop the main and sub
spindle rotation when spindle
7 SYOF.P synchronous rotation control is
canceled.
Set to “1” when using Parts Ejector
K13 0 PEJ.P with Air Cylinder [0M479].
Set to “1” to execute the main collet
clamp in the time set to Timer 45
K15 5 NTYP.P after the steady rest unit is closed Timer 45
when M10 is commanded in
Non-guide bush version.
Set to “1” when using Counter Face
0 FDU4.P Drilling Unit [0M155] at T3400 for
front drilling.
Set to “1” when using Counter Face
1 FDU5.P Drilling Unit [0M155] at T3500 for
front drilling.
Set to “1” when using 3-Spindle
2 SLHU3.P Sleeve Holder at T3300 for front
machining.
Set to “1” when using Polygon
K22 3 PGU3.P Machining Unit [0M191] at T3300.
Set to “1” when using Polygon
4 PGU4.P Machining Unit [0M191] at T3400.
Set to “1” when using Thread
5 SLDWU.P Whirling Unit [0M171] at T3500.

Set to “1” when using Milling Unit

6 MLGU5.P [33150, 57155, 57163] at T3500.
Set to “1” when screwing 4 Spindle
7 0M11B.P Sleeve Holder [0M111] up from the
back side of the machine.

11-54
 Bit
Address Relay Function Remarks
No.
Set to “1” when using 3-Spindle
1 FDUC.P Counter Face Drilling Unit
[0M155] at T3500 for cross drilling.
Set to “1” when using Slotting Unit
3 BSLTU.P [69165, 69166] at T2300.
Set to “1” when using 4-Spindle
K23 5 0M152.P Cross Drilling Unit ER16 [0M152].
Set to “1” when using 3-Spindle
6 BDRLU.P Back Drilling Unit [0E151] at
T2100.
Set to “1” when using Slotting Unit
7 SLTU.P [54153, 54154] at T3300.
Set to “1” when using High Speed
5 FDU4H.P 3Sp. Counter Face Drilling Unit
[0M158] at T3400 for front drilling.
Set to “1” when using High Speed
K24 6 FDU5H.P 3Sp. Counter Face Drilling Unit
[0M158] at T3500 for front drilling.
Set to “1” when using High Speed
7 FDUCH.P 3Sp. Counter Face Drilling Unit
[0M158] at T3500 for cross drilling.
Set to “1” when using Coolant
0 0M461.P Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461].

Set to “1” when using 3 Spindle

1 FD3U4.P Front Drilling Unit [66151] at
T3400.
Set to “1” when using 3 Spindle
2 FD3U5.P Front Drilling Unit [66151] at
T3500.
K25 Set to “1” when using 3 Spindle
3 FD2U4.P Front Drilling Unit [54151] at
T3400.
Set to “1” when using 3 Spindle
4 FD2U5.P Front Drilling Unit [54151] at
T3500.
Set to “1” to stop the coolant
discharge and each motor for
5 A2077.P
power-driven tool when alarm No.
2077 occurs.
Set to “1” to not display the
2 OVC.P message of alarm No. 2061.
Set to “1” to not stop the coolant
K26 4 COL.P when the machine stops by the
count-up state.
Set to “1” to enable the counter by
7 SCNT.P the second M20 command or later
in SETTING mode.

11-55
 Bit
Address Relay Function Remarks
No.
Set to “1” to enable selection
0 TSF11.P (display) of T1100 tool.
Set to “1” to enable selection
1 TSF12.P (display) of T1200 tool.
K27
Set to “1” to enable selection
2 TSF13.P (display) of T1300 tool.
Set to “1” to enable selection
3 TSF14.P (display) of T1400 tool.
Set to “1” when using 2 Spindle
0 CD2U4.P Counter Face Drilling Unit [66159]
at T3400.
Set to “1” when using 2 Spindle
1 CD2U5.P Counter Face Drilling Unit [66159]
at T3500.
Set to “1” when using Front
2 FD1U4.P Drilling Unit [57151, 57157] at
K28 T3400.
Set to “1” when using Front
3 FD1U5.P Drilling Unit [57151, 57157] at
T3500.
Set to “1” when using Counter Face
4 CD1U4.P Drilling Unit [57156] at T3400.
Set to “1” when using Counter Face
5 CD1U5.P Drilling Unit [57156] at T3500.
Set to “1” to turn on the yellow
light of Beacon [0T427] during
0 PATY1.P automatic operation in SETTING
mode.
Set to “1” to turn on the yellow
1 PATY2.P light of Beacon [0T427] during one
cycle stop.
Set to “1” to turn on the yellow
K33 2 PATY3.P light of Beacon [0T427] during M01
stop.
Set to “1” to turn on the yellow
3 PATY4.P light of Beacon [0T427] during feed
hold.
Set to “1” to turn on the yellow
light of Beacon [0T427] while
4 PATY5.P waiting for bar reload on the
automatic bar feeder.

11-56
 Bit
Address Relay Function Remarks
No.
Set to “1” to make the yellow light
of Beacon [0T427] flash during
0 PATY1B.P automatic operation in SETTING
mode.
Set to “1” to make the yellow light
1 PATY2B.P of Beacon [0T427] flash during one
cycle stop.
Set to “1” to make the yellow light
K35 2 PATY3B.P of Beacon [0T427] flash during
M01 stop.
Set to “1” to make the yellow light
3 PATY4B.P of Beacon [0T427] flash during feed
hold.
Set to “1” to make the yellow light
of Beacon [0T427] flash while
4 PATY5B.P waiting for bar reload on the
automatic bar feeder.
Set to “1” to make the warning
buzzer of Beacon [0T427] sound
0 BUZ1.P
during automatic operation in
SETTING mode.
Set to “1” to make the warning
1 BUZ2.P buzzer of Beacon [0T427] sound
during one cycle stop.
Set to “1” to make the warning
K37 2 BUZ3.P buzzer of Beacon [0T427] sound
during M01 stop.
Set to “1” to make the warning
3 BUZ4.P buzzer of Beacon [0T427] sound
during feed hold.
Set to “1” to make the warning
buzzer of Beacon [0T427] sound
4 BUZ5.P
while waiting for bar reload on the
automatic bar feeder.

11-57
11-4-4 PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) Screen

Displaying the PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) Screen

(1) Press the SYSTEM key .

(2) Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
(3) Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

(4) Press the soft key until the [DATA] soft key appears.
(5) Press the [DATA] soft key.

Changing the PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) Setting Data

(1) Turn the MEMORY INPUT key switch to ON ( ).

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the OFFSET key .

(4) Press the [SETTING] soft key.

(5) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen with the PAGE keys , .
(6) Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to [PARAMETER WRITE = ].

(7) Press the [1] data key and then the INPUT key . (This makes parameter
re-writing possible.)

11-58
(8) Press the SYSTEM key .
(9) Display the PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) screen.

1. Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
2. Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

3. Press the soft key until the [KEEPRL] soft key appears.
4. Press the [KEEPRL] soft key.
(10) Set “K17-bit7” to “0”.
(11) Display the PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) screen.

1. Press the soft key until the [PMCMNT] soft key appears.
2. Press the [PMCMNT] soft key.

3. Press the soft key until the [DATA] soft key appears.
4. Press the [DATA] soft key.
(12) Display the PMC Data Table Control screen.
The data tables of “bit1” set to “1” in each parameter are write-protected, therefore set
“bit1” to “0” first then alter the data.
(13) Press the cursor keys and the PAGE keys to move the cursor to a data number to
change.
(14) Press the data keys to input a numerical value.

(15) Press the INPUT key .

(16) Press the [KEEPRL] soft key.
(17) Set the keep relay K17-bit7 to “1”.
(18) After rewriting the data of PMC PARAM (DATA), turn the MEMORY INPUT key

switch to OFF ( ). “PARAMETER WRITE =1” set in step (7) changes to “0”.

(19) Press the RESET key to cancel alarm SW0100.

11-59
MEMO

11-60
12. Inspection and Maintenance
In order to ensure long-term, efficient operation of this machine always carry out the following
maintenance and inspection regardless of whether or not trouble exists.

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting, adjusting the machine and cleaning
out the cutting chips.

This chapter explains the respective procedures of daily inspection and periodical inspection.

Designate a person as a machine supervisor, and always carry out inspection and
adjustments while under the supervisor’s control.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and/or adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.
In order to avoid accidents and work inefficiency, do not leave any tools, tool units
etc. on the machine after use. Always keep them organized.

12-1 Daily Inspection

Inspection items to be carried out daily are listed below.

Daily inspection items

Section Contents Remarks

Chip tank Removing the cutting chips Daily
Inspection and replenishment of coolant Daily
Cleaning the cutting chip filter Daily
Coolant unit Cleaning the coolant tank Min. once/week
Inspection of coolant handles and coolant
Daily
nozzles
Lubricant tank Inspection and replenishment of lubricant Daily
LCD display screen Checking alarm messages Daily
Inspection and adjustment of pneumatic
Pneumatic unit Daily
pressure

12-1
12-1-1 Removing the Cutting Chips

WARNING
Do not use air to remove cutting chips.
The chips will fly and can cause injuries.

CAUTION
Do not touch cutting chips with bare hands. This can cause injury.
When removing cutting chips, wear protective gear such as leather gloves.
Remove the accumulated chips before they exceed the height of the cutting chip
tray.

There may be times when the lid gets pushed by coolant and cutting chips, and
comes off.

Remove the cutting chips daily by following the procedure below.

12-2
(1) Turn the main power OFF ( ).
(2) Remove the cover .
(3) Remove the lid .
(4) Use a chip scraper etc. to scrape out the cutting chips accumulated in the cutting chip
tray .
(5) When chips accumulate at the bottom of the chip tank , pull out the chip tray from
the machine, and use a chip scraper to scrape out the chips through the coolant
outlet .
(6) Insert the chip tray into the machine.
(7) Mount the lid .
(8) Mount the cover .

12-3
12-1-2 Cleaning and Inspection of the Coolant Unit

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.

Coolant type
Coolant is used for cooling the cutting tool and parts during machining and for improving the
cutting finished surface by an anti-friction effect, thus prolonging the tool life.

CAUTION
Do not use a coolant that contains chlorine, as it will shorten the lifespan of the
rubber parts such as the belts and seals.

Follow the directions of the coolant manufacturer relating to quality, deterioration,

inspection intervals, replacement intervals and safe disposal of the coolant.

12-4
Inspection and replenishment of the coolant

WARNING
A shortage of the amount of coolant discharge due to insuffient coolant can
cause a fire. Be sure to replenish the coolant daily.

Replenish the coolant daily by following the procedure below.

(1) Check the amount of coolant shown on the oil gauge .

(2) Supply coolant up to the upper limit of the oil gauge .

Make sure that there is a sufficient amount of coolant before starting operation.

The capacity of the coolant tank is 180 liters.

12-5
Cleaning the cutting chip filter

Clean the cutting chip filter in the coolant tank daily by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn the main power OFF ( ).

(2) Remove the cover .
(3) Pull out the chip filter from the coolant tank to clean the chip filter.
(4) Mount the chip filter back into the coolant tank .
(5) Mount the cover .

12-6
Cleaning the coolant tank

WARNING
Chips accumulated in the coolant tank can cause shortages of coolant discharge,
coolant pump trouble etc. and can lead to a fire. In some cases, an excessive
amount of cutting chips in the coolant tank will hinder the coolant level detector
from detecting shortages of coolant.

The cutting chips (depending on their shapes) may clog the chip filter and the metal
plates. Take out the chips as necessary in order to improve the coolant flow.

12-7
Clean the coolant tank at least once a week by following the procedure below.

CAUTION
Be careful not to drop the connectors into the coolant tank .

(1) Turn the main power OFF ( ).

(2) Remove the cover .
(3) Take out the connector from the receptacle and the connector from the
receptacle .
(4) Remove the union nut and then dismount the coolant hose from the coolant
pump.
(5) Pull out the coolant tank from the machine and dismount the cutting chip filter
and the metal plates from the coolant tank.
(6) Scrape out the cutting chips accumulated at the bottom of the coolant tank .
(7) Mount the cutting chip filter and the metal plates in the coolant tank .
(8) Insert the coolant tank deep into the machine fully.
(9) Mount the union nut and connect the coolant hose to the coolant pump.
(10) Attach the connector to the receptacle and the connector to the receptacle .
(11) Mount the cover .

12-8
Inspection of the coolant handles and coolant nozzles

WARNING
Set the coolant nozzles to the machining point accurately, so that a sufficient
amount of coolant is supplied.
A fire can occur if a sufficient amount of coolant is not supplied to the machining
point.
Check that the moving parts or cutting chips (swarf) do not alter the directions of
the coolant nozzles.

Check the coolant handles and coolant nozzles daily by following the procedure below.
(1) Open the cutting room door.
(2) Set the pipe as shown in the drawing, and tighten the lever to fix the pipe .
(3) Set the five coolant nozzles for the tool post towards each machining point.
(4) Set the four coolant nozzles for back 4-spindle unit toward each machining point.
(5) Open the coolant handle fully.
(6) Close the cutting room door.

12-9
12-1-3 Inspection of the Lubricant

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.

Lubricant Type

This machine adopts an automatic centralized lubricating supply system.

Select the lubricant for this machine as shown below.

Category Sliding surface lubricant

Viscosity grade ISO VG68

STAR MICRONICS recommends using Mobil Vactra Oil No. 2SLC as the lubricant.

Do not mix and use different types of lubricant as doing so may reduce the
performance of the lubricant.
If other brands of lubricant are unavoidably used, flush the unit and replace all of the
lubricant.
Follow the directions of the lubricant manufacturer relating to quality, deterioration,
inspection intervals, replacement intervals and safe disposal of the lubricant.

12-10
Inspection and replenishment of the lubricant

CAUTION
A shortage of the lubricant can cause malfunction or failure of the unit.
Check and replenish the lubricant daily.

(1) Check if the oil level is clearly above the line EMPTY (lubricant lower limit) on the side
of the lubricant tank.
(2) If the lubricant level is below the intermediate position of the tank, replenish the
lubricant.
(3) Remove the cap .
(4) Replenish the lubricant.

The effective capacity of the lubricant tank is 1.3 liters.

(5) Mount the cap .

12-11
Manually supplying the lubricant

This machine adopts an automatic intermittent-centralized lubricating system.

If the machine has been stopped for a long time, supply the lubricant manually before
starting the operation.
(1) Remove the protection cover .
(2) Pull the instant button upwards fully and release it. The instant button moves
down little by little and supplies oil.

Do not push down the instant button .

(3) Mount the protection cover .

12-12
12-1-4 Checking Alarm Messages

Be sure to check that there is no alarm message on the screen every day before starting up the
machine.
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Check if any alarm message is displayed on the screen.
If an alarm is displayed, refer to “11. Troubleshooting” to remove the cause of the alarm
and clear the alarm message.

12-13
12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting and/or adjusting the machine.

Failure or malfunction of the pneumatic unit will occur if the pneumatic pressure is
incorrect.

Inspection of Pneumatic Pressure

Regulator (for various actuators)

The pneumatic pressure has been set to 0.5MPa before shipment. If for any reason it has
changed, follow the steps below to adjust the pressure to 0.5MPa.

Procedure of adjustment
(1) Pull the pressure adjustment handle downwards to release the lock.
(2) Turn the pressure adjustment handle to adjust. Check the pressure shown on the
pressure gauge .
(3) Push in the pressure adjustment handle to lock.

12-14
Turn the pressure adjustment handle to the right to increase the pressure,
and to the left to decrease the pressure.
It may not be possible to adjust the pressure correctly just by simply turning the
pressure adjustment handle .
Therefore, check the pressure gauge of the regulator by turnning one of the
solenoid valves ON/OFF once after adjustment is finished.
If the CE Marking specifications (Accessories in Compliance with CE Machinery
Directive) [0M902] are included, refer to “13-39 CE Marking Version (Accessories in
Compliance with CE Machinery Directive or Korean regulation: Self-Regulatory
Safety Confirmation) [0M902])”.

12-15
Pressure adjustment of sub spindle air blow

At the time of shipment, the reducing valve for pressure adjustment of sub spindle air blow
has been turned 4 and-a-half times in the open direction from its closed position.
Follow the procedure below to adjust the pressure.

Procedure of pressure adjustment

(1) Unscrew the lock nut .

(2) Turn the throttle valve to adjust the pressure.

Turn the throttle valve to the right to decrease the pressure, and to the left to
increase the pressure.

(3) Tighten the lock nut to fix the throttle valve .

12-16
Adjustment of the air purge amount

The adjustment of the air purge flow will be required according to the coolant type.
When necessary, adjust the flow as follows.
Procedure of air purge flow adjustment
(1) Loosen the lock nuts .
(2) Adjust the air purge flow by turning the throttle valves .

Turn the throttle valves to the right to decrease the flow amount, and to the left
to increase the flow amount.

(3) Tighten the lock nuts to fix the throttle valves .

12-17
<SB-16R/20R>
Specification Coolant type Nut , valve Nut , valve
** turns from Close
Water-insoluble
Rotary guide closed position
bush ** turns from Close
Water-soluble
Guide bush closed position
version ** turns from Close
Water-insoluble
Stationary closed position
guide bush ** turns from Close
Water-soluble
closed position
** turns from ** turns from
Water-insoluble
closed position closed position
Non-guide bush version
** turns from ** turns from
Water-soluble
closed position closed position

<SB-12R>
Specification Coolant type Nut , valve Nut , valve
** turns from Close
Water-insoluble
Rotary guide closed position
bush ** turns from Close
Water-soluble
Guide bush closed position
version ** turns from Close
Water-insoluble
Stationary closed position
guide bush ** turns from Close
Water-soluble
closed position
** turns from ** turns from
Water-insoluble
closed position closed position
Non-guide bush version
** turns from ** turns from
Water-soluble
closed position closed position

Even when using water insoluble coolant, set the values same as water soluble
coolant use if its viscosity grade is lower than 22mm2/s (40 C).

12-18
12-2 Periodical Inspection

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.

There are two types of periodical inspection depending on the inspection cycle: monthly
inspection and 6-month inspection.

Monthly inspection items

Section Contents
Bearing of each section Heat generated from bearings
Stationary guide bush Cleaning the parts
Revolving guide bush Cleaning the parts
Main collet Cleaning the parts
Sub collet Cleaning the parts
Checking the pressure gauge operation
Pneumatic unit
Checking for any air leakages
Checking the fan operation and cleaning the
Cooling fans and filters
filters
Power-driven tool unit Checking the gear tooth face

6-month inspection items

Section Contents
Main/sub spindle shifter Checking the shifter wear
Each belt Checking the appearance and tension
Wiring and piping Checking external hosing and damage
Various safety devices Checking the operation
Checking the cutting room door safety
Checking the operation
catcher
Checking the packing of cable entry Checking the packing
Operation check of the earth leakage
Operation check of the earth leakage breaker
breaker
Inspection of the emergency stop
Inspecting the emergency stop function
function

12-19
12-2-1 Monthly Inspection

Monthly inspection is carried out in order to foresee and detect trouble early that cannot be
found by periodical inspection alone. Arrange the date for periodical inspection once a month
and make sure that it is carried out.

Inspection of Heat Generation from Bearings

WARNING
If there is a malfunction of the bearing, the temperature of the bearing can
become abnormally high. Be careful when checking the temperature.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edge of tools during inspection.

12-20
12-21
Check if heat generation from the bearing occurs by following the procedure below.
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.
(4) Perform air cut operation for the main/sub spindles, revolving guide bush and the
power-driven tools at 3000min-1 each for 15 minutes.

(5) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(6) Check that the temperature of the sections (bearing housing sections) indicated by
arrows (in the drawing above) is “room temperature + 20°C or less” (to a degree that
they can be touched by hand for a few seconds).
If the temperature of these sections is abnormally high, the bearing needs to be
replaced.

12-22
Cleaning the guide bush

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during cleaning.

Stationary guide bush

Clean the stationary guide bush as shown in the procedure below.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(5) Take out the guide bush from the sleeve .
(6) Take out the sleeve from the guide bush body .
(7) Clean the guide bush , the sleeve and adjusting nut .
(8) Clean the inner diameter of the bush body .
(9) Mount each part as before.

Refer to section “10-2-1 Installing and Adjusting the Stationary Guide Bush” for
details.

12-23
Revolving guide bush

Clean the revolving guide bush as shown in the procedure below.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(5) Take out the guide bush from the sleeve .
(6) Clean the guide bush and adjusting nut .
(7) Clean the inside of the sleeve .
(8) Mount each part as before.

Refer to section “10-2-2 Installing and Adjusting the Revolving Guide Bush” for
details.

12-24
Cleaning the collet

WARNING

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Main collet

Clean the main collet as shown in the procedure below.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.
(4) Unclamp the main collet.

(5) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(6) Take out the spring , the sleeve and the collet from the spindle.

Refer to section “10-1 Installing and Adjusting the Main Collet” for details on removal
of the spring , the sleeve and the collet .

(7) Clean the spring , the sleeve , the collet and the cap .
(8) Clean the inner diameter of the spindle and the mounting section of the cap .
(9) Mount each part as before.

Refer to section “10-1 Installing and Adjusting the Main Collet” for details.

12-25
 Sub collet

Clean the sub collet as shown in the procedure below.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.
(4) Set the sub collet to unclamp.

(5) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(6) Take out the collet , the sleeve and the spring from the spindle.

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details on removal
of the collet , the sleeve and the spring .

(7) Clean the cap , collet , the sleeve , the spring and the cover .
(8) Clean the inner diameter of the spindle, the cap and the mounting sections of the
cover .
(9) Mount each part as before.

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.

12-26
Inspecting the Pneumatic Unit

Failure or malfunction of the pneumatic unit will occur if the pneumatic pressure is
incorrect.

Regulator (for various actuators)

The pneumatic pressure has been set to 0.5MPa before shipment. If for any reason, it has
changed, follow the steps below to adjust the pressure to 0.5MPa.

Procedure of pressure adjustment

(1) Pull the pressure adjustment handle downwards to release the lock.
(2) Turn the pressure adjustment handle to adjust. Check the pressure shown on the
pressure gauge .

Turn the pressure adjustment handle to the right to increase the pressure, and to
the left to decrease the pressure.
The pressure may not be adjusted correctly just by turning the pressure adjustment
handle . To check the pressure gauge of the regulator, turn one of the solenoid
valves ON/OFF after adjustment is finished.
If the CE Marking specifications (Accessories in Compliance with CE Machinery
Directive) [0M902] are included, refer to “13-39 CE Marking Version (Accessories in
Compliance with CE Machinery Directive or Korean regulation: Self-Regulatory
Safety Confirmation) [0M902])”.

(3) Push in the pressure adjustment handle to lock.

12-27
Checking for air leakages

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in MDI,
MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

(1) Check if air leaks from the pneumatic unit.

Inspect the pneumatic unit regularly and check whether an air leakage exists.
If there is an air leakage, check around the filter regulator, pipe joints and pneumatic
hose to locate the leakage and take the following measures.
- Pipe joints: Tighten the pipe joints securely. Replace the pipe joints if
damaged.
- Others: Replace the damaged parts.

12-28
Cleaning the filter element

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the machine is in the emergency stop state or
while the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).
Disconnect the compressed air supply source from the machine before cleaning.

Clogging in the filter element can cause failure or malfunction of the pneumatic unit.
Replace the filter element after 2 years of use, or when the pressure falls by
approximately 0.1MPa.
Use a neutral detergent when washing each part of the filter regulator.

12-29
Clean the filter element at least once a month by following the procedure below.

(1) Disconnect the compressed air supply source from the machine.
(2) Turn the main power OFF ( ).
(3) While pushing the latch of the bowl guard , rotate the bowl guard and the
bowl by 45 degrees (right or left) to remove it.
(4) Remove the baffle and filter element by rotating the baffle .

Be careful when removing the baffle because the louver will also come off
together with the baffle .

When turning the baffle , use the flathead screwdriver slot located at the bottom
part of the baffle .

(5) Clean the filter element by blowing compressed air.

If the filter element is heavily clogged, wash it with a neutral detergent.

(6) Wash the baffle and the bowl with neutral detergent.
(7) Mount the filter element onto the baffle .
(8) Mount the baffle to the body .

Tighten the baffle with a tightening torque of approx. 0.75Nm, and confirm that
the element does not spin around after tightening.
Do not over-tighten the baffle because the bowl may become damaged.

(9) Put the bowl into the bowl guard .

(10) Mount the bowl guard to the body .
Match the mating marks of the body and the bowl guard to insert the bowl
guard into the body . Rotate the bowl guard by 45 degrees (right or left) until
the latch is locked to mount the assembly . Ensure that the bowl guard is locked.
(Check that the latch is locked.)

12-30
Inspection of the cooling fans

CAUTION
Trouble with the cooling fans can cause failure or malfunction of equipment.

Follow the procedure below to check the cooling fans. Check them at least once a month.
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Put your hand close to the fans and check that air blows. Also check if
abnormal noise is generated.
(3) Turn the machine main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).

12-31
Inspecting the power-driven tool unit
Inspecting the gear tooth face

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during inspection.

The recommended grease is “Multemp LRL No3” by KYODO YUSHI CO. LTD.
Never mix the grease with different brands as this will lower its efficiency.

12-32
Check the tooth face of the power-driven tool units by following the procedure below.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(5) Remove the power-driven tool units from the main tool post and the back 4-spindle
unit.
(6) Put some grease on the tooth face of the gear of the power-driven tool unit.
(7) Install each power-driven tool unit as before.
(8) Confirm that each power-driven tool unit is installed correctly.

12-33
12-2-2 6-Month Inspection

6-month inspection is carried out to foresee and locate any problems that are hard to find just
by ordinary inspection, and also to replace consumable parts. Set the date of periodical
inspection once every 6 months in order to avoid accidents or problems.

Inspection of Wear on the Main/Sub Spindle Shifters

WARNING
Replace the shifters immediately if they have been excessively worn.
Excessive wear of the shifter can cause insufficient gripping force of the main
and sub collets, and the material may suddenly be released and fly out from the
spindle.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Follow the procedure below to check the wear of the main and sub spindle shifters.

12-34
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING while under the supervisor’s
control and open the doors of the machine body.
(5) Check if the toggles are excessively worn out.
(6) Check if the shifters are excessively worn out.

If the shaded section of the toggles are considerably worn out, they must be
replaced (see the above figure).
If the border line of the shifters (indicated by the arrow) is not visible, the
shifters must be replaced.

12-35
Inspection of the belts

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the machine is in the emergency stop state or
while the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).

CAUTION
Always carry out this work while under the supervisor’s control. Be careful of the
moving parts inside the machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during inspection.
Damage of the belt will cause damage to the machine and defective machining.
Excessively large belt tension can damage the belt, reduce the service life of the
belt and the bearing, and increase the noise.
Excessively small belt tension can damage the belt and cause the belt to slip or
jump.

Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.

Follow the procedure below to check each belt.

(1) Check the appearance of the belt in detail.

If the belt is cracked or separated, etc, it must be replaced.

Damage of the belt can cause damage to the machine and defective machining.

(2) Check the belt tension.

Press the rear surface of the belt at the center between the two pulleys, and
measure the load F when the belt is bent by the amount “d” (see figure on the next
page).
The belt tension needs to be adjusted if the load F differs from the corresponding
value in the next table by more than ±20%.

12-36
 Application Load F Bend d
Counter shaft belt (for the main spindle) 3N 5mm
Counter shaft belt (for the revolving guide bush) 2N 5mm
Sub spindle motor belt 4N 3mm

12-37
Main spindle counter shaft belt
Revolving guide bush counter shaft belt

12-38
 Main spindle counter shaft belt

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.
(4) Turn the main power OFF ( ).
(5) Open the headstock room door.
(6) Remove three screws and dismount the cover .
(7) Check the main spindle counter shaft belt .
(8) Put some grease on the gear tooth face of the main spindle counter shaft belt .
(9) Mount the cover with the three screws .

Revolving guide bush counter shaft belt

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute reference point return of all axes.
(4) Turn the main power OFF ( ).
(5) Open the cutting room door.
(6) Remove the three screws and dismount the cover .
(7) Check the revolving guide bush counter shaft belt .
(8) Apply grease to the tooth face of the revolving guide bush counter shaft belt .
(9) Mount the cover with the three screws .

STAR MICRONICS recommends using “Multemp LRL No.3” by KYODO YUSHI CO.
LTD. as the grease.
Never mix the grease with different brands as this will lower its efficiency.

12-39
Sub spindle motor belt

(1) Open the cutting room door after the machine stops by emergency stop or by turning the
main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).
(2) Loosen the two knob screws and dismount the cover .
(3) Remove the three screws and dismount the cover .
(4) Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .
(5) Check the sub spindle motor belt .
(6) Mount the cover with the two screws .
(7) Mount the cover with the three screws .
(8) Mount the cover with the two knob screws .

12-40
Inspection of wiring and piping

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the machine is in the emergency stop state or
while the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).

Check the cables and pneumatic hoses around the headstock, tool post and back attachment,
while paying attention to the following points.

Replace the cables and hoses when they become damaged.

(1) Check if any of the movable cables or hoses does not interfere with any part of the
machine structure.

Correct the wiring or piping if they interfere with the machine structure.

(2) Check that the ends of each cable and hose are securely fixed.

If any bands, screws etc. are loose, tighten them securely.

(3) Check if cutting chips have not accumulated around the cables and hoses.

Remove the cutting chips if they have accumulated around the cables or hoses.

12-41
Inspection of safety devices

WARNING
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if any malfunctions arise with the safety
devices.
Malfunction of the safety devices can cause accidents and trouble with the
machine.

Door interlock operation check

The door interlock is a device for checking if the headstock room door or/and the cutting
room door is/are open.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervision of the
machine controller. Be careful of the moving parts inside the machine.

Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in MDI,
MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

12-42
(1) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING .
(2) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(3) Open the headstock room door only, and close the cutting room door .

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

(5) Operator message 2062 displays and the buzzer will sound.
(6) Confirm that the machine enters the emergency stop state after approx. 30 seconds.
(7) Close the headstock room door .
(8) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).
(9) Turn the main power (main breaker) ON ( ).
(10)Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(11) Confirm that the headstock room door is locked and cannot be opened.
(12)Repeat steps (1) (10) above for the cutting room door and check each operation.

12-43
Operation check of the coolant level detector

The coolant level detector is for detecting shortages of coolant in the coolant tank.

WARNING
Shortage of the coolant discharge amount due to insuffient coolant can cause a
fire.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately If a malfunction arises with any of the
safety devices.

Refer to section “12-1-2 Cleaning and Inspection of the Coolant Unit” for the location
of the coolant tank.

Check the operation of the coolant level detector by following the procedure below.

(1) Check that the required amount of coolant is in the coolant tank.
(2) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(3) Move the float of the level switch down to the lower limit position by hand.
(4) Check that alarm No. 2071 appears on the screen.
(5) Check that the float of the level switch has moved up to the upper limit position .

(6) Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

12-44
Operation check of Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]

The coolant flow detector is for detecting shortages of the coolant discharge amount.

WARNING
Shortage of the coolant discharge amount can cause a fire.

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the control of the
machine supervisor. Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if a malfunction arises with any of the
safety devices.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in MDI,
memory or macro mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

Refer to section “13-13 Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]” for details.

12-45
(1) Check that the required amount of coolant is in the coolant tank.
(2) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(3) Whilst under the machine supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch

to SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(4) Open the coolant handle fully. Adjust the direction of the coolant nozzle beforehand
to prevent the coolant from flying out of the machine.
(5) Close the cutting room door.

(6) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(7) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH1.

(9) Press the MDI key to light up the lamp.

(10)Press the PROGRAM key .

(11) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key to display the PROGRAM (MDI) screen.
(12)Command Coolant 1 ON (PATH1: M25).
(13)Confirm that the coolant is being discharged.
(14)Open the cutting room door.
(15)Gradually turn the coolant handle in the close direction.
(16)Confirm that alarm No. 1017 is displayed on the screen as soon as the coolant
discharge amount becomes small (when it misses the cutting point).
(17)Open the coolant handle fully.

(18)Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

12-46
 Operation check of the lubricant level detector

The lubricant level detector is for detecting shortages of lubricant in the lubricant tank.

CAUTION
Shortage of the lubricant will cause failure or malfunction of equipment.
Make sure that dust does not enter the lubricant tank.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if a malfunction arises with any of the
safety devices.

This unit is for detecting the shortage of the lubricant in the lubricant tank.

Follow the procedure below to check the operation of the lubricant level detector.
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) While holding the lubricant tank not to dropping it, remove the four screws
and slowly lower the lubricant tank .
(3) Move down the float of the level switch manually to the lower limit position.
(4) Close the doors of the machine body.

(5) Press the MDI key to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the PROGRAM key .

(7) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(8) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(9) Press the CHANGE key to select the PATH1.

12-47
(10)Command one cycle stop (M20) on PATH1.
(11) Check that alarm No. 2073 is displayed on the screen.
(12)Mount the lubricant tank with the four screws .

(13)Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

12-48
Operation check of the broken cut-off tool detector

CAUTION

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if a malfunction arises with any of the
safety devices.

(1) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).

(2) Remove the tool from T100 tool position.
(3) Set the coolant nozzles toward the guide bush to prevent a collision between the
coolant nozzles and the broken cut-off tool detector.
(4) Turn the main power (main breaker) ON ( ).
(5) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(6) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(7) Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(8) Press the MAIN COLLET key to turn off the lamp and unclamp the collet.
Insert a bar into the guide bush and make it project out 20mm from the end face of the
guide bush.

(9) Press the MAIN COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the collet.

(10)Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp, and press the PROGRAM

key to display the PROGRAM (MDI) screen.

(11) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(12)Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(13) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(14)Input and execute the following program.
T100 ;
G0 X–2.0 ;
M27 ;
(15)If alarm No. 1006 CUT-OFF TOOL BROKEN is displayed after the operation of broken
cut-off tool detection is completed, the detection is considered to be finished normally.

12-49
Operation check of the parts ejection detector

Check the operation of the parts ejection detector.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if a malfunction arises with any of the
safety devices.

Refer to section “10-5-1 Parts Ejection Detector” for details.

12-50
Checking the cutting room door safety catcher

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the main breaker is OFF ( ).

The doors of the machine body are controlled by the safety catcher system to prevent
it from falling down naturally. Follow the procedure below to check the function of this
system.

(1) While the main breaker is turned off ( ), open the headstock room door to any
angle.
(2) Let go of the door at an inclined angle.
(3) Check that the cutting room door remains stationary at 45 , or opens even more
(rises upwards).
(4) Repeat steps (1) (3) above for the cutting room door and check each operation.

Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if any malfunctions arise with the doors of
the machine body.

12-51
Checking the packing of the cable entry

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).

Checking of the packing of the cable entry in the cabinet

(1) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).

(2) Dismount the cabinet cover.
(3) Check the packing of the cable entry on the cabinet.
(4) If they have been damaged heavily, replace them with new ones. (*1)
(*1) EDP code of the packing
Packing to replace EDP code H×D×W
Left side of front cabinet (for upper, lower) 86500717 25×30×225
Note) In the case of replacing both upper and lower, two packings are necessary.
(5) Mount the cabinet cover.

Replacement of the packing

(1) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).

(2) Dismount the cabinet cover.
(3) Remove the clasp with the packing.
(4) Remove the packing from the clasp.
(5) Clean the clasp at the adhering surface for the packing.
(6) Stick the new packing onto the clasp with two-sided tape.
(7) Return the clasp to its original position.

When putting the clasp back into the original position, make the packing and the
cables coherent to each other to prevent oil and mist from seeping in.

(8) Mount the cabinet cover.

12-52
Operation check of the leakage breaker

WARNING
High voltage currents flow inside the cabinet and operation panel.
Receiving an electric shock will result in serious injury or death.
Only the machine supervisor is permitted to carry out this work.
Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ) before removing the cabinet cover.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if a problem arises with the any of the
safety devices.

How to carry out the operation check of the earth leakage

breaker
(1) Turn the breaker handle to turn OFF ( ) the main
power (main breaker).
(2) Remove the eight screws and dismount the cover .
(3) Turn the latch clockwise by hand to turn the main
breaker ON ( ).
(4) Use a flat head screwdriver etc. to press the test
button (gray) .
(5) Confirm that the earth leakage breaker trips.
The leakage display button (yellow) pops out and
the handle moves to the middle trip position.
(6) Turn the latch counter-clockwise. The handle moves
downwards from the middle trip position to the off
position ( ). The leakage display button (yellow)
that popped-out, returns to its original position.
(7) Mount the cover with the eight screws .
(8) Turn the breaker handle to turn ON ( ) the main
power (main breaker).

12-53
Inspection of the emergency stop function

WARNING
Inform STAR MICRONICS immediately if a malfunction arises with the
emergency stop function.
A malfunction of the emergency stop function will cause accidents and/or
problems with the machine.

This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to carry out an operation check once
every 6 months.
Contact STAR MICRONICS immediately if a problem arises with the any of the
safety devices.

How to inspect the emergency stop function

(1) Turn the main power (main breaker) ON ( ).

(2) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

Confirm that all motors are not moving.

Confirm that the start lamp has gone out.
Confirm that the machine ready lamp has lit up.

(3) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the operation panel.

Confirm that the machine ready lamp has gone out.

Confirm that alarm No. 1000 is displayed.

(4) Turn the knob of the EMERGENCY STOP button clockwise to cancel the
emergency stop.
(5) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).
(6) Turn the main power (main breaker) ON ( ).
(7) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

Confirm that the machine ready lamp has lit up.

Inform STAR MICRONICS if the machine ready lamp does not light up and the
machine does not start up normally.

12-54
12-2-3 How to Replace the Battery

Replacement of the CNC memory backup battery

When the voltage of the CNC memory backup battery is low, alarm No. 2081 will be
displayed on the screen.
Replace the CNC memory backup battery in such a case.

WARNING
Always carry out steps (2) (7) while the main breaker is OFF ( ).
Replace the lithium battery correctly. Otherwise, it may cause an explosion.
Do not replace with other than the designated lithium battery [86509092].

CAUTION
Always carry out this work while under the supervisor’s control.

Do not drop the CNC unit, or use force when taking it out.
Complete the replacement steps (5) and (6) within 30 minutes.
If steps (5) and (6) are not completed within 30 minutes, memory in the CNC unit
may be lost. If memory in the CNC is lost, the RAM PARITY system alarm will be
activated even when the main power (main breaker) is turned ON ( ).
The CNC cannot be used at this time. Contact STAR MICRONICS in such a case.

The machine can be operated even while this alarm is displayed.

Please order replacement batteries from STAR MICRONICS.
The EDP code of the battery is “86509092”.

12-55
Follow the procedure below to replace the CNC memory backup battery.

(1) Maintain the main power (main breaker) ON ( ) status for more than 30 seconds.
(2) Turn the main power (main breaker) OFF ( ).
(3) Prepare a new battery unit at hand.
(4) Remove the twelve screws and dismount the back cover of the operation panel.

12-56
(5) Pull out the battery unit located at the upper-right section of the rear side of the
CNC unit.
(While holding on to the latch of the battery unit , release the claw into the case and
pull out the battery unit .)

(6) Install the new battery unit.

(Push in the battery case until the claw is latched in the case, and check that the latch
is engaged securely.)

(7) Mount the back cover of the operation panel with the twelve screws .

12-57
Replacement of the absolute pulse coder backup battery

When the voltage of the absolute pulse coder backup battery becomes low, alarm No. 2094
will be displayed on the screen.
Replace the absolute pulse coder backup battery in such a case.

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the main power (main breaker) is turned ON ( )
and keep the cabinet cover at the rear side of the machine open.
Always carry out this work while under the supervisor’s control, and avoid
receiving an electric shock.

The alarm number varies depending on the remaining voltage of the batteries.
However, replace the batteries immediately regardless of the alarm number.
If one of the batteries is removed while the main power (main breaker) is OFF
( ), the absolute position data of the machine will be lost. If this occurs, adjustment
of the machine reference point must be carried out again. Contact STAR
MICRONICS if this occurs.
If one of these alarms is activated, keep the main power ON.
Then, replace the batteries within a week of the alarm activating.
If they are not replaced within a week, the absolute position data of the machine will
be lost. In such a case, adjustment of the reference point must be carried out again.
Contact STAR MICRONICS if this occurs.
Prepare 4 alkali D cell batteries for replacement.
Replace all 4 batteries at a time.
Check that the polarity of the batteries is correct during replacement.

12-58
Follow the procedure below to replace the absolute pulse coder backup battery.

(1) Turn the main power (main breaker) ON ( ).

(2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the operation panel.

The machine will enter the emergency stop state.
(3) Prepare new batteries at hand.
(4) Loosen the five screws and dismount the cabinet cover .
(5) Loosen the screws of the battery case on the top-center of the cabinet.
(6) Dismount the cover .
(7) Replace the batteries with the new ones.
(8) Mount the cover with the screws .
(9) Mount the cabinet cover with the five screws .

12-59
MEMO

12-60
13. Specifications and Handling of Optional Accessories

This chapter explains the specifications and handling of optional accessories that can be
installed onto/into this machine. When installing the optional accessories, be sure to read and
thoroughly understand the relevant items in this chapter before operation.
This chapter has been prepared in a format to supplement this operation manual of the main
machine. Thus, refer to the other relevant chapters in this manual for items not mentioned in
this chapter.
If the details in this chapter and the other chapters are duplicated, give priority to the details in
this chapter.

13-1
13-1 Barstock Gripping Unit [57418]

Summary

This unit is to be installed onto a tool installation position of the tool holder.
It grips the bar to prevent it from moving in the longitudinal direction (Z-axis direction) while
the main collet is unclamped. This is used when the sub spindle cannot clamp the workpiece
at the time of re-clamping.

A tool cannot be installed in the same position where this unit is installed.
Use this unit with Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475] when the whole part
length is over 80mm.
This unit cannot be used for Non-guide bush version.

For details on the program example, please refer to section “8-14-27 Re-clamp
Machining 2) When a workpiece is re-clamped with the bar stock gripping unit
[57418].”

Specifications

Applicable outer diameter of bar ······· 6mm 23mm

Gripping load ································· 137N
Installing position ·························· T200 T600 (T700)

Installation

For details on installation, refer to section “10-4-1 Installing and Adjusting the Tools,
Installing the tools”.

Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing :

SB-12R 1.0mm, SB16R/20R 2.0mm

1L0-13-01A

13-2
When installing onto the 12mm tool holder, install the 2mm spacer included with this
unit onto the top side of this unit (refer to the above figure).

13-3
13-2 Main Spindle Inner Tube [1L445] <Exclusive for SB-12R>
[0M446] <Exclusive for SB-16R/20R>

Summary

This inner tube is to be installed inside the main spindle in order to restrain vibration of bars
with small diameters.
By using this with Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube [0M463] and supplying coolant into
the inner tube, the vibration control can be improved.

When the roller steady rest of the bar feeder cannot restrain vibration of the bar at
machining a profile bar stock, it is recommended to use this specification with
Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube [0M463].
Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube [0M463] is used with the standard coolant
unit. Therefore Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] and Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] is
not required.

Specification

[1L445] <Exclusive for SB-12R> version

Outer diameter of tube Inner diameter of tube
14 mm 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

[0M446] <Exclusive for SB-16R/20R> version

Outer diameter of tube Inner diameter of tube
15 mm 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
22 mm 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18

Choose an inner tube with an inner diameter that is approximately 1 2 mm bigger

than the bar material diameter.
Diameters of the push rod and the finger chuck should be the same as or smaller
than the bar diameter.

13-4
Installation

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the machine is in the emergency stop state or
while the main breaker is OFF ( ).

Execute the reference point return of the Z1-axis before starting this work.

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the Z1-axis reference point return.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING mode while under the
supervisor’s control and open the headstock room door.
(5) Insert the guide tube into the sleeve so that the guide tube fits to the tapered
portion of the mouth of the sleeve .
(6) Insert the sleeve with the guide tube into the holder on the back of the
headstock, and tighten the two screws to fix the guide tube firmly.
At this time, make sure that the splits of the sleeve are set in the directions as
shown in the drawing, and the oil outlet of the guide tube is set in the direction as
shown in the drawing. Also, position the sleeve so that the two screws hold the
stepped section of the outer diameter of the sleeve .
(7) After the work is completed, close the doors of the machine body.

(8) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to MACHINING .

13-5
13-3 Parts Receptacle [68424]

Summary

This unit consists of a container and a base which stores parts that are ejected out of the
machine by Parts Conveyor [0M412]. It is designed to fit with other general-purpose
containers available in the market.

Specifications
Container size ································ 362mm 230mm 110mm (W D H)

Handling

The height dimension A of container can be changed to 7 different heights.

Set the 2nd height from the bottom “A=817mm” when using the container .
Follow the steps below to change the height.
(1) Remove the four screws .
(2) Match screw holes of base and the leg of the rack to adjust the height of the leg
as desired.
(3) Fix the base and the leg of the rack with the four screws .

Always use this unit with Parts Conveyor [0M412].

13-6
13-4 Transformer [0G492]

Summary

This unit transforms the overseas commercial power supply voltage (380Vac, 400Vac and
420Vac) into the input voltage for this machine (200Vac).

This unit does not comply with CE Machinery Directive.

Please use Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497] if the machine is to be used in
any of the EU member countries.

Specifications
Power supply ································· 12KVA
Input ············································ 3 phase 380Vac
············································· 3 phase 400Vac Selectable
············································· 3 phase 420Vac
Output ·········································· 3 phase 200Vac

13-7
13-5 Beacon [0T427]

Summary

This warning light is to be installed onto the machine to inform the operator of operation
conditions.

Specification

Lighting type ······················ LED, lighting (at shipping) / flashing

Color ································· Red, yellow and green
Warning buzzer ··················· Continuous sound (at shipping) / Intermittent sound

The continuous/intermittent buzzer types can be switched by changing the cable

connection.

13-8
Lighting Conditions
(I) Red light
The red light turns on when any alarm except for the following alarms is displayed on
the screen.
Alarms which are displayed under "yellow" lighting conditions (II)
When alarm No. 2081 etc. is displayed
The light turns off when the operator message disappears.

(II) Yellow light

The yellow light turns on when one of the following alarms is displayed on the screen.
Alarm Nos. 2070, 2075, 2085, 2086
The light turns off when the operator message disappears.

In addition, by setting the keep relay, it is possible to make the yellow light turns on or
flashes, and to make the buzzer sound in the following conditions. (However, this
function is valid only when the lighting type is “lighting.”)
During automatic operation in SETTING mode
During one cycle stop
During M1 stop
During feed hold
During waiting for material reload on the automatic bar feeder

Refer to the section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) screen” for details on the
keep relay setting.

(III) Green light

The green light turns on during automatic operation (including bar replacement of the
automatic bar feeder).

Installation

WARNING
Always carry out wiring while the machine is in the emergency stop state or while
the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).

To make the beacon flash, remove wire COMD (CONT LED) from B21 of the
terminal block XT753, and connect wire COMD (SNATCH LED) to B21.
To select the intermittent buzzer sound, remove wire Y17 (CONT BEEP) from B20
of terminal block XT753, and connect wire Y17 (SNATCH BEEP) to B20.
To make the buzzer invalid, set the keep relay: K06-bit2 to “0”.

Refer to the ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM for details on wiring.

13-9
13-6 Cable for Transformer CE Marking Version [0T488]

Summary

This specification is the cable for connecting Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497] and
the machine body.
Be sure to install this specification when the machine is used in any of the EU member
countries.

Always use this specification together with CE Marking Version [0M902], Coolant
Flow Detector [0M459] and Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497].

For details on the connection between Transformer CE Marking Version and the
machine body, refer to section “5-2-2 When Transformer CE Marking Version
[0T497] is Selected” of the Installation Manual.

13-10
13-7 Transformer CE Marking Version [0T497]

Summary

This unit transforms the commercial power supply voltage used in EU member countries
(380Vac, 400Vac and 415Vac) into the input voltage for this machine (200Vac).

Always use this specification together with Coolant Flow Detector [0M459], Cable for
Transfer CE Marking Version [0T488] and CE Marking Version [0M902].

This unit complies with CE Machinery Directive.

This unit has two lines of terminals for the power supply of peripheral devices (230
Vac) such as the bar feeder etc.

Specifications
Power supply ································· 12kVA
Input ············································ 3 phase 380Vac
············································· 3 phase 400Vac Selectable
············································· 3 phase 415Vac
Output ·········································· 3 phase 200Vac (For machine body: 1 line)
3 phase 230Vac (For peripheral devices: 2 lines)

13-11
13-8 Parts Separator Type A [0H414]
Summary
This unit collects parts that are unable to be picked up by the sub collet. This unit is to be
attached to the back attachment. It picks up the parts and ejects them into Parts Receptacle
in Machine [0M425] or onto Parts Conveyor [0M412].

The sub spindle cannot be used when this unit is used.

When this unit is installed, the tool holder on back 4-spindle unit must be removed.
When this unit is used, the sleeve projection amount from the 4-spindle sleeve
holder of the tool holder to the side of the sub spindle becomes restricted.

When using this unit, please provide a collet with an inner diameter of 10mm
separately.

Specification
Minimum picked-up part diameter ··················· 2.5mm
Maximum picked-up part diameter ··················· 23mm
Maximum picked-up part length······················· 45 mm
Applicable inner diameter of collet chuck ··········· 10mm

Setting
When installing this unit, set “USE PARTS SEPARATOR A” on the KEEP RELAY
(conversational setting) screen to “YES”, or set the keep relay “K09-bit1” to “1”.
If this keep relay is set, program operation and MDI command on PATH2 will be invalid.

Command (PATH1)

M117 A__ B__ F__ ; : Parts separator type A pick up

M118 ; : Parts separator type A ejection

A: Advance amount at rapid feed, B: Advance amount at cutting feed, F: Cutting feed rate
E. g.) Moving to 100.0 position in rapid traverse, moving to 163.0 position in cutting feed with
feed rate of 2000mm/min. (feed per minute)
M117 A100.0 B163.0 F2000.0

Argument A, B and F cannot be omitted.

Set argument A and B with the Z2-axis absolute coordinate.
A value greater than 165.0 cannot be set for argument A and B.
When the main power is turned ON, the sub spindle rotates a few times with the
initially commanded M117 in order to check the position, then will perform
positioning. Therefore pay attention to the operation.

If the SUB SPINDLE key is turned OFF or an alarm occurs, the holding power
of the sub spindle will be lost.
If no program is registered in the PATH2 memory of the machine, M117/M118
commands cannot be executed. When commanding M117 and /or M118, register at
least one program in the PATH2 memory of the machine beforehand.

13-12
The M codes above (Parts separator A pick-up/ejection) cannot be instructed with
MDI.
The M codes above (Parts separator A pick-up/ejection) cannot be instructed in the
program on PATH2.
M117 command is completed when the Z2-axis advances to the pick-up position.
M118 command is completed when the Z2-axis retracts in step (1).
Dimension J in the following relational dimension drawing:
SB-12R 1.0mm, SB16R/20R 2.0mm

13-13
Installation

Be sure to follow the steps below to install the chute after selecting T100.
Never allow the receptacle to touch the guide bush, the chute nor the coolant
nozzles . The receptacle may become deformed if they touch.

Follow the steps below to install Parts Separator Type A.

(1) Close the doors of the machine body.
(2) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(3) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING , and open the cutting room
door while under the supervisor’s control.
(4) Dismount the chute for the standard parts separator and mount the chute for Parts
Separator Type A.
(5) Install the collet with a 10mm inner diameter into the sub collet. At this time,
adjust the gripping force of the sub collet in order to make the receptacle fit the collet.

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details on installing
the sub collet.

(6) Set “USE PARTS SEPARATOR A” on the KEEP RELAY conversational setting screen
to “YES”.
(7) Set the keep relay “K09-bit5= 1”.

The keep relay “K09-bit5” can be instructed on PATH2. Be sure to set “K09-bit5= 0”
after completing installation and adjustment of the parts separator type A.

Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details on keep
relay re-writing.

(8) Close the cutting room door.

(9) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(10)Command T100 selection on PATH1.

(11) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH2.

(12)Command the sub collet unclamp (PATH2: M11).
(13)Command the sub spindle 0 indexing (PATH2: M8 ; G0 C0 ;).
(14)Open the cutting room door.
(15)Mount the receptacle horizontally to the tip of the sub spindle, as shown in the
following drawing.

13-14
 Install the receptacle while pushing it to the side of the sub spindle.

(16)Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(17)Press the SUB COLLET key to light up the lamp and clamp the collet.
(18)Close the cutting room door.

(19)Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(20)Move the Z2-axis forwards, to make it approach the Z2-axis pick-up position (PATH2:
G0 Z156.0).
(21)Open the cutting room door.

(22)Press the HANDLE key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(23)Move the Z2-axis forward a little more and move the receptacle slowly to the pick-up
position.
(24)Decide the picking-up position while looking at the ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)
screen, and then set the decided Z2-axis value to the argument B of M117 command in
the program.
(25)Close the cutting room door.
(26)Execute the reference point return of the Z2-axis.
(27)Set the keep relay back to “K09-bit5= 0”.

Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details on keep
relay rewriting.

13-15
Attaching / detaching the plastic plate

Attach/detach the plastic plate , attached to the inside of the chute, in accordance with the
shape of the parts. While referring to the figure below, attach the two screws , two
washers , two washers , and the two nuts .

13-16
Program example

(PATH1)
O1234 ;
:
:
:
T100 M3 S2000 ;
G0 X21.0 Z***.* T1 ;
M117 A100.0 B163.0 F2000.0 ; ............ Parts separator type A, part pick-up
G1 X 2.0 F0.03;
M118 ;··········································· Parts separator type A, part ejection
:
:
:
M99 ;

Values in the program vary according to machining conditions.

Alarm
When operation or program error occurs in the related area of this unit, the following alarm
messages will be displayed on the screen. In this case, the machine enters the feed hold state,
and the main/sub spindle motor, power-driven tool motor and coolant motor will stop.

ALARM No. 1141

When a tool other than T100 is selected, Parts separator type A pick-up (M117) cannot be
commanded.
When a tool other than T100 is selected, Z2-axis movement cannot be performed with
HANDLE feed.
When T2100~T2900 is selected, Z2-axis movement cannot be commanded.

ALARM No. 1162

X2-axis movement is commanded when the Z2-axis advances more than 0.1mm.

ALARM No.3611
A tool other than T100 is selected, when the Z2-axis advances 0.1mm or more.

13-17
13-9 Parts Conveyor [0M412]

Summary

This unit is used to eject the parts picked-up by the sub collet or Parts Separator Type A
[0H414] to the outside of the machine.

Specifications

Applicable part diameter ·············· 1mm~ 23mm

Applicable part length ·················· 1mm~80mm
Belt width ·································· 58.7mm
Belt speed ·································· 4m/min(50Hz), 5m/min(60Hz)
Drive motor ································ 25W

Some parts may not be ejected by this unit depending on their contour.
This unit cannot be used with Parts Receptacle in Machine [0M425].

Command

At normal times, execute the following commands to operate this unit independently.
Parts conveyor ON···················· PATH1 / 2: M84
The conveyor will stop in 8 seconds (approx.) after commanding M84.
It is possible to change the operation time of the parts conveyor.
Parts conveyor OFF ·················· PATH1 / 2: M85

How to change the timer setting

The conveyor-operating time is determined by timer No. 6. To change the operation time,
display the PARAMETER (TIMER) screen, move the cursor to the No.6 position and
change the value.
However, a 48ms unit is applied to timer No. 6. When the input value cannot be divided by
48ms, it automatically inputs the closest value.

CAUTION
Changing the timer setting, with the exception of timer No. 6 may cause a
malfunction. If changing other timer settings, please contact STAR MICRONICS.

For details on rewriting the timer, refer to section “11-4-2 PMC PARAM (TIMER)
Screen”.

13-18
Replacing the conveyor belt

The conveyor belt is consumable. Follow the steps below to replace the belt.

WARNING
Always carry out this work while the machine is in the emergency stop state or
while the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during this work.

13-19
(1) Open the cutting room door in the emergency stop status or with the main power
(main breaker) OFF ( ).
(2) Remove the two screws and dismount the chute .
(3) Remove the cover .
(4) Remove the two screws and dismount the plate .
(5) Remove the three screws and detach the connector from the receptacle.
(6) Remove the two nuts and dismount the metal fixture .
(7) Remove the four screws and pull out the parts conveyor from machine body.
(8) Remove the four screws and dismount the chute .
(9) Insert a Phillips screwdriver into the long hole of the parts conveyor, and then fix it
to the notch .
(10)Loosen the two screws . At this time, metal fixture will move to the drive motor
direction by its spring power force. Hold the both ends of the Phillips screwdriver and
remove it from the notch so that the metal fixture will move in the drive motor
direction slowly.
(11) Remove the Phillips screwdriver from long hole
(12)Remove the screw (1 pc), screws (4 pcs) and a stop ring to remove the plate .
(13) Replace the conveyor belt .
(14)Install the plate with the four screws and install the stop ring .
(15)Fix it with the two screws lightly.
(16) Insert the Phillips screwdriver into the long hole of the parts conveyor. Hold both
ends of it, and push the metal fixture to the shaft (with stop ring) , and then fix
the Phillips screwdriver at the notch .
(17)Tighten the two screws to fix the metal fixture .
(18)Install the chute with the four screws .

There should be a gap of 0.5mm or less between the chute and the belt so that they
do not touch each other.
Depending on the part size, the gap can be adjusted by up to 4mm to decrease the
outflow of coolant from the conveyor.

(19)Install the parts conveyor into the machine body and fix them with the four screws .
(20)Attach the fixture with two nuts .
(21)Attach the connector to the receptacle, and fix the cable to the machine body with
the three screws .
(22) Attach the plate with the two screws .
(23) Mount the cover .
(24)Mount the chute with the two screws .

Clean the conveyor belt and the pan daily before operation, as cutting chips
may clog the conveyor belt and/or accumulate in the pan depending on the
conditions of use.

13-20
13-10 Parts Receptacle in Machine [0M425]

Summary

This unit is used to store machined parts which are picked-up by the sub collet or Parts
Separator Type A [0H414] inside the machine.

This unit cannot be used with Parts Conveyor [0M412].

Specifications

Container dimensions ······· 280 mm 95 mm 150mm (W D H)

13-21
13-11 Steady Rest Unit Cover [0M447]

Summary

This cover is used to avoid exposing the moving part outside the machine when the steady
rest unit of the automatic bar feeder is used.

To comply with CE Machinery Directive, it is necessary to use this cover together

when the steady rest unit of the automatic bar feeder is used.

13-22
13-12 Drive Unit for Power-driven Tool Type B [0M457]

Summary

This unit uses a rotary drive system to rotate the back machining tools installed onto the
back 4-spindle unit.

The following machining capabilities apply to SUS303 material (AISI 303, DIN
X10CrNis189).
The machining capabilities may differ from the listed data depending on the
machining conditions, and the material and tools used.
Power-driven tool units for the back 4-spindle unit are not included with this unit.
Power-driven tool units are options.

Specification

Number of tools ···································· Max. 4 tools

Spindle speed······································· Max. 8000min 1
Speed control ······································· 4-digit direct S command
Rotation control ··································· AC servo drive
Motor·················································· 0.75kW
Applicable tool holder···························· Refer to ”Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders”
Maximum drilling capability ·················· 6mm
Maximum tapping capability ················· M5×P0.8

13-23
13-13 Coolant Flow Detector [0M459]

WARNING
Insufficient supply of coolant to the machining point can cause a fire.

Summary
This is a safety device that monitors the flow amount of coolant discharge, and displays an
alarm when the coolant discharge becomes insufficient.

There are occasions when the sensor may not function properly if coolant containing
a large number of bubbles is used.
This is a safety device. Therefore, be sure to check the operation of this unit once
every 6 months.
In order to operate this unit correctly, it is necessary to re-set the coolant flow
sensor after adjusting the coolant handles, replacing the coolant, changing the
direction of the coolant nozzles or any other work that may alter the coolant
discharge amount.

When the AIR CUT key is flashing, the coolant flow will not be monitored even
while coolant is being discharged.

For details on the operation check, refer to section “12-2-2 6-Month Inspection,
Inspection of Safety Devices”.
In the case of installing the CE Marking Version (Accessories in Compliance with CE
Machinery Directive), please refer to section “13-39 CE Marking Version (Accessories
in Compliance with CE Machinery Directive or Korean regulation: Self-Regulatory
Safety Confirmation) [0M902]”.

13-24
Setting
To use this device, set the DIP switch SA770 (4) on P.C.B (A701) in the cabinet to OFF ( ).

Handling
Adjustment

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before starting machine operation.
The coolant flow rate varies depending on the type of coolant and the
environment of the machine installation site (temperature) etc.
Be sure to set and check the max. and min. flow rates of the flow sensor and the
switch point of the sensor.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during inspection or
adjustment.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Be sure to close the doors before executing reference point return, operations in
MDI, MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.
The setting values in the following explanation are reference examples.
Please carry out initialization beforehand when resetting the sensor.
Press the ・ button of the flow sensor with a finger.

[Flow sensor ]

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Loosen the two screws and remove the screw at the right side after sliding the
cover to the left. Then rotate the cover 2 turns so that the flow sensor can be
seen.

13-25
(3) Remove the plastic cover of the flow sensor .
(4) Open the cutting room door and set the coolant nozzles to the machining point.

Make sure that the coolant does not get sprayed to the outside of the machine when
setting the coolant nozzles.

(5) Open the coolant handle fully then close the cutting room door.
(6) Turn the COOLANT1 key ON ( ).

(7) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(8) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(9) Press the PROGRAM key .

(10)Execute M25 Coolant 1 ON.
(11) Set the maximum flow rate within 20 seconds from the time of executing M25.
I. Press and hold down the button of the flow sensor .
II. LED 9 lights up and will flash after 2 seconds.
III. When LED 9 flashes, release the button.
IV. Confirm that the green LEDs light up until number 9.

If the green LEDs do not light up until No. 9, please repeat the procedure from ( ) of
step (11).
When the coolant flow rate is too fast, LED 9 will flash but it will not be an error.

(12)Lower the switching point.

I. Press the button once (the lit up orange LED will change to flashing red).
II. Within 2 seconds, press the button a few times until LED 0 changes to
flashing red.
III. LED 0 changes from flashing red to lighting orange when the button is
released.
(13)Set the minimum flow rate.

Always carry out the minimum flow rate setting after the maximum flow rate setting.

If a button is not pressed for 2 seconds, it will return to the operation mode as a new
setting.

I. Open the cutting room door. Light up the green LEDs at number “6” by closing
the coolant handle.

13-26
 The green LEDs lit up at “6” is a reference.
This can differ depending on the conditions, so adjust the setting as necessary.

II. Wait until the coolant discharge becomes stable.

III. Press and hold down the button of the flow sensor .
IV. LED 0 lights up and will flash after 5 seconds.
V. When LED 0 flashes, release the button.
(14)The coolant flow alarm (No. 1017) will be displayed.
(15)Open the coolant handle fully and close the cutting room door.

(16)Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

(17)Press the PROGRAM key .

(18)Execute M25 Coolant 1 ON.
(19)Confirm that the green LEDs light up until number 9.

If the green LEDs do not light up until No. 9, please carry out initialization of the
sensor, then start from the beginning to correct the setting.

(20)Set the detection point.

I. Press the button once (the lit up orange LED display will change to flashing
red).
II. Within 2 seconds, press the button a few times until LED 0 flashes red.
III. LED 0 changes from flashing red to lighting orange when the button is
released.
IV. Turn the coolant handle in the close direction until the coolant lowers from the
machining point.
V. Wait until the coolant discharge becomes stable.
VI. Press the button once.
VII. Press the button again within 2 seconds, and keep it pressed until one scale
bigger than the maximum value of the green LED flashes red. If the maximum
value of the green LED is flashing, keep the button pressed until the flashing
green LED changes to flashing red.
VIII. The LED changes from flashing red to lighting orange when the button is
released.

If a button is not pressed for 2 seconds, it will return to the operation mode as a new
setting.

(21)The coolant flow alarm (No. 1017) will be displayed.

(22) Open the cutting room door, open the coolant handle fully then close the cutting room
door.

13-27
 (23)Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm.

(24)Press the PROGRAM key .

(25)Execute M25 Coolant 1 ON.
(26)Attach the plastic cover of the flow sensor .
(27)Put the cover back and fix it with the two screws .

About the flow setting

Detection point setting : Setting of step (21)

: Switch point

As the range of valid flow of the initial setting is only from LED 7 to LED 9, setting of the
switch point is difficult, therefore switch point setting is carried out to widen the adjustment
range.
Using the switch point setting, widen the adjustment range by changing the minimum flow
setting to LED 6 of the initial value. This makes the switch point setting easier.

To make this setting more sensitive, use the detection point setting to make the minimum
flow setting a value bigger than LED 6.
Conversely, to make this setting less sensitive, use the detection point setting to make the
minimum flow setting a value smaller than LED 6.

Alarm

No. 1017 COOLANT FLOW ALARM

The coolant flow is lower than the preset value.

Initialization of the flow sensor

Follow the procedure below to carry out initialization of the sensor.

(1) Press and hold the button of the flow sensor for approximately 15 seconds.
LED 9 will light up, and then flash after 5 seconds.
(2) In 15 seconds, when LEDs 0~9 flash orange, release the button.
All settings will change to the values at the time of shipping. (Switch point: LED 7)

13-28
13-14 Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431], Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa [0M462]
Coolant Valve 2.5MPa [0M493], Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488]
Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489]

Summary

Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] can supply coolant at a maximum pressure of 2.5MPa.
This is effective in removing tangled cutting chips from the machining point during machining.
Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa [0M462], Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488] and Coolant Unit
Power Cable [0M489] include the necessary wires and piping for connecting Coolant Unit
2.5MPa [0T431] to the machine body.
Coolant Valve 2.5MPa [0M493] can be used to increase the number of coolant discharge lines
from 3 (standard version) to 4. (Maximum coolant pressure: 2.5MPa)

Device list:
Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461]
Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466]
Coolant Piping for Back 4-spindle Unit [0M467]
Coolant Piping for Guide Bush [0M468]
Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469]
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]
Coolant Piping for Thread Whirling [0M495]

Be sure to use this unit with Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa [0M462], Coolant Unit
Signal Cable [0M488] and Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489].

13-29
 Specifications
Coolant pressure ························· 2.5MPa
Amount of coolant discharge ········· 15.3L/min (50Hz), 18.3L/min (60Hz)
Coolant supply areas···················· 3 areas (valves 1, 2, 3: switched by the solenoid valve)
Addition of 1 area is possible (valve 4): Coolant Valve
2.5MPa [0M493]

Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] Coolant Valve 2.5MPa [0M493]

3 switchable coolant valves An additional valve, selected when
using 4 switchable coolant valves
+ (Use together with)

Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa [0M462]

Coolant unit Machine body piping
+ (Use together with)
Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488]
Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489]
Coolant unit Machine body signal power
cables

(Choose devices from the list below)

Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461]

Oil Hole Drill Version for
Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466] [67126]
Sleeve Holder
Coolant Piping for Back 4-Spindle Oil Hole Drill Version for Back [67127]
[0M467]
Unit Unit [0R123]
Coolant Piping for Guide Bush [0M468]
Coolant Discharge for Back
[0M469]
Attachment
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]
Coolant Piping for Thread
[0M495]
Whirling

Be sure to use this unit with Coolant Unit Piping 2.5MPa [0M462], Coolant Unit
Signal Cable [0M488] and Coolant Unit Power Cable [0M489].
Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] and Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
[0M479] cannot be used together.
The coolant discharge by [0M469] and sub spindle air blow cannot be performed at
the same time.
When using Oil Hole Drill Version for Sleeve Holder [67126], use Coolant Piping for
Sleeve Holder [0M466] together.
When using Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit [67127, 0R123], use Coolant Piping
for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467] together.

If 5 switchable valves (or more) are required, a customer version will be provided.
Please contact STAR MICRONICS.

13-30
Setting

To use this coolant unit, carry out the following setting.

Keep relay K05-bit6=1

Installation

For details on installing this unit, refer to section “4-1 Installation of the Machine,
■ Installation of Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431]” of the installation manual.

Command

Common use on PATH1 and PATH2

Coolant 2 pump motor ON (adjust) ························M1001 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for sleeve holder ON ······························M1005 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for sleeve holder OFF·····························M1006 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit ON······················M1007 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit OFF ····················M1008 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for guide bush ON ·································M1009 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for guide bush OFF································M1010 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for back ATT coolant discharge /
parts ejector with air cylinder ON······················M1011 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for back ATT coolant discharge /
parts ejector with air cylinder OFF ····················M1012 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for thread whirling ON ··························M1013 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for thread whirling OFF ·························M1014 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for sub spindle ON·································M1015 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for sub spindle OFF ·······························M1016 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Initial coolant 2 supply (adjust) ·····························M1019 (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 pump and valves 1 4 ON (adjust) ··········M1020 (common use of PATH1, 2)

If the cutting room door is open, the coolant pump motor of this unit will not start up.
The coolant pump motor will turn OFF in 10 seconds approximately when the
coolant OFF command is executed.

13-31
 When commanding M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011, M1013 or M1015, the standard
coolant pump will turn on at the same time. In addition, the coolant 2 valve will turn
off when M26 is commanded.
For M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011 or M1015, their “OFF” commands commanded
on the same PATH will be valid.
For example, when M1005 is commanded on PATH1, it will be turned OFF by
M1006 on PATH1. Commanding M1006 on PATH2 will not turn OFF M1005 on
PATH1.
M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011, M1013 and M1015 commands will be ignored while

the lamp of the AIR CUT key flashes.

When the AIR CUT key is turned ON during coolant discharge, the coolant
pump motor will stop.
If the cutting room door is opened while the Coolant 2 pump motor is ON, Coolant 2
pump motor will turn OFF. If the door is closed, Coolant 2 pump motor will turn ON
again.
If the COOLANT 2 key is turned OFF while the Coolant 2 pump motor is ON,
Coolant 2 pump motor will turn OFF. If the COOLANT 2 key is turned ON again,
Coolant 2 pump motor will turn on again.

Alarm

Coolant 2 pump motor ON commands M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011, M1013 and M1015
are effective when the COOLANT1 and COOLANT2 keys are ON. When one of the above
commands is issued while the COOLANT1 or COOLANT2 key is OFF, one of the
following alarms will be displayed.
Alarm No. 2083, Alarm No. 2091
The alarms can be cancelled by either turning on each coolant key or by pressing the

RESET key .

When one of the above alarms is triggered, the command waits for M code
completion.
If the coolant keys are turned on, the automatic operation will resume.

Switching the filter

The pump unit is equipped with a 2-filter suction filter. Turn the lever to select the filter to
use.
Position of lever Filter to use
A Filter
B Filter

13-32
Replacing and cleaning the filter element

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting, adjusting the machine or cleaning
out the cutting chips.
Always carry out this work while the machine is in the emergency stop state or
while the main breaker is turned OFF ( ).

CAUTION
When replacing or cleaning the filter elements, switch the lever to select the
other filter which will not be replaced or cleaned before carrying out the work.
Replace or clean the filter element when the pointer of the vacuum gauge
reads 0.03MPa or more during coolant 2 pump operation.
If the filter element is clogged, it may cause damage to the high pressure
coolant pump. Be sure to inspect the vacuum gauge of the suction filter daily.

Carry out machine preparations and adjustments whilst under the supervisor’s
control.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.

13-33
(1) Turn the handle of the other filter, which is not the one to replace/clean, to the opening
direction. (Turn the handle to the position as shown in the above figure.)
(2) Turn the lever to select the other filter which is not the one to replace or clean.

Filter to replace / clean Position of lever

Filter B
Filter A

(3) Turn the handle of the filter to replace/clean to the closing direction.
(Turn the handle 90 degrees to the right from the position as shown in the above
figure.)
(4) Remove the screws or (4pcs. each) and dismount the cover or .
(5) Remove the wave spring .
(6) Pull out the filter element upwards.
(7) Remove the V packing attached to the filter element.
(8) Replace or clean the filter element .
(9) Clean the V packing and attach it to the filter element .
(10) Mount the filter element .
(11) Put the wave spring back.
(12) Put the cover or back after confirming that an O-ring is in the groove.
(13) Mount the cover or with the screws or (4pcs. each).

13-34
13-15 Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa [0M494],
Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488], Coolant Valve 6.9MPa [0M492]

Summary

Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] supplies coolant at a maximum pressure of 6.9MPa. This is
effective in removing tangled cutting chips from the machining point during machining.
Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa [0M494] and Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488] include the
necessary wires and piping for connecting Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] to the machine body.
Coolant Valve 6.9MPa [0M492] can be used to increase the number of coolant discharge line
from 3 to 4.

To supply the coolant, please connect the necessary items from the following list.
Item list:
Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461]
Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466]
Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M467]
Coolant Piping for Guide Bush [0M468]
Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469]
*Pressure reducing with Reducing Valve is necessary.
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]
*Pressure reducing with Reducing Valve is necessary.
Coolant Piping for Thread Whirling [0M495]

Please provide a power supply for this unit that is separate from the power supply of
the machine body (3-phase / 200Vac: 20A or more).
When performing aluminum machining, cutting chips will become fine and the filter
can easily get clogged up, in which case please contact STAR MICRONICS.
If a large amount of bubbles is generated by the discharge of coolant 2, the suction
of the supply pump of this unit may decline significantly and alarm No. 1731 may
display. To restart the operation after the alarm display, please carry out air-bleeding.

It is recommended to use a mist collector together when using Coolant Unit 6.9MPa
[1A457].

For details on air-bleeding, please refer to “ Handling” in this section.

13-35
Specifications

Coolant pressure ··················· 6.9MPa

Amount of coolant discharge ··· 17L/min (50Hz)
21L/min (60Hz)
Coolant supply areas·············· 3 areas (valves1, 2 and 3: switched by the solenoid valves)
Addition of 1 area is possible (valve4): Coolant Valve
6.9MPa [0M492])

Coolant unit 6.9MPa [1A457] Coolant valve 6.9MPa [0M492]

An additional valve, selected when
3 switchable coolant valves
using 4 switchable coolant valves
+ (Always use together)
Coolant unit piping 6.9MPa [0M494]
Piping between the coolant unit and
the machine body
+ (Always use together)
Coolant unit signal cable [0M488]
Signal cable between the coolant unit and
the machine body
(Select from the list below)
Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461]
Oil hole drill version for sleeve
Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466] [67126]
holder
Coolant Piping for Back Oil hole drill version for back unit [67127]
[0M467]
4-Spindle Unit Oil hole drill version for back unit [0R123]
Coolant Piping for Guide Bush [0M468]
Coolant Piping for Thread
[0M495]
Whirling
Reducing Valve [68493]
Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469]
Check Valve [0M496]
Reducing Valve [68493]
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]
Check Valve [0M496]

Always use Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] with Coolant Unit Piping 6.9MPa [0M494]
and Coolant Unit Signal Cable [0M488].
When using Oil Hole Drill Version for Sleeve Holder [67126], use Coolant Piping for
Sleeve Holder [0M466] together.
When using Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit [67127], [0R123], use Coolant Piping
for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467] together.
When using Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] or Parts Ejector with Air
Cylinder [0M479], always use Reducing Valve [68493] together. Refer to section
“13-16 Reducing Valve [68493]” for details on the setting of pressure value.
Install Reducing Valve [68493] onto Valve 3.
When using this unit with Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] or Parts Ejector
with Air Cylinder [0M479], always use Check Valve [0M496] together. Otherwise, air
may flow back through the piping and coolant may splash outside the tank of this
unit when air blow is performed.

13-36
 If 5-switch valves (or more) are required, a customer version will be provided.

Installation

For details on installing this unit, please refer to “4-1 Installation of the Machine
Installation of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457]” in the installation manual.

Control

WARNING
Always turn OFF the factory switchboard before connecting the power cable.
When carrying out work, maintenance etc. with the cover of the control box open,
carry out the work while the indication light is OFF (while the factory switchboard
is turned OFF).

Power supply

3.5kVA
To use Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], prepare a power supply (3 phase 200Vac, 20A or more)
that is separate from the power supply of the machine body.
When the power is supplied, the indication light of the control panel will light up.
Turn the switch below the indication light ON/OFF to turn the power on/off.

CAUTION
Select an overcurrent protection device at the factory side with consideration to
protection from short circuits of the power supply cable (prepared by the user).
Its rated breaking current should be 20A (200V) or more.
Consult the machine electrician for details.

If Transformer [0T497] is used to supply power to Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457]

outside Japan, please refer to “5-2-2 When Transformer CE Marking Version
[0T497] is Selected, Connection between the transformer CE Marking version and
the machine main breaker (QF001)” in the Installation Manual.

13-37
 CAUTION
Follow the precautions below to prepare the power cable.
- The allowable current must be 20A or more.
- The allowable current of the power cable differs depending on the laying
method. (e.g. usage of conduit). Use a power cable with a conductor
cross-sectional area of 6.0mm2 ~ 10.0mm2 and choose a laying method that
guarantees the allowable current to be 20A or more after installation.
Consult the machine electrician for details.
- The maximum conductor cross-sectional area of the cable which is
connectable to the terminal block is 6.0 mm2.
- The ground wire of the power cable should be approximately 50mm longer
than the other wires.
- Protect the cable with a conduit or a cable gland that fits the lead hole
( 38mm) which is located in the control box of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].
- First connect the power cable to Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], and then
connect it to the factory switchboard. Connect the power cable to the terminal
block in the control box of the high-pressure coolant unit as shown below.

The indication light is connected to the primary side of the power supply switch.
Therefore, the condition of the indication lamp is irrelevant to the condition of the
power supply switch.

Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] main breaker specification

Rated current: 20A

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity: 2.5kA

Indicate the wire number (L1, L2, L3) for each wire (excluding the ground wire).

13-38
Keep relay setting

K13-bit4 = 1······ When applying this specification

= 0 ····· When not applying this specification

Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details on keep
relay rewriting.

Command

Coolant 2 pump motor ON (adjust) M1000: (common use of PATH1, 2)

Coolant 2 for sleeve holder ON M1005: (common use of PATH1, 2)
OFF M1006: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit ON M1007: (common use of PATH1, 2)
OFF M1008: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for guide bush ON M1009: (common use of PATH1, 2)
OFF M1010: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for back attachment/ parts ejector
M1011: (common use of PATH1, 2)
with air cylinder ON
OFF M1012: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for thread whirling ON M1013: (common use of PATH1, 2)
OFF M1014: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 for sub spindle ON M1015: (common use of PATH1, 2)
OFF M1016: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Initial coolant 2 supply (adjust) M1019: (common use of PATH1, 2)
Coolant 2 pump and valves 1 ~ 4 ON (adjust) M1020: (common use of PATH1, 2)

Coolant pump of this unit will not start up when the cutting room door is open.

13-39
 When commanding M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011, M1013 or M1015, Coolant 1
(standard) will turn ON at the same time. In addition, when M26 is commanded, the
coolant 2 valve will turn OFF as well.
For M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011, M1013 and M1015, their “OFF” commands on
the PATH they were commanded will be valid.
For example, when M1005 is commanded on PATH1, M1005 can be turned OFF by
commanding M1006 on PATH1.
It cannot be turned OFF by commanding M1006 on PATH2.

When the lamp of the AIR CUT key is flashing, M1005, M1007, M1009,
M1011, M1013 and M1015 will be ignored.

When the AIR CUT key is turned ON during coolant discharge, the coolant
pump will stop.
If the cutting room door is opened while the Coolant 2 pump is ON, Coolant 2 pump
will turn OFF. If the door is closed, Coolant 2 pump will turn ON again.
If the coolant 2 key switch is turned OFF while the Coolant 2 pump is ON, Coolant 2
pump will turn OFF. If the coolant 2 key switch is turned ON again, Coolant 2 pump
will turn ON again.

Control of the supplying pump

The supplying pump is controlled by the upper and lower level sensors in the high
pressure coolant unit. When the lower level sensor detects a low level, the supplying pump
will turn on. When the upper level sensor detects a high level, the supplying pump will
turn off.

Alarm

(1) “Coolant 2 pump ON” commands (M1005, M1007, M1009, M1011, M1013 and M1015)
are valid while the coolant 1 and 2 key switches are turned ON. When these commands
are issued while the coolant 1 and 2 key switches are OFF, following alarms will be
displayed.
Alarm No. 2083, 2091

To cancel the alarms, turn each coolant key switch ON or press the RESET key .

When the above alarms are displayed, the program waits for M code completion.
By turning each coolant key switch ON, the automatic operation will resume.

13-40
(2) When the thermal relay (either for the coolant supplying pump or for the high pressure
pump) of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] has tripped, the machine will enter the
following states.
1. Spindles stop, feed hold
2. The coolant motor, lubricant motor and power-driven tool motor stop
3. The red light of the beacon (option) lights up.
4. Alarm display
Alarm No.1730
To cancel the alarm, reset the thermal relay trip of this unit.

This alarm display is invalid while the AIR CUT key is ON.

(3) When the lower limit sensor of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] functions, the machine
will enter states 1~3 above and alarm No. 1731 will be displayed.
To cancel the alarm, replenish the coolant until the level exceeds the lower limit and

press the RESET key .

When this alarm occurs, the filter may be clogged.

This alarm does not occur while the AIR CUT key is ON.

(4) When the upper limit sensor of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] functions, the machine
will enter states 1~3 above and alarm No. 1732 will be displayed.
To cancel the alarm, reduce the amount of coolant until it becomes lower than the

upper limit and press the RESET key .

This alarm does not occur while the AIR CUT key is ON.

(5) When M1020 command is complete and the Coolant 2 pump & valves 1 4 are turned
OFF, alarm No. 1734 will be displayed.

To cancel the alarm, press the RESET key .

13-41
Handling

13-42
When starting up this unit, confirm that the hose between the coolant tank of the
machine body and the supplying pump is filled with coolant and there are no air
bubbles.
If there are air bubbles, loosen the screw of the supplying pump , and hold up
the hose to fill it up with coolant at the supplying pump side. Then, start up the
supplying pump .
After confirming that the air comes out of the area where the screw is loosened,
hold down the hose and tighten the screw .
If the supplying pump starts up when air bubbles are inside the hose, the unit will
continue dry running and will cause a malfunction of the pump (the pump is not a
self-suction pump).
When supplying coolant to the coolant tank of the machine body, fill it to the upper
limit. If the coolant is supplied over the upper limit, it may cause tank overflow.
Do not position the hose above the connecting port of the coolant tank of the
machine body because air bubbles will be generated.
For details on handling the high pressure coolant pump , the supplying pump
and the relief valve , refer to the operation manual of each device and follow the
instructions.
If pressure cannot be adjusted by the relief valve (rise or fall in pressure), fine
cutting chips may have accumulated in the relief valve .
If this occurs, follow the instructions of the operation manual of the relief valve to
clean it.
If the pressure cannot be adjusted even after cleaning, contact STAR MICRONICS
immediately.

13-43
Supplying the coolant

Follow the steps below to supply the coolant.

(1) Put the machine into the emergency stop state.
(2) Set the keep relay K13-bit4 to “0”.

Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details on keep
relay rewriting.

(3) Cancel the emergency stop status and turn the CNC power ON again.
(4) Confirm that the coolant tank of the machine body is filled with coolant to the upper
limit.
(5) Confirm that the hose between the coolant tank of the machine body and the coolant
Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] is filled with coolant and there are no air bubbles.
(6) Remove the screw and supply the coolant.
When the coolant starts overflowing from the hole, stop supplying and mount the
screw .

Air-bleeding will be carried out with the supplying pump on. Therefore, leave the
screw un-tightened to let air come out of the hose.

(7) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(8) Press the PATH2 key to turn off their lamps.

(9) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(10) Press the PROGRAM key .

(11) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(12) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(13) Command M1019.

If the supplying pump cannot suck the coolant, press the RESET key to stop
the supplying pump immediately. Then, carry out steps (5) and (6) above.
When the hose is filled with coolant, hold it up to make suction easier (observe the
hose to check the suction of the supplying pump).
When a low coolant level is detected at the coolant tank of the machine body, the
supplying pump will stop. In this case, supply coolant to the coolant tank of the
machine body and command M1019 again.

The supplying pump will start up with M1019. When the coolant amount reaches the
allowable lower level of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], the supplying pump will stop
automatically.

13-44
(14) Tighten the screw .
(15) Set the keep relay K13-bit4 to “1”.

Refer to section “11-4-3 PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) Screen” for details on keep
relay rewriting.

(16) Supply coolant to the coolant tank of the machine body up to the upper limit position
of the level gauge.

13-45
Pressure adjustment

Follow the steps below to adjust the pressure.

(1) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(2) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(3) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key .

(5) Press the soft key [PROGRAM].
The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(6) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(7) Command M1000 on PATH1.
(8) Set the pressure to the desired value with the relief valve while watching the
pressure gauge .

The pressure can be set up to 6.9MPa.

(9) Press the RESET key .

13-46
Replenishing the coolant

When the coolant is reaches an insufficient level, follow the steps below to replenish.
(1) Close the doors of the machine body.
(2) Turn OFF coolant 1 switch and turn ON coolant 2 switch.

(3) Press the PATH1 key to light up the lamp.

(4) Press the PATH2 key to turn off the lamp.

(5) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(6) Press the PROGRAM key .

(7) Press the soft key [PROGRAM].
The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(8) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH1.

(9) Command M1020.
With this command, valves 1 4 of high pressure coolant 2 will all be turned ON.
(10) Wait until alarm No. 1734 is displayed.
When alarm No. 1734 displays, valves 1 4 of the high-pressure coolant 2 will all be
turned OFF automatically.

If it is necessary to stop these operations for some reason, press the RESET

key .

(11) Supply coolant to the coolant tank of the machine body up to the upper limit position
of the level gauge.

(12) Press the RESET key to cancel alarm No. 1734.

13-47
Maintenance of the filter

Cleaning and replacement of the filter

Check the pressure gauge to check the clogging condition of the filter .
The pressure will change in accordance with clogging of the filter . Therefore,
check the pressure periodically.
Check the pressure while the supplying pump is in operation. The pressure
gauge works by the occurrence of differential pressure, therefore the pointer
reads 0MPa unless the supplying pump is operating.
When the pressure gauge reads 0.2MPa or more, it shows clogging of the filter
in which case, clean the element or replace it with a new one immediately.
The element is made of non-woven fabric, so it is hard to maintain its original
condition even by cleaning.
Cleaning it roughly will make it become easily clogged. When this occurs, replace it
with a new one.
When cleaning the element, drain the oil adequately and place it in the sun to dry
completely. Then carefully remove the cutting chips which have stuck to the element
with a soft brush etc.
Cutting chips are invisibly fine. They stick to the inner side of the large element, and
to the outer side of the small element.
To avoid stopping operation of the machine to clean the element (while it is drying),
prepare a spare element beforehand.

Follow the steps below to carry out cleaning and replacement of the filter.
(1) Turn OFF the switch under the indication light of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].
(2) Remove the four screws , the four screws and dismount the covers .
(3) Separate the hose from the filter with the coupling .

Coolant may spray out from the separated hose , so please be careful.

(4) Loosen the screw and rotate the cover . Then insert the hose into the hole of
the base.
(5) Lift up the filter from the tank and place it in a container etc.

Be careful when lifting up the filter , as it becomes heavy from soaking up the
coolant.

(6) Remove the four nuts located on top of the filter and dismount the top cover.
(7) Replace the element.

13-48
(8) Put the filter back into the tank.
(9) Join the hose and the filter with the coupling .
(10)Cover the hole with the cover and fix it with the screw .
(11)Fix the covers with the four screws and the four screws .

When putting the filter back into the tank, air will have entered the filter thus
making it buoyant. Fix the covers securely to stabilize the filter.

13-49
13-16 Reducing Valve [68493]

Summary
This unit depressurizes one position of the coolant discharge piping (where ON/OFF control is
possible), when using Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].

Specifications
Reducing valve ···························· F MRB 01 B 30 (by Yuken Kogyo Co., LTD.)
Pressure adjustment range: 0.6MPa~6.9MPa
Installation position ····················· Valve 3 of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457]

Always use this unit with Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].

When using Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] or oil blow of Parts Ejector
with Air Cylinder [0M479], use this unit to set the discharge pressure to 1.5MPa or
less.
If the pressure is increased to a level higher than this, it will become easier for
coolant to enter areas such as the bearing of the spindle etc, the bearing will
deteriorate quicker and thus can cause damage.

Pressure adjustment
Carry out the following procedure to adjust the pressure.

(1) Press the PATH1 or PATH2 key to light up the lamp and select PATH which
uses the reducing valve.

(2) Press the MDI key of MODE to light up the lamp.

(3) Press the PROGRAM key .

(4) Press the [PROGRAM] soft key.
The PROGRAM (MDI) screen will be displayed.

(5) Press the CHANGE key to select PATH which uses the reducing valve.
(6) Loosen the nut of the reducing valve .
(7) Execute the “Coolant ON” with the corresponding command for this unit.
(8) While looking at the pressure gauge , turn the adjustment screw to set the pressure.
Turn the adjustment screw clockwise to increase the pressure, and counter-clockwise
to reduce the pressure.
(9) Tighten the nut of the reducing valve .

13-50
13-17 Check Valve [0M496]

Summary
This unit is used for preventing air from flowing back through the piping when using
Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] together with Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] or
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479].
Be sure to use this unit when using Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] together with Coolant
Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469] or Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]. Otherwise,
coolant may leak from Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].

Since Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] is designed so that air does not flow back
toward it, this unit is unnecessary even when using Coolant Discharge for Back ATT.
[0M469] or Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479].

13-51
13-18 Coolant Piping for Sub Spindle [0M461]

Summary
This unit consists of a coolant nozzle for Coolant Unit 2.5MPa or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa, which
is attached on the upper part of the end of the sub spindle. This is used to remove cutting chips
by discharging coolant.

This specification consists of piping only. The pump unit is not included.
Please use this piping with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa
[1A457].
In the case of supplying all positions with coolant, the amount supplied to each
position may be lower than the required value. Determine the number of nozzles
appropriately. Please plug the unused positions with closer plugs.
If the nozzles are directed in a manner that coolant is sprayed directly towards the
cutting room door, oil leakage may occur. Direct the nozzles downwards, to make it
difficult for coolant to leak outside the machine.
If the end of the bronze pipe with the 2.0 hole is cut, the pipe can be used as a
large hole nozzle.
Do not forcibly bend the nozzles as it will cause damage to the nozzles.

Bend the nozzles appropriately to discharge coolant towards the desired positions.
STAR MICRONICS recommends 364-FHAM lever type tube bender manufactured
by IMPERIAL.

Specifications
Maximum coolant pressure ················ 6.9MPa

Command
Coolant 2 for sub spindle ON············ M1015 (common use of PATH 1 and 2)
Coolant 2 for sub spindle OFF ·········· M1016 (common use of PATH 1 and 2)

Setting
Keep relay setting
K25-bit0=1 ······ When this unit is installed

13-52
13-19 Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube [0M463]

Summary
This unit is for supplying coolant into Main Spindle Inner Tube [0M446] in order to restrain
vibration of the bar material inside the inner tube during the spindle rotation.

When machining a profile bar stock and the roller steady rest of the bar feeder
cannot restrain vibration of the bar, it is recommended to use this specification
together with Main Spindle Inner Tube [0M446].
The standard coolant is applied to Coolant Piping for Spindle Inner Tube [0M463].
Therefore, Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] and Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] are not
necessary.
This unit cannot be used for Guide bush version.

Adjustment of coolant flow rate

(1) Open the valve fully.

(2) Adjust the flow rate with valve .

13-53
Replacing and cleaning the filter element

Clean the filter element periodically.

(1) Turn the levers of valve and valve to close the valves completely.
(2) Remove the nut and the packing , and dismount the cover .
(3) Remove the nut , washer and packing .
(4) Remove the filter element .
(5) Replace/clean the filter element .
(6) Mount the filter element and attach the packing and washer , then tighten the
nut .
(7) Mount the cover and attach the packing , then tighten the nut .
(8) Turn the lever of the valve to open the valve fully.
(9) Adjust the opening of the valve .

When the nut is loosened and the packing is detached, coolant accumulated in
the filter will overflow.
To prevent coolant from splashing out, place a container before carrying out this
work and clean of the filter element after collecting the coolant.

13-54
13-20 Low Pr. Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M464]

Summary
This unit consists of coolant piping and nozzles for discharging coolant to the tools on the
4-spindle sleeve holder, when 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit ER16/11 [0M155] or
[0M158] is installed in T3400 of 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M151] or [0M157].
At this time, coolant is supplied by the standard coolant unit.

Since this unit uses the coolant supplied by the standard coolant unit, coolant
amount discharged to each area may be lower than the required value depending on
the condition of use. In such a case, use Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant
Unit [1A457] and Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466].
In the case of installing 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] and 3-Spindle Counter
Face Drilling Unit ER16/11 [0M155] / [0M158] onto 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit
[0M151] or [0M157] at the same time, be sure to use this unit or Coolant Piping for
Sleeve Holder [0M466] together.

Specifications

Coolant supply areas··············· T1100 ~ T1400

13-55
13-21 Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466]

Summary

This specification consists of additional coolant nozzles for Coolant Unit 2.5MPa or 6.9MPa,
which are to be installed for removing cutting chips generated by tools on the 4-spindle sleeve
holder.

This consists of piping only. The pump unit is not included with this piping.
Please use this piping with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa
[1A457].
When coolant is supplied to all target areas, the coolant discharge amount to each
area may be lower than the required amount. Determine the number of nozzles
appropriately. Please plug the unused positions with closer plugs.
If the end of the bronze pipe with the 2.0 hole is cut, the pipe can also be used as a
large hole nozzle.
Determine the shape of the coolant nozzles according to how they are used.
Be careful of collision with the back attachment when changing the shape of the
coolant nozzles.
In the case of installing 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] and 3-Spindle Counter
Face Drilling Unit ER16/11 [0M155] / [0M158] onto 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit
[0M151] or [0M157] at the same time, be sure to use this unit or Low Pr. Coolant
Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M464] together.
Do not forcibly bend the nozzles as it will cause damage to the nozzles.

Bend the nozzles appropriately to discharge coolant towards the desired positions.
STAR MICRONICS recommends 364-FHAM lever type tube bender manufactured
by IMPERIAL.

13-56
Specifications

Maximum coolant pressure ··········· 6.9MPa

Coolant supply areas···················· T1100, T1200, T1300, T1400

Command
Coolant 2 for sleeve holder ON ············ M1005 : (common use of PATH 1 and 2)
Coolant 2 for sleeve holder OFF··········· M1006 : (common use of PATH 1 and 2)

13-57
13-22 Coolant Piping for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467]

Summary

This specification consists of 4 coolant nozzles for installing onto the back 4-spindle unit, which
are used to remove cutting chips with 2.5MPa or 6.9MPa coolant.

This consists of piping only. The pump unit is not included with this piping. Please
use this piping with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457].
In the case of supplying all positions with coolant, the amount supplied to each
position may be lower than the required value. Determine the number of nozzles
appropriately. Please plug the unused positions with closer plugs.
If the nozzles are directed in a manner that coolant is sprayed directly towards the
cutting room door, oil leakage may occur. Direct the nozzles downwards to make it
difficult for coolant to leak outside the machine.
If the end of the bronze pipe with the 2.0 hole is cut, the pipe can also be used as a
large hole nozzle.
Please determine the shape of the coolant nozzles according to the conditions of
use. At this time, be careful of a collision with the back attachment.
Do not forcibly bend the nozzles as it will cause damage to the nozzles.

Bend the nozzles appropriately to discharge coolant towards the desired positions.
STAR MICRONICS recommends 364-FHAM lever type tube bender manufactured
by IMPERIAL.

Specifications
Maximum coolant pressure ················· 6.9MPa
Coolant supply areas·························· T2100 T2400

Command
Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit ON···· M1007 : (common use of PATH 1 and 2)
Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit OFF ·· M1008 : (common use of PATH 1 and 2)

13-58
13-23 Coolant Piping for Guide Bush [0M468]

Summary

This specification consists of coolant nozzles for discharging coolant from the tool post cover
(operator’s side) to the guide bush. They are used to remove cutting chips with the 2.5MPa or
6.9MPa coolant pump.
This specification can be used for Non-guide bush version.

This consists of piping only. The pump unit is not included with this piping.
Please use this piping with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa
[1A457].
If coolant is discharged while there is no bar in the guide bush, coolant will seep into
the headstock room.
If the end of the bronze pipe with the 2.0 hole is cut, the pipe can also be used as a
large hole nozzle.
Do not forcibly bend the nozzles as it will cause damage to the nozzles.

Bend the nozzles appropriately to discharge coolant towards the desired positions.
STAR MICRONICS recommends 364-FHAM lever type tube bender manufactured
by IMPERIAL.

13-59
Specifications
Maximum coolant pressure ················· 6.9MPa

Command
Coolant 2 for guide bush ON ··············· M1009 : (common use of PATH1 and 2)
Coolant 2 for guide bush OFF·············· M1010 : (common use of PATH1 and 2)

13-60
13-24 Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469]

Summary

This specification runs coolant in order to flush out cutting chips accumulated in the sub
spindle. In addition, sub spindle air blow can be used with this unit (simultaneous discharge is
not possible).

This consists of piping only. The pump unit is not included with this piping.
Please use this piping with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa
[1A457]. However, when using Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], always reduce the
coolant pressure to 2.5MPa with Reducing Valve [68493]. In addition, always use
Check Valve [0M496] together.

Specifications
Maximum coolant pressure ················· 2.5MPa
Maximum part insertion length ··········· 50mm
Applicable sub collet
Sub collet SR23 [0M379]
Sub collet VNC20 [0M383]
Sub collet for profile bar stock VNC20 [0M384]
Sub collet R20 [0M375]
Sub collet for profile bar stock R20 [0M376]
Sub collet SNC18 [0M373]
Sub collet for profile bar stock SNC18 [0M374]
Sub collet R16 [0M377]
Sub collet for profile bar stock R16 [0M378]
Sub collet P16 [0M381]
Sub collet for profile bar stock P16 [0M382]
Sub collet S13 [0M385]
Sub collet for profile bar stock S13 [0M386]
Sub collet P10 [0M372]
Sub collet S10 [0M387]
Sub collet T7 [0M388]

13-61
This unit cannot be used with Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479] and Parts
Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475].
Be sure to use this unit with Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478]

13-62
Installation

(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Remove the two knob screws and dismount the cover .
(6) Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .

Remove the sub spindle cap, collet, spring and sleeve beforehand.
In the case when Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475] has been installed,
remove Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475].

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.
Refer to section “13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 10mm [0M471],
13mm [0M472], 16mm [0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475], Accessory for Parts
Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476], Warning Plate (English/Japanese) [0M476A], Parts
Stopper Unit [0G478]” for details.

(7) Remove the parts ejection detector .

(8) Set dimension A of the proximity switch to 14.0mm to make it apply to this unit.
Loosen the nut and set dimension A to 14.0mm.
Tighten the nut with a torque of 20Nm.

Dimension A is set to 14.0mm when Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478] is installed.

(9) Remove the tube of the sub spindle air blow piping when Parts Ejector with Spring
[0M478] is installed.
(10) Loosen the two screws and remove the sleeve .
(11) Store the sleeve outside the machine.

In the case when Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479] has been installed, remove
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]. Remove the sub spindle air blow piping from
the holder and attach the plug .
In the case when Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475] has been installed,
remove Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475], Accessories for Parts Ejector
(Guide Tube) [0M476] and Parts Stopper Unit [0G478].
Also, remove the sub spindle air blow piping from the holder and attach the
plug .

13-63
 Refer to section “13-28 Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479,0M479A 0M479E],
Installing Parts Ejector” for details on removing Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder
[0M479] and carry out the procedure in reverse to remove it.
Refer to section “13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 10mm [0M471],
13mm [0M472], 16mm [0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475], Accessory for Parts
Ejector (Guide Tube B) [0M476], Warning Plate (English/Japanese) [0M476A],Parts
Stopper Unit [0G478] Installing the Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M476] and Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]” for details on removing Accessories for
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476], and Parts Stopper Unit [0G478].

(12) Install the parts ejection detector after completing the setting in step (5).
(13) Attach the sleeve , on which the pipe is attached, onto the holder and then attach
the joints .
(14) Attach the air blow piping (pipe joints , check valve , tube ).

Cut the sleeve of the standard air blow piping which was removed in step (9).
Then attach the tube to the pipe joint .

(15) Attach the coolant piping (pipe joints , tube ).

(16) Mount the cover with the two screws .
(17) Mount the cover with the two knob screws .

Control

Command
Coolant 2 for back attachment ON .......... M1011 : (common use of PATH1 and 2)
Coolant 2 for back attachment OFF ........ M1012 : (common use of PATH1 and 2)

Alarm
When back attachment air blow ON is commanded while back attachment coolant
discharge is ON, or when back attachment coolant discharge ON is commanded while back
attachment air blow is ON, the following alarm message will be displayed:

1187 COOLANT AIR BLOW INTERLOCK

13-64
13-25 Coolant Piping for Thread Whirling [0M495]

Summary

This piping supplies coolant to the machining point of Thread Whirling Unit / Outer
[0M171].

Be sure to use this piping with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa
[1A457].

Specifications

Maximum coolant pressure ·········· 6.9MPa

13-65
13-26 Automatic Bar Feeder Interface [0M416]

Summary

This is a connector for connecting the automatic bar feeder to the machine body.
This makes connection and disconnection easier.

Specifications
Connection
Power supply ································· 200Vac (3 phase or single phase)
Max. 5A
Maximum signal output load············ 24Vdc, 0.3A

Refer to section “5-3 Connecting Automatic Bar Feeder” of the installation manual
for details on connecting this device.

13-66
Applicable connector
Connector hood
Type by HARTING by ITTICS, Cannon
0930 024 0540 H24B TSH R0 PG21
a type
0930 024 0440 H24B TGH R0 PG21
0930 024 0541 H24B TSH R0 PG29
b type
0930 024 0441 H24B TGH R0 PG29

Connector terminal block

by HARTING by ITTICS, Cannon
0933 024 2601 HE 024 M

Conduit
Use a conduit to protect the cable between the aforementioned connector and the
automatic bar feeder.
The size of conduit for attaching to the connector hood is as shown below.
Type a: PG21
Type b: PG29

13-67
13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 10mm [0M471],
13mm [0M472], 16mm [0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475],
Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476], Warning Plate
(Japanese/English) [0M476A], Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]

Summary

Parts ejector with guide tube consists of a guide tube to be installed inside the sub spindle.
It ejects the parts outside the machine after machining. This unit adopts a pushing system
for ejecting outside. Therefore, it is suitable for simple-shaped parts which can pass smoothly
through the guide tube.
In addition, when Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475] and the sub spindle air blow
unit are used together, the machined part may fly out of the machine due to the compressed
air blown into the guide tube. Parts Stopper Unit [0G478] is to be installed into the end of the
guide tube to prevent the parts from flying out of the machine.

The following units cannot be used with Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475].
Parts Ejection Detector [Standard]
Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469]
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]
Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478]
Be sure to use Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475] with Accessory for Parts
Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476].
When performing sub spindle air blow while Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M471 0M475] is installed, be sure to use this unit with Parts Stopper Unit [0G478].
Some parts, depending on their contour, may not be ejected by this unit.
Some parts, depending on their contour, may be ejected even if they are shorter
than the applicable length listed on the next page.
Set dimension “ D” (bore of the guide tube) to roughly 1 mm bigger than the outer
diameter of the parts, and check that the parts can pass smoothly through the guide
tube before actual machining.

13-68
Specification

CAUTION
Select an appropriate diameter of the guide tube so that machined parts do not
overlap inside the bush and guide tube.

Parts ejector with guide tube

20mm [0M475] 18mm [0M474] 16mm [0M473]
VNC20 [0M383]
R16 [0M377]
Profile bar stock
Profile bar stock
VNC20 [0M384] SNC18 [0M373]
Applicable sub R16 [0M378]
R20 [0M375] Profile bar stock
collet P16 [0M381]
Profile bar stock SNC18 [0M374]
Profile bar stock
R20 [0M376]
P16 [0M382]
SR23 [0M379]
Applicable
part outer 4mm 20mm 4mm 18mm 4mm 16mm
diameter
Guide tube
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,
inner diameter
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 21 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
( Dmm)
55mm 600mm 55mm 600mm 55mm 600mm
Applicable part ( 5 D 16) ( 5 D 14) ( 5 D 11)
overall length 110mm 600mm 105mm 600mm 105mm 600mm
( 17 D 21) ( 15 D 19) ( 12 D 17)

13mm [0M472] 10mm [0M471]

S12 [0M393]
Profile bar stock S12
Applicable sub [0M394] P10 [0M372]
collet S13 [0M385] S10 [0M387]
Profile bar stock S13
[0M386]
Applicable
part outer 4mm 13mm 4mm 10mm
diameter
Guide tube
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
inner diameter 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
12, 13, 14
( Dmm)
45mm 600mm 45mm 600mm
Applicable part ( 5 D 11) ( 5 D 8)
overall length 105mm 600mm 105mm 600mm
( 12 D 14) ( 9 D 11)

Setting
Carry out the following setting when using this unit.
Keep relay ·······K13-bit0=0

13-69
Installing the Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475]

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting and adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during adjustment.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Execute the reference point return of all axes before starting this work.
Carry out step (1) of “Installing the Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M476]” in this section before starting this work.
To use Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475], set the keep relay “USE
PARTS EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER” to “NO” on the KEEP RELAY
(Conversational setting) screen.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

13-70
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Remove the five screws and dismount the cover .
(6) Remove the two knob screws and dismount the cover .
(7) Remove the two screws and dismount the cover .

When Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479] or Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478] is
installed, refer to sections “13-28 Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479, 0M479A
0M479E]” or “13-29 Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478, 0M478A 0M478F]” and
remove it.

13-71
(8) Loosen the two screws and dismount the cover .
(9) Remove the cap and sleeve . To attach/detach the cap , hook a hook spanner onto
the cap and insert the handle into the toggle holder.
(10)Remove the two screws , switch the collar with the plate , and lightly tighten
with the two screws .

Refer to the drawing on the previous page for details.

(11)Attach the exclusive bush or for the parts ejector with guide tube to the sleeve .
The shapes of bushes vary depending on the inner diameter.
(12)Insert the spring and collet into the inner diameter of sleeve . Then, insert them
into the sub spindle in accordance with its key and tighten the cap .
(13)Mount the cover with the two screws
(14)Insert the sleeve or into the holder with the oval hole matching the air blow
nozzle. At this time, match the end faces of the holder and sleeves . Select a
sleeve or which fits the tube or .
(15)Insert the tube or into the sleeve or up to the stop ring position, with the
oval hole matching the air blow nozzle. The shapes of the tubes vary depending on
their inner diameters.
(16)Fix the tube or with the two screws .
(17)Fix the collar and plate with the two screws .

Refer to the drawing on the previous page for details.

(18)Mount the cover with the two screws .

(19)Mount the cover with the two knob screws .

The shapes of the tubes vary depending on their inner diameters.

Choose a sleeve or that fits the tube or .
The shapes of bushes vary depending on their inner diameters, as shown in
the following drawing.

13-72
Installing the Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476] and Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting and adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during adjustment.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

Before installing Parts Stopper Unit [0G478], install Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M471 0M475].
When Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475] is installed and sub spindle air
blow is performed, the machined parts may fly out of the machine due to
compressed air blown into the guide tube. Please use Parts Stopper Unit [0G478] to
prevent the parts from flying out of the machine.

13-73
 Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476]: ~ , , ,
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475]: ,
Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]: ,
(1) Put the covers and the stopper screw together as shown in the drawing
of the previous page, and then attach the cover with five screws .
(2) Attach the plate or and the lid to the cover with the four screws . Select
the plate or which fits to the tube or .
(3) Fix the parts stopper with the two screw at the end of the tube or .
When using the 15 pipe (pipe ), attach the collar between the pipe and the
parts stopper .
(4) Loosen the two screws , and then adjust the guide position against the part outer
diameter.
(5) Tighten the two screws to fix the guide .
(6) Loosen the nut and adjust the position of the roller with the screw .
Adjust the position of the roller against the part outer diameter so that the parts can
pass through the guide smoothly and the roller can hold the part sufficiently
against a compressed air.
(7) Fix the screw with the nut .
(8) Attach the fixtures with screws (one piece each).
(9) Attach the cover to the cover and the fixtures with the four screws and
the two screws .
(10)Attach the cover to the cover with the six screws .
Adjust the position of the cover in proportion as the part length.
(11) Put the warning label on the prescribed position of the cover .

13-74
13-28 Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479, 0M479A 0M479E]

Summary

By using this unit, parts picked-up by sub spindle will be ejected into the chute by driving the
push rod with air cylinder.
This unit is suitable for when there is a possibility of parts incurring damage by the
spring-type push rod of Parts ejector with spring [0M478].
By using this unit with Coolant unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457],
coolant blow from the end of the push rod can be performed, which removes cutting chips
accumulated inside sub collet.
In addition, sub spindle air blow and sub spindle coolant blow can be used together.
(Simultaneous discharge is not possible.)

Always use this unit with Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder (sub collet)
[0M479A 0M479E].
Always use this unit with the parts ejection detector [standard].
This unit cannot be used with Coolant Discharge for Back ATT. [0M469].
This unit cannot be used with Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475].
This unit cannot be used with Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478].
Select the diameter size of the ejector pin in accordance with the collet diameter.
This unit consists of only piping. This unit does not include the pump unit. When sub
spindle coolant blow is performed, use this unit with Coolant Unit 2.5MPa [0T431] or
Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457]. However, when using Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457],
always reduce the coolant pressure to 0.7MPa with Reducing Valve [68493].
When using this unit with Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457], always use Check Valve
[0M496] together. Otherwise, air may flow back through the piping and coolant may
splash outside the tank of Coolant Unit 6.9MPa [1A457] when air blow is performed.

Specifications

Maximum part length for pick-up ·············80mm

Maximum part projection length ·············· 30mm
Maximum part insertion length················ 75mm
Air pressure ·········································· 0.5MPa

Type No. Specifications Applicable Sub collet

VNC20 Applicable to 0M383, 0M384
A version 0M479A Sub collet VNC20 R20 Applicable to 0M375, 0M376
SR23 Applicable to 0M379
B version 0M479B Sub collet SNC18 SNC18 Applicable to 0M373, 0M374
R16 Applicable to 0M377, 0M378
C version 0M479C Sub collet R16
P16 Applicable to 0M381, 0M382
D version 0M479D Sub collet P10 P10 Applicable to 0M372
S13 Applicable to 0M385, 0M386
E version 0M479E Sub collet S13
S12 Applicable to 0M393, 0M394

13-75
Setting
Carry out the following setting when using this unit.
Keep relay ··········· K13-bit0 = 1

Installing Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479]

WARNING
Always stop the machine before carrying out inspections or adjustments.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during this work.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts inside the machine.

To use Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479], set the keep relay “USE PARTS
EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER” to “YES” on the KEEP RELAY (Conversational
setting) screen.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

13-76
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) While under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Remove the two knob screws and dismount the cover
(6) Remove the three screws and dismount the cover

In the case when Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478] or Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M471 0M475] has been installed, remove Parts Ejector with Spring or Parts Ejector
with Guide Tube.

13-77
 Refer to “13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) 10mm [0M471], 13mm [0M472], 16mm
[0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475], Accessory for Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M476], Warning Plate (English/Japanese) [0M476A], Parts Stopper Unit [0G478]”
or “13-29 Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478, 0M478A 0M478F]” for details.

(7) Remove the parts ejection detector .

(8) Set dimension A of the proximity switch to 17.5mm to apply to this unit.
Loosen the nut and set the dimension A to 17.5mm.
Tighten the nut with a torque 20Nm.
(9) Remove the three screws and dismount the holder .
(10)Remove the cover , cap , collet , spring and sleeve from the sub spindle.
Then install the exclusive bush in the sleeve .

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.

(11) While the exclusive push rod assembly (exclusive spring and push rod with
dog ) is passed through the guide , insert the exclusive push rod assembly into the
nut , and fix it with the four screws .
(12)Insert the dog into the exclusive bush , and insert the sleeve into the sub
spindle in accordance with the key inside the sub spindle.
(13)Install the exclusive ejector pin into the exclusive push rod .

Refer to “ Replacing the Ejector Pin” in this section for details.

(14)Install the spring , collet , cap and the cover .

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.

(15)Install the holder with the three screws .

(16)Insert the sleeve making sure that the 17 hole faces the operator side,
and insert until it comes into contact with the guide .
(17)Attach the adjustment nut to the sleeve and insert into the holder .
(18)Tighten the adjustment nut until it touches the holder .
Tighten the adjustment nut another quarter turn from the above position, and fix
the adjustment nut with the screw .
(19)Tighten the two screws to fix the sleeve .
(20)Rotate the sub spindle by hand to confirm that the sleeve and the guide are not in
contact with each other.
If it is not possible to rotate it by hand, carry out steps (18) and (19) again since the

13-78
 sleeve and the guide are in contact with each other.

In steps (17)~(19), ensure that there is a 0.25mm gap between the sleeve and
the guide . Repeat steps (18)~(20) if the gap cannot be ensured.

(21)Install the air cylinder into the sleeve with the four screws .
(22)Mount the cover with the two screws .
(23)Install the parts ejection detector with the setting completed in step (5).
(24)Mount the joint .
(25)Mount the piping for air blow (joint , check valve , tube ).
(26)Attach the coolant piping (joint , tube ).
(27)Attach the cover with the three screws .
(28)Attach the cover with the two knob screws .
(29)Close the cutting room door, and turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

MACHINING .

When Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478] or Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M471 0M475] etc. is used and this unit [0M479] is not used, attach and store this
unit to the position with the two screws shown in the figure below.

13-79
Replacing the ejector pin

Carry out the following procedure to replace the ejector pin according to the chucking
diameter of the part.

WARNING
Always stop the machine before carrying out inspections or adjustments.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
Tighten the exclusive ejector pin and the exclusive push rod firmly. If the
ejector pin becomes loose during machining, it will cause damage to the
machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during this work.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts inside the machine.

Execute reference point return of all axes before starting this work.
Be sure to close the doors when executing reference point return, operations in MDI,
MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.

13-80
 (1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.
(4) Whilst under the supervisor’s control, turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

SETTING and open the cutting room door.

(5) Remove the two knob screws and dismount the cover .
(6) Unscrew the two screws and dismount the cover .
(7) Close the cutting room door.

(8) Press the PATH2 key and the MDI key to light up their lamps, and then
command M121.
(9) Open the cutting room door.
(10)Remove the cap (right-hand screw).
To remove the cap , hook a hook spanner onto the cap and insert the handle into the
toggle holder.
(11) After removing the collet and spring , pull out the exclusive bush together with
the sleeve . The exclusive ejector pin , exclusive push rod and exclusive spring
also come out.
(12)Slightly shift the exclusive spring , and use the hole of the exclusive ejector pin
and the exclusive push rod to replace the exclusive ejector pin .
(13)Close the cutting room door.
(14)Command M120.
(15)Open the cutting room door.
(16)Insert the spring and collet into the sleeve . Then insert in accordance with the
sub spindle key, and mount the cap (right-hand screw).
(17)Mount the cover with the two screws .
(18)Mount the cover with the two screws .
(19)Close the cutting room door, and turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

MACHINING .

To create an ejector pin , refer to “Appendix 6 Consumable Tool List Ejector

pin.”
Dimension D should be at least 1mm smaller than the inner diameter of the sub
collet.

Command [PATH2]

M120: Parts ejector for sub spindle advance/retract

(the cylinder moves forward and then retracts.)
M121: Parts ejector for sub spindle advance (adjust)
(the cylinder moves forward. Use this to replace the ejector pin.)
To retract the cylinder, command M120.

13-81
Alarm

When a parts ejection fails with M120, the machine enters the single block stop state, and
the following alarm is displayed.
2077 PART EJECT ERROR
Parts ejection failed.
The cylinder did not advance to the advance end position.

Program example
M5 ;
T2900 ;
G0 Z40.0 M14 ; Air blow ON
M11 ;
M120 ; Parts ejector for sub spindle advance/retract
M84 ; Parts conveyor ON
M15 ; Air blow OFF
G28 W0 ;
M20 ;

13-82
13-29 Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478, 0M478A 0M478F]

Summary

By using this unit, parts picked-up by sub spindle will be ejected into the chute by driving the
push rod with spring power.

Be sure to use this unit with one of Parts Ejector with Spring (sub collet version)
[0M478A 0M478F].
This unit cannot be used with Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M471 0M475].
This unit cannot be used with Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479].

Specifications

Maximum part length for pick-up ·············80mm

Maximum part projection length ·············· 30mm
Maximum part insertion length················ 50mm
Spring tension ·······································7N 9N

Type No. Specifications Applicable Sub collet

VNC20 Applicable to 0M383, 0M384
A version 0M478A Sub collet VNC20 R20 Applicable to 0M375, 0M376
SR23 Applicable to 0M379
B version 0M478B Sub collet SNC18 SNC18 Applicable to 0M373, 0M374
R16 Applicable to 0M377, 0M378
C version 0M478C Sub collet R16
P16 Applicable to 0M381,0M382
P10 Applicable to 0M372
D version 0M478D Sub collet P10
S10 Applicable to 0M387
S12 Applicable to 0M393, 0M394
E version 0M478E Sub collet S13
S13 Applicable to 0M385, 0M386
F version 0M478F Sub collet T7 T7 Applicable to 0M388

Setting
Carry out the following setting when using this unit.
Keep relay ·······K13-bit0 = 0

13-83
Installation of the parts ejector

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting and adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during adjustment.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts in the machine.

To use Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478], set the keep relay “USE PARTS
EJECTOR WITH AIR CYLINDER” to “NO” on the KEEP RELAY (Conversational
setting) screen.

Refer to section “7-10-3 Keep Relay Conversational Setting Screen” for details.

13-84
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING , and open the cutting room door
while under the supervisor’s control.
(5) Remove the two knob screws and the cover .
(6) Remove the three screws , and then remove the cover .

If Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479] or Parts Ejector (Guide Tube)
[0M471 0M475] is installed in the machine, remove it.

Refer to section “13-27 Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 10mm [0M471],
13mm [0M472], 16mm [0M473], 18mm [0M474], 20mm [0M475], Accessory for Parts
Ejector (Guide Tube) [0M476], Warning Plate (English/Japanese) [0M476A], Parts
Stopper Unit [0G478]” or “13-28 Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479,
0M479A 0M479E]” for details on the instruction above.

(7) Remove the parts ejection detector once.

(8) Confirm that the dimension A of proximity switch has been set to 14.0mm.
If it is not 14.0mm, follow the steps below to set.
Loosen the nut and set the dimension A to 14.0mm.
Tighten the nut with a torque of 20Nm.
(9) Remove the three screws and the holder .
(10) Remove the cover , cap , collet , spring and sleeve from the sub spindle.
Then install the exclusive bush into the sleeve .

Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.

(11) While the exclusive push rod assembly (exclusive spring and push rod ) is passed
through the guide , insert the exclusive push rod assembly into the nut , and fix it
with the four screws .
(12) Insert the exclusive push rod into the exclusive bush , and insert the sleeve into
the sub spindle in accordance with its key.
(13) Install the exclusive ejector pin into the exclusive push rod .

Refer to “ Replacing the ejector pin” in this section for details.

(14) Install the spring , collet , cap and the cover .

13-85
 Refer to section “10-3 Installing and Adjusting the Sub Collet” for details.

(15) Install the holder , on which the plug is attached, with the three screws .
(16) Insert the sleeve into the holder until it comes into contact with the guide ,
making sure that the 17 hole faces the operator side.
(17) Attach the adjustment nut to the sleeve and insert into the holder .
(18) Tighten the adjustment nut until it touches the holder .
Then from that position, tighten the adjustment nut another quarter turn, and fix the
adjustment nut with the screw .
(19) Tighten the two screws to fix the sleeve .
(20) Rotate the sub spindle by hand, and confirm that the sleeve and the guide are not
in contact with each other. If it cannot be rotated by hand, the sleeve and the guide
are in contact with each other. In this case, carry out steps (18) and (19) again.

In steps (17)~(19), ensure that there is a 0.25mm gap between the sleeve and
the guide . Repeat steps (18)~(20) if the gap cannot be ensured.

(21) Install the parts ejecting detector which is completed in step (8).
(22) Install the air blow piping (the joint and the tube ).
(23) Mount the cover with the three screws .
(24) Mount the cover with two the knob screws .
(25) Close the cutting room door and turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

MACHINING .

13-86
Replacing the ejector pin

Replace the ejector pin in accordance with the gripping diameter of the machined part by
following the procedure below.

WARNING
Always stop the machine before inspecting and adjusting the machine.
Be sure to close all the doors before operating the machine.

CAUTION
Tighten the exclusive ejector pin and the exclusive push rod firmly.
If the ejector pin becomes loose during machining, it can cause damage to the
machine.
In order to prevent injury, avoid touching the edges of tools during replacement.

Any work that involves turning the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING
and opening the doors must be carried out while under the supervisor’s control.
Be careful of the moving parts inside the machine.

Always close the doors when executing reference point return, or operations in MDI,
MEMORY or MACRO mode. The operation will not start if a door is open.
Refer to “Appendix 6 Consumable Tool List” for details on the shapes of ejector pin.
Execute the reference point return for all axes before starting this work.

13-87
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready status.
(2) Close the doors of the machine body.
(3) Execute the reference point return of all axes.

(4) Turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to SETTING , and open the cutting room
door while under the supervisor’s control.
(5) Remove the two knob screws and the cover .
(6) Loosen the two screws and remove the cover .
(7) Remove the cap (right-hand screw).

To remove the cap , hook a hook spanner onto the cap and insert the handle into
the toggle holder.

(8) Pull out the exclusive ejector pin to the end of the sub spindle.
(9) Replace the ejector pin . To attach/detach the ejector pin , hook a hook spanner onto the
ejector pin and the push rod .
(10) Insert the spring and collet into the sleeve . Then insert in accordance with the
sub spindle key, and mount the cap (right-hand screw).
(11) Attach the cover with the two screws .
(12) Attach the cover with the two knob screws .
(13) Close the cutting room door and turn the CONTROL MODE key switch to

MACHINING .

To create an ejector pin , refer to “Appendix 6 Consumable Tool List Ejector

pin.”
Dimension D should be at least 1mm smaller than the inner diameter of the sub
collet.

13-88
13-30 Water Separator [0M482]

Summary

This unit removes moisture from the compressed air supplied to the machine, and suppresses
adverse effects on the pneumatic units installed in the machine.

CAUTION
Carry out daily inspection by following the attached operating instructions of the
“MIZUTORI-KUN” (Compressed Air Cleaner).

This unit is not a de-humidifier, and therefore does not remove vaporized moisture.

Specifications

Maximum flow ······························· 500 L/min

Supplying pressure range ················ 0.1MPa 1.0MPa
Piping bore ···································· Rc3/8

13-89
13-31 Stopper [0M497] <Exclusive for Non-Guide Bush Version>

Summary

This unit is to be installed on the side surface of Wedge Type Tool Holder [0M103, 0M104].
Make the end face of the bar come in contact with this unit to position the bar.

Control

By commanding T900, the tool post will select the stopper.

Set the keep relay K09-bit7 to “1”.

Command
Command················· T900

CAUTION
When milling is performed with T3100, be careful of the collision between this
unit and the bar.
Be careful of a collision between the bar and the stopper when commanding
T900 selection. (Refer to Drawing-1.)
Do not give an excessive impact to the stopper. Before unclamping the main
collet to feed the bar, set the clearance between the bar and the stopper to 5mm
or less. (Refer to Drawing-2.)
In order to use T900 as the stopper, be sure to start automatic operation in the
condition of T900 (X≧ 1.0).
T900 selection cannot be commanded while the main collet is unclamped and
M63 is commanded.

13-90
Drawing-1

Drawing-2

13-91
Program pattern

Command the machining condition at mark sections.

For details on G266, G125, #522, #524, #525, #528, #529, #530, #531, refer to
section “8-14-1 Setting of Machining Data, Z1-axis Coordinate System Setting.”

When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the finger-type
O1234
M190 ; If T900 has not been selected, alarm No.1722 will
be displayed
G266 A** W** S** X** Z** F** B** ; Machining data setting
G125 Z1 axis coordinate system setting
G170 ;
G40 G97 M9 ;
G99 ;
M11 ;
G0 Z 0.1 T0 ; Machining amount of workpiece end face 0.1mm
M200 ;
M20 ;
M10 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 T0 M25 ;
;
Front machining
(CUT-OFF)
T100 M3 S#529 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z***.* T1 ;
M82 ;
M600 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M610 ;
M83 ;
;
M80 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ;
/M98 P7000 ;
M81 ;
M5 ;
G0 W 1.0 ; When using left-handed cut-off tool:
W= (Tool width Tip width) 1.0
E.g. W = (12.0 2.0) 1.0 = 11.0
M27 ; Broken cutoff tool detection ON
T900 ; Stopper selection
G0 X[#531+1.0] ;
G98 G1 X1.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 ;
M99 ;

13-92
When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the push/pull-type
O1234
M190 ; If T900 has not been selected, alarm No.1722 will
be displayed
G266 A** W** S** X** Z** F** B** ; Machining data setting
G125 Z1 axis coordinate system setting
G170 ;
G40 G97 M9 ;
G99 ;
M63 ; Automatic bar feeder torque ON
G4 U0.5 ;
M11 ;
G0 Z 0.1 T0 ; Machining amount of workpiece end face 0.1mm
M200 ;
M20 ;
M10 ;
M62 ; Automatic bar feeder torque OFF
G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 T0 M25 ;
;
Front machining
(CUT-OFF)
T100 M3 S#529 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] Z***.* T1 ;
M82 ;
M600 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M610 ;
M83 ;
;
M80 ;
/G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 ;
/M98 P7100 ;
M81 ;
M5 ;
G0 W 1.0 ; When using left-handed cut-off tool:
W= (Tool width Tip width) 1.0
E.g. W = (12.0 2.0) 1.0 = 11.0
M27 ; Broken cut-off tool detection ON
T900 ; Stopper selection
G0 X[#531+1.0] ;
G98 G1 X1.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 ;
M99 ;

13-93
Bar replacement program
When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the finger-type
PATH 1
O7000 ;
G1 U 2.0 F0.015 ;
G0 U2.0 M26 ;
G4 U3.0 ;
M5 ;
M62 ;
M11 ;
M0 ;
M10 ;
M63 ;
G4 U3.0 ;
M25 ;
M3 S#529 ;
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M99 ;

When using the inching version, select “YES” for “ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0” on the
KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen. In addition,
please change M5 to M3 S300.
Command the deburring process as necessary.
Change the value U of the deburring process in accordance with the shape of
the cut-off tool.

13-94
When the feed rod of the automatic bar feeder is the push/pull-type
O7100 ;
M26 ;
M5 ;
G4 U1.0 ;
G0 W 20.0 ;
M63 ; Automatic bar feeder torque ON
M11 ;
G4 U1.0 ;
M0 ; Eject remnant bar to front
M27 ; Remnant bar confirmation
T900; Stopper selection
G0 X[#531+1.0] ;
G98 G1 X1.0 F2000.0 ;
G99 ;
M0 ; Supply new bar
M10 ;
G4 U1.0 ;
M62 ; Automatic bar feeder torque OFF
G0 X[#531+1.0] W 0.5 M25 ;
T100 ;
G99 M3 S#529 ;
G0 X[#531+1.0] W20.5 ; W20.5 = ( W 20.0 0.5)
G1 X#524 F#522 ;
M99 ;

When using the inching version, select “YES” for “ROTATE SPINDLE AT M0” on the
KEEP RELAY (conversational setting) screen. In addition,
please change M5 to M3 S300.

13-95
13-32 Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171]

Summary

This is a cartridge type power-driven tool unit that is for installing onto T3500 of 5-Spindle
Cross Drilling Unit [0M151 or 0M157], and is used to perform thread whirling of the outer
diameter.

Specifications

Maximum machining diameter········· 8 mm (when the angle is 20°)

Maximum height of thread ·············· 2.5 mm (when the angle is 20° and the diameter
is 8 mm)
Maximum spindle speed ·················· 2858 min-1
Range of angle adjustment··············· 20° ~ 0°
Minimum angle graduation ············· 1
Cutter ··········································· Inscribed circle diameter of tool tip: 12 mm

The installing position of this unit is T3500.

Always install Idler Shaft [0M189] onto T3400.
No unit other than Idler Shaft [0M189] can be installed onto T3400 when using this
unit.
The exclusive cutter holder and cutter are required for this unit.
Be sure to use this unit with Coolant Piping for Thread Whirling [0M495], in order to
supply coolant to the machining point.

13-96
13-33 Polygon Machining Unit [0M191]

Summary

This is a cartridge-type power-driven tool unit that is installed onto T3300 or T3400 of
5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M151 or 0M157], and used for polygon machining.
Polygon machining is possible by rotating the material and cutter by a fixed ratio.
If the rotation ratio is set to 1:2, two planes (180 degrees) will be machined by one blade.
In this case, the machined surfaces will become slightly convex.
If the rotation ratio is set to 1:3, three planes (120 degrees) will be machined by one blade.
In this case, the machined surfaces will become slightly concave. Thus, in polygon machining,
a strict plane cannot be obtained on a finished surface.

Specifications

Polygon cutter ································ Equivalent to SM-3 (DIETERLE)

Maximum spindle speed ·················· 6000 min-1

The installation position of this unit is T3300 or T3400.

13-97
13-34 Main Collet SR23 [66351] <Exclusive for 20R Guide Bush Version>,
[0M359] <Exclusive for 20R Non-Guide Bush Version>

Summary

This unit is the SR23 type main collet.

When using this unit, select one of the following units below.
Stationary Guide Bush VNC20 [0G321]
Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush VNC20 [1L301].

Specifications

Maximum machining diameter ·········· 23mm

Collet type ······································ SR23 (STAR MICRONICS standard product)

Collets with an internal diameter of over 21mm are not available in carbide alloy.
Only high speed steel is available.
Please use the oversized version of guide bush VNC20 (STAR MICRONICS
standard product) when the bar diameter is larger than 20mm.
The R20 version cannot be used. (Not required for Non-Guide Bush Version)
Since the minimum internal diameter of the main spindle is 24mm, use a finger
chuck with an outer diameter of 23mm or less. Therefore, step turning is
necessary at the rear end of the bar.
When using a finger chuck with outer diameter of 22.5mm or larger, adjust the
position of the no bar stock switch so that the finger chuck will not go into the collet.
Therefore, the remnant bar length will be longer.

Specifications

MACHINING DATA screen: BAR DIAMETER [#531] setting

Metric version: ············· 23.000
Inching version: ··········· 0.9055

13-98
13-35 Sub Collet SR23 [0M379]

Summary

This is the SR23 type sub collet.

When using this unit, select one of the following units below.
Stationary Guide Bush VNC20 [0G321]
Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush VNC20 [1L301].

Specifications

Maximum machining diameter ·········· 23mm

Collet type ······································ SR23 (STAR MICRONICS standard product)

Collets with an internal diameter of over 21mm are not available in carbide alloy.
Only high speed steel is available.
Parts Ejector (Guide Tube) for Sub Collet 20mm [0M475] cannot be used when
machining the parts with outer diameter of over 20mm.

Refer to “Appendix 6 Consumable Tool List Ejector pin” for details on the shape of
ejector pin.

13-99
13-36 Oil Hole Drill Version for Sleeve Holder [67126]

Summary

This unit is for performing drilling by installing the oil hole drill onto the 4-spindle sleeve
holder.

This unit includes the drill sleeve and piping.

Always use together with Coolant Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466].
Only one oil hole drill can be installed. Detach all the coolant nozzles from Coolant
Piping for Sleeve Holder [0M466].
Plug all holes with closer plugs except for the hole connected to the drill sleeve.
If coolant is discharged from a position other than the drill sleeve, coolant cannot be
discharged from the drill sleeve.
Bend and cut the bronze pipe appropriately.
Depending on the conditions of use, such as the coolant pressure, drill diameter or
drilling depth etc., the oil hole drill may not properly perform the function of removing
all cutting chips.

Specification

Maximum coolant pressure ······ 6.9MPa

Coolant supply areas ··············· T1100 T1400
Collet type ····························· AR16OH (by ALPS TOOL)
Shank diameter ······················ 3~ 10

Command

Coolant 2 for sleeve holder ON ·· M1005 (common use of PATH1 and 2)

Coolant 2 for sleeve holder OFF M1006 (common use of PATH1 and 2)

13-100
13-37 Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit [67127, 0R123]

Summary

This unit is for performing drilling by installing the oil hole drill onto the back 4-spindle unit.

This unit includes the drill sleeve and piping.

Always use together with Coolant Piping for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467].
Only one oil hole drill can be installed. Detach all the coolant nozzles from Coolant
Piping for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467].
Plug all holes with closer plugs except for the hole connected to the drill sleeve. If
coolant is discharged from a position other than the drill sleeve, coolant cannot be
discharged from the drill sleeve.
Bend and cut the bronze pipe appropriately.
Depending on the conditions of use, such as the coolant pressure, drill diameter or
drilling depth etc., the oil hole drill may not properly perform the function of removing
all cutting chips.

When using [67127]

13-101
 When using [0R123]

Specification

Maximum coolant pressure ······ 6.9MPa

Coolant supply areas··············· T2100~T2400 (when using [67127])
T2200~T2400 (when using [0R123])
Collet type ····························· AR16OH (by ALPS TOOL)
Shank diameter ····················· 3~ 10

Command

Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit ON·········· M1007 (common use of PATH1 and 2)
Coolant 2 for back 4-spindle unit OFF ········ M1008 (common use of PATH1 and 2)

13-102
13-38 Jig for G.B. VNC 20 [1L421], R20 [1L422], R16, P16 [1L423],
S13[1L427], S12 [1H429], S10,P10 [1H431], T7 [1H432],
Jig for G.B. Body [1L426, 1L431]

Summary
This unit is used for making the switch between Non-guide bush version and Guide bush
version easier.

Specification

Applicable
Type No. Name Applicable unit
Type
Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush VNC20
1L421 Jig for G.B. VNC20
[1L311]
1L422 Jig for G.B. R20 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush R20 [1L312]
Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush R16 [1L313]
1L423 Jig for G.B. R16, P16
SB-16R/20R Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush P16 [1L314]
Guide Bush Body
(exclusive for stationary guide bush) [1L329]
1L426 Jig for G.B. Body
* When using Stationary Guide Bush
[0G321, 48321 48324]
1L427 Jig for G.B. S13 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush S13 [1L316]
1H429 Jig for G.B. S12 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush S12 [1L317]
Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush S10 [1L318]
1H431 Jig for G.B. S10, P10
Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush P10 [1L315]
SB-12R 1L432 Jig for G.B. T7 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush T7 [1L319]
Guide Bush Body
(exclusive for stationary guide bush) [1L328]
1L431 Jig for G.B. Body
* When using Stationary Guide Bush
[1L321, 1L322, 69321 69323]

13-103
13-39 CE Marking Version (Accessories in Compliance with the CE
Machinery Directive or Korean Regulation: Self-Regulatory Safety
Confirmation) [0M902]

<When using this machine in any of the EU member countries>

This unit must be used with Coolant Flow Detector [0M459], Transformer CE
Marking Version [0T497] and Cable for Transformer CE Marking Version [0T488].
<When using this machine in Korea>
This unit must be used with Coolant Flow Detector [0M459] and Warning plate
(Korean) [28814].

Summary

These accessories are for making the machine specifications comply with the CE Machinery
Directive or Korean regulation (Self-regulatory safety confirmation).
Make sure that these are installed when using the machine in any of EU member countries or
Korea. When installing these accessories, the normal adjustment procedure of the filter
regulator cannot be carried out.

13-104
Adjustment

Always obtain approval from the machine supervisor before inspecting or adjusting
the machine.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.

Loosen the screws (2pcs. each) and move the fixture downwards. Then start
adjustment.
After the adjustment, move the fixture upwards and fix it with the screws (2pcs. each).

Confirm that the pressure adjustment cannot be carried out with the pressure
adjustment handle after fixing the fixture .

Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure” for
details on adjusting the filter regulator.

13-105
13-40 Safety Relay Module Version [0M932]

This specification must be used together with Coolant Flow Detector [0M459].

Summary

These accessories are for making the machine specifications comply with GB regulations.
Make sure that these are installed when using the machine in China.
When installing these accessories, the normal adjustment procedure of the filter regulator
cannot be carried out.

13-106
Adjustment

Always obtain approval from the machine supervisor before inspecting or adjusting
the machine.
Place a sign etc. so that the inspection and adjustment work being carried out can
be clearly recognized by others.

Loosen the screws (2pcs. each) and move the fixture downwards. Then start
adjustment.
After the adjustment, move the fixture upwards and fix it with the screws (2pcs. each).

Confirm that the pressure adjustment cannot be carried out with the pressure
adjustment handle after fixing the fixture .

Refer to section “12-1-5 Inspection and Adjustment of the Pneumatic Pressure” for
details on adjusting the filter regulator.

13-107
13-41 Expanded I/O Module Unit [0R449]

Summary

This specification is for adding I/O inside the cabinet.

Specifications

Additional I/O ···························· 24 inputs, 16 outputs

DO output ································· Max. 200mA per output

13-108
13-42 Program Utility Jr. (PU-Jr) [72592]

Summary

This program-editing software is for the user’s personal computer.

The applicable OS of this device is Windows by Microsoft Corp.

When installing a new OS, the issuing of a new password by STAR MICRONICS will
be required. The user can acquire a maximum of three passwords including the first
one at purchase. If more passwords are required from the fourth time onwards,
please purchase a PU-Jr. additional license [932 ZZ ZZZ]. One password is issued
per license.

13-109
13-43 PU-Jr. USB Protection Key [72593]

Summary

This is hardware for using the Program utility Jr. (PU-Jr.) [72592].
By attaching this hardware to the USB port of the PC, it will be possible to use PU-Jr.
without acquiring a password.

Please use this hardware with PU-Jr. [72592].

When using PU-Jr., one PU-Jr. USB Protection Key will be required per PC.
It is necessary to use a PC with a USB port in order to use this hardware.
This hardware can be used even when the PC is changed.

13-110
13-44 RS232C Interface Version [72801]
RS232C Interface Version (with Cover) [72803]

Summary

This is the interface unit for the communication between the CNC unit and an external
device by RS232C.
Carry out the setting of I/O channel.

Specification
RS232C Interface Version [72801]: ···················· without the cover for protecting the
connector
RS232C Interface Version (with cover) [72803]: ··· with the cover for protecting the connector

Refer to section “7-1-1 Setting Screen” for details on I/O channel setting.

13-111
MEMO

13-112
Appendix 1 Major Dimensional Drawings

Major dimensional drawing-1

A-1
Major dimensional drawing-2

Automatic bar feeder layout dimensions

Length Maximum bar A (mm)

Type diameter 2.5M type 3M type 4M type
Z-16 20 3386 3886 4886
ASRX-20AS 20 3386 3886 4886
OS20S 20 3560 4060
OS203E 20 3644 4094 4949

When Steady Rest Unit Cover [0M447] is used, 67mm is added to each dimension
A in the list above.

A-2
Appendix 2 Control Axis Configuration Diagram

Control axis configuration diagram -1

A-3
Control axis configuration diagram -2

A-4
Appendix 3 Tool Numbers

In this manual, tool positions are indicated by the following tool numbers according to the tool
selection commands.
Tool holders, power-driven tools, 4-spindle sleeve holders

Tool positions are indicated by a T code followed by 3-digit (only tools), or 4-digit. The first
one or two digit of the tool number is indicated by arrows in the figures below.
(1) Combination of Wedge Type 6-Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103], Stopper [0M497],
5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M151] and 4-Spindle SleeveHolder [0M111]

(2) Combination of Wedge Type 6-Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103], Stopper [0M497],
4-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M152] and 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M112]

A-5
(3) Combination of Wedge Type 7-Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104], Stopper [0M497],
5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M151] and 4-Spindle SleeveHolder [0M111]

(4) Combination of Wedge Type 7-Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104], Stopper [0M497],
4-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit [0M152] and 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M112]

A-6
(5) Combination of Wedge Type 6-Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103],
High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit [0M157] and 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111]

(6) Combination of Wedge Type 6-Station Tool Holder 12mm [0M103],

High Speed 5sp Cross Drill Unit [0M156] and 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M112]

A-7
(7) Combination of Wedge Type 7-Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104],
High Speed 5sp Cross Drill Unit [0M157] and 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111]

(8) Combination of Wedge Type 7-Station Tool Holder 10mm [0M104],

High Speed 5sp Cross Drill Unit [0M156] and 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M112]

A-8
<5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151]>
(1) When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or
High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] is installed in T3400

(2) When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face
Drill Unit [0M158] is installed in T3500 for front (back) drilling

A-9
 (3) When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face
Drill Unit [0M158] is installed at T3500 for cross drilling

<High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16 [0M157]>

(1) When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or
High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] is installed in T3400

A-10
(2) When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face
Drill Unit [0M158] is installed in T3500 for front (back) drilling

(3) When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face
Drill Unit [0M158] is installed at T3500 for cross drilling

A-11
<Back attachment>
(1) Standard

(2) When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is installed

A-12
Appendix 4 List of Tool Holders

Tool holders

Tool holders
Type No. Name Remarks
12 mm, 1/2 inch
0M103 Wedge Type 6-Station Tool Holder 12mm Stopper [0M497] can be attached
on T900.
10 mm, 3/8 inch
0M104 Wedge Type 7-Station Tool Holder 10mm Stopper [0M497] can be attached
on T900.

15mm overhang tool holders

Type No. Name Remarks
0G102 Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 12mm For [0M103]
48105 Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 10mm For [0M104]

The installation position of Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 12mm
[0G102] is T400 or T500.
The installation positions of Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 10mm
[48105] are T400 T600. However, when installing [48105] into two positions,
attach them to T400 and T600.

A-13
Sleeve holder

Sleeve holders
Type No. Name Remarks
Fit position: T3500
0M111 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder (cartridge type) Always use with either
[0M151 or 0M157].
Always use with either
0M112 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder
[0M152 or 0M156].

Sleeves for 4-spindle sleeve holder

Type No. Name Remarks
30121 Drill Sleeve ER11
30122 Drill Sleeve ER11 for Deep
30124 Drill Sleeve ER16
30125 Drill Sleeve ER16 for Deep
33121 Drill Sleeve ER20
42122 Counter Face Drill Sleeve ER16
42127 Counter Face Drill Sleeve ER16
46121 Counter Face Drill Sleeve ER Front ER16/Back ER11
30141 Boring Sleeve 6 mm
30142 Boring Sleeve 8 mm
30143 Boring Sleeve 10 mm
41144 Boring Sleeve1/4 inch
30144 Boring Sleeve 5/16 inch
30145 Boring Sleeve 3/8 inch
67126 Oil Hole Drill Version for Sleeve Holder

When Drill Sleeve ER20 [33121] is installed, no sleeves can be installed in the
positions adjacent to [33121].
When using Oil Hole Drill Version for Sleeve Holder [67126], use Coolant Piping for
Sleeve Holder [0M466] together.

Maximum chucking diameter: ············· ER11: 7mm

ER16: 10mm
ER20: 13mm

A-14
Cross drilling unit

Cross drilling units

Type No. Name Remarks

0M151 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16
0M152 4-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER16 Always use with [0M112].
Always use with [0M112,
0M156 High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11
0M156A].
0M157 High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16

A cartridge type power-driven tool unit cannot be installed into 4-Spindle Cross
Drilling Unit ER16 [0M152] and High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11 [0M156].
When High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11 [0M156] is used, use with High
Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit TYPE E/N/G [0M156A].

Cartridge-type power driven tool units <for 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16
[0M151] and High Speed 5sp Cross Drill Unit ER11/16 [0M157]>
Type No. Name Remarks
33150 Milling Unit ER16 Fit position: T3300 T3500
57155 Milling Unit ER16 Fit position: T3300 T3500
57163 Milling Unit ER11 Fit position: T3300 T3500
Fit position: T3400, T3500
0M155 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit
Front: ER16 / Back: ER11
Fit position: T3400, T3500
0M158 High speed 3sp. counter face drill unit
Front: ER11 / Back: ER11
54153 Slotting Unit 50B ( 50 12.7) Fit position: T3300
54154 Slotting Unit 50A ( 50 13) Fit position: T3300
0M191 Polygon Machining Unit Fit position: T3300, T3400
Fit position: T3500
0M171 Thread Whirling Unit / Outer
Always use with [0M189].
Fit position: T3400
0M189 Idler Shaft
Use with [0M171].

A-15
 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill
Unit [0M158] can be installed in T3500 for front drilling or cross drilling.
Both 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Units [0M155] and High Speed 3sp. Counter
Face Drill Units [0M158] cannot be installed in T3400 and T3500 for front drilling at
the same time.
When Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] is used, no tool unit can be installed in T3400.
When Slotting Unit [54153, 54154] is used, no cartridge type power-driven tool unit
can be installed in T3500. Only 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder [0M111] can be installed in
T3500.
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is installed in T3300, 3-Spindle Counter
Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158]
cannot be installed in T3400.
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is installed in T3400, 3-Spindle Counter
Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] can
be installed in T3500, provided that it is used only for cross drilling.
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is installed, there are restrictions on the
machining range with the tools installed in the positions adjacent to [0M191].
When Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171] is used, it is necessary to install Idler
Shaft [0M189] into T3400.

Maximum chucking diameter: ············· ER11: 7mm

ER16: 10mm

The following tool units can also be installed onto the cartridge type power-driven tool
units “5-spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16 [0M151] and High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill
Unit ER11/16 [0M157].”

CAUTION
The following tool units can be used as the front drilling unit, but cannot be used
as the cross drilling unit.

Type No. Name Remarks

54151 2 Spindle Front Drilling Unit Fit position: T3400, T3500
66161 3 Spindle Front Drilling Unit Fit position: T3400, T3500
Fit position: T3400, T3500
66159 2 Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit
Front: ER11/Back: ER11
Fit position: T3400, T3500
67161 3 Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit
Front: ER11/Back: ER11
57151 Front Drilling Unit ER16 Fit position: T3400, T3500
Fit position: T3400, T3500
57156 Counter Face Drilling Unit
Front: ER11/Back: ER11
57157 Front Drilling Unit ER11 Fit position: T3400, T3500

A-16
Sleeve for back 4-spindle unit

Sleeves for back 4-spindle unit <stationary tool>

Type No. Name Remarks
54121 Drill Sleeve ER16
10104 Drill Sleeve ER16
57171 Boring Sleeve 4mm
10106 Boring Sleeve 4mm
54171 Boring Sleeve 6mm
10107 Boring Sleeve 6mm
54172 Boring Sleeve 8mm
10108 Boring Sleeve 8mm
54173 Boring Sleeve 10mm
10109 Boring Sleeve 10mm
54175 Boring Sleeve1/4inch
10112 Boring Sleeve1/4inch
54176 Boring Sleeve 5/16inch
10114 Boring Sleeve 5/16inch
54177 Boring Sleeve 3/8inch
10113 Boring Sleeve 3/8inch
67127 Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit
0R123 Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit

When using Oil Hole Drill Version for Back Unit [67127], [0R123], use Coolant
Piping for Back 4-Spindle Unit [0M467] together.

Sleeves are options.

Maximum chucking diameter: ············· ER16: 10mm

A-17
Sleeves for back 4-spindle unit <power-driven tool>
Type No. Name Remarks
54161 Milling Unit ER11
57161 Milling Unit ER16
0R161 Milling Unit ER16
0E151 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit Exclusive for T21
69165 Slotting Unit 45B ( 45 12.7) Exclusive for T23
69166 Slotting Unit 30A ( 30 6) Exclusive for T23

When 3-Spindle Back Drilling Unit [0E151] is used, there are the restrictions shown
below on the tool units that can be installed in 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit
ER11/16 [0M151] and High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16 [0M157].
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is used at T3300, T3500 cannot be
used.
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is used at T3300, there are restrictions
on the machining range of T3400.
When Polygon Machining Unit [0M191] is used at T3400, there are restrictions
on the machining range of T3500.
When 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit [0M155] or High Speed 3sp.
Counter Face Drill Unit [0M158] is used at T3400, there are restrictions on the
machining range of T3500.
When Slotting Unit [69165, 69166] is used, there are the restrictions shown below.
Milling unit [57161, 0R161] cannot be installed in T2200 and T2400.
Drill Sleeve [10104] and Boring Sleeves [10106 10109, 10112 10114] cannot
be installed in T2200 and T2400.
There are restrictions on the machining range of the tools on T2200 and
T2400.

To use the power-driven tool for back 4-spindle unit, Drive Unit for Power Driven
Tool Type B [0M457] is required.
Maximum chucking diameter: ············· ER11: 7mm
ER16: 10mm

A-18
Appendix 5 Relational Dimension Drawings of Tool Holders
The drawings below illustrate the relational dimensions of X1=0.0, Y1=0.0, X2=0.0,
Z2=0.0 unless otherwise specified.
For Non-guide bush version, the relational dimension of Z1=50.0.

Tool holders

Name Wedge Type 6-Station Tool Holder 12mm

Type No. 0M103
Application Turning, cutting-off, stopper
1/2 inch tools can be used.
Remarks Stopper [0M497] can be attached to T900.
Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Wedge Type 7-station Tool Holder 10mm

Type No. 0M104
Application Turning, cutting-off, stopper
3/8 inch tools can be used.
Remarks Stopper [0M497] can be attached to T900.
Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-19
15mm overhang tool holders

For 0M103
Name Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 12mm
Type No. 0G102
Fit position T400 or T500
Application Threading, grooving, boring
1/2 inch tools can be used.
Remarks
Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

For 0M104
Name Wedge Type 15mm Overhang Tool Holder 10mm
Type No. 48105
T400, T500, T600
Fit position
(Restricted to T400 and T600 when using 2 tools)
Application Threading, grooving, boring
3/8 inch tools can be used.
Remarks
Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-20
Cross drilling units
Name 5-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER11/16
Type No. 0M151
ER11 (stationary 2 tools): max. 7
Shank diameter
ER16 (cartridge type): max 10
Application Cross drilling/milling/tapping
ER11 (stationary 2 tools): max. 8000min-1
Spindle speed
ER16 (cartridge type): max 6000min-1
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name 4-Spindle Cross Drilling Unit ER16

Type No. 0M152 Shank diameter Max. 10
Application Cross drilling/milling/tapping
Spindle speed max. 6000min-1
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-21
Cross drilling units
Name High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11
Type No. 0M156 Shank diameter Max. 7
Application Cross drilling/milling/tapping
Spindle speed max. 10000min-1
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name High Speed 5sp. Cross Drill Unit ER11/16

Type No. 0M157
ER11 (stationary 2 tools): max. 7
Shank diameter
ER16 (cartridge type): max 10
Application Cross drilling/milling/tapping
ER11 (stationary 2 tools): max. 10000min-1
Spindle speed
ER16 (cartridge type): max 6000min-1
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-22
Sleeve holders
Name 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder
Type No. 0M111
Exclusive for 0M151, 0M157
Remarks
Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name 4-Spindle Sleeve Holder

Type No. 0M112
Exclusive for 0M152, 0M156
Remarks
Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-23
Cartridge type power-driven tool units
Name Milling Unit ER16
Type No. 33150 Shank diameter Max. 10mm
Application Cross drilling/milling/tapping Fit position T3300 T3500
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Milling Unit ER16

Type No. 57155 Shank diameter Max. 10mm
Application Cross drilling/milling/tapping Fit position T3300 T3500
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Milling Unit ER11

Type No. 57163 Shank diameter Max. 7mm
Application Cross drilling/tapping/milling Fit position T3300 T3500
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-24
Cartridge type power-driven tool units

Name 3-Spindle Counter Face Drilling Unit

ER16 (front): max. 10mm
Type No. 0M155 Shank diameter
ER11 (back): max. 7mm
Cross drilling/ For cross drilling: T3500
Application Fit position
milling/tapping For front drilling: T3400, T3500
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-25
Cartridge type power-driven tool unit

Name High Speed 3sp. Counter Face Drill Unit

Type No. 0M158 Shank diameter ER11: max. 7mm
Cross drilling/ For cross drilling: T3500
Application Fit position
milling/tapping For front drilling: T3400, T3500
Spindle speed Max. 10000 min-1
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-26
Cartridge type power-driven tool units

Name Slotting Unit 50B

Type No. 54153 Spindle speed Max. 2244 min-1
Application Slotting, 2-side milling Fit position T3300
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Slotting Unit 50A

Type No. 54154 Spindle speed Max. 2244 min-1
Application Slotting, 2-side milling Fit position T3300
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-27
Cartridge type power-driven tool units

Name Polygon Machining Unit

Type No. 0M191 Fit position T3300, T3400
Application Polygon machining Spindle speed max. 6000min-1
Remarks Dimension A: SB-12R 1.0mm, SB-16R/20R 2.0mm

A-28
Cartridge type power-driven tool units

Name Thread Whirling Unit / Outer

Type No. 0M171 Fit position T3500
Application Outer diameter thread whirling ( 20°~0°against the axis)
Spindle speed max. 2858min-1
Remarks Idler Shaft [0M189] is required.

A-29
Cartridge type power-driven tool unit

Name Idler Shaft

Type No. 0M189 Fit position T3400
Remarks Use with Thread Whirling Unit / Outer [0M171].

A-30
Sleeves for 4-spindle sleeve holder

Dimension A in the following relational dimension drawings :

SB-12R 1.0mm, SB16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Drill Sleeve ER11 Name Drill Sleeve ER11 for deep
Type No. 30121 Type No. 30122
Shank diameter max. 7 Shank diameter max. 7
Fit position T1100 T1400 Fit position T1100 T1400

Name Drill Sleeve ER16 Name Drill Sleeve ER16 for deep
Type No. 30124 Type No. 30125
Shank diameter max. 10 Shank diameter max. 10
Fit position T1100 T1400 Fit position T1100 T1400

Oil Hole Drill Version

Name Drill Sleeve ER20 Name
for Sleeve Holder
Type No. 33121 Type No. 67126
Shank diameter max. 13 Shank diameter max. 10
Fit position T1100 T1400 Fit position T1100 T1400

A-31
Sleeves for 4-spindle sleeve holder

Dimension A in the following relational dimension drawings :

SB-12R 1.0mm, SB16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Counter Face Drill Sleeve ER16

Type No. 42122 Shank diameter Front: max. 10, Back: max. 10

Name Counter Face Drill Sleeve ER16

Type No. 42127 Shank diameter Front: max. 10, Back: max. 10

Name Counter Face Drill Sleeve ER

Type No. 46121 Shank diameter Front: max. 10, Back: max. 7

A-32
Sleeves for 4-spindle sleeve holder

Dimension A in the following relational dimension drawings :

SB-12R 1.0mm, SB16R/20R 2.0mm

Name Boring Sleeve 6mm Name Boring Sleeve 8mm

Type No. 30141 Type No. 30142
Shank diameter 6 Shank diameter 8
Fit position T1100 T1400 Fit position T1100 T1400

Name Boring Sleeve 10mm Name Boring Sleeve1/4inch

Type No. 30143 Type No. 41144
Shank diameter 10 Shank diameter 1/4inch
Fit position T1100 T1400 Fit position T1100 T1400

Name Boring Sleeve 5/16inch Name Boring Sleeve 3/8inch

Type No. 30144 Type No. 30145
Shank diameter 5/16inch Shank diameter 3/8inch
Fit position T1100 T1400 Fit position T1100 T1400

A-33
Sleeves for back 4-spindle unit Stationary tool

Name Drill Sleeve ER16 Name Drill Sleeve ER16

Type No. 54121 Type No. 10104
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

Name Boring Sleeve 4mm Name Boring Sleeve 4mm

Type No. 57171 Type No. 10106
Shank diameter 4mm Shank diameter 4mm
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

Name Boring Sleeve 6mm Name Boring Sleeve 6mm

Type No. 54171 Type No. 10107
Shank diameter 6mm Shank diameter 6mm
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

A-34
Stationary tools for back 4-spindle unit Stationary tool

Name Boring Sleeve 8mm Name Boring Sleeve 8mm

Type No. 54172 Type No. 10108
Shank diameter 8mm Shank diameter 8mm
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

Name Boring Sleeve 10mm Name Boring Sleeve 10mm

Type No. 54173 Type No. 10109
Shank diameter 10mm Shank diameter 10mm
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

Name Boring Sleeve 1/4inch Name Boring Sleeve 1/4inch

Type No. 54175 Type No. 10112
Shank diameter 1/4inch Shank diameter 1/4inch
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

A-35
Stationary tools for back 4-spindle unit Stationary tool

Name Boring Sleeve 5/16inch Name Boring Sleeve 5/16inch

Type No. 54176 Type No. 10114
Shank diameter 5/16inch Shank diameter 5/16inch
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

Name Boring Sleeve 3/8inch Name Boring Sleeve 3/8inch

Type No. 54177 Type No. 10113
Shank diameter 3/8inch Shank diameter 3/8inch
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

Oil Hole Drill Version Oil Hole Drill Version

Name Name
for Back Unit for Back Unit
Type No. 67127 Type No. 0R123
Shank diameter max. 10mm Shank diameter max. 10mm
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2200 T2400

A-36
Power-driven tools for back 4-spindle unit

Name Milling Unit ER11 Name Milling Unit ER16

Type No. 54161 Type No. 57161
Fit position T2100 T2400 Fit position T2100 T2400

Name Milling Unit ER16 Name Back 3-Spindle Drilling Unit

Type No. 0R161 Type No. 0E151
Fit position T2200 T2400 Fit position T2100

A-37
Power-driven tools for back 4-spindle unit

Name Adjustable Slotting Unit 45B

Type No. 69165 Fit position T2300
Spindle speed max. 3333min -1

Name Adjustable Slotting Unit 30A

Type No. 69166 Fit position T2300
Spindle speed max. 3333min -1

A-38
Appendix 6 Consumable Tool List

Guide bush

Stationary guide bush units <SB-12R Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>
Type No. Name Remarks
1L328 Guide Bush Body
1L321 Stationary Guide Bush Unit S13 Neukomm: Type B Art No.450.001
1L322 Stationary Guide Bush Unit S12 Neukomm: Type B Art No.166.001
69321 Stationary Guide Bush Unit T7 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 5.001
69322 Stationary Guide Bush Unit S10 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 8.001
69323 Stationary Guide Bush Unit P10

Be sure to use Stationary Guide Bush Unit [1L321, 1L322, 69321, 69322, 69323]
with Guide Bush Body [1L328].

Maximum machining diameter ······· S13: 15 mm (round)

S12: 12 mm (round)
S10: 10 mm (round)
P10: 10 mm (round)
T7: 7 mm (round)

A-39
Stationary guide bush units <SB-16R/20R Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>
Type No. Name Remarks
1L329 Guide Bush Body
Guide Bush Body
1L329A Use with [0G321] and [1L329].
(for stationary guide bush VNC20)
Guide Bush Body Use with [1L329] and either [48321,
1L329B
(for stationary guide bush P16) 48323 or 48324].
Neukomm: Type B Art No. 450.001
48321 Stationary Guide Bush Unit S13
Use with [1L329] and [1L329B].
Neukomm: Type B Art No. 450.001
48322 Stationary Guide Bush Unit R16
Use with [1L329].
48323 Stationary Guide Bush Unit P10 Use with [1L329] and [1L329B].
48324 Stationary Guide Bush Unit P16 Use with [1L329] and [1L329B].
STAR MICRONICS standard product
0G321 Stationary Guide Bush Unit VNC20 (C16 or equivalent)
Use with [1L329] and [1L329A].

Combination list
Type Guide bush body Stationary guide bush Guide bush body (Work tool)
P10 1L329 48323 1L329B
S13 1L329 48321 1L329B
P16 1L329 48324 1L329B
R16 1L329 48322
VNC20 1L329 0G321 1L329A

Be sure to use Stationary Guide Bush Unit P16 [48321, 48323, 48324] with Guide
Bush Body [1L329] and [1L329B].
Be sure to use Stationary Guide Bush Unit R16 [48322] with Guide Bush Body
[1L329].
Be sure to use Stationary Guide Bush Unit VNC20 [0G321] with Guide Bush Body
[1L329] and [1L329A].

Maximum machining diameter ······· P10: 11 mm (round)

S13: 15 mm (round)
S12: 12 mm (round)
R16: 16 mm (round)
P16: 16 mm (round)
VNC20: 20 mm (round)

A-40
Revolving guide bush units <SB-12R Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>
Type No. Name Remarks
1L315 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush P10
STAR MICRONICS standard product
1L316 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush S13
(Equivalent to C16)
1L317 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush S12 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 166.001
1L318 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush S10 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 8.001
1L319 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush T7 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 5.001

Maximum machining diameter: S13: ······ 13 mm (round)

S12:······ 12 mm (round)
P10:······ 10 mm (round)
S10:······ 10 mm (round)
T7: ······· 7 mm (round)

Revolving guide bush units <SB-16R/20R Exclusive for Guide Bush Version>
Type No. Name Remarks
STAR MICRONICS standard product
1L311 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush VNC20
(Equivalent to C16)
1L312 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush R20 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 22.001
1L313 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush R16 Neukomm: Type B Art No. 39.001
1L314 Synchr. Revolving Guide Bush P16

When the bar diameter is larger than 20mm, use the oversized version of guide
bush VNC 20 (Star domestic standard article). R20 type guide bush cannot be
used.

Maximum machining diameter:

VNC20: 20 mm (round), 16 mm (hexagonal), 12 mm (square)
R20: ···· 20 mm (round), 16 mm (hexagonal), 12 mm (square)
R16: ···· 16 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
P16: ····· 16 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)

A-41
Collets

Main collets <SB-12R>

Type No. Name Remarks
1L351 Main Collet S13
Schaublin: Type F18 Art No.85
1L352 Main Collet for Profile Barstock S13
1L353 Main Collet S12
Schaublin: Type F16 Art No.1076
1L354 Main Collet for Profile Barstock S12
1L355 Main Collet S10
Schaublin: Type F15 Art No.580
1L358 Main Collet for Profile Barstock S10
1L356 Main Collet P10
1L357 Main Collet T7 Schaublin: Type F10 Art No.86

Always use a main collet with seals attached to the splits for the Non-guide bush
version.

Maximum chucking diameter:

S13: ····· 13 mm (round), 11 mm (hexagonal), 9 mm (square)
S12: ····· 12 mm (round), 10 mm (hexagonal), 8 mm (square)
S10: ····· 10 mm (round)
P10: ····· 11 mm (round)
T7: ······ 7 mm (round)

Main collets <SB-16R/20R>

Type No. Name Remarks
STAR MICRONICS standard
product
0M359 Main Collet SR23 Collets with an internal diameter
of over 21 mm are not available in
carbide alloy. High Speed steel only.
0M355 Main Collet VNC20
STAR MICRONICS standard
Main Collet for Profile Barstock
0M356 product
VNC20
0M353 Main Collet R20
Schaublin: Type F25 Art No.64
0M354 Main Collet for Profile Barstock R20
0M357 Main Collet SNC18
STAR MICRONICS standard
Main Collet for Profile Barstock
0M358 product
SNC18
0M351 Main Collet R16 Schaublin: Type F20 Art No.87
0M352 Main Collet for Profile Barstock R16 (S13 thick bore)
0M366 Main Collet P16
0M367 Main Collet for Profile Barstock P16
0M371 Main Collet P10

Always use a main collet with seals attached to the splits for the Non-guide bush
version.

A-42
Maximum machining diameter:
SR23: ·· 23 mm (round)
VNC20: 20 mm (round), 16 mm (hexagonal), 12 mm (square)
R20: ···· 20 mm (round), 16 mm (hexagonal), 12 mm (square)
SNC18··· 18 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
R16: ···· 16 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
P16: ····· 16 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
P10: ······ 11 mm (round)

A-43
Sub collets
Type No. Name Remarks
STAR MICRONICS standard product
Collets with an internal diameter
of over 21 mm are not available in
0M379 Sub Collet SR23 carbide alloy. High speed steel only.
Parts with outer diameter of over
20mm cannot be ejected by Parts
ejector with guide tube.
0M383 Sub Collet VNC20
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock STAR MICRONICS standard product
0M384
VNC20
0M375 Sub Collet R20
Schaublin: Type F25 Art No.64
0M376 Sub Collet for Profile Barstock R20
0M373 Sub Collet SNC18
STAR MICRONICS standard
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock
0M374 product
SNC18
0M377 Sub Collet R16 Schaublin: Type F20 Art No.87
0M378 Sub Collet for Profile Barstock R16 (S13 thick bore)
0M381 Sub Collet P16
0M382 Sub Collet for Profile Barstock P16
0M385 Sub Collet S13
Schaublin: Type F18 Art No.85
0M386 Sub Collet for Profile Barstock S13
0M393 Sub Collet S12
Schaublin: Type F16 Art No.1076
0M394 Sub Collet for Profile Barstock S12
0M372 Sub Collet P10
0M387 Sub Collet S10 Schaublin: Type F15 Art No.580
0M388 Sub Collet T7 Schaublin: Type F10 Art No.86

Maximum machining diameter:

SR23: ·· 23 mm (round)
VNC20: 20 mm (round), 16 mm (hexagonal), 12 mm (square)
R20: ···· 20 mm (round), 16 mm (hexagonal), 12 mm (square)
SNC18··· 18 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
R16: ···· 16 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
P16: ····· 16 mm (round), 14 mm (hexagonal), 11 mm (square)
S13: ······ 13 mm (round)
S12: ····· 12 mm (round), 10 mm (hexagonal), 8 mm (square)
P10: ······ 11 mm (round)
S10: ······ 10 mm (round), 9 mm (hexagonal), 8 mm (square)
T7: ········ 7 mm (round)

A-44
Ejector pin

Create an ejector pin of the sub spindle according to the shape shown below.

Dimension “D” should be smaller than the inner diameter of the sub collet by 1mm
or more.

Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478A 0M478C]

Applicable
Name Type No.
Parts Ejector
Sub Collet SR23 [0M379]
Sub Collet VNC20 [0M383]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock VNC20 [0M384] [0M478A]
Sub Collet R20 [0M375]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock R20 [0M376]
Sub Collet SNC18 [0M373]
[0M478B]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock SNC18 [0M374]
Sub Collet R16 [0M377]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock R16 [0M378]
[0M478C]
Sub Collet P16 [0M381]
Sub Collet for Profile Bar P16 [0M382]

A-45
Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478D]

Applicable
Name Type No.
Parts Ejector
Sub Collet P10 [0M372]
[0M478D]
Sub Collet S10 [0M387]

Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478E]

Applicable
Name Type No.
Parts Ejector
Sub Collet S13 [0M385]
[0M478E]
Sub Collet for profile barstock S13 [0M386]

A-46
Parts Ejector with Spring [0M478F]

Applicable
Name Type No.
Parts Ejector
Sub Collet T7 [0M388] [0M478F]

A-47
Parts Ejector with Air Cylinder [0M479A 0M479E]

Applicable
Name Type No.
Parts Ejector
Sub Collet SR23 [0M379]
Sub Collet VNC20 [0M383]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock VNC20 [0M384] [0M479A]
Sub Collet R20 [0M375]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock R20 [0M376]
Sub Collet SNC18 [0M373]
[0M479B]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock SNC18 [0M374]
Sub Collet R16 [0M377]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock R16 [0M378]
[0M479C]
Sub Collet P16 [0M381]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock P16 [0M382]
Sub Collet P10 [0M372] [0M479D]
Sub Collet S13 [0M385]
[0M479E]
Sub Collet for Profile Barstock S13 [0M386]

A-48
Appendix 7 Work Tools “Unique Shape”

NAME SHAPE REMARK

For adjustment of
revolving guide
Pipe
bush
[0M454B]

For adjustment of
revolving guide
Plate
bush
[0M454B]

For fixing the

adjusting nut of
Hexagonal
revolving guide
wrench
bush
[0M454B]

For adjustment of
stationary guide
Pipe
bush
[1L329]

Handle For adjustment of

#34440 collet gripping force

For Non-guide bush

version,
Pipe for attaching
/detaching main
spindle cap

A-49
 NAME SHAPE REMARK

For Non-guide bush

T type version,
hexagon for attaching
wrench /detaching main
spindle cover

Hook For attaching

Spanner /detaching sub
FP5255 spindle cap

For SB-12R
Non-guide bush
Hook
version,
Spanner
for attaching
FP3032 /detaching main
spindle cap

Spanner
For tool units
#32610

Spanner
For ER11 cap
AE-11M

Spanner
For ER16 cap
AE-16M

Spanner
For ER20 cap
AE-20M

A-50
Appendix 8 Precautions on Use, Inspection and Maintenance

Precautions on use
(1) Coolant
When an inflammable metal such as magnesium is machined with a water-soluble coolant,
the explosive fire may occur due to hydrogen generation in the case of a fire.
The exclusive coolant or a water-insoluble coolant is used to prevent the mentioned above
situation.
When a water-insoluble coolant is used, increasing the risk of a fire is totally understood.
Therefore, pay attention to fire prevention by carrying out the appropriate method for use,
maintenance, inspection and safety device installation.

(2) Measures during the unmanned operation

It is required to check regularly that the machine operates normally during the
unmanned operation.
In addition, it is recommended to install “an automatic fire extinguisher” to the
machine body and peripheral devices as necessary for a fire preparation.
It is also required to prepare a fire detector, alarm device and firefighting equipment
in the machine installation place.

(3) Cutting condition

There is the possibility that the cutting resistance grows and the temperature of
cutting chips becomes very high by setting strict conditions to improve machining
efficiency.
It is required to set the condition which is suitable for the combination of materials
and tools. A fire may occur by the high temperature.
Therefore, it is recommended to carry out the tool life management to maintain the
condition.

(4) Confirmation of CNC program

In the case of making the machining program, it is required to prevent programing
may lead to heat generation and a fire so as not to command tool path to generate the
collision and
sequence operations and machining conditions to make the machine overload state
etc..
When the program command is right and the amount of tool geometry offset is wrong,
a collision may occur.
Therefore, it is required to confirm the amount of tool geometry offset before the
program is executed.
When the cutting condition cannot be satisfied due to tool wear and damage, the
machine becomes the overload state.
Therefore, it is important to carry out the appropriate tool life management in the
program.
After due consideration of the mentioned above, it is required to confirm sufficiently
that there is nothing wrong with the program before actual machining.

(5) Confirmation of preparation

The preparation is required to confirm sufficiently.
It is required to control a tool projection length and tool diameter.
It is also required to confirm that workpiece installation position, jig selection, work
clamp position are consistent with CNC program.
Failure to do so may result in heat generation and a fire due to the collision of main
spindle and workpiece and the overload state.

A-51
(6) Measures for tool damage and abnormal tool wear
When tool damage or abnormal tool wear is generated during the operation, the load
of the tool tip is increased and the temperature of the tool tip becomes very high,
which may lead to sparks.
In addition, sparks is generated by becoming abnormally large amount of a cut-in
becomes abnormally large with the next tool of the damaged tool, which may leads to
a fire.
It is recommended to use the spindle fluctuation detecting function which detects an
abnormal load in a real time during the machining and interrupts the machining.
The broken cut-off tool detection is only executed after the machining.
However, the spindle fluctuation detecting function detects abnormal loads at a tool tip
instantly and interrupts the machining instantly to prevent catching fire from the tool tip.

(7) Measures for cleaning cutting chips

Coolant does not reach to machining point due to the accumulation of cutting chips in
the machine generated by the machining.
Therefore, overheat was generated, which may catch a fire.
In addition, the accumulation of cutting chips in the machine may occur due to an
inadequate direction of the coolant nozzles.
It is required to keep the inside of the machine normal by cleaning the inside of the
machine, adjusting the direction of coolant nozzles and installing the automatic
conveying device (the chip conveyor etc..) for cutting chips.
Pay attention to the storage of cutting chips and the disposal method.

(8) Coolant supply

The adequate coolant amount is not supplied to the machining point by decreasing
the coolant discharge pressure etc.. due to the shortage of coolant in the coolant tank,
which may lead to a fire.
It is required to control coolant discharge pressure or coolant flow rate and supply
coolant regularly.

(9) Measures when coolant changes (a water-soluble coolant a water-insoluble coolant)

After due recognition of increasing the risk of a fire by changing from a water-soluble
coolant to a water-insoluble coolant, contact STAR MICRONICS if the following
measures are required.
・When a larger pump is required due to the shortage of coolant discharge by
increasing coolant viscosity.
・When a mist collector is required to remove mist may cause a fire.
・When an automatic fire extinguisher is required to extinguish a fire quickly.

(10)Confirmation of the automatic fire extinguisher installation and the guidance for
operators
Be sure to attend the start-up test of distinguisher device performed by STAR
MICRONICS in delivery and the release from fire-extinguishing agent discharge stop
function after the star-up test.
Confirm that the distinguisher device is in fire monitoring state normally.
The guidance of daily maintenance and measures in an emergency state for operators
in charge of the machine is also carried out by STAR MICRONICS.

(11)Measures if flaws of fire prevention measures are revealed

If flaws of fire prevention measures are revealed, report to STAR MICRONICS.
Discuss measures and carry out appropriate measures.

A-52
 Inspection and Maintenance
(1)Inspection and cleaning of Machine tools (daily inspection)
Coolant tank 1. Confirm that the level of liquid is within the normal
range.
2. Confirm there are not coolant leaks from a tank.
3. Confirm that the cutting chips are not accumulated
around the coolant pump.
4. Confirm that there is not a clogging of coolant filter.
Coolant supply unit 1. Confirm that there is not an abnormal vibration, noise,
（Coolant pump） smell or heat generation from the supply unit.
2. Confirm that pressure and flow rate are the normal
values.
3. Confirm that there are not coolant leaks from each
pipe.
Coolant nozzle 1. Confirm that the nozzles are not damaged.
2. Confirm that the coolant discharge is sufficient.
3. Confirm that the sufficient amount of coolant is
supplied to the tool tip.
Workpiece installation 1. Confirm that workpiece is installed correctly to jigs
and chucks.
Tool conditions 1. Confirm that there are damages or wear of the tool tip.
2. Confirm that cutting chips are not attached to tools.
3. Confirm that tools are installed correctly to tool
holders.
Cutting chips ejection 1. Confirm that the cutting chips are not accumulated
inside the machine and the ejection path.
2. Confirm that cutting chips ejection of the chip conveyor
is performed normally.
Cables and Hoses 1. Confirm that cables are not contaminated with oil.
2. Confirm that there are not insets, crushes, and bends of
cables.
3. Confirm that there are not damages of cable sheaths
and conductor exposures.
4. Confirm that the electric leakages do not occur and the
insulation resistance value is not decreased.
5. Confirm that there are cracks, abrasions.
Cabinet, Operation panel, 1. Confirm that dust is accumulated on the cabinet,
Terminal box operation panel or terminal box.
2. Confirm that terminal parts are not contaminated with
dust and oil.
3. Confirm that there are not looseness and backlashes of
terminals and connectors.
4. Confirm that the filter of cooling device is not dirty.
Oils 1. Confirm that the qualities of coolant, lubrication oil
and hydraulic oil are appropriate.
Cleaning 1. Remove the cutting chips inside the machine.
2. Clean the mist collector and vents, etc.
3. Clean inside of the cabinet, operation panel and
terminal box.
4. Wipe oils off the machine body and peripheral devices.

A-53
(2)Inspection and Maintenance of Automatic distinguisher device
Daily inspection 1. Confirm that a power lamp lights up.
2. Confirm that errors and warnings are not alerted.
3. Confirm that the fire-extinguishing agent is within the
validity date.
4. Confirm that nozzles and pipes do not have
malfunctions.
5. Confirm that the fire sensor does not have a
malfunction.
6. Confirm that valves of the fire-extinguishing agent and
compressed gas are not closed.
Periodic inspection Request the manufacturer of Automatic distinguisher
device to carry out the routine maintenance within a
specified period.
Maintenance parts Request the manufacturer of Automatic distinguisher
exchange device to exchange maintenance parts within a specified
period.
Fire-extinguishing agent Request the manufacturer of Automatic distinguisher
exchange device to exchange a fire-extinguishing agent within a
specified period.
Distinguisher device Request the manufacturer of Automatic distinguisher
exchange device to exchange the device within a specified period.

A-54
Appendix 9 Trouble Notes

Company name Machine model

Division Serial number
Person in charge
CNC manufacturer
Tel. number
Fax number Delivery date

PATH1 (CH1)
Alarm PATH2 (CH2)
(CH3)
When the main power turns to ON *What are the contents
in the program (MDI)?
When the MACHINE READY button is pressed
When returning to the zero point
When operating the machine in HANDLE mode
Status of occurrence
When operating the machine in MDI mode *
When operating a program with AIR CUT *
When operating continuous machining
Others

Today ( / )
Since ( ) days ago,
Date of occurrence
( ) week(s) ago,
( ) month(s) ago

Every time
Once after every ( ) pieces of part machining
Frequency of
every ( ) minute(s)
occurrence
every ( ) hour(s)
every ( ) day(s)

Position of each axis, position of each tool or attachment, spindle rotation,

light-up status of buttons etc.
Machine status

A-55
MEMO

A-56